external/bsd/openldap/dist/doc/guide/admin/guide.html

   1 <!doctype html public "-//W30//DTD W3 HTML 2.0//EN">
   2
   3 <HTML>
   4
   5 <!-- This file was generated using SDF 2.001 by
   6      Ian Clatworthy (ianc@mincom.com). SDF is freely
   7      available from http://www.mincom.com/mtr/sdf. -->
   8
   9 <HEAD>
  10 <TITLE>OpenLDAP Software 2.4 Administrator's Guide</TITLE>
  11 </HEAD>
  12 <BODY>
  13
  14 <DIV CLASS="header">
  15 <A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/">
  16 <P><IMG SRC="../images/LDAPlogo.gif" ALIGN="Left" BORDER=0></P>
  17 </A>
  18 <DIV CLASS="navigate">
  19 <P ALIGN="Center"><A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">Home</A> | <A HREF="../index.html">Catalog</A></P>
  20 </DIV>
  21 <BR CLEAR="Left">
  22 </DIV>
  23 <DIV CLASS="title">
  24 <H1 CLASS="doc-title">OpenLDAP Software 2.4 Administrator's Guide</H1>
  25 <ADDRESS CLASS="doc-author">The OpenLDAP Project &lt;<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">http://www.openldap.org/</A>&gt;</ADDRESS>
  26 <ADDRESS CLASS="doc-modified">16 July 2008</ADDRESS>
  27 <BR CLEAR="All">
  28 </DIV>
  29 <DIV CLASS="contents">
  30 <HR>
  31 <H2>Table of Contents</H2>
  32 <UL>
  33 <A HREF="#Preface">Preface</A>
  34 <BR>
  35 <A HREF="#Introduction to OpenLDAP Directory Services">1. Introduction to OpenLDAP Directory Services</A><UL>
  36 <A HREF="#What is a directory service">1.1. What is a directory service?</A>
  37 <BR>
  38 <A HREF="#What is LDAP">1.2. What is LDAP?</A>
  39 <BR>
  40 <A HREF="#When should I use LDAP">1.3. When should I use LDAP?</A>
  41 <BR>
  42 <A HREF="#When should I not use LDAP">1.4. When should I not use LDAP?</A>
  43 <BR>
  44 <A HREF="#How does LDAP work">1.5. How does LDAP work?</A>
  45 <BR>
  46 <A HREF="#What about X.500">1.6. What about X.500?</A>
  47 <BR>
  48 <A HREF="#What is the difference between LDAPv2 and LDAPv3">1.7. What is the difference between LDAPv2 and LDAPv3?</A>
  49 <BR>
  50 <A HREF="#LDAP vs RDBMS">1.8. LDAP vs RDBMS</A>
  51 <BR>
  52 <A HREF="#What is slapd and what can it do">1.9. What is slapd and what can it do?</A></UL>
  53 <BR>
  54 <A HREF="#A Quick-Start Guide">2. A Quick-Start Guide</A>
  55 <BR>
  56 <A HREF="#The Big Picture - Configuration Choices">3. The Big Picture - Configuration Choices</A><UL>
  57 <A HREF="#Local Directory Service">3.1. Local Directory Service</A>
  58 <BR>
  59 <A HREF="#Local Directory Service with Referrals">3.2. Local Directory Service with Referrals</A>
  60 <BR>
  61 <A HREF="#Replicated Directory Service">3.3. Replicated Directory Service</A>
  62 <BR>
  63 <A HREF="#Distributed Local Directory Service">3.4. Distributed Local Directory Service</A></UL>
  64 <BR>
  65 <A HREF="#Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software">4. Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software</A><UL>
  66 <A HREF="#Obtaining and Extracting the Software">4.1. Obtaining and Extracting the Software</A>
  67 <BR>
  68 <A HREF="#Prerequisite software">4.2. Prerequisite software</A><UL>
  69 <A HREF="#{{TERM[expand]TLS}}">4.2.1. <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM></A>
  70 <BR>
  71 <A HREF="#{{TERM[expand]SASL}}">4.2.2. <TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM></A>
  72 <BR>
  73 <A HREF="#{{TERM[expand]Kerberos}}">4.2.3. <TERM>Kerberos Authentication Service</TERM></A>
  74 <BR>
  75 <A HREF="#Database Software">4.2.4. Database Software</A>
  76 <BR>
  77 <A HREF="#Threads">4.2.5. Threads</A>
  78 <BR>
  79 <A HREF="#TCP Wrappers">4.2.6. TCP Wrappers</A></UL>
  80 <BR>
  81 <A HREF="#Running configure">4.3. Running configure</A>
  82 <BR>
  83 <A HREF="#Building the Software">4.4. Building the Software</A>
  84 <BR>
  85 <A HREF="#Testing the Software">4.5. Testing the Software</A>
  86 <BR>
  87 <A HREF="#Installing the Software">4.6. Installing the Software</A></UL>
  88 <BR>
  89 <A HREF="#Configuring slapd">5. Configuring slapd</A><UL>
  90 <A HREF="#Configuration Layout">5.1. Configuration Layout</A>
  91 <BR>
  92 <A HREF="#Configuration Directives">5.2. Configuration Directives</A><UL>
  93 <A HREF="#cn=config">5.2.1. cn=config</A>
  94 <BR>
  95 <A HREF="#cn=module">5.2.2. cn=module</A>
  96 <BR>
  97 <A HREF="#cn=schema">5.2.3. cn=schema</A>
  98 <BR>
  99 <A HREF="#Backend-specific Directives">5.2.4. Backend-specific Directives</A>
 100 <BR>
 101 <A HREF="#Database-specific Directives">5.2.5. Database-specific Directives</A>
 102 <BR>
 103 <A HREF="#BDB and HDB Database Directives">5.2.6. BDB and HDB Database Directives</A></UL></UL>
 104 <BR>
 105 <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">6. The slapd Configuration File</A><UL>
 106 <A HREF="#Configuration File Format">6.1. Configuration File Format</A>
 107 <BR>
 108 <A HREF="#Configuration File Directives">6.2. Configuration File Directives</A><UL>
 109 <A HREF="#Global Directives">6.2.1. Global Directives</A>
 110 <BR>
 111 <A HREF="#General Backend Directives">6.2.2. General Backend Directives</A>
 112 <BR>
 113 <A HREF="#General Database Directives">6.2.3. General Database Directives</A>
 114 <BR>
 115 <A HREF="#BDB and HDB Database Directives">6.2.4. BDB and HDB Database Directives</A></UL></UL>
 116 <BR>
 117 <A HREF="#Access Control">7. Access Control</A><UL>
 118 <A HREF="#Introduction">7.1. Introduction</A>
 119 <BR>
 120 <A HREF="#Access Control via Static Configuration">7.2. Access Control via Static Configuration</A><UL>
 121 <A HREF="#What to control access to">7.2.1. What to control access to</A>
 122 <BR>
 123 <A HREF="#Who to grant access to">7.2.2. Who to grant access to</A>
 124 <BR>
 125 <A HREF="#The access to grant">7.2.3. The access to grant</A>
 126 <BR>
 127 <A HREF="#Access Control Evaluation">7.2.4. Access Control Evaluation</A>
 128 <BR>
 129 <A HREF="#Access Control Examples">7.2.5. Access Control Examples</A>
 130 <BR>
 131 <A HREF="#Configuration File Example">7.2.6. Configuration File Example</A></UL>
 132 <BR>
 133 <A HREF="#Access Control via Dynamic Configuration">7.3. Access Control via Dynamic Configuration</A><UL>
 134 <A HREF="#What to control access to">7.3.1. What to control access to</A>
 135 <BR>
 136 <A HREF="#Who to grant access to">7.3.2. Who to grant access to</A>
 137 <BR>
 138 <A HREF="#The access to grant">7.3.3. The access to grant</A>
 139 <BR>
 140 <A HREF="#Access Control Evaluation">7.3.4. Access Control Evaluation</A>
 141 <BR>
 142 <A HREF="#Access Control Examples">7.3.5. Access Control Examples</A>
 143 <BR>
 144 <A HREF="#Access Control Ordering">7.3.6. Access Control Ordering</A>
 145 <BR>
 146 <A HREF="#Configuration Example">7.3.7. Configuration Example</A>
 147 <BR>
 148 <A HREF="#Converting from {{slapd.conf}}(5) to a {{B:cn=config}} directory format">7.3.8. Converting from <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) to a <B>cn=config</B> directory format</A></UL>
 149 <BR>
 150 <A HREF="#Access Control Common Examples">7.4. Access Control Common Examples</A><UL>
 151 <A HREF="#Basic ACLs">7.4.1. Basic ACLs</A>
 152 <BR>
 153 <A HREF="#Matching Anonymous and Authenticated users">7.4.2. Matching Anonymous and Authenticated users</A>
 154 <BR>
 155 <A HREF="#Controlling rootdn access">7.4.3. Controlling rootdn access</A>
 156 <BR>
 157 <A HREF="#Managing access with Groups">7.4.4. Managing access with Groups</A>
 158 <BR>
 159 <A HREF="#Granting access to a subset of attributes">7.4.5. Granting access to a subset of attributes</A>
 160 <BR>
 161 <A HREF="#Allowing a user write to all entries below theirs">7.4.6. Allowing a user write to all entries below theirs</A>
 162 <BR>
 163 <A HREF="#Allowing entry creation">7.4.7. Allowing entry creation</A>
 164 <BR>
 165 <A HREF="#Tips for using regular expressions in Access Control">7.4.8. Tips for using regular expressions in Access Control</A>
 166 <BR>
 167 <A HREF="#Granting and Denying access based on security strength factors (ssf)">7.4.9. Granting and Denying access based on security strength factors (ssf)</A>
 168 <BR>
 169 <A HREF="#When things aren\'t working as expected">7.4.10. When things aren't working as expected</A></UL>
 170 <BR>
 171 <A HREF="#Sets - Granting rights based on relationships">7.5. Sets - Granting rights based on relationships</A><UL>
 172 <A HREF="#Groups of Groups">7.5.1. Groups of Groups</A>
 173 <BR>
 174 <A HREF="#Group ACLs without DN syntax">7.5.2. Group ACLs without DN syntax</A>
 175 <BR>
 176 <A HREF="#Following references">7.5.3. Following references</A></UL></UL>
 177 <BR>
 178 <A HREF="#Running slapd">8. Running slapd</A><UL>
 179 <A HREF="#Command-Line Options">8.1. Command-Line Options</A>
 180 <BR>
 181 <A HREF="#Starting slapd">8.2. Starting slapd</A>
 182 <BR>
 183 <A HREF="#Stopping slapd">8.3. Stopping slapd</A></UL>
 184 <BR>
 185 <A HREF="#Database Creation and Maintenance Tools">9. Database Creation and Maintenance Tools</A><UL>
 186 <A HREF="#Creating a database over LDAP">9.1. Creating a database over LDAP</A>
 187 <BR>
 188 <A HREF="#Creating a database off-line">9.2. Creating a database off-line</A><UL>
 189 <A HREF="#The {{EX:slapadd}} program">9.2.1. The <TT>slapadd</TT> program</A>
 190 <BR>
 191 <A HREF="#The {{EX:slapindex}} program">9.2.2. The <TT>slapindex</TT> program</A>
 192 <BR>
 193 <A HREF="#The {{EX:slapcat}} program">9.2.3. The <TT>slapcat</TT> program</A></UL>
 194 <BR>
 195 <A HREF="#The LDIF text entry format">9.3. The LDIF text entry format</A></UL>
 196 <BR>
 197 <A HREF="#Backends">10. Backends</A><UL>
 198 <A HREF="#Berkeley DB Backends">10.1. Berkeley DB Backends</A><UL>
 199 <A HREF="#Overview">10.1.1. Overview</A>
 200 <BR>
 201 <A HREF="#back-bdb/back-hdb Configuration">10.1.2. back-bdb/back-hdb Configuration</A>
 202 <BR>
 203 <A HREF="#Further Information">10.1.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 204 <BR>
 205 <A HREF="#LDAP">10.2. LDAP</A><UL>
 206 <A HREF="#Overview">10.2.1. Overview</A>
 207 <BR>
 208 <A HREF="#back-ldap Configuration">10.2.2. back-ldap Configuration</A>
 209 <BR>
 210 <A HREF="#Further Information">10.2.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 211 <BR>
 212 <A HREF="#LDIF">10.3. LDIF</A><UL>
 213 <A HREF="#Overview">10.3.1. Overview</A>
 214 <BR>
 215 <A HREF="#back-ldif Configuration">10.3.2. back-ldif Configuration</A>
 216 <BR>
 217 <A HREF="#Further Information">10.3.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 218 <BR>
 219 <A HREF="#Metadirectory">10.4. Metadirectory</A><UL>
 220 <A HREF="#Overview">10.4.1. Overview</A>
 221 <BR>
 222 <A HREF="#back-meta Configuration">10.4.2. back-meta Configuration</A>
 223 <BR>
 224 <A HREF="#Further Information">10.4.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 225 <BR>
 226 <A HREF="#Monitor">10.5. Monitor</A><UL>
 227 <A HREF="#Overview">10.5.1. Overview</A>
 228 <BR>
 229 <A HREF="#back-monitor Configuration">10.5.2. back-monitor Configuration</A>
 230 <BR>
 231 <A HREF="#Further Information">10.5.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 232 <BR>
 233 <A HREF="#Null">10.6. Null</A><UL>
 234 <A HREF="#Overview">10.6.1. Overview</A>
 235 <BR>
 236 <A HREF="#back-null Configuration">10.6.2. back-null Configuration</A>
 237 <BR>
 238 <A HREF="#Further Information">10.6.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 239 <BR>
 240 <A HREF="#Passwd">10.7. Passwd</A><UL>
 241 <A HREF="#Overview">10.7.1. Overview</A>
 242 <BR>
 243 <A HREF="#back-passwd Configuration">10.7.2. back-passwd Configuration</A>
 244 <BR>
 245 <A HREF="#Further Information">10.7.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 246 <BR>
 247 <A HREF="#Perl/Shell">10.8. Perl/Shell</A><UL>
 248 <A HREF="#Overview">10.8.1. Overview</A>
 249 <BR>
 250 <A HREF="#back-perl/back-shell Configuration">10.8.2. back-perl/back-shell Configuration</A>
 251 <BR>
 252 <A HREF="#Further Information">10.8.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 253 <BR>
 254 <A HREF="#Relay">10.9. Relay</A><UL>
 255 <A HREF="#Overview">10.9.1. Overview</A>
 256 <BR>
 257 <A HREF="#back-relay Configuration">10.9.2. back-relay Configuration</A>
 258 <BR>
 259 <A HREF="#Further Information">10.9.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 260 <BR>
 261 <A HREF="#SQL">10.10. SQL</A><UL>
 262 <A HREF="#Overview">10.10.1. Overview</A>
 263 <BR>
 264 <A HREF="#back-sql Configuration">10.10.2. back-sql Configuration</A>
 265 <BR>
 266 <A HREF="#Further Information">10.10.3. Further Information</A></UL></UL>
 267 <BR>
 268 <A HREF="#Overlays">11. Overlays</A><UL>
 269 <A HREF="#Access Logging">11.1. Access Logging</A><UL>
 270 <A HREF="#Overview">11.1.1. Overview</A>
 271 <BR>
 272 <A HREF="#Access Logging Configuration">11.1.2. Access Logging Configuration</A>
 273 <BR>
 274 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.1.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 275 <BR>
 276 <A HREF="#Audit Logging">11.2. Audit Logging</A><UL>
 277 <A HREF="#Overview">11.2.1. Overview</A>
 278 <BR>
 279 <A HREF="#Audit Logging Configuration">11.2.2. Audit Logging Configuration</A>
 280 <BR>
 281 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.2.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 282 <BR>
 283 <A HREF="#Chaining">11.3. Chaining</A><UL>
 284 <A HREF="#Overview">11.3.1. Overview</A>
 285 <BR>
 286 <A HREF="#Chaining Configuration">11.3.2. Chaining Configuration</A>
 287 <BR>
 288 <A HREF="#Handling Chaining Errors">11.3.3. Handling Chaining Errors</A>
 289 <BR>
 290 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.3.4. Further Information</A></UL>
 291 <BR>
 292 <A HREF="#Constraints">11.4. Constraints</A><UL>
 293 <A HREF="#Overview">11.4.1. Overview</A>
 294 <BR>
 295 <A HREF="#Constraint Configuration">11.4.2. Constraint Configuration</A>
 296 <BR>
 297 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.4.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 298 <BR>
 299 <A HREF="#Dynamic Directory Services">11.5. Dynamic Directory Services</A><UL>
 300 <A HREF="#Overview">11.5.1. Overview</A>
 301 <BR>
 302 <A HREF="#Dynamic Directory Service Configuration">11.5.2. Dynamic Directory Service Configuration</A>
 303 <BR>
 304 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.5.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 305 <BR>
 306 <A HREF="#Dynamic Groups">11.6. Dynamic Groups</A><UL>
 307 <A HREF="#Overview">11.6.1. Overview</A>
 308 <BR>
 309 <A HREF="#Dynamic Group Configuration">11.6.2. Dynamic Group Configuration</A></UL>
 310 <BR>
 311 <A HREF="#Dynamic Lists">11.7. Dynamic Lists</A><UL>
 312 <A HREF="#Overview">11.7.1. Overview</A>
 313 <BR>
 314 <A HREF="#Dynamic List Configuration">11.7.2. Dynamic List Configuration</A>
 315 <BR>
 316 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.7.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 317 <BR>
 318 <A HREF="#Reverse Group Membership Maintenance">11.8. Reverse Group Membership Maintenance</A><UL>
 319 <A HREF="#Overview">11.8.1. Overview</A>
 320 <BR>
 321 <A HREF="#Member Of Configuration">11.8.2. Member Of Configuration</A>
 322 <BR>
 323 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.8.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 324 <BR>
 325 <A HREF="#The Proxy Cache Engine">11.9. The Proxy Cache Engine</A><UL>
 326 <A HREF="#Overview">11.9.1. Overview</A>
 327 <BR>
 328 <A HREF="#Proxy Cache Configuration">11.9.2. Proxy Cache Configuration</A>
 329 <BR>
 330 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.9.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 331 <BR>
 332 <A HREF="#Password Policies">11.10. Password Policies</A><UL>
 333 <A HREF="#Overview">11.10.1. Overview</A>
 334 <BR>
 335 <A HREF="#Password Policy Configuration">11.10.2. Password Policy Configuration</A>
 336 <BR>
 337 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.10.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 338 <BR>
 339 <A HREF="#Referential Integrity">11.11. Referential Integrity</A><UL>
 340 <A HREF="#Overview">11.11.1. Overview</A>
 341 <BR>
 342 <A HREF="#Referential Integrity Configuration">11.11.2. Referential Integrity Configuration</A>
 343 <BR>
 344 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.11.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 345 <BR>
 346 <A HREF="#Return Code">11.12. Return Code</A><UL>
 347 <A HREF="#Overview">11.12.1. Overview</A>
 348 <BR>
 349 <A HREF="#Return Code Configuration">11.12.2. Return Code Configuration</A>
 350 <BR>
 351 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.12.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 352 <BR>
 353 <A HREF="#Rewrite/Remap">11.13. Rewrite/Remap</A><UL>
 354 <A HREF="#Overview">11.13.1. Overview</A>
 355 <BR>
 356 <A HREF="#Rewrite/Remap Configuration">11.13.2. Rewrite/Remap Configuration</A>
 357 <BR>
 358 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.13.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 359 <BR>
 360 <A HREF="#Sync Provider">11.14. Sync Provider</A><UL>
 361 <A HREF="#Overview">11.14.1. Overview</A>
 362 <BR>
 363 <A HREF="#Sync Provider Configuration">11.14.2. Sync Provider Configuration</A>
 364 <BR>
 365 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.14.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 366 <BR>
 367 <A HREF="#Translucent Proxy">11.15. Translucent Proxy</A><UL>
 368 <A HREF="#Overview">11.15.1. Overview</A>
 369 <BR>
 370 <A HREF="#Translucent Proxy Configuration">11.15.2. Translucent Proxy Configuration</A>
 371 <BR>
 372 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.15.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 373 <BR>
 374 <A HREF="#Attribute Uniqueness">11.16. Attribute Uniqueness</A><UL>
 375 <A HREF="#Overview">11.16.1. Overview</A>
 376 <BR>
 377 <A HREF="#Attribute Uniqueness Configuration">11.16.2. Attribute Uniqueness Configuration</A>
 378 <BR>
 379 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.16.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 380 <BR>
 381 <A HREF="#Value Sorting">11.17. Value Sorting</A><UL>
 382 <A HREF="#Overview">11.17.1. Overview</A>
 383 <BR>
 384 <A HREF="#Value Sorting Configuration">11.17.2. Value Sorting Configuration</A>
 385 <BR>
 386 <A HREF="#Further Information">11.17.3. Further Information</A></UL>
 387 <BR>
 388 <A HREF="#Overlay Stacking">11.18. Overlay Stacking</A><UL>
 389 <A HREF="#Overview">11.18.1. Overview</A>
 390 <BR>
 391 <A HREF="#Example Scenarios">11.18.2. Example Scenarios</A></UL></UL>
 392 <BR>
 393 <A HREF="#Schema Specification">12. Schema Specification</A><UL>
 394 <A HREF="#Distributed Schema Files">12.1. Distributed Schema Files</A>
 395 <BR>
 396 <A HREF="#Extending Schema">12.2. Extending Schema</A><UL>
 397 <A HREF="#Object Identifiers">12.2.1. Object Identifiers</A>
 398 <BR>
 399 <A HREF="#Naming Elements">12.2.2. Naming Elements</A>
 400 <BR>
 401 <A HREF="#Local schema file">12.2.3. Local schema file</A>
 402 <BR>
 403 <A HREF="#Attribute Type Specification">12.2.4. Attribute Type Specification</A>
 404 <BR>
 405 <A HREF="#Object Class Specification">12.2.5. Object Class Specification</A>
 406 <BR>
 407 <A HREF="#OID Macros">12.2.6. OID Macros</A></UL></UL>
 408 <BR>
 409 <A HREF="#Security Considerations">13. Security Considerations</A><UL>
 410 <A HREF="#Network Security">13.1. Network Security</A><UL>
 411 <A HREF="#Selective Listening">13.1.1. Selective Listening</A>
 412 <BR>
 413 <A HREF="#IP Firewall">13.1.2. IP Firewall</A>
 414 <BR>
 415 <A HREF="#TCP Wrappers">13.1.3. TCP Wrappers</A></UL>
 416 <BR>
 417 <A HREF="#Data Integrity and Confidentiality Protection">13.2. Data Integrity and Confidentiality Protection</A><UL>
 418 <A HREF="#Security Strength Factors">13.2.1. Security Strength Factors</A></UL>
 419 <BR>
 420 <A HREF="#Authentication Methods">13.3. Authentication Methods</A><UL>
 421 <A HREF="#&quot;simple&quot; method">13.3.1. &quot;simple&quot; method</A>
 422 <BR>
 423 <A HREF="#SASL method">13.3.2. SASL method</A></UL>
 424 <BR>
 425 <A HREF="#Password Storage">13.4. Password Storage</A><UL>
 426 <A HREF="#SSHA password storage scheme">13.4.1. SSHA password storage scheme</A>
 427 <BR>
 428 <A HREF="#CRYPT password storage scheme">13.4.2. CRYPT password storage scheme</A>
 429 <BR>
 430 <A HREF="#MD5 password storage scheme">13.4.3. MD5 password storage scheme</A>
 431 <BR>
 432 <A HREF="#SMD5 password storage scheme">13.4.4. SMD5 password storage scheme</A>
 433 <BR>
 434 <A HREF="#SHA password storage scheme">13.4.5. SHA password storage scheme</A>
 435 <BR>
 436 <A HREF="#SASL password storage scheme">13.4.6. SASL password storage scheme</A>
 437 <BR>
 438 <A HREF="#KERBEROS password storage scheme">13.4.7. KERBEROS password storage scheme</A></UL>
 439 <BR>
 440 <A HREF="#Pass-Through authentication">13.5. Pass-Through authentication</A><UL>
 441 <A HREF="#Configuring slapd to use an authentication provider">13.5.1. Configuring slapd to use an authentication provider</A>
 442 <BR>
 443 <A HREF="#Configuring saslauthd">13.5.2. Configuring saslauthd</A>
 444 <BR>
 445 <A HREF="#Testing pass-through authentication">13.5.3. Testing pass-through authentication</A></UL></UL>
 446 <BR>
 447 <A HREF="#Using SASL">14. Using SASL</A><UL>
 448 <A HREF="#SASL Security Considerations">14.1. SASL Security Considerations</A>
 449 <BR>
 450 <A HREF="#SASL Authentication">14.2. SASL Authentication</A><UL>
 451 <A HREF="#GSSAPI">14.2.1. GSSAPI</A>
 452 <BR>
 453 <A HREF="#KERBEROS_V4">14.2.2. KERBEROS_V4</A>
 454 <BR>
 455 <A HREF="#DIGEST-MD5">14.2.3. DIGEST-MD5</A>
 456 <BR>
 457 <A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">14.2.4. Mapping Authentication Identities</A>
 458 <BR>
 459 <A HREF="#Direct Mapping">14.2.5. Direct Mapping</A>
 460 <BR>
 461 <A HREF="#Search-based mappings">14.2.6. Search-based mappings</A></UL>
 462 <BR>
 463 <A HREF="#SASL Proxy Authorization">14.3. SASL Proxy Authorization</A><UL>
 464 <A HREF="#Uses of Proxy Authorization">14.3.1. Uses of Proxy Authorization</A>
 465 <BR>
 466 <A HREF="#SASL Authorization Identities">14.3.2. SASL Authorization Identities</A>
 467 <BR>
 468 <A HREF="#Proxy Authorization Rules">14.3.3. Proxy Authorization Rules</A></UL></UL>
 469 <BR>
 470 <A HREF="#Using TLS">15. Using TLS</A><UL>
 471 <A HREF="#TLS Certificates">15.1. TLS Certificates</A><UL>
 472 <A HREF="#Server Certificates">15.1.1. Server Certificates</A>
 473 <BR>
 474 <A HREF="#Client Certificates">15.1.2. Client Certificates</A></UL>
 475 <BR>
 476 <A HREF="#TLS Configuration">15.2. TLS Configuration</A><UL>
 477 <A HREF="#Server Configuration">15.2.1. Server Configuration</A>
 478 <BR>
 479 <A HREF="#Client Configuration">15.2.2. Client Configuration</A></UL></UL>
 480 <BR>
 481 <A HREF="#Constructing a Distributed Directory Service">16. Constructing a Distributed Directory Service</A><UL>
 482 <A HREF="#Subordinate Knowledge Information">16.1. Subordinate Knowledge Information</A>
 483 <BR>
 484 <A HREF="#Superior Knowledge Information">16.2. Superior Knowledge Information</A>
 485 <BR>
 486 <A HREF="#The ManageDsaIT Control">16.3. The ManageDsaIT Control</A></UL>
 487 <BR>
 488 <A HREF="#Replication">17. Replication</A><UL>
 489 <A HREF="#Push Based">17.1. Push Based</A><UL>
 490 <A HREF="#Replacing Slurpd">17.1.1. Replacing Slurpd</A></UL>
 491 <BR>
 492 <A HREF="#Pull Based">17.2. Pull Based</A><UL>
 493 <A HREF="#LDAP Sync Replication">17.2.1. LDAP Sync Replication</A>
 494 <BR>
 495 <A HREF="#Delta-syncrepl replication">17.2.2. Delta-syncrepl replication</A></UL>
 496 <BR>
 497 <A HREF="#Mixture of both Pull and Push based">17.3. Mixture of both Pull and Push based</A><UL>
 498 <A HREF="#N-Way Multi-Master replication">17.3.1. N-Way Multi-Master replication</A>
 499 <BR>
 500 <A HREF="#MirrorMode replication">17.3.2. MirrorMode replication</A></UL>
 501 <BR>
 502 <A HREF="#Configuring the different replication types">17.4. Configuring the different replication types</A><UL>
 503 <A HREF="#Syncrepl">17.4.1. Syncrepl</A>
 504 <BR>
 505 <A HREF="#Delta-syncrepl">17.4.2. Delta-syncrepl</A>
 506 <BR>
 507 <A HREF="#N-Way Multi-Master">17.4.3. N-Way Multi-Master</A>
 508 <BR>
 509 <A HREF="#MirrorMode">17.4.4. MirrorMode</A></UL></UL>
 510 <BR>
 511 <A HREF="#Maintenance">18. Maintenance</A><UL>
 512 <A HREF="#Directory Backups">18.1. Directory Backups</A>
 513 <BR>
 514 <A HREF="#Berkeley DB Logs">18.2. Berkeley DB Logs</A>
 515 <BR>
 516 <A HREF="#Checkpointing">18.3. Checkpointing</A>
 517 <BR>
 518 <A HREF="#Migration">18.4. Migration</A></UL>
 519 <BR>
 520 <A HREF="#Monitoring">19. Monitoring</A><UL>
 521 <A HREF="#Monitor configuration via cn=config(5)">19.1. Monitor configuration via cn=config(5)</A>
 522 <BR>
 523 <A HREF="#Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)">19.2. Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)</A>
 524 <BR>
 525 <A HREF="#Accessing Monitoring Information">19.3. Accessing Monitoring Information</A>
 526 <BR>
 527 <A HREF="#Monitor Information">19.4. Monitor Information</A><UL>
 528 <A HREF="#Backends">19.4.1. Backends</A>
 529 <BR>
 530 <A HREF="#Connections">19.4.2. Connections</A>
 531 <BR>
 532 <A HREF="#Databases">19.4.3. Databases</A>
 533 <BR>
 534 <A HREF="#Listener">19.4.4. Listener</A>
 535 <BR>
 536 <A HREF="#Log">19.4.5. Log</A>
 537 <BR>
 538 <A HREF="#Operations">19.4.6. Operations</A>
 539 <BR>
 540 <A HREF="#Overlays">19.4.7. Overlays</A>
 541 <BR>
 542 <A HREF="#SASL">19.4.8. SASL</A>
 543 <BR>
 544 <A HREF="#Statistics">19.4.9. Statistics</A>
 545 <BR>
 546 <A HREF="#Threads">19.4.10. Threads</A>
 547 <BR>
 548 <A HREF="#Time">19.4.11. Time</A>
 549 <BR>
 550 <A HREF="#TLS">19.4.12. TLS</A>
 551 <BR>
 552 <A HREF="#Waiters">19.4.13. Waiters</A></UL></UL>
 553 <BR>
 554 <A HREF="#Tuning">20. Tuning</A><UL>
 555 <A HREF="#Performance Factors">20.1. Performance Factors</A><UL>
 556 <A HREF="#Memory">20.1.1. Memory</A>
 557 <BR>
 558 <A HREF="#Disks">20.1.2. Disks</A>
 559 <BR>
 560 <A HREF="#Network Topology">20.1.3. Network Topology</A>
 561 <BR>
 562 <A HREF="#Directory Layout Design">20.1.4. Directory Layout Design</A>
 563 <BR>
 564 <A HREF="#Expected Usage">20.1.5. Expected Usage</A></UL>
 565 <BR>
 566 <A HREF="#Indexes">20.2. Indexes</A><UL>
 567 <A HREF="#Understanding how a search works">20.2.1. Understanding how a search works</A>
 568 <BR>
 569 <A HREF="#What to index">20.2.2. What to index</A>
 570 <BR>
 571 <A HREF="#Presence indexing">20.2.3. Presence indexing</A></UL>
 572 <BR>
 573 <A HREF="#Logging">20.3. Logging</A><UL>
 574 <A HREF="#What log level to use">20.3.1. What log level to use</A>
 575 <BR>
 576 <A HREF="#What to watch out for">20.3.2. What to watch out for</A>
 577 <BR>
 578 <A HREF="#Improving throughput">20.3.3. Improving throughput</A></UL>
 579 <BR>
 580 <A HREF="#Caching">20.4. Caching</A><UL>
 581 <A HREF="#Berkeley DB Cache">20.4.1. Berkeley DB Cache</A>
 582 <BR>
 583 <A HREF="#{{slapd}}(8) Entry Cache (cachesize)">20.4.2. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) Entry Cache (cachesize)</A>
 584 <BR>
 585 <A HREF="#{{TERM:IDL}} Cache (idlcachesize)">20.4.3. <TERM>IDL</TERM> Cache (idlcachesize)</A>
 586 <BR>
 587 <A HREF="#{{slapd}}(8) Threads">20.4.4. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) Threads</A></UL></UL>
 588 <BR>
 589 <A HREF="#Troubleshooting">21. Troubleshooting</A><UL>
 590 <A HREF="#User or Software errors">21.1. User or Software errors?</A>
 591 <BR>
 592 <A HREF="#Checklist">21.2. Checklist</A>
 593 <BR>
 594 <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Bugs">21.3. OpenLDAP Bugs</A>
 595 <BR>
 596 <A HREF="#3rd party software error">21.4. 3rd party software error</A>
 597 <BR>
 598 <A HREF="#How to contact the OpenLDAP Project">21.5. How to contact the OpenLDAP Project</A>
 599 <BR>
 600 <A HREF="#How to present your problem">21.6. How to present your problem</A>
 601 <BR>
 602 <A HREF="#Debugging {{slapd}}(8)">21.7. Debugging <EM>slapd</EM>(8)</A>
 603 <BR>
 604 <A HREF="#Commercial Support">21.8. Commercial Support</A></UL>
 605 <BR>
 606 <A HREF="#Changes Since Previous Release">A. Changes Since Previous Release</A><UL>
 607 <A HREF="#New Guide Sections">A.1. New Guide Sections</A>
 608 <BR>
 609 <A HREF="#New Features and Enhancements in 2.4">A.2. New Features and Enhancements in 2.4</A><UL>
 610 <A HREF="#Better {{B:cn=config}} functionality">A.2.1. Better <B>cn=config</B> functionality</A>
 611 <BR>
 612 <A HREF="#Better {{B:cn=schema}} functionality">A.2.2. Better <B>cn=schema</B> functionality</A>
 613 <BR>
 614 <A HREF="#More sophisticated Syncrepl configurations">A.2.3. More sophisticated Syncrepl configurations</A>
 615 <BR>
 616 <A HREF="#N-Way Multimaster Replication">A.2.4. N-Way Multimaster Replication</A>
 617 <BR>
 618 <A HREF="#Replicating {{slapd}} Configuration (syncrepl and {{B:cn=config}})">A.2.5. Replicating <EM>slapd</EM> Configuration (syncrepl and <B>cn=config</B>)</A>
 619 <BR>
 620 <A HREF="#Push-Mode Replication">A.2.6. Push-Mode Replication</A>
 621 <BR>
 622 <A HREF="#More extensive TLS configuration control">A.2.7. More extensive TLS configuration control</A>
 623 <BR>
 624 <A HREF="#Performance enhancements">A.2.8. Performance enhancements</A>
 625 <BR>
 626 <A HREF="#New overlays">A.2.9. New overlays</A>
 627 <BR>
 628 <A HREF="#New features in existing Overlays">A.2.10. New features in existing Overlays</A>
 629 <BR>
 630 <A HREF="#New features in slapd">A.2.11. New features in slapd</A>
 631 <BR>
 632 <A HREF="#New features in libldap">A.2.12. New features in libldap</A>
 633 <BR>
 634 <A HREF="#New clients, tools and tool enhancements">A.2.13. New clients, tools and tool enhancements</A>
 635 <BR>
 636 <A HREF="#New build options">A.2.14. New build options</A></UL>
 637 <BR>
 638 <A HREF="#Obsolete Features Removed From 2.4">A.3. Obsolete Features Removed From 2.4</A><UL>
 639 <A HREF="#Slurpd">A.3.1. Slurpd</A>
 640 <BR>
 641 <A HREF="#back-ldbm">A.3.2. back-ldbm</A></UL></UL>
 642 <BR>
 643 <A HREF="#Upgrading from 2.3.x">B. Upgrading from 2.3.x</A><UL>
 644 <A HREF="#Monitor Backend">B.1. Monitor Backend</A>
 645 <BR>
 646 <A HREF="#{{B:cn=config}} olc* attributes">B.2. <B>cn=config</B> olc* attributes</A>
 647 <BR>
 648 <A HREF="#ACLs: searches require privileges on the search base">B.3. ACLs: searches require privileges on the search base</A></UL>
 649 <BR>
 650 <A HREF="#Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software">C. Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software</A><UL>
 651 <A HREF="#Common causes of LDAP errors">C.1. Common causes of LDAP errors</A><UL>
 652 <A HREF="#ldap_*: Can\'t contact LDAP server">C.1.1. ldap_*: Can't contact LDAP server</A>
 653 <BR>
 654 <A HREF="#ldap_*: No such object">C.1.2. ldap_*: No such object</A>
 655 <BR>
 656 <A HREF="#ldap_*: Can\'t chase referral">C.1.3. ldap_*: Can't chase referral</A>
 657 <BR>
 658 <A HREF="#ldap_*: server is unwilling to perform">C.1.4. ldap_*: server is unwilling to perform</A>
 659 <BR>
 660 <A HREF="#ldap_*: Insufficient access">C.1.5. ldap_*: Insufficient access</A>
 661 <BR>
 662 <A HREF="#ldap_*: Invalid DN syntax">C.1.6. ldap_*: Invalid DN syntax</A>
 663 <BR>
 664 <A HREF="#ldap_*: Referral hop limit exceeded">C.1.7. ldap_*: Referral hop limit exceeded</A>
 665 <BR>
 666 <A HREF="#ldap_*: operations error">C.1.8. ldap_*: operations error</A>
 667 <BR>
 668 <A HREF="#ldap_*: other error">C.1.9. ldap_*: other error</A>
 669 <BR>
 670 <A HREF="#ldap_add/modify: Invalid syntax">C.1.10. ldap_add/modify: Invalid syntax</A>
 671 <BR>
 672 <A HREF="#ldap_add/modify: Object class violation">C.1.11. ldap_add/modify: Object class violation</A>
 673 <BR>
 674 <A HREF="#ldap_add: No such object">C.1.12. ldap_add: No such object</A>
 675 <BR>
 676 <A HREF="#ldap add: invalid structural object class chain">C.1.13. ldap add: invalid structural object class chain</A>
 677 <BR>
 678 <A HREF="#ldap_add: no structuralObjectClass operational attribute">C.1.14. ldap_add: no structuralObjectClass operational attribute</A>
 679 <BR>
 680 <A HREF="#ldap_add/modify/rename: Naming violation">C.1.15. ldap_add/modify/rename: Naming violation</A>
 681 <BR>
 682 <A HREF="#ldap_add/delete/modify/rename: no global superior knowledge">C.1.16. ldap_add/delete/modify/rename: no global superior knowledge</A>
 683 <BR>
 684 <A HREF="#ldap_bind: Insufficient access">C.1.17. ldap_bind: Insufficient access</A>
 685 <BR>
 686 <A HREF="#ldap_bind: Invalid credentials">C.1.18. ldap_bind: Invalid credentials</A>
 687 <BR>
 688 <A HREF="#ldap_bind: Protocol error">C.1.19. ldap_bind: Protocol error</A>
 689 <BR>
 690 <A HREF="#ldap_modify: cannot modify object class">C.1.20. ldap_modify: cannot modify object class</A>
 691 <BR>
 692 <A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: ..">C.1.21. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: ...</A>
 693 <BR>
 694 <A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such Object">C.1.22. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such Object</A>
 695 <BR>
 696 <A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such attribute">C.1.23. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such attribute</A>
 697 <BR>
 698 <A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Unknown authentication method">C.1.24. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Unknown authentication method</A>
 699 <BR>
 700 <A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Local error (82)">C.1.25. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Local error (82)</A>
 701 <BR>
 702 <A HREF="#ldap_search: Partial results and referral received">C.1.26. ldap_search: Partial results and referral received</A>
 703 <BR>
 704 <A HREF="#ldap_start_tls: Operations error">C.1.27. ldap_start_tls: Operations error</A></UL>
 705 <BR>
 706 <A HREF="#Other Errors">C.2. Other Errors</A><UL>
 707 <A HREF="#ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=34 (Numerical result out of range)">C.2.1. ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=34 (Numerical result out of range)</A>
 708 <BR>
 709 <A HREF="#ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=11 (Resource temporarily unavailable)">C.2.2. ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=11 (Resource temporarily unavailable)</A>
 710 <BR>
 711 <A HREF="#daemon: socket() failed errno=97 (Address family not supported)">C.2.3. daemon: socket() failed errno=97 (Address family not supported)</A>
 712 <BR>
 713 <A HREF="#GSSAPI: gss_acquire_cred: Miscellaneous failure; Permission denied;">C.2.4. GSSAPI: gss_acquire_cred: Miscellaneous failure; Permission denied;</A>
 714 <BR>
 715 <A HREF="#access from unknown denied">C.2.5. access from unknown denied</A>
 716 <BR>
 717 <A HREF="#ldap_read: want=# error=Resource temporarily unavailable">C.2.6. ldap_read: want=# error=Resource temporarily unavailable</A>
 718 <BR>
 719 <A HREF="#`make test\' fails">C.2.7. `make test' fails</A>
 720 <BR>
 721 <A HREF="#ldap_*: Internal (implementation specific) error (80) - additional info: entry index delete failed">C.2.8. ldap_*: Internal (implementation specific) error (80) - additional info: entry index delete failed</A>
 722 <BR>
 723 <A HREF="#ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Can\'t contact LDAP server (-1)">C.2.9. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Can't contact LDAP server (-1)</A></UL></UL>
 724 <BR>
 725 <A HREF="#Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions">D. Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions</A><UL>
 726 <A HREF="#Dependency Versions">D.1. Dependency Versions</A></UL>
 727 <BR>
 728 <A HREF="#Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples">E. Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples</A>
 729 <BR>
 730 <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Software Contributions">F. OpenLDAP Software Contributions</A><UL>
 731 <A HREF="#Client APIs">F.1. Client APIs</A><UL>
 732 <A HREF="#ldapc++">F.1.1. ldapc++</A>
 733 <BR>
 734 <A HREF="#ldaptcl">F.1.2. ldaptcl</A></UL>
 735 <BR>
 736 <A HREF="#Overlays">F.2. Overlays</A><UL>
 737 <A HREF="#acl">F.2.1. acl</A>
 738 <BR>
 739 <A HREF="#addpartial">F.2.2. addpartial</A>
 740 <BR>
 741 <A HREF="#allop">F.2.3. allop</A>
 742 <BR>
 743 <A HREF="#autogroup">F.2.4. autogroup</A>
 744 <BR>
 745 <A HREF="#comp_match">F.2.5. comp_match</A>
 746 <BR>
 747 <A HREF="#denyop">F.2.6. denyop</A>
 748 <BR>
 749 <A HREF="#dsaschema">F.2.7. dsaschema</A>
 750 <BR>
 751 <A HREF="#lastmod">F.2.8. lastmod</A>
 752 <BR>
 753 <A HREF="#nops">F.2.9. nops</A>
 754 <BR>
 755 <A HREF="#nssov">F.2.10. nssov</A>
 756 <BR>
 757 <A HREF="#passwd">F.2.11. passwd</A>
 758 <BR>
 759 <A HREF="#proxyOld">F.2.12. proxyOld</A>
 760 <BR>
 761 <A HREF="#smbk5pwd">F.2.13. smbk5pwd</A>
 762 <BR>
 763 <A HREF="#trace">F.2.14. trace</A>
 764 <BR>
 765 <A HREF="#usn">F.2.15. usn</A></UL>
 766 <BR>
 767 <A HREF="#Tools">F.3. Tools</A><UL>
 768 <A HREF="#Statistic Logging">F.3.1. Statistic Logging</A></UL>
 769 <BR>
 770 <A HREF="#SLAPI Plugins">F.4. SLAPI Plugins</A><UL>
 771 <A HREF="#addrdnvalues">F.4.1. addrdnvalues</A></UL></UL>
 772 <BR>
 773 <A HREF="#Configuration File Examples">G. Configuration File Examples</A><UL>
 774 <A HREF="#slapd.conf">G.1. slapd.conf</A>
 775 <BR>
 776 <A HREF="#ldap.conf">G.2. ldap.conf</A>
 777 <BR>
 778 <A HREF="#a-n-other.conf">G.3. a-n-other.conf</A></UL>
 779 <BR>
 780 <A HREF="#LDAP Result Codes">H. LDAP Result Codes</A><UL>
 781 <A HREF="#Non-Error Result Codes">H.1. Non-Error Result Codes</A>
 782 <BR>
 783 <A HREF="#Result Codes">H.2. Result Codes</A>
 784 <BR>
 785 <A HREF="#{{success (0)}}">H.3. <EM>success (0)</EM></A>
 786 <BR>
 787 <A HREF="#{{operationsError (1)}}">H.4. <EM>operationsError (1)</EM></A>
 788 <BR>
 789 <A HREF="#{{protocolError (2)}}">H.5. <EM>protocolError (2)</EM></A>
 790 <BR>
 791 <A HREF="#{{timeLimitExceeded (3)}}">H.6. <EM>timeLimitExceeded (3)</EM></A>
 792 <BR>
 793 <A HREF="#{{sizeLimitExceeded (4)}}">H.7. <EM>sizeLimitExceeded (4)</EM></A>
 794 <BR>
 795 <A HREF="#{{compareFalse (5)}}">H.8. <EM>compareFalse (5)</EM></A>
 796 <BR>
 797 <A HREF="#{{compareTrue (6)}}">H.9. <EM>compareTrue (6)</EM></A>
 798 <BR>
 799 <A HREF="#{{authMethodNotSupported (7)}}">H.10. <EM>authMethodNotSupported (7)</EM></A>
 800 <BR>
 801 <A HREF="#{{strongerAuthRequired (8)}}">H.11. <EM>strongerAuthRequired (8)</EM></A>
 802 <BR>
 803 <A HREF="#{{referral (10)}}">H.12. <EM>referral (10)</EM></A>
 804 <BR>
 805 <A HREF="#{{adminLimitExceeded (11)}}">H.13. <EM>adminLimitExceeded (11)</EM></A>
 806 <BR>
 807 <A HREF="#{{unavailableCriticalExtension (12)}}">H.14. <EM>unavailableCriticalExtension (12)</EM></A>
 808 <BR>
 809 <A HREF="#{{confidentialityRequired (13)}}">H.15. <EM>confidentialityRequired (13)</EM></A>
 810 <BR>
 811 <A HREF="#{{saslBindInProgress (14)}}">H.16. <EM>saslBindInProgress (14)</EM></A>
 812 <BR>
 813 <A HREF="#{{noSuchAttribute (16)}}">H.17. <EM>noSuchAttribute (16)</EM></A>
 814 <BR>
 815 <A HREF="#{{undefinedAttributeType (17)}}">H.18. <EM>undefinedAttributeType (17)</EM></A>
 816 <BR>
 817 <A HREF="#{{inappropriateMatching (18)}}">H.19. <EM>inappropriateMatching (18)</EM></A>
 818 <BR>
 819 <A HREF="#{{constraintViolation (19)}}">H.20. <EM>constraintViolation (19)</EM></A>
 820 <BR>
 821 <A HREF="#{{attributeOrValueExists (20)}}">H.21. <EM>attributeOrValueExists (20)</EM></A>
 822 <BR>
 823 <A HREF="#{{invalidAttributeSyntax (21)}}">H.22. <EM>invalidAttributeSyntax (21)</EM></A>
 824 <BR>
 825 <A HREF="#{{noSuchObject (32)}}">H.23. <EM>noSuchObject (32)</EM></A>
 826 <BR>
 827 <A HREF="#{{aliasProblem (33)}}">H.24. <EM>aliasProblem (33)</EM></A>
 828 <BR>
 829 <A HREF="#{{invalidDNSyntax (34)}}">H.25. <EM>invalidDNSyntax (34)</EM></A>
 830 <BR>
 831 <A HREF="#{{aliasDereferencingProblem (36)}}">H.26. <EM>aliasDereferencingProblem (36)</EM></A>
 832 <BR>
 833 <A HREF="#{{inappropriateAuthentication (48)}}">H.27. <EM>inappropriateAuthentication (48)</EM></A>
 834 <BR>
 835 <A HREF="#{{invalidCredentials (49)}}">H.28. <EM>invalidCredentials (49)</EM></A>
 836 <BR>
 837 <A HREF="#{{insufficientAccessRights (50)}}">H.29. <EM>insufficientAccessRights (50)</EM></A>
 838 <BR>
 839 <A HREF="#{{busy (51)}}">H.30. <EM>busy (51)</EM></A>
 840 <BR>
 841 <A HREF="#{{unavailable (52)}}">H.31. <EM>unavailable (52)</EM></A>
 842 <BR>
 843 <A HREF="#{{unwillingToPerform (53)}}">H.32. <EM>unwillingToPerform (53)</EM></A>
 844 <BR>
 845 <A HREF="#{{loopDetect (54)}}">H.33. <EM>loopDetect (54)</EM></A>
 846 <BR>
 847 <A HREF="#{{namingViolation (64)}}">H.34. <EM>namingViolation (64)</EM></A>
 848 <BR>
 849 <A HREF="#{{objectClassViolation (65)}}">H.35. <EM>objectClassViolation (65)</EM></A>
 850 <BR>
 851 <A HREF="#{{notAllowedOnNonLeaf (66)}}">H.36. <EM>notAllowedOnNonLeaf (66)</EM></A>
 852 <BR>
 853 <A HREF="#{{notAllowedOnRDN (67)}}">H.37. <EM>notAllowedOnRDN (67)</EM></A>
 854 <BR>
 855 <A HREF="#{{entryAlreadyExists (68)}}">H.38. <EM>entryAlreadyExists (68)</EM></A>
 856 <BR>
 857 <A HREF="#{{objectClassModsProhibited (69)}}">H.39. <EM>objectClassModsProhibited (69)</EM></A>
 858 <BR>
 859 <A HREF="#{{affectsMultipleDSAs (71)}}">H.40. <EM>affectsMultipleDSAs (71)</EM></A>
 860 <BR>
 861 <A HREF="#{{other (80)}}">H.41. <EM>other (80)</EM></A></UL>
 862 <BR>
 863 <A HREF="#Glossary">I. Glossary</A><UL>
 864 <A HREF="#Terms">I.1. Terms</A>
 865 <BR>
 866 <A HREF="#Related Organizations">I.2. Related Organizations</A>
 867 <BR>
 868 <A HREF="#Related Products">I.3. Related Products</A>
 869 <BR>
 870 <A HREF="#References">I.4. References</A></UL>
 871 <BR>
 872 <A HREF="#Generic configure Instructions">J. Generic configure Instructions</A>
 873 <BR>
 874 <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices">K. OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices</A><UL>
 875 <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Copyright Notice">K.1. OpenLDAP Copyright Notice</A>
 876 <BR>
 877 <A HREF="#Additional Copyright Notices">K.2. Additional Copyright Notices</A>
 878 <BR>
 879 <A HREF="#University of Michigan Copyright Notice">K.3. University of Michigan Copyright Notice</A></UL>
 880 <BR>
 881 <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Public License">L. OpenLDAP Public License</A></UL>
 882 </DIV>
 883 <DIV CLASS="main">
 884 <P></P>
 885 <HR>
 886 <H1><A NAME="Preface">Preface</A></H1>
 887 <H2>Copyright</H2>
 888 <P>Copyright 1998-2008, The <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/foundation/">OpenLDAP Foundation</A>, <EM>All Rights Reserved</EM>.</P>
 889 <P>Copyright 1992-1996, Regents of the <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/">University of Michigan</A>, <EM>All Rights Reserved</EM>.</P>
 890 <P>This document is considered a part of OpenLDAP Software.  This document is subject to terms of conditions set forth in <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices">OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices</A> and the <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Public License">OpenLDAP Public License</A>. Complete copies of the notices and associated license can be found in Appendix K and L, respectively.</P>
 891 <P>Portions of OpenLDAP Software and this document may be copyright by other parties and/or subject to additional restrictions.  Individual source files should be consulted for additional copyright notices.</P>
 892 <H2>Scope of this Document</H2>
 893 <P>This document provides a guide for installing OpenLDAP Software 2.4 (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/">http://www.openldap.org/software/</A>) on <TERM>UNIX</TERM> (and UNIX-like) systems.  The document is aimed at experienced system administrators with basic understanding of <TERM>LDAP</TERM>-based directory services.</P>
 894 <P>This document is meant to be used in conjunction with other OpenLDAP information resources provided with the software package and on the project's site (<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/</A>) on the <TERM>World Wide Web</TERM>.  The site makes available a number of resources.</P>
 895 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
 896 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>OpenLDAP Resources</CAPTION>
 897 <TR CLASS="heading">
 898 <TD>
 899 <STRONG>Resource</STRONG>
 900 </TD>
 901 <TD>
 902 <STRONG>URL</STRONG>
 903 </TD>
 904 </TR>
 905 <TR>
 906 <TD>
 907 Document Catalog
 908 </TD>
 909 <TD>
 910 <A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/doc/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/doc/</A>
 911 </TD>
 912 </TR>
 913 <TR>
 914 <TD>
 915 Frequently Asked Questions
 916 </TD>
 917 <TD>
 918 <A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/faq/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/faq/</A>
 919 </TD>
 920 </TR>
 921 <TR>
 922 <TD>
 923 Issue Tracking System
 924 </TD>
 925 <TD>
 926 <A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/its/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/its/</A>
 927 </TD>
 928 </TR>
 929 <TR>
 930 <TD>
 931 Mailing Lists
 932 </TD>
 933 <TD>
 934 <A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/lists/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/lists/</A>
 935 </TD>
 936 </TR>
 937 <TR>
 938 <TD>
 939 Manual Pages
 940 </TD>
 941 <TD>
 942 <A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/software/man.cgi">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/software/man.cgi</A>
 943 </TD>
 944 </TR>
 945 <TR>
 946 <TD>
 947 Software Pages
 948 </TD>
 949 <TD>
 950 <A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/software/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/software/</A>
 951 </TD>
 952 </TR>
 953 <TR>
 954 <TD>
 955 Support Pages
 956 </TD>
 957 <TD>
 958 <A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/support/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/support/</A>
 959 </TD>
 960 </TR>
 961 </TABLE>
 962
 963 <H2>Acknowledgments</H2>
 964 <P>The <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/project/">OpenLDAP Project</A> is comprised of a team of volunteers.  This document would not be possible without their contribution of time and energy.</P>
 965 <P>The OpenLDAP Project would also like to thank the <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">University of Michigan LDAP Team</A> for building the foundation of LDAP software and information to which OpenLDAP Software is built upon.  This document is based upon University of Michigan document: <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/doc/guides/slapd/guide.pdf">The SLAPD and SLURPD Administrators Guide</A>.</P>
 966 <H2>Amendments</H2>
 967 <P>Suggested enhancements and corrections to this document should be submitted using the <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A> <TERM>Issue Tracking System</TERM> (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">http://www.openldap.org/its/</A>).</P>
 968 <H2>About this document</H2>
 969 <P>This document was produced using the <TERM>Simple Document Format</TERM> (<TERM>SDF</TERM>) documentation system (<A HREF="http://search.cpan.org/src/IANC/sdf-2.001/doc/catalog.html">http://search.cpan.org/src/IANC/sdf-2.001/doc/catalog.html</A>) developed by <EM>Ian Clatworthy</EM>.  Tools for SDF are available from <A HREF="http://cpan.org/">CPAN</A> (<A HREF="http://search.cpan.org/search?query=SDF&amp;mode=dist">http://search.cpan.org/search?query=SDF&amp;mode=dist</A>).</P>
 970 <P></P>
 971 <HR>
 972 <H1><A NAME="Introduction to OpenLDAP Directory Services">1. Introduction to OpenLDAP Directory Services</A></H1>
 973 <P>This document describes how to build, configure, and operate <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A> Software to provide directory services.  This includes details on how to configure and run the Standalone <TERM>LDAP</TERM> Daemon, <EM>slapd</EM>(8).  It is intended for new and experienced administrators alike.  This section provides a basic introduction to directory services and, in particular, the directory services provided by <EM>slapd</EM>(8).  This introduction is only intended to provide enough information so one might get started learning about <TERM>LDAP</TERM>, <TERM>X.500</TERM>, and directory services.</P>
 974 <H2><A NAME="What is a directory service">1.1. What is a directory service?</A></H2>
 975 <P>A directory is a specialized database specifically designed for searching and browsing, in additional to supporting basic lookup and update functions.</P>
 976 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
 977 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>A directory is defined by some as merely a database optimized for read access.  This definition, at best, is overly simplistic.
 978 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
 979 <P>Directories tend to contain descriptive, attribute-based information and support sophisticated filtering capabilities.  Directories generally do not support complicated transaction or roll-back schemes found in database management systems designed for handling high-volume complex updates.  Directory updates are typically simple all-or-nothing changes, if they are allowed at all.  Directories are generally tuned to give quick response to high-volume lookup or search operations. They may have the ability to replicate information widely in order to increase availability and reliability, while reducing response time.  When directory information is replicated, temporary inconsistencies between the replicas may be okay, as long as inconsistencies are resolved in a timely manner.</P>
 980 <P>There are many different ways to provide a directory service. Different methods allow different kinds of information to be stored in the directory, place different requirements on how that information can be referenced, queried and updated, how it is protected from unauthorized access, etc.  Some directory services are <EM>local</EM>, providing service to a restricted context (e.g., the finger service on a single machine). Other services are global, providing service to a much broader context (e.g., the entire Internet).  Global services are usually <EM>distributed</EM>, meaning that the data they contain is spread across many machines, all of which cooperate to provide the directory service. Typically a global service defines a uniform <EM>namespace</EM> which gives the same view of the data no matter where you are in relation to the data itself.</P>
 981 <P>A web directory, such as provided by the <EM>Open Directory Project</EM> &lt;<A HREF="http://dmoz.org">http://dmoz.org</A>&gt;, is a good example of a directory service. These services catalog web pages and are specifically designed to support browsing and searching.</P>
 982 <P>While some consider the Internet <TERM>Domain Name System</TERM> (DNS) is an example of a globally distributed directory service, DNS is not browseable nor searchable.  It is more properly described as a globally distributed <EM>lookup</EM> service.</P>
 983 <H2><A NAME="What is LDAP">1.2. What is LDAP?</A></H2>
 984 <P><TERM>LDAP</TERM> stands for <TERM>Lightweight Directory Access Protocol</TERM>.  As the name suggests, it is a lightweight protocol for accessing directory services, specifically <TERM>X.500</TERM>-based directory services.  LDAP runs over <TERM>TCP</TERM>/<TERM>IP</TERM> or other connection oriented transfer services.  LDAP is an <A HREF="http://www.ietf.org/">IETF</A> Standard Track protocol and is specified in &quot;Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) Technical Specification Road Map&quot; <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4510.txt">RFC4510</A>.</P>
 985 <P>This section gives an overview of LDAP from a user's perspective.</P>
 986 <P><EM>What kind of information can be stored in the directory?</EM> The LDAP information model is based on <EM>entries</EM>. An entry is a collection of attributes that has a globally-unique <TERM>Distinguished Name</TERM> (DN).  The DN is used to refer to the entry unambiguously. Each of the entry's attributes has a <EM>type</EM> and one or more <EM>values</EM>. The types are typically mnemonic strings, like &quot;<TT>cn</TT>&quot; for common name, or &quot;<TT>mail</TT>&quot; for email address. The syntax of values depend on the attribute type.  For example, a <TT>cn</TT> attribute might contain the value <TT>Babs Jensen</TT>.  A <TT>mail</TT> attribute might contain the value &quot;<TT>babs@example.com</TT>&quot;. A <TT>jpegPhoto</TT> attribute would contain a photograph in the <TERM>JPEG</TERM> (binary) format.</P>
 987 <P><EM>How is the information arranged?</EM> In LDAP, directory entries are arranged in a hierarchical tree-like structure.  Traditionally, this structure reflected the geographic and/or organizational boundaries.  Entries representing countries appear at the top of the tree. Below them are entries representing states and national organizations. Below them might be entries representing organizational units, people, printers, documents, or just about anything else you can think of.  Figure 1.1 shows an example LDAP directory tree using traditional naming.</P>
 988 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="intro_tree.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
 989 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure 1.1: LDAP directory tree (traditional naming)</P>
 990 <P>The tree may also be arranged based upon Internet domain names. This naming approach is becoming increasing popular as it allows for directory services to be located using the <EM>DNS</EM>. Figure 1.2 shows an example LDAP directory tree using domain-based naming.</P>
 991 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="intro_dctree.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
 992 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure 1.2: LDAP directory tree (Internet naming)</P>
 993 <P>In addition, LDAP allows you to control which attributes are required and allowed in an entry through the use of a special attribute called <TT>objectClass</TT>.  The values of the <TT>objectClass</TT> attribute determine the <EM>schema</EM> rules the entry must obey.</P>
 994 <P><EM>How is the information referenced?</EM> An entry is referenced by its distinguished name, which is constructed by taking the name of the entry itself (called the <TERM>Relative Distinguished Name</TERM> or RDN) and concatenating the names of its ancestor entries. For example, the entry for Barbara Jensen in the Internet naming example above has an RDN of <TT>uid=babs</TT> and a DN of <TT>uid=babs,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com</TT>. The full DN format is described in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt">RFC4514</A>, &quot;LDAP: String Representation of Distinguished Names.&quot;</P>
 995 <P><EM>How is the information accessed?</EM> LDAP defines operations for interrogating and updating the directory.  Operations are provided for adding and deleting an entry from the directory, changing an existing entry, and changing the name of an entry. Most of the time, though, LDAP is used to search for information in the directory. The LDAP search operation allows some portion of the directory to be searched for entries that match some criteria specified by a search filter. Information can be requested from each entry that matches the criteria.</P>
 996 <P>For example, you might want to search the entire directory subtree at and below <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> for people with the name <TT>Barbara Jensen</TT>, retrieving the email address of each entry found. LDAP lets you do this easily.  Or you might want to search the entries directly below the <TT>st=California,c=US</TT> entry for organizations with the string <TT>Acme</TT> in their name, and that have a fax number. LDAP lets you do this too. The next section describes in more detail what you can do with LDAP and how it might be useful to you.</P>
 997 <P><EM>How is the information protected from unauthorized access?</EM> Some directory services provide no protection, allowing anyone to see the information. LDAP provides a mechanism for a client to authenticate, or prove its identity to a directory server, paving the way for rich access control to protect the information the server contains. LDAP also supports data security (integrity and confidentiality) services.</P>
 998 <H2><A NAME="When should I use LDAP">1.3. When should I use LDAP?</A></H2>
 999 <P>This is a very good question. In general, you should use a Directory server when you require data to be centrally managed, stored and accessible via standards based methods.</P>
1000 <P>Some common examples found throughout the industry are, but not limited to:</P>
1001 <UL>
1002 <LI>Machine Authentication
1003 <LI>User Authentication
1004 <LI>User/System Groups
1005 <LI>Address book
1006 <LI>Organization Representation
1007 <LI>Asset Tracking
1008 <LI>Telephony Information Store
1009 <LI>User resource management
1010 <LI>E-mail address lookups
1011 <LI>Application Configuration store
1012 <LI>PBX Configuration store
1013 <LI>etc.....</UL>
1014 <P>There are various <A HREF="#Distributed Schema Files">Distributed Schema Files</A> that are standards based, but you can always create your own <A HREF="#Schema Specification">Schema Specification</A>.</P>
1015 <P>There are always new ways to use a Directory and apply LDAP principles to address certain problems, therefore there is no simple answer to this question.</P>
1016 <P>If in doubt, join the general LDAP forum for non-commercial discussions and information relating to LDAP at: <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/mailinglist.html">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/mailinglist.html</A> and ask</P>
1017 <H2><A NAME="When should I not use LDAP">1.4. When should I not use LDAP?</A></H2>
1018 <P>When you start finding yourself bending the directory to do what you require, maybe a redesign is needed. Or if you only require one application to use and manipulate your data (for discussion of LDAP vs RDBMS, please read the <A HREF="#LDAP vs RDBMS">LDAP vs RDBMS</A> section).</P>
1019 <P>It will become obvious when LDAP is the right tool for the job.</P>
1020 <H2><A NAME="How does LDAP work">1.5. How does LDAP work?</A></H2>
1021 <P>LDAP utilizes a <EM>client-server model</EM>. One or more LDAP servers contain the data making up the directory information tree (<TERM>DIT</TERM>). The client connects to servers and asks it a question.  The server responds with an answer and/or with a pointer to where the client can get additional information (typically, another LDAP server). No matter which LDAP server a client connects to, it sees the same view of the directory; a name presented to one LDAP server references the same entry it would at another LDAP server.  This is an important feature of a global directory service.</P>
1022 <H2><A NAME="What about X.500">1.6. What about X.500?</A></H2>
1023 <P>Technically, <TERM>LDAP</TERM> is a directory access protocol to an <TERM>X.500</TERM> directory service, the <TERM>OSI</TERM> directory service. Initially, LDAP clients accessed gateways to the X.500 directory service. This gateway ran LDAP between the client and gateway and X.500's <TERM>Directory Access Protocol</TERM> (<TERM>DAP</TERM>) between the gateway and the X.500 server.  DAP is a heavyweight protocol that operates over a full OSI protocol stack and requires a significant amount of computing resources.  LDAP is designed to operate over <TERM>TCP</TERM>/<TERM>IP</TERM> and provides most of the functionality of DAP at a much lower cost.</P>
1024 <P>While LDAP is still used to access X.500 directory service via gateways, LDAP is now more commonly directly implemented in X.500 servers.</P>
1025 <P>The Standalone LDAP Daemon, or <EM>slapd</EM>(8), can be viewed as a <EM>lightweight</EM> X.500 directory server.  That is, it does not implement the X.500's DAP nor does it support the complete X.500 models.</P>
1026 <P>If you are already running a X.500 DAP service and you want to continue to do so, you can probably stop reading this guide.  This guide is all about running LDAP via <EM>slapd</EM>(8), without running X.500 DAP.  If you are not running X.500 DAP, want to stop running X.500 DAP, or have no immediate plans to run X.500 DAP, read on.</P>
1027 <P>It is possible to replicate data from an LDAP directory server to a X.500 DAP <TERM>DSA</TERM>.  This requires an LDAP/DAP gateway. OpenLDAP Software does not include such a gateway.</P>
1028 <H2><A NAME="What is the difference between LDAPv2 and LDAPv3">1.7. What is the difference between LDAPv2 and LDAPv3?</A></H2>
1029 <P>LDAPv3 was developed in the late 1990's to replace LDAPv2. LDAPv3 adds the following features to LDAP:</P>
1030 <UL>
1031 <LI>Strong authentication and data security services via <TERM>SASL</TERM>
1032 <LI>Certificate authentication and data security services via <TERM>TLS</TERM> (SSL)
1033 <LI>Internationalization through the use of Unicode
1034 <LI>Referrals and Continuations
1035 <LI>Schema Discovery
1036 <LI>Extensibility (controls, extended operations, and more)</UL>
1037 <P>LDAPv2 is historic (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3494.txt">RFC3494</A>).  As most <EM>so-called</EM> LDAPv2 implementations (including <EM>slapd</EM>(8)) do not conform to the LDAPv2 technical specification, interoperability amongst implementations claiming LDAPv2 support is limited.  As LDAPv2 differs significantly from LDAPv3, deploying both LDAPv2 and LDAPv3 simultaneously is quite problematic.  LDAPv2 should be avoided. LDAPv2 is disabled by default.</P>
1038 <H2><A NAME="LDAP vs RDBMS">1.8. LDAP vs RDBMS</A></H2>
1039 <P>This question is raised many times, in different forms. The most common, however, is: <EM>Why doesn't OpenLDAP drop Berkeley DB and use a relational database management system (RDBMS) instead?</EM> In general, expecting that the sophisticated algorithms implemented by commercial-grade RDBMS would make <EM>OpenLDAP</EM> be faster or somehow better and, at the same time, permitting sharing of data with other applications.</P>
1040 <P>The short answer is that use of an embedded database and custom indexing system allows OpenLDAP to provide greater performance and scalability without loss of reliability. OpenLDAP uses Berkeley DB concurrent / transactional database software. This is the same software used by leading commercial directory software.</P>
1041 <P>Now for the long answer. We are all confronted all the time with the choice RDBMSes vs. directories. It is a hard choice and no simple answer exists.</P>
1042 <P>It is tempting to think that having a RDBMS backend to the directory solves all problems. However, it is a pig. This is because the data models are very different. Representing directory data with a relational database is going to require splitting data into multiple tables.</P>
1043 <P>Think for a moment about the person objectclass. Its definition requires attribute types objectclass, sn and cn and allows attribute types userPassword, telephoneNumber, seeAlso and description. All of these attributes are multivalued, so a normalization requires putting each attribute type in a separate table.</P>
1044 <P>Now you have to decide on appropriate keys for those tables. The primary key might be a combination of the DN, but this becomes rather inefficient on most database implementations.</P>
1045 <P>The big problem now is that accessing data from one entry requires seeking on different disk areas. On some applications this may be OK but in many applications performance suffers.</P>
1046 <P>The only attribute types that can be put in the main table entry are those that are mandatory and single-value. You may add also the optional single-valued attributes and set them to NULL or something if not present.</P>
1047 <P>But wait, the entry can have multiple objectclasses and they are organized in an inheritance hierarchy. An entry of objectclass organizationalPerson now has the attributes from person plus a few others and some formerly optional attribute types are now mandatory.</P>
1048 <P>What to do? Should we have different tables for the different objectclasses? This way the person would have an entry on the person table, another on organizationalPerson, etc. Or should we get rid of person and put everything on the second table?</P>
1049 <P>But what do we do with a filter like (cn=*) where cn is an attribute type that appears in many, many objectclasses. Should we search all possible tables for matching entries? Not very attractive.</P>
1050 <P>Once this point is reached, three approaches come to mind. One is to do full normalization so that each attribute type, no matter what, has its own separate table. The simplistic approach where the DN is part of the primary key is extremely wasteful, and calls for an approach where the entry has a unique numeric id that is used instead for the keys and a main table that maps DNs to ids. The approach, anyway, is very inefficient when several attribute types from one or more entries are requested. Such a database, though cumbersomely, can be managed from SQL applications.</P>
1051 <P>The second approach is to put the whole entry as a blob in a table shared by all entries regardless of the objectclass and have additional tables that act as indices for the first table. Index tables are not database indices, but are fully managed by the LDAP server-side implementation. However, the database becomes unusable from SQL. And, thus, a fully fledged database system provides little or no advantage. The full generality of the database is unneeded. Much better to use something light and fast, like Berkeley DB.</P>
1052 <P>A completely different way to see this is to give up any hopes of implementing the directory data model. In this case, LDAP is used as an access protocol to data that provides only superficially the directory data model. For instance, it may be read only or, where updates are allowed, restrictions are applied, such as making single-value attribute types that would allow for multiple values. Or the impossibility to add new objectclasses to an existing entry or remove one of those present. The restrictions span the range from allowed restrictions (that might be elsewhere the result of access control) to outright violations of the data model. It can be, however, a method to provide LDAP access to preexisting data that is used by other applications. But in the understanding that we don't really have a &quot;directory&quot;.</P>
1053 <P>Existing commercial LDAP server implementations that use a relational database are either from the first kind or the third. I don't know of any implementation that uses a relational database to do inefficiently what BDB does efficiently. For those who are interested in &quot;third way&quot; (exposing EXISTING data from RDBMS as LDAP tree, having some limitations compared to classic LDAP model, but making it possible to interoperate between LDAP and SQL applications):</P>
1054 <P>OpenLDAP includes back-sql - the backend that makes it possible. It uses ODBC + additional metainformation about translating LDAP queries to SQL queries in your RDBMS schema, providing different levels of access - from read-only to full access depending on RDBMS you use, and your schema.</P>
1055 <P>For more information on concept and limitations, see <EM>slapd-sql</EM>(5) man page, or the <A HREF="#Backends">Backends</A> section. There are also several examples for several RDBMSes in <TT>back-sql/rdbms_depend/*</TT> subdirectories.</P>
1056 <H2><A NAME="What is slapd and what can it do">1.9. What is slapd and what can it do?</A></H2>
1057 <P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) is an LDAP directory server that runs on many different platforms. You can use it to provide a directory service of your very own.  Your directory can contain pretty much anything you want to put in it. You can connect it to the global LDAP directory service, or run a service all by yourself. Some of slapd's more interesting features and capabilities include:</P>
1058 <P><B>LDAPv3</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> implements version 3 of <TERM>Lightweight Directory Access Protocol</TERM>. <EM>slapd</EM> supports LDAP over both <TERM>IPv4</TERM> and <TERM>IPv6</TERM> and Unix <TERM>IPC</TERM>.</P>
1059 <P><B><TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM></B>: <EM>slapd</EM> supports strong authentication and data security (integrity and confidentiality) services through the use of SASL.  <EM>slapd</EM>'s SASL implementation utilizes <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A> software which supports a number of mechanisms including <TERM>DIGEST-MD5</TERM>, <TERM>EXTERNAL</TERM>, and <TERM>GSSAPI</TERM>.</P>
1060 <P><B><TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM></B>: <EM>slapd</EM> supports certificate-based authentication and data security (integrity and confidentiality) services through the use of TLS (or SSL).  <EM>slapd</EM>'s TLS implementation can utilize either <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A> or <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">GnuTLS</A> software.</P>
1061 <P><B>Topology control</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> can be configured to restrict access at the socket layer based upon network topology information. This feature utilizes <EM>TCP wrappers</EM>.</P>
1062 <P><B>Access control</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> provides a rich and powerful access control facility, allowing you to control access to the information in your database(s). You can control access to entries based on LDAP authorization information, <TERM>IP</TERM> address, domain name and other criteria.  <EM>slapd</EM> supports both <EM>static</EM> and <EM>dynamic</EM> access control information.</P>
1063 <P><B>Internationalization</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> supports Unicode and language tags.</P>
1064 <P><B>Choice of database backends</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> comes with a variety of different database backends you can choose from. They include <TERM>BDB</TERM>, a high-performance transactional database backend; <TERM>HDB</TERM>, a hierarchical high-performance transactional backend; <EM>SHELL</EM>, a backend interface to arbitrary shell scripts; and PASSWD, a simple backend interface to the <EM>passwd</EM>(5) file. The BDB and HDB backends utilize <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/">Oracle</A> <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A>.</P>
1065 <P><B>Multiple database instances</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> can be configured to serve multiple databases at the same time. This means that a single <EM>slapd</EM> server can respond to requests for many logically different portions of the LDAP tree, using the same or different database backends.</P>
1066 <P><B>Generic modules API</B>:  If you require even more customization, <EM>slapd</EM> lets you write your own modules easily. <EM>slapd</EM> consists of two distinct parts: a front end that handles protocol communication with LDAP clients; and modules which handle specific tasks such as database operations.  Because these two pieces communicate via a well-defined <TERM>C</TERM> <TERM>API</TERM>, you can write your own customized modules which extend <EM>slapd</EM> in numerous ways.  Also, a number of <EM>programmable database</EM> modules are provided.  These allow you to expose external data sources to <EM>slapd</EM> using popular programming languages (<A HREF="http://www.perl.org/">Perl</A>, <EM>shell</EM>, and <TERM>SQL</TERM>.</P>
1067 <P><B>Threads</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> is threaded for high performance.  A single multi-threaded <EM>slapd</EM> process handles all incoming requests using a pool of threads.  This reduces the amount of system overhead required while providing high performance.</P>
1068 <P><B>Replication</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> can be configured to maintain shadow copies of directory information.  This <EM>single-master/multiple-slave</EM> replication scheme is vital in high-volume environments where a single <EM>slapd</EM> installation just doesn't provide the necessary availability or reliability.  For extremely demanding environments where a single point of failure is not acceptable, <EM>multi-master</EM> replication is also available.  <EM>slapd</EM> includes support for <EM>LDAP Sync</EM>-based replication.</P>
1069 <P><B>Proxy Cache</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> can be configured as a caching LDAP proxy service.</P>
1070 <P><B>Configuration</B>: <EM>slapd</EM> is highly configurable through a single configuration file which allows you to change just about everything you'd ever want to change.  Configuration options have reasonable defaults, making your job much easier. Configuration can also be performed dynamically using LDAP itself, which greatly improves manageability.</P>
1071 <P></P>
1072 <HR>
1073 <H1><A NAME="A Quick-Start Guide">2. A Quick-Start Guide</A></H1>
1074 <P>The following is a quick start guide to OpenLDAP Software 2.4, including the Standalone <TERM>LDAP</TERM> Daemon, <EM>slapd</EM>(8).</P>
1075 <P>It is meant to walk you through the basic steps needed to install and configure <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/">OpenLDAP Software</A>.  It should be used in conjunction with the other chapters of this document, manual pages, and other materials provided with the distribution (e.g. the <TT>INSTALL</TT> document) or on the <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A> web site (<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org">http://www.OpenLDAP.org</A>), in particular the OpenLDAP Software <TERM>FAQ</TERM> (<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/faq/?file=2">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/faq/?file=2</A>).</P>
1076 <P>If you intend to run OpenLDAP Software seriously, you should review all of this document before attempting to install the software.</P>
1077 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
1078 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>This quick start guide does not use strong authentication nor any integrity or confidential protection services.  These services are described in other chapters of the OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide.
1079 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
1080 <UL>
1081 &nbsp;</UL><OL>
1082 <LI><B>Get the software</B>
1083 <BR>
1084 You can obtain a copy of the software by following the instructions on the OpenLDAP Software download page (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/download/">http://www.openldap.org/software/download/</A>).  It is recommended that new users start with the latest <EM>release</EM>.
1085 <BR>
1086 &nbsp;
1087 <LI><B>Unpack the distribution</B>
1088 <BR>
1089 Pick a directory for the source to live under, change directory to there, and unpack the distribution using the following commands:<UL>
1090 <TT>gunzip -c openldap-VERSION.tgz | tar xvfB -</TT></UL>
1091 <BR>
1092 then relocate yourself into the distribution directory:<UL>
1093 <TT>cd openldap-VERSION</TT></UL>
1094 <BR>
1095 You'll have to replace <TT>VERSION</TT> with the version name of the release.
1096 <BR>
1097 &nbsp;
1098 <LI><B>Review documentation</B>
1099 <BR>
1100 You should now review the <TT>COPYRIGHT</TT>, <TT>LICENSE</TT>, <TT>README</TT> and <TT>INSTALL</TT> documents provided with the distribution. The <TT>COPYRIGHT</TT> and <TT>LICENSE</TT> provide information on acceptable use, copying, and limitation of warranty of OpenLDAP Software.
1101 <BR>
1102 &nbsp;
1103 <BR>
1104 You should also review other chapters of this document. In particular, the <A HREF="#Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software">Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software</A> chapter of this document provides detailed information on prerequisite software and installation procedures.
1105 <BR>
1106 &nbsp;
1107 <LI><B>Run <TT>configure</TT></B>
1108 <BR>
1109 You will need to run the provided <TT>configure</TT> script to <EM>configure</EM> the distribution for building on your system.  The <TT>configure</TT> script accepts many command line options that enable or disable optional software features.  Usually the defaults are okay, but you may want to change them.  To get a complete list of options that <TT>configure</TT> accepts, use the <TT>--help</TT> option:<UL>
1110 <TT>./configure --help</TT></UL>
1111 <BR>
1112 However, given that you are using this guide, we'll assume you are brave enough to just let <TT>configure</TT> determine what's best:<UL>
1113 <TT>./configure</TT></UL>
1114 <BR>
1115 Assuming <TT>configure</TT> doesn't dislike your system, you can proceed with building the software.  If <TT>configure</TT> did complain, well, you'll likely need to go to the Software FAQ <EM>Installation</EM> section (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/?file=8">http://www.openldap.org/faq/?file=8</A>) and/or actually read the <A HREF="#Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software">Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software</A> chapter of this document.
1116 <BR>
1117 &nbsp;
1118 <LI><B>Build the software</B>.
1119 <BR>
1120 The next step is to build the software.  This step has two parts, first we construct dependencies and then we compile the software:<UL>
1121 <TT>make depend</TT>
1122 <BR>
1123 <TT>make</TT></UL>
1124 <BR>
1125 Both makes should complete without error.
1126 <BR>
1127 &nbsp;
1128 <LI><B>Test the build</B>.
1129 <BR>
1130 To ensure a correct build, you should run the test suite (it only takes a few minutes):<UL>
1131 <TT>make test</TT></UL>
1132 <BR>
1133 Tests which apply to your configuration will run and they should pass.  Some tests, such as the replication test, may be skipped.
1134 <BR>
1135 &nbsp;
1136 <LI><B>Install the software</B>.
1137 <BR>
1138 You are now ready to install the software; this usually requires <EM>super-user</EM> privileges:<UL>
1139 <TT>su root -c 'make install'</TT></UL>
1140 <BR>
1141 Everything should now be installed under <TT>/usr/local</TT> (or whatever installation prefix was used by <TT>configure</TT>).
1142 <BR>
1143 &nbsp;
1144 <LI><B>Edit the configuration file</B>.
1145 <BR>
1146 Use your favorite editor to edit the provided <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) example (usually installed as <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.conf</TT>) to contain a BDB database definition of the form:<UL>
1147 <TT>database        bdb</TT>
1148 <BR>
1149 <TT>suffix          &quot;dc=&lt;MY-DOMAIN&gt;,dc=&lt;COM&gt;&quot;</TT>
1150 <BR>
1151 <TT>rootdn          &quot;cn=Manager,dc=&lt;MY-DOMAIN&gt;,dc=&lt;COM&gt;&quot;</TT>
1152 <BR>
1153 <TT>rootpw          secret</TT>
1154 <BR>
1155 <TT>directory       /usr/local/var/openldap-data</TT></UL>
1156 <BR>
1157 Be sure to replace <TT>&lt;MY-DOMAIN&gt;</TT> and <TT>&lt;COM&gt;</TT> with the appropriate domain components of your domain name.  For example, for <TT>example.com</TT>, use:<UL>
1158 <TT>database        bdb</TT>
1159 <BR>
1160 <TT>suffix          &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;</TT>
1161 <BR>
1162 <TT>rootdn          &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot;</TT>
1163 <BR>
1164 <TT>rootpw          secret</TT>
1165 <BR>
1166 <TT>directory       /usr/local/var/openldap-data</TT></UL>
1167 <BR>
1168 If your domain contains additional components, such as <TT>eng.uni.edu.eu</TT>, use:<UL>
1169 <TT>database        bdb</TT>
1170 <BR>
1171 <TT>suffix          &quot;dc=eng,dc=uni,dc=edu,dc=eu&quot;</TT>
1172 <BR>
1173 <TT>rootdn          &quot;cn=Manager,dc=eng,dc=uni,dc=edu,dc=eu&quot;</TT>
1174 <BR>
1175 <TT>rootpw          secret</TT>
1176 <BR>
1177 <TT>directory       /usr/local/var/openldap-data</TT></UL>
1178 <BR>
1179 Details regarding configuring <EM>slapd</EM>(8) can be found in the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) manual page and the <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> chapter of this document.  Note that the specified directory must exist prior to starting <EM>slapd</EM>(8).
1180 <BR>
1181 &nbsp;
1182 <LI><B>Start SLAPD</B>.
1183 <BR>
1184 You are now ready to start the Standalone LDAP Daemon, <EM>slapd</EM>(8), by running the command:<UL>
1185 <TT>su root -c /usr/local/libexec/slapd</TT></UL>
1186 <BR>
1187 To check to see if the server is running and configured correctly, you can run a search against it with <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1).  By default, <EM>ldapsearch</EM> is installed as <TT>/usr/local/bin/ldapsearch</TT>:<UL>
1188 <TT>ldapsearch -x -b '' -s base '(objectclass=*)' namingContexts</TT></UL>
1189 <BR>
1190 Note the use of single quotes around command parameters to prevent special characters from being interpreted by the shell.  This should return:<UL>
1191 <TT>dn:</TT>
1192 <BR>
1193 <TT>namingContexts: dc=example,dc=com</TT></UL>
1194 <BR>
1195 Details regarding running <EM>slapd</EM>(8) can be found in the <EM>slapd</EM>(8) manual page and the <A HREF="#Running slapd">Running slapd</A> chapter of this document.
1196 <BR>
1197 &nbsp;
1198 <LI><B>Add initial entries to your directory</B>.
1199 <BR>
1200 You can use <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1) to add entries to your LDAP directory. <EM>ldapadd</EM> expects input in <TERM>LDIF</TERM> form.  We'll do it in two steps:<OL>
1201 <LI>create an LDIF file
1202 <LI>run ldapadd</OL>
1203 <BR>
1204 Use your favorite editor and create an LDIF file that contains:<UL>
1205 <TT>dn: dc=&lt;MY-DOMAIN&gt;,dc=&lt;COM&gt;</TT>
1206 <BR>
1207 <TT>objectclass: dcObject</TT>
1208 <BR>
1209 <TT>objectclass: organization</TT>
1210 <BR>
1211 <TT>o: &lt;MY ORGANIZATION&gt;</TT>
1212 <BR>
1213 <TT>dc: &lt;MY-DOMAIN&gt;</TT>
1214 <BR>
1215 <TT></TT>
1216 <BR>
1217 <TT>dn: cn=Manager,dc=&lt;MY-DOMAIN&gt;,dc=&lt;COM&gt;</TT>
1218 <BR>
1219 <TT>objectclass: organizationalRole</TT>
1220 <BR>
1221 <TT>cn: Manager</TT></UL>
1222 <BR>
1223 Be sure to replace <TT>&lt;MY-DOMAIN&gt;</TT> and <TT>&lt;COM&gt;</TT> with the appropriate domain components of your domain name.  <TT>&lt;MY ORGANIZATION&gt;</TT> should be replaced with the name of your organization. When you cut and paste, be sure to trim any leading and trailing whitespace from the example.<UL>
1224 <TT>dn: dc=example,dc=com</TT>
1225 <BR>
1226 <TT>objectclass: dcObject</TT>
1227 <BR>
1228 <TT>objectclass: organization</TT>
1229 <BR>
1230 <TT>o: Example Company</TT>
1231 <BR>
1232 <TT>dc: example</TT>
1233 <BR>
1234 <TT></TT>
1235 <BR>
1236 <TT>dn: cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com</TT>
1237 <BR>
1238 <TT>objectclass: organizationalRole</TT>
1239 <BR>
1240 <TT>cn: Manager</TT></UL>
1241 <BR>
1242 Now, you may run <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1) to insert these entries into your directory.<UL>
1243 <TT>ldapadd -x -D &quot;cn=Manager,dc=&lt;MY-DOMAIN&gt;,dc=&lt;COM&gt;&quot; -W -f example.ldif</TT></UL>
1244 <BR>
1245 Be sure to replace <TT>&lt;MY-DOMAIN&gt;</TT> and <TT>&lt;COM&gt;</TT> with the appropriate domain components of your domain name.  You will be prompted for the &quot;<TT>secret</TT>&quot; specified in <TT>slapd.conf</TT>. For example, for <TT>example.com</TT>, use:<UL>
1246 <TT>ldapadd -x -D &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot; -W -f example.ldif</TT></UL>
1247 <BR>
1248 where <TT>example.ldif</TT> is the file you created above.<UL>
1249 <TT> </TT></UL>
1250 <BR>
1251 Additional information regarding directory creation can be found in the <A HREF="#Database Creation and Maintenance Tools">Database Creation and Maintenance Tools</A> chapter of this document.
1252 <BR>
1253 &nbsp;
1254 <LI><B>See if it works</B>.
1255 <BR>
1256 Now we're ready to verify the added entries are in your directory. You can use any LDAP client to do this, but our example uses the <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) tool.  Remember to replace <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> with the correct values for your site:<UL>
1257 <TT>ldapsearch -x -b 'dc=example,dc=com' '(objectclass=*)'</TT></UL>
1258 <BR>
1259 This command will search for and retrieve every entry in the database.</OL>
1260 <P>You are now ready to add more entries using <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1) or another LDAP client, experiment with various configuration options, backend arrangements, etc..</P>
1261 <P>Note that by default, the <EM>slapd</EM>(8) database grants <EM>read access to everybody</EM> excepting the <EM>super-user</EM> (as specified by the <TT>rootdn</TT> configuration directive).  It is highly recommended that you establish controls to restrict access to authorized users. Access controls are discussed in the <A HREF="#The access Configuration Directive">The access Configuration Directive</A> section of <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> chapter. You are also encouraged to read the <A HREF="#Security Considerations">Security Considerations</A>, <A HREF="#Using SASL">Using SASL</A> and <A HREF="#Using TLS">Using TLS</A> sections.</P>
1262 <P>The following chapters provide more detailed information on making, installing, and running <EM>slapd</EM>(8).</P>
1263 <P></P>
1264 <HR>
1265 <H1><A NAME="The Big Picture - Configuration Choices">3. The Big Picture - Configuration Choices</A></H1>
1266 <P>This section gives a brief overview of various <TERM>LDAP</TERM> directory configurations, and how your Standalone LDAP Daemon <EM>slapd</EM>(8) fits in with the rest of the world.</P>
1267 <H2><A NAME="Local Directory Service">3.1. Local Directory Service</A></H2>
1268 <P>In this configuration, you run a <EM>slapd</EM>(8) instance which provides directory service for your local domain only. It does not interact with other directory servers in any way. This configuration is shown in Figure 3.1.</P>
1269 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="config_local.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
1270 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure 3.1: Local service configuration.</P>
1271 <P>Use this configuration if you are just starting out (it's the one the quick-start guide makes for you) or if you want to provide a local service and are not interested in connecting to the rest of the world. It's easy to upgrade to another configuration later if you want.</P>
1272 <H2><A NAME="Local Directory Service with Referrals">3.2. Local Directory Service with Referrals</A></H2>
1273 <P>In this configuration, you run a <EM>slapd</EM>(8) instance which provides directory service for your local domain and configure it to return referrals to other servers capable of handling requests.  You may run this service (or services) yourself or use one provided to you. This configuration is shown in Figure 3.2.</P>
1274 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="config_ref.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
1275 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure 3.2: Local service with referrals</P>
1276 <P>Use this configuration if you want to provide local service and participate in the Global Directory,  or you want to delegate responsibility for <EM>subordinate</EM> entries to another server.</P>
1277 <H2><A NAME="Replicated Directory Service">3.3. Replicated Directory Service</A></H2>
1278 <P>slapd(8) includes support for <EM>LDAP Sync</EM>-based replication, called <EM>syncrepl</EM>, which may be used to maintain shadow copies of directory information on multiple directory servers.   In its most basic configuration, the <EM>master</EM> is a syncrepl provider and one or more <EM>slave</EM> (or <EM>shadow</EM>) are syncrepl consumers.  An example master-slave configuration is shown in figure 3.3. Multi-Master configurations are also supported.</P>
1279 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="config_repl.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
1280 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure 3.3: Replicated Directory Services</P>
1281 <P>This configuration can be used in conjunction with either of the first two configurations in situations where a single <EM>slapd</EM>(8) instance does not provide the required reliability or availability.</P>
1282 <H2><A NAME="Distributed Local Directory Service">3.4. Distributed Local Directory Service</A></H2>
1283 <P>In this configuration, the local service is partitioned into smaller services, each of which may be replicated, and <EM>glued</EM> together with <EM>superior</EM> and <EM>subordinate</EM> referrals.</P>
1284 <P></P>
1285 <HR>
1286 <H1><A NAME="Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software">4. Building and Installing OpenLDAP Software</A></H1>
1287 <P>This chapter details how to build and install the <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A> Software package including <EM>slapd</EM>(8), the Standalone <TERM>LDAP</TERM> Daemon.  Building and installing OpenLDAP Software requires several steps: installing prerequisite software, configuring OpenLDAP Software itself, making, and finally installing.  The following sections describe this process in detail.</P>
1288 <H2><A NAME="Obtaining and Extracting the Software">4.1. Obtaining and Extracting the Software</A></H2>
1289 <P>You can obtain OpenLDAP Software from the project's download page at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/download/">http://www.openldap.org/software/download/</A> or directly from the project's <TERM>FTP</TERM> service at <A HREF="ftp://ftp.openldap.org/pub/OpenLDAP/">ftp://ftp.openldap.org/pub/OpenLDAP/</A>.</P>
1290 <P>The project makes available two series of packages for <EM>general use</EM>.  The project makes <EM>releases</EM> as new features and bug fixes come available.  Though the project takes steps to improve stability of these releases, it is common for problems to arise only after <EM>release</EM>.  The <EM>stable</EM> release is the latest <EM>release</EM> which has demonstrated stability through general use.</P>
1291 <P>Users of OpenLDAP Software can choose, depending on their desire for the <EM>latest features</EM> versus <EM>demonstrated stability</EM>, the most appropriate series to install.</P>
1292 <P>After downloading OpenLDAP Software, you need to extract the distribution from the compressed archive file and change your working directory to the top directory of the distribution:</P>
1293 <UL>
1294 <TT>gunzip -c openldap-VERSION.tgz | tar xf -</TT>
1295 <BR>
1296 <TT>cd openldap-VERSION</TT></UL>
1297 <P>You'll have to replace <TT>VERSION</TT> with the version name of the release.</P>
1298 <P>You should now review the <TT>COPYRIGHT</TT>, <TT>LICENSE</TT>, <TT>README</TT> and <TT>INSTALL</TT> documents provided with the distribution.  The <TT>COPYRIGHT</TT> and <TT>LICENSE</TT> provide information on acceptable use, copying, and limitation of warranty of OpenLDAP Software. The <TT>README</TT> and <TT>INSTALL</TT> documents provide detailed information on prerequisite software and installation procedures.</P>
1299 <H2><A NAME="Prerequisite software">4.2. Prerequisite software</A></H2>
1300 <P>OpenLDAP Software relies upon a number of software packages distributed by third parties.  Depending on the features you intend to use, you may have to download and install a number of additional software packages.  This section details commonly needed third party software packages you might have to install.  However, for an up-to-date prerequisite information, the <TT>README</TT> document should be consulted.  Note that some of these third party packages may depend on additional software packages.  Install each package per the installation instructions provided with it.</P>
1301 <H3><A NAME="{{TERM[expand]TLS}}">4.2.1. <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM></A></H3>
1302 <P>OpenLDAP clients and servers require installation of either <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A> or <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">GnuTLS</A> <TERM>TLS</TERM> libraries to provide <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM> services.  Though some operating systems may provide these libraries as part of the base system or as an optional software component, OpenSSL and GnuTLS often require separate installation.</P>
1303 <P>OpenSSL is available from <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">http://www.openssl.org/</A>. GnuTLS is available from <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/</A>.</P>
1304 <P>OpenLDAP Software will not be fully LDAPv3 compliant unless OpenLDAP's <TT>configure</TT> detects a usable TLS library.</P>
1305 <H3><A NAME="{{TERM[expand]SASL}}">4.2.2. <TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM></A></H3>
1306 <P>OpenLDAP clients and servers require installation of <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A> libraries to provide <TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM> services.  Though some operating systems may provide this library as part of the base system or as an optional software component, Cyrus SASL often requires separate installation.</P>
1307 <P>Cyrus SASL is available from <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html</A>. Cyrus SASL will make use of OpenSSL and Kerberos/GSSAPI libraries if preinstalled.</P>
1308 <P>OpenLDAP Software will not be fully LDAPv3 compliant unless OpenLDAP's configure detects a usable Cyrus SASL installation.</P>
1309 <H3><A NAME="{{TERM[expand]Kerberos}}">4.2.3. <TERM>Kerberos Authentication Service</TERM></A></H3>
1310 <P>OpenLDAP clients and servers support <TERM>Kerberos</TERM> authentication services.  In particular, OpenLDAP supports the Kerberos V <TERM>GSS-API</TERM> <TERM>SASL</TERM> authentication mechanism known as the <TERM>GSSAPI</TERM> mechanism.  This feature requires, in addition to Cyrus SASL libraries, either <A HREF="http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/">Heimdal</A> or <A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">MIT Kerberos</A> V libraries.</P>
1311 <P>Heimdal Kerberos is available from <A HREF="http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/">http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/</A>. MIT Kerberos is available from <A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/</A>.</P>
1312 <P>Use of strong authentication services, such as those provided by Kerberos, is highly recommended.</P>
1313 <H3><A NAME="Database Software">4.2.4. Database Software</A></H3>
1314 <P>OpenLDAP's <EM>slapd</EM>(8) <TERM>BDB</TERM> and <TERM>HDB</TERM> primary database backends require <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/">Oracle Corporation</A> <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A>. If not available at configure time, you will not be able build <EM>slapd</EM>(8) with these primary database backends.</P>
1315 <P>Your operating system may provide a supported version of <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A> in the base system or as an optional software component.  If not, you'll have to obtain and install it yourself.</P>
1316 <P><A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A> is available from <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/">Oracle Corporation</A>'s Berkeley DB download page <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/software/products/berkeley-db/index.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/software/products/berkeley-db/index.html</A>.</P>
1317 <P>There are several versions available. Generally, the most recent release (with published patches) is recommended. This package is required if you wish to use the <TERM>BDB</TERM> or <TERM>HDB</TERM> database backends.</P>
1318 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
1319 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Please see <A HREF="#Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions">Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions</A> for more information.
1320 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
1321 <H3><A NAME="Threads">4.2.5. Threads</A></H3>
1322 <P>OpenLDAP is designed to take advantage of threads.  OpenLDAP supports POSIX <EM>pthreads</EM>, Mach <EM>CThreads</EM>, and a number of other varieties.  <TT>configure</TT> will complain if it cannot find a suitable thread subsystem.   If this occurs, please consult the <TT>Software|Installation|Platform Hints</TT> section of the OpenLDAP FAQ <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/">http://www.openldap.org/faq/</A>.</P>
1323 <H3><A NAME="TCP Wrappers">4.2.6. TCP Wrappers</A></H3>
1324 <P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports TCP Wrappers (IP level access control filters) if preinstalled.  Use of TCP Wrappers or other IP-level access filters (such as those provided by an IP-level firewall) is recommended for servers containing non-public information.</P>
1325 <H2><A NAME="Running configure">4.3. Running configure</A></H2>
1326 <P>Now you should probably run the <TT>configure</TT> script with the <TT>--help</TT> option. This will give you a list of options that you can change when building OpenLDAP.  Many of the features of OpenLDAP can be enabled or disabled using this method.</P>
1327 <PRE>
1328         ./configure --help
1329 </PRE>
1330 <P>The <TT>configure</TT> script will also look at various environment variables for certain settings.  These environment variables include:</P>
1331 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
1332 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 4.1: Environment Variables</CAPTION>
1333 <TR CLASS="heading">
1334 <TD>
1335 <STRONG>Variable</STRONG>
1336 </TD>
1337 <TD>
1338 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
1339 </TD>
1340 </TR>
1341 <TR>
1342 <TD>
1343 <TT>CC</TT>
1344 </TD>
1345 <TD>
1346 Specify alternative C Compiler
1347 </TD>
1348 </TR>
1349 <TR>
1350 <TD>
1351 <TT>CFLAGS</TT>
1352 </TD>
1353 <TD>
1354 Specify additional compiler flags
1355 </TD>
1356 </TR>
1357 <TR>
1358 <TD>
1359 <TT>CPPFLAGS</TT>
1360 </TD>
1361 <TD>
1362 Specify C Preprocessor flags
1363 </TD>
1364 </TR>
1365 <TR>
1366 <TD>
1367 <TT>LDFLAGS</TT>
1368 </TD>
1369 <TD>
1370 Specify linker flags
1371 </TD>
1372 </TR>
1373 <TR>
1374 <TD>
1375 <TT>LIBS</TT>
1376 </TD>
1377 <TD>
1378 Specify additional libraries
1379 </TD>
1380 </TR>
1381 </TABLE>
1382
1383 <P>Now run the configure script with any desired configuration options or environment variables.</P>
1384 <PRE>
1385         [[env] settings] ./configure [options]
1386 </PRE>
1387 <P>As an example, let's assume that we want to install OpenLDAP with BDB backend and TCP Wrappers support.  By default, BDB is enabled and TCP Wrappers is not.  So, we just need to specify <TT>--with-wrappers</TT> to include TCP Wrappers support:</P>
1388 <PRE>
1389         ./configure --with-wrappers
1390 </PRE>
1391 <P>However, this will fail to locate dependent software not installed in system directories.  For example, if TCP Wrappers headers and libraries are installed in <TT>/usr/local/include</TT> and <TT>/usr/local/lib</TT> respectively, the <TT>configure</TT> script should be called as follows:</P>
1392 <PRE>
1393         env CPPFLAGS=&quot;-I/usr/local/include&quot; LDFLAGS=&quot;-L/usr/local/lib&quot; \
1394                 ./configure --with-wrappers
1395 </PRE>
1396 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
1397 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Some shells, such as those derived from the Bourne <EM>sh</EM>(1), do not require use of the <EM>env</EM>(1) command.  In some cases, environmental variables have to be specified using alternative syntaxes.
1398 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
1399 <P>The <TT>configure</TT> script will normally auto-detect appropriate settings.  If you have problems at this stage, consult any platform specific hints and check your <TT>configure</TT> options, if any.</P>
1400 <H2><A NAME="Building the Software">4.4. Building the Software</A></H2>
1401 <P>Once you have run the <TT>configure</TT> script the last line of output should be:</P>
1402 <PRE>
1403         Please &quot;make depend&quot; to build dependencies
1404 </PRE>
1405 <P>If the last line of output does not match, <TT>configure</TT> has failed, and you will need to review its output to determine what went wrong. You should not proceed until <TT>configure</TT> completes successfully.</P>
1406 <P>To build dependencies, run:</P>
1407 <PRE>
1408         make depend
1409 </PRE>
1410 <P>Now build the software, this step will actually compile OpenLDAP.</P>
1411 <PRE>
1412         make
1413 </PRE>
1414 <P>You should examine the output of this command carefully to make sure everything is built correctly.  Note that this command builds the LDAP libraries and associated clients as well as <EM>slapd</EM>(8).</P>
1415 <H2><A NAME="Testing the Software">4.5. Testing the Software</A></H2>
1416 <P>Once the software has been properly configured and successfully made, you should run the test suite to verify the build.</P>
1417 <PRE>
1418         make test
1419 </PRE>
1420 <P>Tests which apply to your configuration will run and they should pass. Some tests, such as the replication test, may be skipped if not supported by your configuration.</P>
1421 <H2><A NAME="Installing the Software">4.6. Installing the Software</A></H2>
1422 <P>Once you have successfully tested the software, you are ready to install it.  You will need to have write permission to the installation directories you specified when you ran configure.  By default OpenLDAP Software is installed in <TT>/usr/local</TT>.  If you changed this setting with the <TT>--prefix</TT> configure option, it will be installed in the location you provided.</P>
1423 <P>Typically, the installation requires <EM>super-user</EM> privileges. From the top level OpenLDAP source directory, type:</P>
1424 <PRE>
1425         su root -c 'make install'
1426 </PRE>
1427 <P>and enter the appropriate password when requested.</P>
1428 <P>You should examine the output of this command carefully to make sure everything is installed correctly. You will find the configuration files for <EM>slapd</EM>(8) in <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap</TT> by default.  See the chapter <A HREF="#Configuring slapd">Configuring slapd</A> for additional information.</P>
1429 <P></P>
1430 <HR>
1431 <H1><A NAME="Configuring slapd">5. Configuring slapd</A></H1>
1432 <P>Once the software has been built and installed, you are ready to configure <EM>slapd</EM>(8) for use at your site. Unlike previous OpenLDAP releases, the slapd(8) runtime configuration in 2.3 (and later) is fully LDAP-enabled and can be managed using the standard LDAP operations with data in <TERM>LDIF</TERM>. The LDAP configuration engine allows all of slapd's configuration options to be changed on the fly, generally without requiring a server restart for the changes to take effect. The old style <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file is still supported, but must be converted to the new <EM>slapd-config</EM>(5) format to allow runtime changes to be saved. While the old style configuration uses a single file, normally installed as <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.conf</TT>, the new style uses a slapd backend database to store the configuration. The configuration database normally resides in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.d</TT> directory. When converting from the slapd.conf format to slapd.d format, any include files will also be integrated into the resulting configuration database.</P>
1433 <P>An alternate configuration directory (or file) can be specified via a command-line option to <EM>slapd</EM>(8). This chapter describes the general format of the configuration system, followed by a detailed description of commonly used config settings.</P>
1434 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
1435 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>some of the backends and of the distributed overlays do not support runtime configuration yet.  In those cases, the old style <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file must be used.
1436 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
1437 <H2><A NAME="Configuration Layout">5.1. Configuration Layout</A></H2>
1438 <P>The slapd configuration is stored as a special LDAP directory with a predefined schema and DIT. There are specific objectClasses used to carry global configuration options, schema definitions, backend and database definitions, and assorted other items. A sample config tree is shown in Figure 5.1.</P>
1439 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="config_dit.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
1440 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure 5.1: Sample configuration tree.</P>
1441 <P>Other objects may be part of the configuration but were omitted from the illustration for clarity.</P>
1442 <P>The <EM>slapd-config</EM> configuration tree has a very specific structure. The root of the tree is named <TT>cn=config</TT> and contains global configuration settings. Additional settings are contained in separate child entries:</P>
1443 <UL>
1444 <LI>Dynamically loaded modules<UL>
1445 These may only be used if the <TT>--enable-modules</TT> option was used to configure the software.</UL>
1446 <LI>Schema definitions<UL>
1447 The <TT>cn=schema,cn=config</TT> entry contains the system schema (all the schema that is hard-coded in slapd).
1448 <BR>
1449 Child entries of <TT>cn=schema,cn=config</TT> contain user schema as loaded from config files or added at runtime.</UL>
1450 <LI>Backend-specific configuration
1451 <LI>Database-specific configuration<UL>
1452 Overlays are defined in children of the Database entry.
1453 <BR>
1454 Databases and Overlays may also have other miscellaneous children.</UL></UL>
1455 <P>The usual rules for LDIF files apply to the configuration information: Comment lines beginning with a '<TT>#</TT>' character are ignored.  If a line begins with a single space, it is considered a continuation of the previous line (even if the previous line is a comment) and the single leading space is removed. Entries are separated by blank lines.</P>
1456 <P>The general layout of the config LDIF is as follows:</P>
1457 <PRE>
1458         # global configuration settings
1459         dn: cn=config
1460         objectClass: olcGlobal
1461         cn: config
1462         &lt;global config settings&gt;
1463
1464         # schema definitions
1465         dn: cn=schema,cn=config
1466         objectClass: olcSchemaConfig
1467         cn: schema
1468         &lt;system schema&gt;
1469
1470         dn: cn={X}core,cn=schema,cn=config
1471         objectClass: olcSchemaConfig
1472         cn: {X}core
1473         &lt;core schema&gt;
1474
1475         # additional user-specified schema
1476         ...
1477
1478         # backend definitions
1479         dn: olcBackend=&lt;typeA&gt;,cn=config
1480         objectClass: olcBackendConfig
1481         olcBackend: &lt;typeA&gt;
1482         &lt;backend-specific settings&gt;
1483
1484         # database definitions
1485         dn: olcDatabase={X}&lt;typeA&gt;,cn=config
1486         objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig
1487         olcDatabase: {X}&lt;typeA&gt;
1488         &lt;database-specific settings&gt;
1489
1490         # subsequent definitions and settings
1491         ...
1492 </PRE>
1493 <P>Some of the entries listed above have a numeric index <TT>&quot;{X}&quot;</TT> in their names. While most configuration settings have an inherent ordering dependency (i.e., one setting must take effect before a subsequent one may be set), LDAP databases are inherently unordered. The numeric index is used to enforce a consistent ordering in the configuration database, so that all ordering dependencies are preserved. In most cases the index does not have to be provided; it will be automatically generated based on the order in which entries are created.</P>
1494 <P>Configuration directives are specified as values of individual attributes. Most of the attributes and objectClasses used in the slapd configuration have a prefix of <TT>&quot;olc&quot;</TT> (OpenLDAP Configuration) in their names. Generally there is a one-to-one correspondence between the attributes and the old-style <TT>slapd.conf</TT> configuration keywords, using the keyword as the attribute name, with the &quot;olc&quot; prefix attached.</P>
1495 <P>A configuration directive may take arguments.  If so, the arguments are separated by white space.  If an argument contains white space, the argument should be enclosed in double quotes <TT>&quot;like this&quot;</TT>. In the descriptions that follow, arguments that should be replaced by actual text are shown in brackets <TT>&lt;&gt;</TT>.</P>
1496 <P>The distribution contains an example configuration file that will be installed in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap</TT> directory. A number of files containing schema definitions (attribute types and object classes) are also provided in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/schema</TT> directory.</P>
1497 <H2><A NAME="Configuration Directives">5.2. Configuration Directives</A></H2>
1498 <P>This section details commonly used configuration directives.  For a complete list, see the <EM>slapd-config</EM>(5) manual page.  This section will treat the configuration directives in a top-down order, starting with the global directives in the <TT>cn=config</TT> entry. Each directive will be described along with its default value (if any) and an example of its use.</P>
1499 <H3><A NAME="cn=config">5.2.1. cn=config</A></H3>
1500 <P>Directives contained in this entry generally apply to the server as a whole. Most of them are system or connection oriented, not database related. This entry must have the <TT>olcGlobal</TT> objectClass.</P>
1501 <H4><A NAME="olcIdleTimeout: &lt;integer&gt;">5.2.1.1. olcIdleTimeout: &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
1502 <P>Specify the number of seconds to wait before forcibly closing an idle client connection.  A value of 0, the default, disables this feature.</P>
1503 <H4><A NAME="olcLogLevel: &lt;level&gt;">5.2.1.2. olcLogLevel: &lt;level&gt;</A></H4>
1504 <P>This directive specifies the level at which debugging statements and operation statistics should be syslogged (currently logged to the <EM>syslogd</EM>(8) <TT>LOG_LOCAL4</TT> facility). You must have configured OpenLDAP <TT>--enable-debug</TT> (the default) for this to work (except for the two statistics levels, which are always enabled). Log levels may be specified as integers or by keyword. Multiple log levels may be used and the levels are additive. To display what levels correspond to what kind of debugging, invoke slapd with <TT>-?</TT> or consult the table below. The possible values for &lt;level&gt; are:</P>
1505 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
1506 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 5.1: Debugging Levels</CAPTION>
1507 <TR CLASS="heading">
1508 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1509 <STRONG>Level</STRONG>
1510 </TD>
1511 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1512 <STRONG>Keyword</STRONG>
1513 </TD>
1514 <TD>
1515 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
1516 </TD>
1517 </TR>
1518 <TR>
1519 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1520 -1
1521 </TD>
1522 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1523 Any
1524 </TD>
1525 <TD>
1526 enable all debugging
1527 </TD>
1528 </TR>
1529 <TR>
1530 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1531 0
1532 </TD>
1533 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1534 &nbsp;
1535 </TD>
1536 <TD>
1537 no debugging
1538 </TD>
1539 </TR>
1540 <TR>
1541 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1542 1
1543 </TD>
1544 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1545 Trace
1546 </TD>
1547 <TD>
1548 trace function calls
1549 </TD>
1550 </TR>
1551 <TR>
1552 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1553 2
1554 </TD>
1555 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1556 Packets
1557 </TD>
1558 <TD>
1559 debug packet handling
1560 </TD>
1561 </TR>
1562 <TR>
1563 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1564 4
1565 </TD>
1566 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1567 Args
1568 </TD>
1569 <TD>
1570 heavy trace debugging
1571 </TD>
1572 </TR>
1573 <TR>
1574 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1575 8
1576 </TD>
1577 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1578 Conns
1579 </TD>
1580 <TD>
1581 connection management
1582 </TD>
1583 </TR>
1584 <TR>
1585 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1586 16
1587 </TD>
1588 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1589 BER
1590 </TD>
1591 <TD>
1592 print out packets sent and received
1593 </TD>
1594 </TR>
1595 <TR>
1596 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1597 32
1598 </TD>
1599 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1600 Filter
1601 </TD>
1602 <TD>
1603 search filter processing
1604 </TD>
1605 </TR>
1606 <TR>
1607 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1608 64
1609 </TD>
1610 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1611 Config
1612 </TD>
1613 <TD>
1614 configuration processing
1615 </TD>
1616 </TR>
1617 <TR>
1618 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1619 128
1620 </TD>
1621 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1622 ACL
1623 </TD>
1624 <TD>
1625 access control list processing
1626 </TD>
1627 </TR>
1628 <TR>
1629 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1630 256
1631 </TD>
1632 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1633 Stats
1634 </TD>
1635 <TD>
1636 stats log connections/operations/results
1637 </TD>
1638 </TR>
1639 <TR>
1640 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1641 512
1642 </TD>
1643 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1644 Stats2
1645 </TD>
1646 <TD>
1647 stats log entries sent
1648 </TD>
1649 </TR>
1650 <TR>
1651 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1652 1024
1653 </TD>
1654 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1655 Shell
1656 </TD>
1657 <TD>
1658 print communication with shell backends
1659 </TD>
1660 </TR>
1661 <TR>
1662 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1663 2048
1664 </TD>
1665 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1666 Parse
1667 </TD>
1668 <TD>
1669 print entry parsing debugging
1670 </TD>
1671 </TR>
1672 <TR>
1673 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1674 4096
1675 </TD>
1676 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1677 Cache
1678 </TD>
1679 <TD>
1680 database cache processing
1681 </TD>
1682 </TR>
1683 <TR>
1684 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1685 8192
1686 </TD>
1687 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1688 Index
1689 </TD>
1690 <TD>
1691 database indexing
1692 </TD>
1693 </TR>
1694 <TR>
1695 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
1696 16384
1697 </TD>
1698 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
1699 Sync
1700 </TD>
1701 <TD>
1702 syncrepl consumer processing
1703 </TD>
1704 </TR>
1705 </TABLE>
1706
1707 <P>Example:</P>
1708 <PRE>
1709  olcLogLevel: -1
1710 </PRE>
1711 <P>This will cause lots and lots of debugging information to be logged.</P>
1712 <PRE>
1713  olcLogLevel: Conns Filter
1714 </PRE>
1715 <P>Just log the connection and search filter processing.</P>
1716 <P>Default:</P>
1717 <PRE>
1718  olcLogLevel: Stats
1719 </PRE>
1720 <H4><A NAME="olcReferral &lt;URI&gt;">5.2.1.3. olcReferral &lt;URI&gt;</A></H4>
1721 <P>This directive specifies the referral to pass back when slapd cannot find a local database to handle a request.</P>
1722 <P>Example:</P>
1723 <PRE>
1724         olcReferral: ldap://root.openldap.org
1725 </PRE>
1726 <P>This will refer non-local queries to the global root LDAP server at the OpenLDAP Project. Smart LDAP clients can re-ask their query at that server, but note that most of these clients are only going to know how to handle simple LDAP URLs that contain a host part and optionally a distinguished name part.</P>
1727 <H4><A NAME="Sample Entry">5.2.1.4. Sample Entry</A></H4>
1728 <PRE>
1729 dn: cn=config
1730 objectClass: olcGlobal
1731 cn: config
1732 olcIdleTimeout: 30
1733 olcLogLevel: Stats
1734 olcReferral: ldap://root.openldap.org
1735 </PRE>
1736 <H3><A NAME="cn=module">5.2.2. cn=module</A></H3>
1737 <P>If support for dynamically loaded modules was enabled when configuring slapd, <TT>cn=module</TT> entries may be used to specify sets of modules to load. Module entries must have the <TT>olcModuleList</TT> objectClass.</P>
1738 <H4><A NAME="olcModuleLoad: &lt;filename&gt;">5.2.2.1. olcModuleLoad: &lt;filename&gt;</A></H4>
1739 <P>Specify the name of a dynamically loadable module to load. The filename may be an absolute path name or a simple filename. Non-absolute names are searched for in the directories specified by the <TT>olcModulePath</TT> directive.</P>
1740 <H4><A NAME="olcModulePath: &lt;pathspec&gt;">5.2.2.2. olcModulePath: &lt;pathspec&gt;</A></H4>
1741 <P>Specify a list of directories to search for loadable modules. Typically the path is colon-separated but this depends on the operating system.</P>
1742 <H4><A NAME="Sample Entries">5.2.2.3. Sample Entries</A></H4>
1743 <PRE>
1744 dn: cn=module{0},cn=config
1745 objectClass: olcModuleList
1746 cn: module{0}
1747 olcModuleLoad: /usr/local/lib/smbk5pwd.la
1748
1749 dn: cn=module{1},cn=config
1750 objectClass: olcModuleList
1751 cn: module{1}
1752 olcModulePath: /usr/local/lib:/usr/local/lib/slapd
1753 olcModuleLoad: accesslog.la
1754 olcModuleLoad: pcache.la
1755 </PRE>
1756 <H3><A NAME="cn=schema">5.2.3. cn=schema</A></H3>
1757 <P>The cn=schema entry holds all of the schema definitions that are hard-coded in slapd. As such, the values in this entry are generated by slapd so no schema values need to be provided in the config file. The entry must still be defined though, to serve as a base for the user-defined schema to add in underneath. Schema entries must have the <TT>olcSchemaConfig</TT> objectClass.</P>
1758 <H4><A NAME="olcAttributeTypes: &lt;{{REF:RFC4512}} Attribute Type Description&gt;"> </A>5.2.3.1. olcAttributeTypes: &lt;<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Attribute Type Description&gt;</H4>
1759 <P>This directive defines an attribute type. Please see the <A HREF="#Schema Specification">Schema Specification</A> chapter for information regarding how to use this directive.</P>
1760 <H4><A NAME="olcObjectClasses: &lt;{{REF:RFC4512}} Object Class Description&gt;"> </A>5.2.3.2. olcObjectClasses: &lt;<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Object Class Description&gt;</H4>
1761 <P>This directive defines an object class. Please see the <A HREF="#Schema Specification">Schema Specification</A> chapter for information regarding how to use this directive.</P>
1762 <H4><A NAME="Sample Entries">5.2.3.3. Sample Entries</A></H4>
1763 <PRE>
1764 dn: cn=schema,cn=config
1765 objectClass: olcSchemaConfig
1766 cn: schema
1767
1768 dn: cn=test,cn=schema,cn=config
1769 objectClass: olcSchemaConfig
1770 cn: test
1771 olcAttributeTypes: ( 1.1.1
1772   NAME 'testAttr'
1773   EQUALITY integerMatch
1774   SYNTAX 1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.27 )
1775 olcAttributeTypes: ( 1.1.2 NAME 'testTwo' EQUALITY caseIgnoreMatch
1776   SUBSTR caseIgnoreSubstringsMatch SYNTAX 1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.44 )
1777 olcObjectClasses: ( 1.1.3 NAME 'testObject'
1778   MAY ( testAttr $ testTwo ) AUXILIARY )
1779 </PRE>
1780 <H3><A NAME="Backend-specific Directives">5.2.4. Backend-specific Directives</A></H3>
1781 <P>Backend directives apply to all database instances of the same type and, depending on the directive, may be overridden by database directives. Backend entries must have the <TT>olcBackendConfig</TT> objectClass.</P>
1782 <H4><A NAME="olcBackend: &lt;type&gt;">5.2.4.1. olcBackend: &lt;type&gt;</A></H4>
1783 <P>This directive names a backend-specific configuration entry. <TT>&lt;type&gt;</TT> should be one of the supported backend types listed in Table 5.2.</P>
1784 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
1785 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 5.2: Database Backends</CAPTION>
1786 <TR CLASS="heading">
1787 <TD>
1788 <STRONG>Types</STRONG>
1789 </TD>
1790 <TD>
1791 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
1792 </TD>
1793 </TR>
1794 <TR>
1795 <TD>
1796 <TT>bdb</TT>
1797 </TD>
1798 <TD>
1799 Berkeley DB transactional backend
1800 </TD>
1801 </TR>
1802 <TR>
1803 <TD>
1804 <TT>config</TT>
1805 </TD>
1806 <TD>
1807 Slapd configuration backend
1808 </TD>
1809 </TR>
1810 <TR>
1811 <TD>
1812 <TT>dnssrv</TT>
1813 </TD>
1814 <TD>
1815 DNS SRV backend
1816 </TD>
1817 </TR>
1818 <TR>
1819 <TD>
1820 <TT>hdb</TT>
1821 </TD>
1822 <TD>
1823 Hierarchical variant of bdb backend
1824 </TD>
1825 </TR>
1826 <TR>
1827 <TD>
1828 <TT>ldap</TT>
1829 </TD>
1830 <TD>
1831 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (Proxy) backend
1832 </TD>
1833 </TR>
1834 <TR>
1835 <TD>
1836 <TT>ldif</TT>
1837 </TD>
1838 <TD>
1839 Lightweight Data Interchange Format backend
1840 </TD>
1841 </TR>
1842 <TR>
1843 <TD>
1844 <TT>meta</TT>
1845 </TD>
1846 <TD>
1847 Meta Directory backend
1848 </TD>
1849 </TR>
1850 <TR>
1851 <TD>
1852 <TT>monitor</TT>
1853 </TD>
1854 <TD>
1855 Monitor backend
1856 </TD>
1857 </TR>
1858 <TR>
1859 <TD>
1860 <TT>passwd</TT>
1861 </TD>
1862 <TD>
1863 Provides read-only access to <EM>passwd</EM>(5)
1864 </TD>
1865 </TR>
1866 <TR>
1867 <TD>
1868 <TT>perl</TT>
1869 </TD>
1870 <TD>
1871 Perl Programmable backend
1872 </TD>
1873 </TR>
1874 <TR>
1875 <TD>
1876 <TT>shell</TT>
1877 </TD>
1878 <TD>
1879 Shell (extern program) backend
1880 </TD>
1881 </TR>
1882 <TR>
1883 <TD>
1884 <TT>sql</TT>
1885 </TD>
1886 <TD>
1887 SQL Programmable backend
1888 </TD>
1889 </TR>
1890 </TABLE>
1891
1892 <P>Example:</P>
1893 <PRE>
1894         olcBackend: bdb
1895 </PRE>
1896 <P>There are no other directives defined for this entry.  Specific backend types may define additional attributes for their particular use but so far none have ever been defined.  As such, these directives usually do not appear in any actual configurations.</P>
1897 <H4><A NAME="Sample Entry">5.2.4.2. Sample Entry</A></H4>
1898 <PRE>
1899  dn: olcBackend=bdb,cn=config
1900  objectClass: olcBackendConfig
1901  olcBackend: bdb
1902 </PRE>
1903 <H3><A NAME="Database-specific Directives">5.2.5. Database-specific Directives</A></H3>
1904 <P>Directives in this section are supported by every type of database. Database entries must have the <TT>olcDatabaseConfig</TT> objectClass.</P>
1905 <H4><A NAME="olcDatabase: [{&lt;index&gt;}]&lt;type&gt;">5.2.5.1. olcDatabase: [{&lt;index&gt;}]&lt;type&gt;</A></H4>
1906 <P>This directive names a specific database instance. The numeric {&lt;index&gt;} may be provided to distinguish multiple databases of the same type. Usually the index can be omitted, and slapd will generate it automatically. <TT>&lt;type&gt;</TT> should be one of the supported backend types listed in Table 5.2 or the <TT>frontend</TT> type.</P>
1907 <P>The <TT>frontend</TT> is a special database that is used to hold database-level options that should be applied to all the other databases. Subsequent database definitions may also override some frontend settings.</P>
1908 <P>The <TT>config</TT> database is also special; both the <TT>config</TT> and the <TT>frontend</TT> databases are always created implicitly even if they are not explicitly configured, and they are created before any other databases.</P>
1909 <P>Example:</P>
1910 <PRE>
1911         olcDatabase: bdb
1912 </PRE>
1913 <P>This marks the beginning of a new <TERM>BDB</TERM> database instance.</P>
1914 <H4><A NAME="olcAccess: to &lt;what&gt; [ by &lt;who&gt; [&lt;accesslevel&gt;] [&lt;control&gt;] ]+">5.2.5.2. olcAccess: to &lt;what&gt; [ by &lt;who&gt; [&lt;accesslevel&gt;] [&lt;control&gt;] ]+</A></H4>
1915 <P>This directive grants access (specified by &lt;accesslevel&gt;) to a set of entries and/or attributes (specified by &lt;what&gt;) by one or more requestors (specified by &lt;who&gt;). See the <A HREF="#Access Control">Access Control</A> section of this guide for basic usage.</P>
1916 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
1917 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>If no <TT>olcAccess</TT> directives are specified, the default access control policy, <TT>to * by * read</TT>, allows all users (both authenticated and anonymous) read access.
1918 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
1919 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
1920 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Access controls defined in the frontend are appended to all other databases' controls.
1921 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
1922 <H4><A NAME="olcReadonly { TRUE | FALSE }">5.2.5.3. olcReadonly { TRUE | FALSE }</A></H4>
1923 <P>This directive puts the database into &quot;read-only&quot; mode. Any attempts to modify the database will return an &quot;unwilling to perform&quot; error.</P>
1924 <P>Default:</P>
1925 <PRE>
1926         olcReadonly: FALSE
1927 </PRE>
1928 <H4><A NAME="olcRootDN: &lt;DN&gt;">5.2.5.4. olcRootDN: &lt;DN&gt;</A></H4>
1929 <P>This directive specifies the DN that is not subject to access control or administrative limit restrictions for operations on this database.  The DN need not refer to an entry in this database or even in the directory. The DN may refer to a SASL identity.</P>
1930 <P>Entry-based Example:</P>
1931 <PRE>
1932         olcRootDN: &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
1933 </PRE>
1934 <P>SASL-based Example:</P>
1935 <PRE>
1936         olcRootDN: &quot;uid=root,cn=example.com,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth&quot;
1937 </PRE>
1938 <P>See the <A HREF="#SASL Authentication">SASL Authentication</A> section for information on SASL authentication identities.</P>
1939 <H4><A NAME="olcRootPW: &lt;password&gt;">5.2.5.5. olcRootPW: &lt;password&gt;</A></H4>
1940 <P>This directive can be used to specify a password for the DN for the rootdn (when the rootdn is set to a DN within the database).</P>
1941 <P>Example:</P>
1942 <PRE>
1943         olcRootPW: secret
1944 </PRE>
1945 <P>It is also permissible to provide a hash of the password in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2307.txt">RFC2307</A> form.  <EM>slappasswd</EM>(8) may be used to generate the password hash.</P>
1946 <P>Example:</P>
1947 <PRE>
1948         olcRootPW: {SSHA}ZKKuqbEKJfKSXhUbHG3fG8MDn9j1v4QN
1949 </PRE>
1950 <P>The hash was generated using the command <TT>slappasswd -s secret</TT>.</P>
1951 <H4><A NAME="olcSizeLimit: &lt;integer&gt;">5.2.5.6. olcSizeLimit: &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
1952 <P>This directive specifies the maximum number of entries to return from a search operation.</P>
1953 <P>Default:</P>
1954 <PRE>
1955         olcSizeLimit: 500
1956 </PRE>
1957 <H4><A NAME="olcSuffix: &lt;dn suffix&gt;">5.2.5.7. olcSuffix: &lt;dn suffix&gt;</A></H4>
1958 <P>This directive specifies the DN suffix of queries that will be passed to this backend database. Multiple suffix lines can be given, and usually at least one is required for each database definition. (Some backend types, such as <TT>frontend</TT> and <TT>monitor</TT> use a hard-coded suffix which may not be overridden in the configuration.)</P>
1959 <P>Example:</P>
1960 <PRE>
1961         olcSuffix: &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
1962 </PRE>
1963 <P>Queries with a DN ending in &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; will be passed to this backend.</P>
1964 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
1965 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>When the backend to pass a query to is selected, slapd looks at the suffix value(s) in each database definition in the order in which they were configured. Thus, if one database suffix is a prefix of another, it must appear after it in the configuration.
1966 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
1967 <H4><A NAME="olcSyncrepl">5.2.5.8. olcSyncrepl</A></H4>
1968 <PRE>
1969         olcSyncrepl: rid=&lt;replica ID&gt;
1970                 provider=ldap[s]://&lt;hostname&gt;[:port]
1971                 [type=refreshOnly|refreshAndPersist]
1972                 [interval=dd:hh:mm:ss]
1973                 [retry=[&lt;retry interval&gt; &lt;# of retries&gt;]+]
1974                 searchbase=&lt;base DN&gt;
1975                 [filter=&lt;filter str&gt;]
1976                 [scope=sub|one|base]
1977                 [attrs=&lt;attr list&gt;]
1978                 [attrsonly]
1979                 [sizelimit=&lt;limit&gt;]
1980                 [timelimit=&lt;limit&gt;]
1981                 [schemachecking=on|off]
1982                 [bindmethod=simple|sasl]
1983                 [binddn=&lt;DN&gt;]
1984                 [saslmech=&lt;mech&gt;]
1985                 [authcid=&lt;identity&gt;]
1986                 [authzid=&lt;identity&gt;]
1987                 [credentials=&lt;passwd&gt;]
1988                 [realm=&lt;realm&gt;]
1989                 [secprops=&lt;properties&gt;]
1990                 [starttls=yes|critical]
1991                 [tls_cert=&lt;file&gt;]
1992                 [tls_key=&lt;file&gt;]
1993                 [tls_cacert=&lt;file&gt;]
1994                 [tls_cacertdir=&lt;path&gt;]
1995                 [tls_reqcert=never|allow|try|demand]
1996                 [tls_ciphersuite=&lt;ciphers&gt;]
1997                 [tls_crlcheck=none|peer|all]
1998                 [logbase=&lt;base DN&gt;]
1999                 [logfilter=&lt;filter str&gt;]
2000                 [syncdata=default|accesslog|changelog]
2001 </PRE>
2002 <P>This directive specifies the current database as a replica of the master content by establishing the current <EM>slapd</EM>(8) as a replication consumer site running a syncrepl replication engine. The master database is located at the replication provider site specified by the <TT>provider</TT> parameter. The replica database is kept up-to-date with the master content using the LDAP Content Synchronization protocol. See <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt">RFC4533</A> for more information on the protocol.</P>
2003 <P>The <TT>rid</TT> parameter is used for identification of the current <TT>syncrepl</TT> directive within the replication consumer server, where <TT>&lt;replica ID&gt;</TT> uniquely identifies the syncrepl specification described by the current <TT>syncrepl</TT> directive. <TT>&lt;replica ID&gt;</TT> is non-negative and is no more than three decimal digits in length.</P>
2004 <P>The <TT>provider</TT> parameter specifies the replication provider site containing the master content as an LDAP URI. The <TT>provider</TT> parameter specifies a scheme, a host and optionally a port where the provider slapd instance can be found. Either a domain name or IP address may be used for &lt;hostname&gt;. Examples are <TT>ldap://provider.example.com:389</TT> or <TT>ldaps://192.168.1.1:636</TT>. If &lt;port&gt; is not given, the standard LDAP port number (389 or 636) is used. Note that the syncrepl uses a consumer-initiated protocol, and hence its specification is located at the consumer site, whereas the <TT>replica</TT> specification is located at the provider site. <TT>syncrepl</TT> and <TT>replica</TT> directives define two independent replication mechanisms. They do not represent the replication peers of each other.</P>
2005 <P>The content of the syncrepl replica is defined using a search specification as its result set. The consumer slapd will send search requests to the provider slapd according to the search specification. The search specification includes <TT>searchbase</TT>, <TT>scope</TT>, <TT>filter</TT>, <TT>attrs</TT>, <TT>attrsonly</TT>, <TT>sizelimit</TT>, and <TT>timelimit</TT> parameters as in the normal search specification. The <TT>searchbase</TT> parameter has no default value and must always be specified. The <TT>scope</TT> defaults to <TT>sub</TT>, the <TT>filter</TT> defaults to <TT>(objectclass=*)</TT>, <TT>attrs</TT> defaults to <TT>&quot;*,+&quot;</TT> to replicate all user and operational attributes, and <TT>attrsonly</TT> is unset by default. Both <TT>sizelimit</TT> and <TT>timelimit</TT> default to &quot;unlimited&quot;, and only positive integers or &quot;unlimited&quot; may be specified.</P>
2006 <P>The <TERM>LDAP Content Synchronization</TERM> protocol has two operation types: <TT>refreshOnly</TT> and <TT>refreshAndPersist</TT>. The operation type is specified by the <TT>type</TT> parameter. In the <TT>refreshOnly</TT> operation, the next synchronization search operation is periodically rescheduled at an interval time after each synchronization operation finishes. The interval is specified by the <TT>interval</TT> parameter. It is set to one day by default. In the <TT>refreshAndPersist</TT> operation, a synchronization search remains persistent in the provider <EM>slapd</EM> instance. Further updates to the master replica will generate <TT>searchResultEntry</TT> to the consumer slapd as the search responses to the persistent synchronization search.</P>
2007 <P>If an error occurs during replication, the consumer will attempt to reconnect according to the retry parameter which is a list of the &lt;retry interval&gt; and &lt;# of retries&gt; pairs. For example, retry=&quot;60 10 300 3&quot; lets the consumer retry every 60 seconds for the first 10 times and then retry every 300 seconds for the next three times before stop retrying. + in &lt;#  of retries&gt; means indefinite number of retries until success.</P>
2008 <P>The schema checking can be enforced at the LDAP Sync consumer site by turning on the <TT>schemachecking</TT> parameter. If it is turned on, every replicated entry will be checked for its schema as the entry is stored into the replica content. Every entry in the replica should contain those attributes required by the schema definition. If it is turned off, entries will be stored without checking schema conformance. The default is off.</P>
2009 <P>The <TT>binddn</TT> parameter gives the DN to bind as for the syncrepl searches to the provider slapd. It should be a DN which has read access to the replication content in the master database.</P>
2010 <P>The <TT>bindmethod</TT> is <TT>simple</TT> or <TT>sasl</TT>, depending on whether simple password-based authentication or <TERM>SASL</TERM> authentication is to be used when connecting to the provider <EM>slapd</EM> instance.</P>
2011 <P>Simple authentication should not be used unless adequate data integrity and confidentiality protections are in place (e.g. TLS or IPsec). Simple authentication requires specification of <TT>binddn</TT> and <TT>credentials</TT> parameters.</P>
2012 <P>SASL authentication is generally recommended.  SASL authentication requires specification of a mechanism using the <TT>saslmech</TT> parameter. Depending on the mechanism, an authentication identity and/or credentials can be specified using <TT>authcid</TT> and <TT>credentials</TT>, respectively.  The <TT>authzid</TT> parameter may be used to specify an authorization identity.</P>
2013 <P>The <TT>realm</TT> parameter specifies a realm which a certain mechanisms authenticate the identity within. The <TT>secprops</TT> parameter specifies Cyrus SASL security properties.</P>
2014 <P>The <TT>starttls</TT> parameter specifies use of the StartTLS extended operation to establish a TLS session before authenticating to the provider. If the <TT>critical</TT> argument is supplied, the session will be aborted if the StartTLS request fails.  Otherwise the syncrepl session continues without TLS.  Note that the main slapd TLS settings are not used by the syncrepl engine; by default the TLS parameters from a <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) configuration file will be used.  TLS settings may be specified here, in which case any <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) settings will be completely ignored.</P>
2015 <P>Rather than replicating whole entries, the consumer can query logs of data modifications.  This mode of operation is referred to as <EM>delta syncrepl</EM>.  In addition to the above parameters, the <TT>logbase</TT> and <TT>logfilter</TT> parameters must be set appropriately for the log that will be used. The <TT>syncdata</TT> parameter must be set to either <TT>&quot;accesslog&quot;</TT> if the log conforms to the <EM>slapo-accesslog</EM>(5) log format, or <TT>&quot;changelog&quot;</TT> if the log conforms to the obsolete <EM>changelog</EM> format. If the <TT>syncdata</TT> parameter is omitted or set to <TT>&quot;default&quot;</TT> then the log parameters are ignored.</P>
2016 <P>The <EM>syncrepl</EM> replication mechanism is supported by the <EM>bdb</EM> and <EM>hdb</EM> backends.</P>
2017 <P>See the <A HREF="#LDAP Sync Replication">LDAP Sync Replication</A> chapter of this guide for more information on how to use this directive.</P>
2018 <H4><A NAME="olcTimeLimit: &lt;integer&gt;">5.2.5.9. olcTimeLimit: &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
2019 <P>This directive specifies the maximum number of seconds (in real time) slapd will spend answering a search request. If a request is not finished in this time, a result indicating an exceeded timelimit will be returned.</P>
2020 <P>Default:</P>
2021 <PRE>
2022         olcTimeLimit: 3600
2023 </PRE>
2024 <H4><A NAME="olcUpdateref: &lt;URL&gt;">5.2.5.10. olcUpdateref: &lt;URL&gt;</A></H4>
2025 <P>This directive is only applicable in a slave slapd. It specifies the URL to return to clients which submit update requests upon the replica. If specified multiple times, each <TERM>URL</TERM> is provided.</P>
2026 <P>Example:</P>
2027 <PRE>
2028         olcUpdateref:   ldap://master.example.net
2029 </PRE>
2030 <H4><A NAME="Sample Entries">5.2.5.11. Sample Entries</A></H4>
2031 <PRE>
2032 dn: olcDatabase=frontend,cn=config
2033 objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig
2034 objectClass: olcFrontendConfig
2035 olcDatabase: frontend
2036 olcReadOnly: FALSE
2037
2038 dn: olcDatabase=config,cn=config
2039 objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig
2040 olcDatabase: config
2041 olcRootDN: cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com
2042 </PRE>
2043 <H3><A NAME="BDB and HDB Database Directives">5.2.6. BDB and HDB Database Directives</A></H3>
2044 <P>Directives in this category apply to both the <TERM>BDB</TERM> and the <TERM>HDB</TERM> database. They are used in an olcDatabase entry in addition to the generic database directives defined above.  For a complete reference of BDB/HDB configuration directives, see <EM>slapd-bdb</EM>(5). In addition to the <TT>olcDatabaseConfig</TT> objectClass, BDB and HDB database entries must have the <TT>olcBdbConfig</TT> and <TT>olcHdbConfig</TT> objectClass, respectively.</P>
2045 <H4><A NAME="olcDbDirectory: &lt;directory&gt;">5.2.6.1. olcDbDirectory: &lt;directory&gt;</A></H4>
2046 <P>This directive specifies the directory where the BDB files containing the database and associated indices live.</P>
2047 <P>Default:</P>
2048 <PRE>
2049         olcDbDirectory: /usr/local/var/openldap-data
2050 </PRE>
2051 <H4><A NAME="olcDbCachesize: &lt;integer&gt;">5.2.6.2. olcDbCachesize: &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
2052 <P>This directive specifies the size in entries of the in-memory cache maintained by the BDB backend database instance.</P>
2053 <P>Default:</P>
2054 <PRE>
2055         olcDbCachesize: 1000
2056 </PRE>
2057 <H4><A NAME="olcDbCheckpoint: &lt;kbyte&gt; &lt;min&gt;">5.2.6.3. olcDbCheckpoint: &lt;kbyte&gt; &lt;min&gt;</A></H4>
2058 <P>This directive specifies how often to checkpoint the BDB transaction log. A checkpoint operation flushes the database buffers to disk and writes a checkpoint record in the log. The checkpoint will occur if either &lt;kbyte&gt; data has been written or &lt;min&gt; minutes have passed since the last checkpoint. Both arguments default to zero, in which case they are ignored. When the &lt;min&gt; argument is non-zero, an internal task will run every &lt;min&gt; minutes to perform the checkpoint. See the Berkeley DB reference guide for more details.</P>
2059 <P>Example:</P>
2060 <PRE>
2061         olcDbCheckpoint: 1024 10
2062 </PRE>
2063 <H4><A NAME="olcDbConfig: &lt;DB_CONFIG setting&gt;">5.2.6.4. olcDbConfig: &lt;DB_CONFIG setting&gt;</A></H4>
2064 <P>This attribute specifies a configuration directive to be placed in the <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> file of the database directory. At server startup time, if no such file exists yet, the <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> file will be created and the settings in this attribute will be written to it. If the file exists, its contents will be read and displayed in this attribute. The attribute is multi-valued, to accommodate multiple configuration directives. No default is provided, but it is essential to use proper settings here to get the best server performance.</P>
2065 <P>Any changes made to this attribute will be written to the <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> file and will cause the database environment to be reset so the changes can take immediate effect. If the environment cache is large and has not been recently checkpointed, this reset operation may take a long time. It may be advisable to manually perform a single checkpoint using the Berkeley DB <EM>db_checkpoint</EM> utility before using LDAP Modify to change this attribute.</P>
2066 <P>Example:</P>
2067 <PRE>
2068         olcDbConfig: set_cachesize 0 10485760 0
2069         olcDbConfig: set_lg_bsize 2097512
2070         olcDbConfig: set_lg_dir /var/tmp/bdb-log
2071         olcDbConfig: set_flags DB_LOG_AUTOREMOVE
2072 </PRE>
2073 <P>In this example, the BDB cache is set to 10MB, the BDB transaction log buffer size is set to 2MB, and the transaction log files are to be stored in the /var/tmp/bdb-log directory. Also a flag is set to tell BDB to delete transaction log files as soon as their contents have been checkpointed and they are no longer needed. Without this setting the transaction log files will continue to accumulate until some other cleanup procedure removes them. See the Berkeley DB documentation for the <TT>db_archive</TT> command for details. For a complete list of Berkeley DB flags please see - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/api_c/env_set_flags.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/api_c/env_set_flags.html</A></P>
2074 <P>Ideally the BDB cache must be at least as large as the working set of the database, the log buffer size should be large enough to accommodate most transactions without overflowing, and the log directory must be on a separate physical disk from the main database files. And both the database directory and the log directory should be separate from disks used for regular system activities such as the root, boot, or swap filesystems. See the FAQ-o-Matic and the Berkeley DB documentation for more details.</P>
2075 <H4><A NAME="olcDbNosync: { TRUE | FALSE }">5.2.6.5. olcDbNosync: { TRUE | FALSE }</A></H4>
2076 <P>This option causes on-disk database contents to not be immediately synchronized with in memory changes upon change.  Setting this option to <TT>TRUE</TT> may improve performance at the expense of data integrity. This directive has the same effect as using</P>
2077 <PRE>
2078         olcDbConfig: set_flags DB_TXN_NOSYNC
2079 </PRE>
2080 <H4><A NAME="olcDbIDLcacheSize: &lt;integer&gt;">5.2.6.6. olcDbIDLcacheSize: &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
2081 <P>Specify the size of the in-memory index cache, in index slots. The default is zero. A larger value will speed up frequent searches of indexed entries. The optimal size will depend on the data and search characteristics of the database, but using a number three times the entry cache size is a good starting point.</P>
2082 <P>Example:</P>
2083 <PRE>
2084         olcDbIDLcacheSize: 3000
2085 </PRE>
2086 <H4><A NAME="olcDbIndex: {&lt;attrlist&gt; | default} [pres,eq,approx,sub,none]">5.2.6.7. olcDbIndex: {&lt;attrlist&gt; | default} [pres,eq,approx,sub,none]</A></H4>
2087 <P>This directive specifies the indices to maintain for the given attribute. If only an <TT>&lt;attrlist&gt;</TT> is given, the default indices are maintained. The index keywords correspond to the common types of matches that may be used in an LDAP search filter.</P>
2088 <P>Example:</P>
2089 <PRE>
2090         olcDbIndex: default pres,eq
2091         olcDbIndex: uid
2092         olcDbIndex: cn,sn pres,eq,sub
2093         olcDbIndex: objectClass eq
2094 </PRE>
2095 <P>The first line sets the default set of indices to maintain to present and equality.  The second line causes the default (pres,eq) set of indices to be maintained for the <TT>uid</TT> attribute type. The third line causes present, equality, and substring indices to be maintained for <TT>cn</TT> and <TT>sn</TT> attribute types.  The fourth line causes an equality index for the <TT>objectClass</TT> attribute type.</P>
2096 <P>There is no index keyword for inequality matches. Generally these matches do not use an index. However, some attributes do support indexing for inequality matches, based on the equality index.</P>
2097 <P>A substring index can be more explicitly specified as <TT>subinitial</TT>, <TT>subany</TT>, or <TT>subfinal</TT>, corresponding to the three possible components of a substring match filter. A subinitial index only indexes substrings that appear at the beginning of an attribute value. A subfinal index only indexes substrings that appear at the end of an attribute value, while subany indexes substrings that occur anywhere in a value.</P>
2098 <P>Note that by default, setting an index for an attribute also affects every subtype of that attribute. E.g., setting an equality index on the <TT>name</TT> attribute causes <TT>cn</TT>, <TT>sn</TT>, and every other attribute that inherits from <TT>name</TT> to be indexed.</P>
2099 <P>By default, no indices are maintained.  It is generally advised that minimally an equality index upon objectClass be maintained.</P>
2100 <PRE>
2101         olcDbindex: objectClass eq
2102 </PRE>
2103 <P>Additional indices should be configured corresponding to the most common searches that are used on the database. Presence indexing should not be configured for an attribute unless the attribute occurs very rarely in the database, and presence searches on the attribute occur very frequently during normal use of the directory. Most applications don't use presence searches, so usually presence indexing is not very useful.</P>
2104 <P>If this setting is changed while slapd is running, an internal task will be run to generate the changed index data. All server operations can continue as normal while the indexer does its work.  If slapd is stopped before the index task completes, indexing will have to be manually completed using the slapindex tool.</P>
2105 <H4><A NAME="olcDbLinearIndex: { TRUE | FALSE }">5.2.6.8. olcDbLinearIndex: { TRUE | FALSE }</A></H4>
2106 <P>If this setting is <TT>TRUE</TT> slapindex will index one attribute at a time. The default settings is <TT>FALSE</TT> in which case all indexed attributes of an entry are processed at the same time. When enabled, each indexed attribute is processed individually, using multiple passes through the entire database. This option improves slapindex performance when the database size exceeds the BDB cache size. When the BDB cache is large enough, this option is not needed and will decrease performance. Also by default, slapadd performs full indexing and so a separate slapindex run is not needed. With this option, slapadd does no indexing and slapindex must be used.</P>
2107 <H4><A NAME="olcDbMode: &lt;integer&gt;">5.2.6.9. olcDbMode: &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
2108 <P>This directive specifies the file protection mode that newly created database index files should have.</P>
2109 <P>Default:</P>
2110 <PRE>
2111         olcDbMode: 0600
2112 </PRE>
2113 <H4><A NAME="olcDbSearchStack: &lt;integer&gt;">5.2.6.10. olcDbSearchStack: &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
2114 <P>Specify the depth of the stack used for search filter evaluation. Search filters are evaluated on a stack to accommodate nested <TT>AND</TT> / <TT>OR</TT> clauses. An individual stack is allocated for each server thread. The depth of the stack determines how complex a filter can be evaluated without requiring any additional memory allocation. Filters that are nested deeper than the search stack depth will cause a separate stack to be allocated for that particular search operation. These separate allocations can have a major negative impact on server performance, but specifying too much stack will also consume a great deal of memory. Each search uses 512K bytes per level on a 32-bit machine, or 1024K bytes per level on a 64-bit machine. The default stack depth is 16, thus 8MB or 16MB per thread is used on 32 and 64 bit machines, respectively. Also the 512KB size of a single stack slot is set by a compile-time constant which may be changed if needed; the code must be recompiled for the change to take effect.</P>
2115 <P>Default:</P>
2116 <PRE>
2117         olcDbSearchStack: 16
2118 </PRE>
2119 <H4><A NAME="olcDbShmKey: &lt;integer&gt;">5.2.6.11. olcDbShmKey: &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
2120 <P>Specify a key for a shared memory BDB environment. By default the BDB environment uses memory mapped files. If a non-zero value is specified, it will be used as the key to identify a shared memory region that will house the environment.</P>
2121 <P>Example:</P>
2122 <PRE>
2123         olcDbShmKey: 42
2124 </PRE>
2125 <H4><A NAME="Sample Entry">5.2.6.12. Sample Entry</A></H4>
2126 <PRE>
2127 dn: olcDatabase=hdb,cn=config
2128 objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig
2129 objectClass: olcHdbConfig
2130 olcDatabase: hdb
2131 olcSuffix: &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
2132 olcDbDirectory: /usr/local/var/openldap-data
2133 olcDbCacheSize: 1000
2134 olcDbCheckpoint: 1024 10
2135 olcDbConfig: set_cachesize 0 10485760 0
2136 olcDbConfig: set_lg_bsize 2097152
2137 olcDbConfig: set_lg_dir /var/tmp/bdb-log
2138 olcDbConfig: set_flags DB_LOG_AUTOREMOVE
2139 olcDbIDLcacheSize: 3000
2140 olcDbIndex: objectClass eq
2141 </PRE>
2142 <P></P>
2143 <HR>
2144 <H1><A NAME="The slapd Configuration File">6. The slapd Configuration File</A></H1>
2145 <P>Once the software has been built and installed, you are ready to configure <EM>slapd</EM>(8) for use at your site. The slapd runtime configuration is primarily accomplished through the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file, normally installed in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap</TT> directory.</P>
2146 <P>An alternate configuration file location can be specified via a command-line option to <EM>slapd</EM>(8). This chapter describes the general format of the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) configuration file, followed by a detailed description of commonly used config file directives.</P>
2147 <H2><A NAME="Configuration File Format">6.1. Configuration File Format</A></H2>
2148 <P>The <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file consists of three types of configuration information: global, backend specific, and database specific.  Global information is specified first, followed by information associated with a particular backend type, which is then followed by information associated with a particular database instance.  Global directives can be overridden in backend and/or database directives, and backend directives can be overridden by database directives.</P>
2149 <P>Blank lines and comment lines beginning with a '<TT>#</TT>' character are ignored.  If a line begins with white space, it is considered a continuation of the previous line (even if the previous line is a comment).</P>
2150 <P>The general format of slapd.conf is as follows:</P>
2151 <PRE>
2152         # global configuration directives
2153         &lt;global config directives&gt;
2154
2155         # backend definition
2156         backend &lt;typeA&gt;
2157         &lt;backend-specific directives&gt;
2158
2159         # first database definition &amp; config directives
2160         database &lt;typeA&gt;
2161         &lt;database-specific directives&gt;
2162
2163         # second database definition &amp; config directives
2164         database &lt;typeB&gt;
2165         &lt;database-specific directives&gt;
2166
2167         # second database definition &amp; config directives
2168         database &lt;typeA&gt;
2169         &lt;database-specific directives&gt;
2170
2171         # subsequent backend &amp; database definitions &amp; config directives
2172         ...
2173 </PRE>
2174 <P>A configuration directive may take arguments.  If so, they are separated by white space.  If an argument contains white space, the argument should be enclosed in double quotes <TT>&quot;like this&quot;</TT>. If an argument contains a double quote or a backslash character `<TT>\</TT>', the character should be preceded by a backslash character `<TT>\</TT>'.</P>
2175 <P>The distribution contains an example configuration file that will be installed in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap</TT> directory. A number of files containing schema definitions (attribute types and object classes) are also provided in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/schema</TT> directory.</P>
2176 <H2><A NAME="Configuration File Directives">6.2. Configuration File Directives</A></H2>
2177 <P>This section details commonly used configuration directives.  For a complete list, see the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) manual page.  This section separates the configuration file directives into global, backend-specific and data-specific categories, describing each directive and its default value (if any), and giving an example of its use.</P>
2178 <H3><A NAME="Global Directives">6.2.1. Global Directives</A></H3>
2179 <P>Directives described in this section apply to all backends and databases unless specifically overridden in a backend or database definition.  Arguments that should be replaced by actual text are shown in brackets <TT>&lt;&gt;</TT>.</P>
2180 <H4><A NAME="access to &lt;what&gt; [ by &lt;who&gt; [&lt;accesslevel&gt;] [&lt;control&gt;] ]+">6.2.1.1. access to &lt;what&gt; [ by &lt;who&gt; [&lt;accesslevel&gt;] [&lt;control&gt;] ]+</A></H4>
2181 <P>This directive grants access (specified by &lt;accesslevel&gt;) to a set of entries and/or attributes (specified by &lt;what&gt;) by one or more requestors (specified by &lt;who&gt;).  See the <A HREF="#Access Control">Access Control</A> section of this guide for basic usage.</P>
2182 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
2183 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>If no <TT>access</TT> directives are specified, the default access control policy, <TT>access to * by * read</TT>, allows all both authenticated and anonymous users read access.
2184 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
2185 <H4><A NAME="attributetype &lt;{{REF:RFC4512}} Attribute Type Description&gt;"> </A>6.2.1.2. attributetype &lt;<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Attribute Type Description&gt;</H4>
2186 <P>This directive defines an attribute type. Please see the <A HREF="#Schema Specification">Schema Specification</A> chapter for information regarding how to use this directive.</P>
2187 <H4><A NAME="idletimeout &lt;integer&gt;">6.2.1.3. idletimeout &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
2188 <P>Specify the number of seconds to wait before forcibly closing an idle client connection.  An idletimeout of 0, the default, disables this feature.</P>
2189 <H4><A NAME="include &lt;filename&gt;">6.2.1.4. include &lt;filename&gt;</A></H4>
2190 <P>This directive specifies that slapd should read additional configuration information from the given file before continuing with the next line of the current file. The included file should follow the normal slapd config file format.  The file is commonly used to include files containing schema specifications.</P>
2191 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
2192 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>You should be careful when using this directive - there is no small limit on the number of nested include directives, and no loop detection is done.
2193 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
2194 <H4><A NAME="loglevel &lt;integer&gt;">6.2.1.5. loglevel &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
2195 <P>This directive specifies the level at which debugging statements and operation statistics should be syslogged (currently logged to the <EM>syslogd</EM>(8) <TT>LOG_LOCAL4</TT> facility). You must have configured OpenLDAP <TT>--enable-debug</TT> (the default) for this to work (except for the two statistics levels, which are always enabled).  Log levels are additive. To display what numbers correspond to what kind of debugging, invoke slapd with <TT>-?</TT> or consult the table below. The possible values for &lt;integer&gt; are:</P>
2196 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
2197 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 6.1: Debugging Levels</CAPTION>
2198 <TR CLASS="heading">
2199 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2200 <STRONG>Level</STRONG>
2201 </TD>
2202 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2203 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
2204 </TD>
2205 </TR>
2206 <TR>
2207 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2208 -1
2209 </TD>
2210 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2211 enable all debugging
2212 </TD>
2213 </TR>
2214 <TR>
2215 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2216 0
2217 </TD>
2218 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2219 no debugging
2220 </TD>
2221 </TR>
2222 <TR>
2223 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2224 1
2225 </TD>
2226 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2227 trace function calls
2228 </TD>
2229 </TR>
2230 <TR>
2231 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2232 2
2233 </TD>
2234 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2235 debug packet handling
2236 </TD>
2237 </TR>
2238 <TR>
2239 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2240 4
2241 </TD>
2242 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2243 heavy trace debugging
2244 </TD>
2245 </TR>
2246 <TR>
2247 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2248 8
2249 </TD>
2250 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2251 connection management
2252 </TD>
2253 </TR>
2254 <TR>
2255 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2256 16
2257 </TD>
2258 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2259 print out packets sent and received
2260 </TD>
2261 </TR>
2262 <TR>
2263 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2264 32
2265 </TD>
2266 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2267 search filter processing
2268 </TD>
2269 </TR>
2270 <TR>
2271 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2272 64
2273 </TD>
2274 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2275 configuration file processing
2276 </TD>
2277 </TR>
2278 <TR>
2279 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2280 128
2281 </TD>
2282 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2283 access control list processing
2284 </TD>
2285 </TR>
2286 <TR>
2287 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2288 256
2289 </TD>
2290 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2291 stats log connections/operations/results
2292 </TD>
2293 </TR>
2294 <TR>
2295 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2296 512
2297 </TD>
2298 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2299 stats log entries sent
2300 </TD>
2301 </TR>
2302 <TR>
2303 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2304 1024
2305 </TD>
2306 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2307 print communication with shell backends
2308 </TD>
2309 </TR>
2310 <TR>
2311 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2312 2048
2313 </TD>
2314 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2315 print entry parsing debugging
2316 </TD>
2317 </TR>
2318 </TABLE>
2319
2320 <P>Example:</P>
2321 <PRE>
2322  loglevel -1
2323 </PRE>
2324 <P>This will cause lots and lots of debugging information to be logged.</P>
2325 <P>Default:</P>
2326 <PRE>
2327  loglevel 256
2328 </PRE>
2329 <H4><A NAME="objectclass &lt;{{REF:RFC4512}} Object Class Description&gt;"> </A>6.2.1.6. objectclass &lt;<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Object Class Description&gt;</H4>
2330 <P>This directive defines an object class. Please see the <A HREF="#Schema Specification">Schema Specification</A> chapter for information regarding how to use this directive.</P>
2331 <H4><A NAME="referral &lt;URI&gt;">6.2.1.7. referral &lt;URI&gt;</A></H4>
2332 <P>This directive specifies the referral to pass back when slapd cannot find a local database to handle a request.</P>
2333 <P>Example:</P>
2334 <PRE>
2335         referral ldap://root.openldap.org
2336 </PRE>
2337 <P>This will refer non-local queries to the global root LDAP server at the OpenLDAP Project. Smart LDAP clients can re-ask their query at that server, but note that most of these clients are only going to know how to handle simple LDAP URLs that contain a host part and optionally a distinguished name part.</P>
2338 <H4><A NAME="sizelimit &lt;integer&gt;">6.2.1.8. sizelimit &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
2339 <P>This directive specifies the maximum number of entries to return from a search operation.</P>
2340 <P>Default:</P>
2341 <PRE>
2342         sizelimit 500
2343 </PRE>
2344 <H4><A NAME="timelimit &lt;integer&gt;">6.2.1.9. timelimit &lt;integer&gt;</A></H4>
2345 <P>This directive specifies the maximum number of seconds (in real time) slapd will spend answering a search request. If a request is not finished in this time, a result indicating an exceeded timelimit will be returned.</P>
2346 <P>Default:</P>
2347 <PRE>
2348         timelimit 3600
2349 </PRE>
2350 <H3><A NAME="General Backend Directives">6.2.2. General Backend Directives</A></H3>
2351 <P>Directives in this section apply only to the backend in which they are defined. They are supported by every type of backend. Backend directives apply to all databases instances of the same type and, depending on the directive, may be overridden by database directives.</P>
2352 <H4><A NAME="backend &lt;type&gt;">6.2.2.1. backend &lt;type&gt;</A></H4>
2353 <P>This directive marks the beginning of a backend declaration. <TT>&lt;type&gt;</TT> should be one of the supported backend types listed in Table 6.2.</P>
2354 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
2355 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 5.2: Database Backends</CAPTION>
2356 <TR CLASS="heading">
2357 <TD>
2358 <STRONG>Types</STRONG>
2359 </TD>
2360 <TD>
2361 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
2362 </TD>
2363 </TR>
2364 <TR>
2365 <TD>
2366 <TT>bdb</TT>
2367 </TD>
2368 <TD>
2369 Berkeley DB transactional backend
2370 </TD>
2371 </TR>
2372 <TR>
2373 <TD>
2374 <TT>dnssrv</TT>
2375 </TD>
2376 <TD>
2377 DNS SRV backend
2378 </TD>
2379 </TR>
2380 <TR>
2381 <TD>
2382 <TT>hdb</TT>
2383 </TD>
2384 <TD>
2385 Hierarchical variant of bdb backend
2386 </TD>
2387 </TR>
2388 <TR>
2389 <TD>
2390 <TT>ldap</TT>
2391 </TD>
2392 <TD>
2393 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (Proxy) backend
2394 </TD>
2395 </TR>
2396 <TR>
2397 <TD>
2398 <TT>meta</TT>
2399 </TD>
2400 <TD>
2401 Meta Directory backend
2402 </TD>
2403 </TR>
2404 <TR>
2405 <TD>
2406 <TT>monitor</TT>
2407 </TD>
2408 <TD>
2409 Monitor backend
2410 </TD>
2411 </TR>
2412 <TR>
2413 <TD>
2414 <TT>passwd</TT>
2415 </TD>
2416 <TD>
2417 Provides read-only access to <EM>passwd</EM>(5)
2418 </TD>
2419 </TR>
2420 <TR>
2421 <TD>
2422 <TT>perl</TT>
2423 </TD>
2424 <TD>
2425 Perl Programmable backend
2426 </TD>
2427 </TR>
2428 <TR>
2429 <TD>
2430 <TT>shell</TT>
2431 </TD>
2432 <TD>
2433 Shell (extern program) backend
2434 </TD>
2435 </TR>
2436 <TR>
2437 <TD>
2438 <TT>sql</TT>
2439 </TD>
2440 <TD>
2441 SQL Programmable backend
2442 </TD>
2443 </TR>
2444 </TABLE>
2445
2446 <P>Example:</P>
2447 <PRE>
2448         backend bdb
2449 </PRE>
2450 <P>This marks the beginning of a new <TERM>BDB</TERM> backend definition.</P>
2451 <H3><A NAME="General Database Directives">6.2.3. General Database Directives</A></H3>
2452 <P>Directives in this section apply only to the database in which they are defined. They are supported by every type of database.</P>
2453 <H4><A NAME="database &lt;type&gt;">6.2.3.1. database &lt;type&gt;</A></H4>
2454 <P>This directive marks the beginning of a database instance declaration. <TT>&lt;type&gt;</TT> should be one of the supported backend types listed in Table 6.2.</P>
2455 <P>Example:</P>
2456 <PRE>
2457         database bdb
2458 </PRE>
2459 <P>This marks the beginning of a new <TERM>BDB</TERM> database instance declaration.</P>
2460 <H4><A NAME="readonly { on | off }">6.2.3.2. readonly { on | off }</A></H4>
2461 <P>This directive puts the database into &quot;read-only&quot; mode. Any attempts to modify the database will return an &quot;unwilling to perform&quot; error.</P>
2462 <P>Default:</P>
2463 <PRE>
2464         readonly off
2465 </PRE>
2466 <H4><A NAME="rootdn &lt;DN&gt;">6.2.3.3. rootdn &lt;DN&gt;</A></H4>
2467 <P>This directive specifies the DN that is not subject to access control or administrative limit restrictions for operations on this database.  The DN need not refer to an entry in this database or even in the directory. The DN may refer to a SASL identity.</P>
2468 <P>Entry-based Example:</P>
2469 <PRE>
2470         rootdn &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
2471 </PRE>
2472 <P>SASL-based Example:</P>
2473 <PRE>
2474         rootdn &quot;uid=root,cn=example.com,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth&quot;
2475 </PRE>
2476 <P>See the <A HREF="#SASL Authentication">SASL Authentication</A> section for information on SASL authentication identities.</P>
2477 <H4><A NAME="rootpw &lt;password&gt;">6.2.3.4. rootpw &lt;password&gt;</A></H4>
2478 <P>This directive can be used to specifies a password for the DN for the rootdn (when the rootdn is set to a DN within the database).</P>
2479 <P>Example:</P>
2480 <PRE>
2481         rootpw secret
2482 </PRE>
2483 <P>It is also permissible to provide hash of the password in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2307.txt">RFC2307</A> form.  <EM>slappasswd</EM>(8) may be used to generate the password hash.</P>
2484 <P>Example:</P>
2485 <PRE>
2486         rootpw {SSHA}ZKKuqbEKJfKSXhUbHG3fG8MDn9j1v4QN
2487 </PRE>
2488 <P>The hash was generated using the command <TT>slappasswd -s secret</TT>.</P>
2489 <H4><A NAME="suffix &lt;dn suffix&gt;">6.2.3.5. suffix &lt;dn suffix&gt;</A></H4>
2490 <P>This directive specifies the DN suffix of queries that will be passed to this backend database. Multiple suffix lines can be given, and at least one is required for each database definition.</P>
2491 <P>Example:</P>
2492 <PRE>
2493         suffix &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
2494 </PRE>
2495 <P>Queries with a DN ending in &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; will be passed to this backend.</P>
2496 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
2497 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>When the backend to pass a query to is selected, slapd looks at the suffix line(s) in each database definition in the order they appear in the file. Thus, if one database suffix is a prefix of another, it must appear after it in the config file.
2498 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
2499 <H4><A NAME="syncrepl">6.2.3.6. syncrepl</A></H4>
2500 <PRE>
2501         syncrepl rid=&lt;replica ID&gt;
2502                 provider=ldap[s]://&lt;hostname&gt;[:port]
2503                 [type=refreshOnly|refreshAndPersist]
2504                 [interval=dd:hh:mm:ss]
2505                 [retry=[&lt;retry interval&gt; &lt;# of retries&gt;]+]
2506                 searchbase=&lt;base DN&gt;
2507                 [filter=&lt;filter str&gt;]
2508                 [scope=sub|one|base]
2509                 [attrs=&lt;attr list&gt;]
2510                 [attrsonly]
2511                 [sizelimit=&lt;limit&gt;]
2512                 [timelimit=&lt;limit&gt;]
2513                 [schemachecking=on|off]
2514                 [bindmethod=simple|sasl]
2515                 [binddn=&lt;DN&gt;]
2516                 [saslmech=&lt;mech&gt;]
2517                 [authcid=&lt;identity&gt;]
2518                 [authzid=&lt;identity&gt;]
2519                 [credentials=&lt;passwd&gt;]
2520                 [realm=&lt;realm&gt;]
2521                 [secprops=&lt;properties&gt;]
2522                 [starttls=yes|critical]
2523                 [tls_cert=&lt;file&gt;]
2524                 [tls_key=&lt;file&gt;]
2525                 [tls_cacert=&lt;file&gt;]
2526                 [tls_cacertdir=&lt;path&gt;]
2527                 [tls_reqcert=never|allow|try|demand]
2528                 [tls_ciphersuite=&lt;ciphers&gt;]
2529                 [tls_crlcheck=none|peer|all]
2530                 [logbase=&lt;base DN&gt;]
2531                 [logfilter=&lt;filter str&gt;]
2532                 [syncdata=default|accesslog|changelog]
2533 </PRE>
2534 <P>This directive specifies the current database as a replica of the master content by establishing the current <EM>slapd</EM>(8) as a replication consumer site running a syncrepl replication engine. The master database is located at the replication provider site specified by the <TT>provider</TT> parameter. The replica database is kept up-to-date with the master content using the LDAP Content Synchronization protocol. See <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt">RFC4533</A> for more information on the protocol.</P>
2535 <P>The <TT>rid</TT> parameter is used for identification of the current <TT>syncrepl</TT> directive within the replication consumer server, where <TT>&lt;replica ID&gt;</TT> uniquely identifies the syncrepl specification described by the current <TT>syncrepl</TT> directive. <TT>&lt;replica ID&gt;</TT> is non-negative and is no more than three decimal digits in length.</P>
2536 <P>The <TT>provider</TT> parameter specifies the replication provider site containing the master content as an LDAP URI. The <TT>provider</TT> parameter specifies a scheme, a host and optionally a port where the provider slapd instance can be found. Either a domain name or IP address may be used for &lt;hostname&gt;. Examples are <TT>ldap://provider.example.com:389</TT> or <TT>ldaps://192.168.1.1:636</TT>. If &lt;port&gt; is not given, the standard LDAP port number (389 or 636) is used. Note that the syncrepl uses a consumer-initiated protocol, and hence its specification is located at the consumer site, whereas the <TT>replica</TT> specification is located at the provider site. <TT>syncrepl</TT> and <TT>replica</TT> directives define two independent replication mechanisms. They do not represent the replication peers of each other.</P>
2537 <P>The content of the syncrepl replica is defined using a search specification as its result set. The consumer slapd will send search requests to the provider slapd according to the search specification. The search specification includes <TT>searchbase</TT>, <TT>scope</TT>, <TT>filter</TT>, <TT>attrs</TT>, <TT>attrsonly</TT>, <TT>sizelimit</TT>, and <TT>timelimit</TT> parameters as in the normal search specification. The <TT>searchbase</TT> parameter has no default value and must always be specified. The <TT>scope</TT> defaults to <TT>sub</TT>, the <TT>filter</TT> defaults to <TT>(objectclass=*)</TT>, <TT>attrs</TT> defaults to <TT>&quot;*,+&quot;</TT> to replicate all user and operational attributes, and <TT>attrsonly</TT> is unset by default. Both <TT>sizelimit</TT> and <TT>timelimit</TT> default to &quot;unlimited&quot;, and only positive integers or &quot;unlimited&quot; may be specified.</P>
2538 <P>The <TERM>LDAP Content Synchronization</TERM> protocol has two operation types: <TT>refreshOnly</TT> and <TT>refreshAndPersist</TT>. The operation type is specified by the <TT>type</TT> parameter. In the <TT>refreshOnly</TT> operation, the next synchronization search operation is periodically rescheduled at an interval time after each synchronization operation finishes. The interval is specified by the <TT>interval</TT> parameter. It is set to one day by default. In the <TT>refreshAndPersist</TT> operation, a synchronization search remains persistent in the provider <EM>slapd</EM> instance. Further updates to the master replica will generate <TT>searchResultEntry</TT> to the consumer slapd as the search responses to the persistent synchronization search.</P>
2539 <P>If an error occurs during replication, the consumer will attempt to reconnect according to the retry parameter which is a list of the &lt;retry interval&gt; and &lt;# of retries&gt; pairs. For example, retry=&quot;60 10 300 3&quot; lets the consumer retry every 60 seconds for the first 10 times and then retry every 300 seconds for the next three times before stop retrying. + in &lt;#  of retries&gt; means indefinite number of retries until success.</P>
2540 <P>The schema checking can be enforced at the LDAP Sync consumer site by turning on the <TT>schemachecking</TT> parameter. If it is turned on, every replicated entry will be checked for its schema as the entry is stored into the replica content. Every entry in the replica should contain those attributes required by the schema definition. If it is turned off, entries will be stored without checking schema conformance. The default is off.</P>
2541 <P>The <TT>binddn</TT> parameter gives the DN to bind as for the syncrepl searches to the provider slapd. It should be a DN which has read access to the replication content in the master database.</P>
2542 <P>The <TT>bindmethod</TT> is <TT>simple</TT> or <TT>sasl</TT>, depending on whether simple password-based authentication or <TERM>SASL</TERM> authentication is to be used when connecting to the provider <EM>slapd</EM> instance.</P>
2543 <P>Simple authentication should not be used unless adequate data integrity and confidentiality protections are in place (e.g. TLS or IPsec). Simple authentication requires specification of <TT>binddn</TT> and <TT>credentials</TT> parameters.</P>
2544 <P>SASL authentication is generally recommended.  SASL authentication requires specification of a mechanism using the <TT>saslmech</TT> parameter. Depending on the mechanism, an authentication identity and/or credentials can be specified using <TT>authcid</TT> and <TT>credentials</TT>, respectively.  The <TT>authzid</TT> parameter may be used to specify an authorization identity.</P>
2545 <P>The <TT>realm</TT> parameter specifies a realm which a certain mechanisms authenticate the identity within. The <TT>secprops</TT> parameter specifies Cyrus SASL security properties.</P>
2546 <P>The <TT>starttls</TT> parameter specifies use of the StartTLS extended operation to establish a TLS session before authenticating to the provider. If the <TT>critical</TT> argument is supplied, the session will be aborted if the StartTLS request fails.  Otherwise the syncrepl session continues without TLS.  Note that the main slapd TLS settings are not used by the syncrepl engine; by default the TLS parameters from a <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) configuration file will be used.  TLS settings may be specified here, in which case any <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) settings will be completely ignored.</P>
2547 <P>Rather than replicating whole entries, the consumer can query logs of data modifications.  This mode of operation is referred to as <EM>delta syncrepl</EM>.  In addition to the above parameters, the <TT>logbase</TT> and <TT>logfilter</TT> parameters must be set appropriately for the log that will be used. The <TT>syncdata</TT> parameter must be set to either <TT>&quot;accesslog&quot;</TT> if the log conforms to the <EM>slapo-accesslog</EM>(5) log format, or <TT>&quot;changelog&quot;</TT> if the log conforms to the obsolete <EM>changelog</EM> format. If the <TT>syncdata</TT> parameter is omitted or set to <TT>&quot;default&quot;</TT> then the log parameters are ignored.</P>
2548 <P>The <EM>syncrepl</EM> replication mechanism is supported by the <EM>bdb</EM> and <EM>hdb</EM> backends.</P>
2549 <P>See the <A HREF="#LDAP Sync Replication">LDAP Sync Replication</A> chapter of this guide for more information on how to use this directive.</P>
2550 <H4><A NAME="updateref &lt;URL&gt;">6.2.3.7. updateref &lt;URL&gt;</A></H4>
2551 <P>This directive is only applicable in a <EM>slave</EM> (or <EM>shadow</EM>) <EM>slapd</EM>(8) instance. It specifies the URL to return to clients which submit update requests upon the replica. If specified multiple times, each <TERM>URL</TERM> is provided.</P>
2552 <P>Example:</P>
2553 <PRE>
2554         updateref       ldap://master.example.net
2555 </PRE>
2556 <H3><A NAME="BDB and HDB Database Directives">6.2.4. BDB and HDB Database Directives</A></H3>
2557 <P>Directives in this category only apply to both the <TERM>BDB</TERM> and the <TERM>HDB</TERM> database. That is, they must follow a &quot;database bdb&quot; or &quot;database hdb&quot; line and come before any subsequent &quot;backend&quot; or &quot;database&quot; line.  For a complete reference of BDB/HDB configuration directives, see <EM>slapd-bdb</EM>(5).</P>
2558 <H4><A NAME="directory &lt;directory&gt;">6.2.4.1. directory &lt;directory&gt;</A></H4>
2559 <P>This directive specifies the directory where the BDB files containing the database and associated indices live.</P>
2560 <P>Default:</P>
2561 <PRE>
2562         directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data
2563 </PRE>
2564 <P></P>
2565 <HR>
2566 <H1><A NAME="Access Control">7. Access Control</A></H1>
2567 <H2><A NAME="Introduction">7.1. Introduction</A></H2>
2568 <P>As the directory gets populated with more and more data of varying sensitivity, controlling the kinds of access granted to the directory becomes more and more critical. For instance, the directory may contain data of a confidential nature that you may need to protect by contract or by law. Or, if using the directory to control access to other services, inappropriate access to the directory may create avenues of attack to your sites security that result in devastating damage to your assets.</P>
2569 <P>Access to your directory can be configured via two methods, the first using <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> and the second using the <EM>slapd-config</EM>(5) format (<A HREF="#Configuring slapd">Configuring slapd</A>).</P>
2570 <P>The default access control policy is allow read by all clients. Regardless of what access control policy is defined, the <EM>rootdn</EM> is always allowed full rights (i.e. auth, search, compare, read and write) on everything and anything.</P>
2571 <P>As a consequence, it's useless (and results in a performance penalty) to explicitly list the <EM>rootdn</EM> among the <EM>&lt;by&gt;</EM> clauses.</P>
2572 <P>The following sections will describe Access Control Lists in more details and follow with some examples and recommendations.</P>
2573 <H2><A NAME="Access Control via Static Configuration">7.2. Access Control via Static Configuration</A></H2>
2574 <P>Access to entries and attributes is controlled by the access configuration file directive. The general form of an access line is:</P>
2575 <PRE>
2576     &lt;access directive&gt; ::= access to &lt;what&gt;
2577         [by &lt;who&gt; [&lt;access&gt;] [&lt;control&gt;] ]+
2578     &lt;what&gt; ::= * |
2579         [dn[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt; | dn.&lt;scope-style&gt;=&lt;DN&gt;]
2580         [filter=&lt;ldapfilter&gt;] [attrs=&lt;attrlist&gt;]
2581     &lt;basic-style&gt; ::= regex | exact
2582     &lt;scope-style&gt; ::= base | one | subtree | children
2583     &lt;attrlist&gt; ::= &lt;attr&gt; [val[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;] | &lt;attr&gt; , &lt;attrlist&gt;
2584     &lt;attr&gt; ::= &lt;attrname&gt; | entry | children
2585     &lt;who&gt; ::= * | [anonymous | users | self
2586             | dn[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt; | dn.&lt;scope-style&gt;=&lt;DN&gt;]
2587         [dnattr=&lt;attrname&gt;]
2588         [group[/&lt;objectclass&gt;[/&lt;attrname&gt;][.&lt;basic-style&gt;]]=&lt;regex&gt;]
2589         [peername[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;]
2590         [sockname[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;]
2591         [domain[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;]
2592         [sockurl[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;]
2593         [set=&lt;setspec&gt;]
2594         [aci=&lt;attrname&gt;]
2595     &lt;access&gt; ::= [self]{&lt;level&gt;|&lt;priv&gt;}
2596     &lt;level&gt; ::= none | disclose | auth | compare | search | read | write | manage
2597     &lt;priv&gt; ::= {=|+|-}{m|w|r|s|c|x|d|0}+
2598     &lt;control&gt; ::= [stop | continue | break]
2599 </PRE>
2600 <P>where the &lt;what&gt; part selects the entries and/or attributes to which the access applies, the <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> part specifies which entities are granted access, and the <TT>&lt;access&gt;</TT> part specifies the access granted. Multiple <TT>&lt;who&gt; &lt;access&gt; &lt;control&gt;</TT> triplets are supported, allowing many entities to be granted different access to the same set of entries and attributes. Not all of these access control options are described here; for more details see the <EM>slapd.access</EM>(5) man page.</P>
2601 <H3><A NAME="What to control access to">7.2.1. What to control access to</A></H3>
2602 <P>The &lt;what&gt; part of an access specification determines the entries and attributes to which the access control applies.  Entries are commonly selected in two ways: by DN and by filter.  The following qualifiers select entries by DN:</P>
2603 <PRE>
2604     to *
2605     to dn[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;
2606     to dn.&lt;scope-style&gt;=&lt;DN&gt;
2607 </PRE>
2608 <P>The first form is used to select all entries.  The second form may be used to select entries by matching a regular expression against the target entry's <EM>normalized DN</EM>.   (The second form is not discussed further in this document.)  The third form is used to select entries which are within the requested scope of DN.  The &lt;DN&gt; is a string representation of the Distinguished Name, as described in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt">RFC4514</A>.</P>
2609 <P>The scope can be either <TT>base</TT>, <TT>one</TT>, <TT>subtree</TT>, or <TT>children</TT>.  Where <TT>base</TT> matches only the entry with provided DN, <TT>one</TT> matches the entries whose parent is the provided DN, <TT>subtree</TT> matches all entries in the subtree whose root is the provided DN, and <TT>children</TT> matches all entries under the DN (but not the entry named by the DN).</P>
2610 <P>For example, if the directory contained entries named:</P>
2611 <PRE>
2612     0: o=suffix
2613     1: cn=Manager,o=suffix
2614     2: ou=people,o=suffix
2615     3: uid=kdz,ou=people,o=suffix
2616     4: cn=addresses,uid=kdz,ou=people,o=suffix
2617     5: uid=hyc,ou=people,o=suffix
2618 </PRE>
2619 <P>Then:</P>
2620 <UL>
2621 <TT>dn.base=&quot;ou=people,o=suffix&quot;</TT> match 2;
2622 <BR>
2623 <TT>dn.one=&quot;ou=people,o=suffix&quot;</TT> match 3, and 5;
2624 <BR>
2625 <TT>dn.subtree=&quot;ou=people,o=suffix&quot;</TT> match 2, 3, 4, and 5; and
2626 <BR>
2627 <TT>dn.children=&quot;ou=people,o=suffix&quot;</TT> match 3, 4, and 5.</UL>
2628 <P>Entries may also be selected using a filter:</P>
2629 <PRE>
2630     to filter=&lt;ldap filter&gt;
2631 </PRE>
2632 <P>where &lt;ldap filter&gt; is a string representation of an LDAP search filter, as described in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt">RFC4515</A>.  For example:</P>
2633 <PRE>
2634     to filter=(objectClass=person)
2635 </PRE>
2636 <P>Note that entries may be selected by both DN and filter by including both qualifiers in the &lt;what&gt; clause.</P>
2637 <PRE>
2638     to dn.one=&quot;ou=people,o=suffix&quot; filter=(objectClass=person)
2639 </PRE>
2640 <P>Attributes within an entry are selected by including a comma-separated list of attribute names in the &lt;what&gt; selector:</P>
2641 <PRE>
2642     attrs=&lt;attribute list&gt;
2643 </PRE>
2644 <P>A specific value of an attribute is selected by using a single attribute name and also using a value selector:</P>
2645 <PRE>
2646     attrs=&lt;attribute&gt; val[.&lt;style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;
2647 </PRE>
2648 <P>There are two special <EM>pseudo</EM> attributes <TT>entry</TT> and <TT>children</TT>.  To read (and hence return) a target entry, the subject must have <TT>read</TT> access to the target's <EM>entry</EM> attribute.  To perform a search, the subject must have <TT>search</TT> access to the search base's <EM>entry</EM> attribute. To add or delete an entry, the subject must have <TT>write</TT> access to the entry's <TT>entry</TT> attribute AND must have <TT>write</TT> access to the entry's parent's <TT>children</TT> attribute.  To rename an entry, the subject must have <TT>write</TT> access to entry's <TT>entry</TT> attribute AND have <TT>write</TT> access to both the old parent's and new parent's <TT>children</TT> attributes.  The complete examples at the end of this section should help clear things up.</P>
2649 <P>Lastly, there is a special entry selector <TT>&quot;*&quot;</TT> that is used to select any entry.  It is used when no other <TT>&lt;what&gt;</TT> selector has been provided.  It's equivalent to &quot;<TT>dn=.*</TT>&quot;</P>
2650 <H3><A NAME="Who to grant access to">7.2.2. Who to grant access to</A></H3>
2651 <P>The &lt;who&gt; part identifies the entity or entities being granted access. Note that access is granted to &quot;entities&quot; not &quot;entries.&quot; The following table summarizes entity specifiers:</P>
2652 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
2653 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 6.3: Access Entity Specifiers</CAPTION>
2654 <TR CLASS="heading">
2655 <TD>
2656 <STRONG>Specifier</STRONG>
2657 </TD>
2658 <TD>
2659 <STRONG>Entities</STRONG>
2660 </TD>
2661 </TR>
2662 <TR>
2663 <TD>
2664 <TT>*</TT>
2665 </TD>
2666 <TD>
2667 All, including anonymous and authenticated users
2668 </TD>
2669 </TR>
2670 <TR>
2671 <TD>
2672 <TT>anonymous</TT>
2673 </TD>
2674 <TD>
2675 Anonymous (non-authenticated) users
2676 </TD>
2677 </TR>
2678 <TR>
2679 <TD>
2680 <TT>users</TT>
2681 </TD>
2682 <TD>
2683 Authenticated users
2684 </TD>
2685 </TR>
2686 <TR>
2687 <TD>
2688 <TT>self</TT>
2689 </TD>
2690 <TD>
2691 User associated with target entry
2692 </TD>
2693 </TR>
2694 <TR>
2695 <TD>
2696 <TT>dn[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;</TT>
2697 </TD>
2698 <TD>
2699 Users matching a regular expression
2700 </TD>
2701 </TR>
2702 <TR>
2703 <TD>
2704 <TT>dn.&lt;scope-style&gt;=&lt;DN&gt;</TT>
2705 </TD>
2706 <TD>
2707 Users within scope of a DN
2708 </TD>
2709 </TR>
2710 </TABLE>
2711
2712 <P>The DN specifier behaves much like &lt;what&gt; clause DN specifiers.</P>
2713 <P>Other control factors are also supported.  For example, a <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> can be restricted by an entry listed in a DN-valued attribute in the entry to which the access applies:</P>
2714 <PRE>
2715     dnattr=&lt;dn-valued attribute name&gt;
2716 </PRE>
2717 <P>The dnattr specification is used to give access to an entry whose DN is listed in an attribute of the entry (e.g., give access to a group entry to whoever is listed as the owner of the group entry).</P>
2718 <P>Some factors may not be appropriate in all environments (or any). For example, the domain factor relies on IP to domain name lookups. As these can easily be spoofed, the domain factor should be avoided.</P>
2719 <H3><A NAME="The access to grant">7.2.3. The access to grant</A></H3>
2720 <P>The kind of &lt;access&gt; granted can be one of the following:</P>
2721 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
2722 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 6.4: Access Levels</CAPTION>
2723 <TR CLASS="heading">
2724 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2725 <STRONG>Level</STRONG>
2726 </TD>
2727 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2728 <STRONG>Privileges</STRONG>
2729 </TD>
2730 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2731 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
2732 </TD>
2733 </TR>
2734 <TR>
2735 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2736 <TT>none        =</TT>
2737 </TD>
2738 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2739 <TT>0</TT>
2740 </TD>
2741 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2742 no access
2743 </TD>
2744 </TR>
2745 <TR>
2746 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2747 <TT>disclose    =</TT>
2748 </TD>
2749 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2750 <TT>d</TT>
2751 </TD>
2752 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2753 needed for information disclosure on error
2754 </TD>
2755 </TR>
2756 <TR>
2757 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2758 <TT>auth        =</TT>
2759 </TD>
2760 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2761 <TT>dx</TT>
2762 </TD>
2763 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2764 needed to authenticate (bind)
2765 </TD>
2766 </TR>
2767 <TR>
2768 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2769 <TT>compare     =</TT>
2770 </TD>
2771 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2772 <TT>cdx</TT>
2773 </TD>
2774 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2775 needed to compare
2776 </TD>
2777 </TR>
2778 <TR>
2779 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2780 <TT>search      =</TT>
2781 </TD>
2782 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2783 <TT>scdx</TT>
2784 </TD>
2785 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2786 needed to apply search filters
2787 </TD>
2788 </TR>
2789 <TR>
2790 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2791 <TT>read        =</TT>
2792 </TD>
2793 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2794 <TT>rscdx</TT>
2795 </TD>
2796 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2797 needed to read search results
2798 </TD>
2799 </TR>
2800 <TR>
2801 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2802 <TT>write       =</TT>
2803 </TD>
2804 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2805 <TT>wrscdx</TT>
2806 </TD>
2807 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2808 needed to modify/rename
2809 </TD>
2810 </TR>
2811 <TR>
2812 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2813 <TT>manage      =</TT>
2814 </TD>
2815 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
2816 <TT>mwrscdx</TT>
2817 </TD>
2818 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
2819 needed to manage
2820 </TD>
2821 </TR>
2822 </TABLE>
2823
2824 <P>Each level implies all lower levels of access. So, for example, granting someone <TT>write</TT> access to an entry also grants them <TT>read</TT>, <TT>search</TT>, <TT>compare</TT>, <TT>auth</TT> and <TT>disclose</TT> access.  However, one may use the privileges specifier to grant specific permissions.</P>
2825 <H3><A NAME="Access Control Evaluation">7.2.4. Access Control Evaluation</A></H3>
2826 <P>When evaluating whether some requester should be given access to an entry and/or attribute, slapd compares the entry and/or attribute to the <TT>&lt;what&gt;</TT> selectors given in the configuration file. For each entry, access controls provided in the database which holds the entry (or the first database if not held in any database) apply first, followed by the global access directives.  Within this priority, access directives are examined in the order in which they appear in the config file.  Slapd stops with the first <TT>&lt;what&gt;</TT> selector that matches the entry and/or attribute. The corresponding access directive is the one slapd will use to evaluate access.</P>
2827 <P>Next, slapd compares the entity requesting access to the <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> selectors within the access directive selected above in the order in which they appear. It stops with the first <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> selector that matches the requester. This determines the access the entity requesting access has to the entry and/or attribute.</P>
2828 <P>Finally, slapd compares the access granted in the selected <TT>&lt;access&gt;</TT> clause to the access requested by the client. If it allows greater or equal access, access is granted. Otherwise, access is denied.</P>
2829 <P>The order of evaluation of access directives makes their placement in the configuration file important. If one access directive is more specific than another in terms of the entries it selects, it should appear first in the config file. Similarly, if one <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> selector is more specific than another it should come first in the access directive. The access control examples given below should help make this clear.</P>
2830 <H3><A NAME="Access Control Examples">7.2.5. Access Control Examples</A></H3>
2831 <P>The access control facility described above is quite powerful.  This section shows some examples of its use for descriptive purposes.</P>
2832 <P>A simple example:</P>
2833 <PRE>
2834     access to * by * read
2835 </PRE>
2836 <P>This access directive grants read access to everyone.</P>
2837 <PRE>
2838     access to *
2839         by self write
2840         by anonymous auth
2841         by * read
2842 </PRE>
2843 <P>This directive allows the user to modify their entry, allows anonymous to authentication against these entries, and allows all others to read these entries.  Note that only the first <TT>by &lt;who&gt;</TT> clause which matches applies.  Hence, the anonymous users are granted <TT>auth</TT>, not <TT>read</TT>.  The last clause could just as well have been &quot;<TT>by users read</TT>&quot;.</P>
2844 <P>It is often desirable to restrict operations based upon the level of protection in place.  The following shows how security strength factors (SSF) can be used.</P>
2845 <PRE>
2846     access to *
2847         by ssf=128 self write
2848         by ssf=64 anonymous auth
2849         by ssf=64 users read
2850 </PRE>
2851 <P>This directive allows users to modify their own entries if security protections have of strength 128 or better have been established, allows authentication access to anonymous users, and read access when 64 or better security protections have been established.  If client has not establish sufficient security protections, the implicit <TT>by * none</TT> clause would be applied.</P>
2852 <P>The following example shows the use of a style specifiers to select the entries by DN in two access directives where ordering is significant.</P>
2853 <PRE>
2854     access to dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
2855          by * search
2856     access to dn.children=&quot;dc=com&quot;
2857          by * read
2858 </PRE>
2859 <P>Read access is granted to entries under the <TT>dc=com</TT> subtree, except for those entries under the <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> subtree, to which search access is granted.  No access is granted to <TT>dc=com</TT> as neither access directive matches this DN.  If the order of these access directives was reversed, the trailing directive would never be reached, since all entries under <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> are also under <TT>dc=com</TT> entries.</P>
2860 <P>Also note that if no <TT>access to</TT> directive matches or no <TT>by &lt;who&gt;</TT> clause, <B>access is denied</B>.  That is, every <TT>access to</TT> directive ends with an implicit <TT>by * none</TT> clause and every access list ends with an implicit <TT>access to * by * none</TT> directive.</P>
2861 <P>The next example again shows the importance of ordering, both of the access directives and the <TT>by &lt;who&gt;</TT> clauses.  It also shows the use of an attribute selector to grant access to a specific attribute and various <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> selectors.</P>
2862 <PRE>
2863     access to dn.subtree=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; attrs=homePhone
2864         by self write
2865         by dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; search
2866         by peername.regex=IP:10\..+ read
2867     access to dn.subtree=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
2868         by self write
2869         by dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; search
2870         by anonymous auth
2871 </PRE>
2872 <P>This example applies to entries in the &quot;<TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT>&quot; subtree. To all attributes except <TT>homePhone</TT>, an entry can write to itself, entries under <TT>example.com</TT> entries can search by them, anybody else has no access (implicit <TT>by * none</TT>) excepting for authentication/authorization (which is always done anonymously).  The <TT>homePhone</TT> attribute is writable by the entry, searchable by entries under <TT>example.com</TT>, readable by clients connecting from network 10, and otherwise not readable (implicit <TT>by * none</TT>).  All other access is denied by the implicit <TT>access to * by * none</TT>.</P>
2873 <P>Sometimes it is useful to permit a particular DN to add or remove itself from an attribute. For example, if you would like to create a group and allow people to add and remove only their own DN from the member attribute, you could accomplish it with an access directive like this:</P>
2874 <PRE>
2875     access to attrs=member,entry
2876          by dnattr=member selfwrite
2877 </PRE>
2878 <P>The dnattr <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> selector says that the access applies to entries listed in the <TT>member</TT> attribute. The <TT>selfwrite</TT> access selector says that such members can only add or delete their own DN from the attribute, not other values. The addition of the entry attribute is required because access to the entry is required to access any of the entry's attributes.</P>
2879 <H3><A NAME="Configuration File Example">7.2.6. Configuration File Example</A></H3>
2880 <P>The following is an example configuration file, interspersed with explanatory text. It defines two databases to handle different parts of the <TERM>X.500</TERM> tree; both are <TERM>BDB</TERM> database instances. The line numbers shown are provided for reference only and are not included in the actual file. First, the global configuration section:</P>
2881 <PRE>
2882   1.    # example config file - global configuration section
2883   2.    include /usr/local/etc/schema/core.schema
2884   3.    referral ldap://root.openldap.org
2885   4.    access to * by * read
2886 </PRE>
2887 <P>Line 1 is a comment. Line 2 includes another config file which contains <EM>core</EM> schema definitions. The <TT>referral</TT> directive on line 3 means that queries not local to one of the databases defined below will be referred to the LDAP server running on the standard port (389) at the host <TT>root.openldap.org</TT>.</P>
2888 <P>Line 4 is a global access control.  It applies to all entries (after any applicable database-specific access controls).</P>
2889 <P>The next section of the configuration file defines a BDB backend that will handle queries for things in the &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; portion of the tree. The database is to be replicated to two slave slapds, one on truelies, the other on judgmentday. Indices are to be maintained for several attributes, and the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute is to be protected from unauthorized access.</P>
2890 <PRE>
2891   5.    # BDB definition for the example.com
2892   6.    database bdb
2893   7.    suffix &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
2894   8.    directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data
2895   9.    rootdn &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
2896  10.    rootpw secret
2897  11.    # indexed attribute definitions
2898  12.    index uid pres,eq
2899  13.    index cn,sn,uid pres,eq,approx,sub
2900  14.    index objectClass eq
2901  15.    # database access control definitions
2902  16.    access to attrs=userPassword
2903  17.        by self write
2904  18.        by anonymous auth
2905  19.        by dn.base=&quot;cn=Admin,dc=example,dc=com&quot; write
2906  20.        by * none
2907  21.    access to *
2908  22.        by self write
2909  23.        by dn.base=&quot;cn=Admin,dc=example,dc=com&quot; write
2910  24.        by * read
2911 </PRE>
2912 <P>Line 5 is a comment. The start of the database definition is marked by the database keyword on line 6. Line 7 specifies the DN suffix for queries to pass to this database. Line 8 specifies the directory in which the database files will live.</P>
2913 <P>Lines 9 and 10 identify the database <EM>super-user</EM> entry and associated password. This entry is not subject to access control or size or time limit restrictions.</P>
2914 <P>Lines 12 through 14 indicate the indices to maintain for various attributes.</P>
2915 <P>Lines 16 through 24 specify access control for entries in this database.  As this is the first database, the controls also apply to entries not held in any database (such as the Root DSE).  For all applicable entries, the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute is writable by the entry itself and by the &quot;admin&quot; entry.  It may be used for authentication/authorization purposes, but is otherwise not readable. All other attributes are writable by the entry and the &quot;admin&quot; entry, but may be read by all users (authenticated or not).</P>
2916 <P>The next section of the example configuration file defines another BDB database. This one handles queries involving the <TT>dc=example,dc=net</TT> subtree but is managed by the same entity as the first database.  Note that without line 39, the read access would be allowed due to the global access rule at line 4.</P>
2917 <PRE>
2918  33.    # BDB definition for example.net
2919  34.    database bdb
2920  35.    suffix &quot;dc=example,dc=net&quot;
2921  36.    directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data-net
2922  37.    rootdn &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
2923  38.    index objectClass eq
2924  39.    access to * by users read
2925 </PRE>
2926 <H2><A NAME="Access Control via Dynamic Configuration">7.3. Access Control via Dynamic Configuration</A></H2>
2927 <P>Access to slapd entries and attributes is controlled by the olcAccess attribute, whose values are a sequence of access directives. The general form of the olcAccess configuration is:</P>
2928 <PRE>
2929     olcAccess: &lt;access directive&gt;
2930     &lt;access directive&gt; ::= to &lt;what&gt;
2931         [by &lt;who&gt; [&lt;access&gt;] [&lt;control&gt;] ]+
2932     &lt;what&gt; ::= * |
2933         [dn[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt; | dn.&lt;scope-style&gt;=&lt;DN&gt;]
2934         [filter=&lt;ldapfilter&gt;] [attrs=&lt;attrlist&gt;]
2935     &lt;basic-style&gt; ::= regex | exact
2936     &lt;scope-style&gt; ::= base | one | subtree | children
2937     &lt;attrlist&gt; ::= &lt;attr&gt; [val[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;] | &lt;attr&gt; , &lt;attrlist&gt;
2938     &lt;attr&gt; ::= &lt;attrname&gt; | entry | children
2939     &lt;who&gt; ::= * | [anonymous | users | self
2940             | dn[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt; | dn.&lt;scope-style&gt;=&lt;DN&gt;]
2941         [dnattr=&lt;attrname&gt;]
2942         [group[/&lt;objectclass&gt;[/&lt;attrname&gt;][.&lt;basic-style&gt;]]=&lt;regex&gt;]
2943         [peername[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;]
2944         [sockname[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;]
2945         [domain[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;]
2946         [sockurl[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;]
2947         [set=&lt;setspec&gt;]
2948         [aci=&lt;attrname&gt;]
2949     &lt;access&gt; ::= [self]{&lt;level&gt;|&lt;priv&gt;}
2950     &lt;level&gt; ::= none | disclose | auth | compare | search | read | write | manage
2951     &lt;priv&gt; ::= {=|+|-}{m|w|r|s|c|x|d|0}+
2952     &lt;control&gt; ::= [stop | continue | break]
2953 </PRE>
2954 <P>where the &lt;what&gt; part selects the entries and/or attributes to which the access applies, the <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> part specifies which entities are granted access, and the <TT>&lt;access&gt;</TT> part specifies the access granted. Multiple <TT>&lt;who&gt; &lt;access&gt; &lt;control&gt;</TT> triplets are supported, allowing many entities to be granted different access to the same set of entries and attributes. Not all of these access control options are described here; for more details see the <EM>slapd.access</EM>(5) man page.</P>
2955 <H3><A NAME="What to control access to">7.3.1. What to control access to</A></H3>
2956 <P>The &lt;what&gt; part of an access specification determines the entries and attributes to which the access control applies.  Entries are commonly selected in two ways: by DN and by filter.  The following qualifiers select entries by DN:</P>
2957 <PRE>
2958     to *
2959     to dn[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;
2960     to dn.&lt;scope-style&gt;=&lt;DN&gt;
2961 </PRE>
2962 <P>The first form is used to select all entries.  The second form may be used to select entries by matching a regular expression against the target entry's <EM>normalized DN</EM>.   (The second form is not discussed further in this document.)  The third form is used to select entries which are within the requested scope of DN.  The &lt;DN&gt; is a string representation of the Distinguished Name, as described in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt">RFC4514</A>.</P>
2963 <P>The scope can be either <TT>base</TT>, <TT>one</TT>, <TT>subtree</TT>, or <TT>children</TT>.  Where <TT>base</TT> matches only the entry with provided DN, <TT>one</TT> matches the entries whose parent is the provided DN, <TT>subtree</TT> matches all entries in the subtree whose root is the provided DN, and <TT>children</TT> matches all entries under the DN (but not the entry named by the DN).</P>
2964 <P>For example, if the directory contained entries named:</P>
2965 <PRE>
2966     0: o=suffix
2967     1: cn=Manager,o=suffix
2968     2: ou=people,o=suffix
2969     3: uid=kdz,ou=people,o=suffix
2970     4: cn=addresses,uid=kdz,ou=people,o=suffix
2971     5: uid=hyc,ou=people,o=suffix
2972 </PRE>
2973 <P>Then:</P>
2974 <UL>
2975 <TT>dn.base=&quot;ou=people,o=suffix&quot;</TT> match 2;
2976 <BR>
2977 <TT>dn.one=&quot;ou=people,o=suffix&quot;</TT> match 3, and 5;
2978 <BR>
2979 <TT>dn.subtree=&quot;ou=people,o=suffix&quot;</TT> match 2, 3, 4, and 5; and
2980 <BR>
2981 <TT>dn.children=&quot;ou=people,o=suffix&quot;</TT> match 3, 4, and 5.</UL>
2982 <P>Entries may also be selected using a filter:</P>
2983 <PRE>
2984     to filter=&lt;ldap filter&gt;
2985 </PRE>
2986 <P>where &lt;ldap filter&gt; is a string representation of an LDAP search filter, as described in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt">RFC4515</A>.  For example:</P>
2987 <PRE>
2988     to filter=(objectClass=person)
2989 </PRE>
2990 <P>Note that entries may be selected by both DN and filter by including both qualifiers in the &lt;what&gt; clause.</P>
2991 <PRE>
2992     to dn.one=&quot;ou=people,o=suffix&quot; filter=(objectClass=person)
2993 </PRE>
2994 <P>Attributes within an entry are selected by including a comma-separated list of attribute names in the &lt;what&gt; selector:</P>
2995 <PRE>
2996     attrs=&lt;attribute list&gt;
2997 </PRE>
2998 <P>A specific value of an attribute is selected by using a single attribute name and also using a value selector:</P>
2999 <PRE>
3000     attrs=&lt;attribute&gt; val[.&lt;style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;
3001 </PRE>
3002 <P>There are two special <EM>pseudo</EM> attributes <TT>entry</TT> and <TT>children</TT>.  To read (and hence return) a target entry, the subject must have <TT>read</TT> access to the target's <EM>entry</EM> attribute.  To perform a search, the subject must have <TT>search</TT> access to the search base's <EM>entry</EM> attribute. To add or delete an entry, the subject must have <TT>write</TT> access to the entry's <TT>entry</TT> attribute AND must have <TT>write</TT> access to the entry's parent's <TT>children</TT> attribute.  To rename an entry, the subject must have <TT>write</TT> access to entry's <TT>entry</TT> attribute AND have <TT>write</TT> access to both the old parent's and new parent's <TT>children</TT> attributes.  The complete examples at the end of this section should help clear things up.</P>
3003 <P>Lastly, there is a special entry selector <TT>&quot;*&quot;</TT> that is used to select any entry.  It is used when no other <TT>&lt;what&gt;</TT> selector has been provided.  It's equivalent to &quot;<TT>dn=.*</TT>&quot;</P>
3004 <H3><A NAME="Who to grant access to">7.3.2. Who to grant access to</A></H3>
3005 <P>The &lt;who&gt; part identifies the entity or entities being granted access. Note that access is granted to &quot;entities&quot; not &quot;entries.&quot; The following table summarizes entity specifiers:</P>
3006 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
3007 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 5.3: Access Entity Specifiers</CAPTION>
3008 <TR CLASS="heading">
3009 <TD>
3010 <STRONG>Specifier</STRONG>
3011 </TD>
3012 <TD>
3013 <STRONG>Entities</STRONG>
3014 </TD>
3015 </TR>
3016 <TR>
3017 <TD>
3018 <TT>*</TT>
3019 </TD>
3020 <TD>
3021 All, including anonymous and authenticated users
3022 </TD>
3023 </TR>
3024 <TR>
3025 <TD>
3026 <TT>anonymous</TT>
3027 </TD>
3028 <TD>
3029 Anonymous (non-authenticated) users
3030 </TD>
3031 </TR>
3032 <TR>
3033 <TD>
3034 <TT>users</TT>
3035 </TD>
3036 <TD>
3037 Authenticated users
3038 </TD>
3039 </TR>
3040 <TR>
3041 <TD>
3042 <TT>self</TT>
3043 </TD>
3044 <TD>
3045 User associated with target entry
3046 </TD>
3047 </TR>
3048 <TR>
3049 <TD>
3050 <TT>dn[.&lt;basic-style&gt;]=&lt;regex&gt;</TT>
3051 </TD>
3052 <TD>
3053 Users matching a regular expression
3054 </TD>
3055 </TR>
3056 <TR>
3057 <TD>
3058 <TT>dn.&lt;scope-style&gt;=&lt;DN&gt;</TT>
3059 </TD>
3060 <TD>
3061 Users within scope of a DN
3062 </TD>
3063 </TR>
3064 </TABLE>
3065
3066 <P>The DN specifier behaves much like &lt;what&gt; clause DN specifiers.</P>
3067 <P>Other control factors are also supported.  For example, a <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> can be restricted by an entry listed in a DN-valued attribute in the entry to which the access applies:</P>
3068 <PRE>
3069     dnattr=&lt;dn-valued attribute name&gt;
3070 </PRE>
3071 <P>The dnattr specification is used to give access to an entry whose DN is listed in an attribute of the entry (e.g., give access to a group entry to whoever is listed as the owner of the group entry).</P>
3072 <P>Some factors may not be appropriate in all environments (or any). For example, the domain factor relies on IP to domain name lookups. As these can easily be spoofed, the domain factor should be avoided.</P>
3073 <H3><A NAME="The access to grant">7.3.3. The access to grant</A></H3>
3074 <P>The kind of &lt;access&gt; granted can be one of the following:</P>
3075 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
3076 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 5.4: Access Levels</CAPTION>
3077 <TR CLASS="heading">
3078 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3079 <STRONG>Level</STRONG>
3080 </TD>
3081 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3082 <STRONG>Privileges</STRONG>
3083 </TD>
3084 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3085 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
3086 </TD>
3087 </TR>
3088 <TR>
3089 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3090 <TT>none</TT>
3091 </TD>
3092 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3093 <TT>=0</TT>
3094 </TD>
3095 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3096 no access
3097 </TD>
3098 </TR>
3099 <TR>
3100 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3101 <TT>disclose</TT>
3102 </TD>
3103 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3104 <TT>=d</TT>
3105 </TD>
3106 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3107 needed for information disclosure on error
3108 </TD>
3109 </TR>
3110 <TR>
3111 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3112 <TT>auth</TT>
3113 </TD>
3114 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3115 <TT>=dx</TT>
3116 </TD>
3117 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3118 needed to authenticate (bind)
3119 </TD>
3120 </TR>
3121 <TR>
3122 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3123 <TT>compare</TT>
3124 </TD>
3125 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3126 <TT>=cdx</TT>
3127 </TD>
3128 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3129 needed to compare
3130 </TD>
3131 </TR>
3132 <TR>
3133 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3134 <TT>search</TT>
3135 </TD>
3136 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3137 <TT>=scdx</TT>
3138 </TD>
3139 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3140 needed to apply search filters
3141 </TD>
3142 </TR>
3143 <TR>
3144 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3145 <TT>read</TT>
3146 </TD>
3147 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3148 <TT>=rscdx</TT>
3149 </TD>
3150 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3151 needed to read search results
3152 </TD>
3153 </TR>
3154 <TR>
3155 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3156 <TT>write</TT>
3157 </TD>
3158 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3159 <TT>=wrscdx</TT>
3160 </TD>
3161 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3162 needed to modify/rename
3163 </TD>
3164 </TR>
3165 <TR>
3166 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3167 <TT>manage</TT>
3168 </TD>
3169 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3170 <TT>=mwrscdx</TT>
3171 </TD>
3172 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3173 needed to manage
3174 </TD>
3175 </TR>
3176 </TABLE>
3177
3178 <P>Each level implies all lower levels of access. So, for example, granting someone <TT>write</TT> access to an entry also grants them <TT>read</TT>, <TT>search</TT>, <TT>compare</TT>, <TT>auth</TT> and <TT>disclose</TT> access.  However, one may use the privileges specifier to grant specific permissions.</P>
3179 <H3><A NAME="Access Control Evaluation">7.3.4. Access Control Evaluation</A></H3>
3180 <P>When evaluating whether some requester should be given access to an entry and/or attribute, slapd compares the entry and/or attribute to the <TT>&lt;what&gt;</TT> selectors given in the configuration.  For each entry, access controls provided in the database which holds the entry (or the first database if not held in any database) apply first, followed by the global access directives (which are held in the <TT>frontend</TT> database definition).  Within this priority, access directives are examined in the order in which they appear in the configuration attribute.  Slapd stops with the first <TT>&lt;what&gt;</TT> selector that matches the entry and/or attribute. The corresponding access directive is the one slapd will use to evaluate access.</P>
3181 <P>Next, slapd compares the entity requesting access to the <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> selectors within the access directive selected above in the order in which they appear. It stops with the first <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> selector that matches the requester. This determines the access the entity requesting access has to the entry and/or attribute.</P>
3182 <P>Finally, slapd compares the access granted in the selected <TT>&lt;access&gt;</TT> clause to the access requested by the client. If it allows greater or equal access, access is granted. Otherwise, access is denied.</P>
3183 <P>The order of evaluation of access directives makes their placement in the configuration file important. If one access directive is more specific than another in terms of the entries it selects, it should appear first in the configuration. Similarly, if one <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> selector is more specific than another it should come first in the access directive. The access control examples given below should help make this clear.</P>
3184 <H3><A NAME="Access Control Examples">7.3.5. Access Control Examples</A></H3>
3185 <P>The access control facility described above is quite powerful.  This section shows some examples of its use for descriptive purposes.</P>
3186 <P>A simple example:</P>
3187 <PRE>
3188     olcAccess: to * by * read
3189 </PRE>
3190 <P>This access directive grants read access to everyone.</P>
3191 <PRE>
3192     olcAccess: to *
3193         by self write
3194         by anonymous auth
3195         by * read
3196 </PRE>
3197 <P>This directive allows the user to modify their entry, allows anonymous to authenticate against these entries, and allows all others to read these entries.  Note that only the first <TT>by &lt;who&gt;</TT> clause which matches applies.  Hence, the anonymous users are granted <TT>auth</TT>, not <TT>read</TT>.  The last clause could just as well have been &quot;<TT>by users read</TT>&quot;.</P>
3198 <P>It is often desirable to restrict operations based upon the level of protection in place.  The following shows how security strength factors (SSF) can be used.</P>
3199 <PRE>
3200     olcAccess: to *
3201         by ssf=128 self write
3202         by ssf=64 anonymous auth
3203         by ssf=64 users read
3204 </PRE>
3205 <P>This directive allows users to modify their own entries if security protections of strength 128 or better have been established, allows authentication access to anonymous users, and read access when strength 64 or better security protections have been established.  If the client has not establish sufficient security protections, the implicit <TT>by * none</TT> clause would be applied.</P>
3206 <P>The following example shows the use of style specifiers to select the entries by DN in two access directives where ordering is significant.</P>
3207 <PRE>
3208     olcAccess: to dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3209          by * search
3210     olcAccess: to dn.children=&quot;dc=com&quot;
3211          by * read
3212 </PRE>
3213 <P>Read access is granted to entries under the <TT>dc=com</TT> subtree, except for those entries under the <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> subtree, to which search access is granted.  No access is granted to <TT>dc=com</TT> as neither access directive matches this DN.  If the order of these access directives was reversed, the trailing directive would never be reached, since all entries under <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> are also under <TT>dc=com</TT> entries.</P>
3214 <P>Also note that if no <TT>olcAccess: to</TT> directive matches or no <TT>by &lt;who&gt;</TT> clause, <B>access is denied</B>.  That is, every <TT>olcAccess: to</TT> directive ends with an implicit <TT>by * none</TT> clause and every access list ends with an implicit <TT>olcAccess: to * by * none</TT> directive.</P>
3215 <P>The next example again shows the importance of ordering, both of the access directives and the <TT>by &lt;who&gt;</TT> clauses.  It also shows the use of an attribute selector to grant access to a specific attribute and various <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> selectors.</P>
3216 <PRE>
3217     olcAccess: to dn.subtree=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; attrs=homePhone
3218         by self write
3219         by dn.children=dc=example,dc=com&quot; search
3220         by peername.regex=IP:10\..+ read
3221     olcAccess: to dn.subtree=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3222         by self write
3223         by dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; search
3224         by anonymous auth
3225 </PRE>
3226 <P>This example applies to entries in the &quot;<TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT>&quot; subtree. To all attributes except <TT>homePhone</TT>, an entry can write to itself, entries under <TT>example.com</TT> entries can search by them, anybody else has no access (implicit <TT>by * none</TT>) excepting for authentication/authorization (which is always done anonymously).  The <TT>homePhone</TT> attribute is writable by the entry, searchable by entries under <TT>example.com</TT>, readable by clients connecting from network 10, and otherwise not readable (implicit <TT>by * none</TT>).  All other access is denied by the implicit <TT>access to * by * none</TT>.</P>
3227 <P>Sometimes it is useful to permit a particular DN to add or remove itself from an attribute. For example, if you would like to create a group and allow people to add and remove only their own DN from the member attribute, you could accomplish it with an access directive like this:</P>
3228 <PRE>
3229     olcAccess: to attrs=member,entry
3230          by dnattr=member selfwrite
3231 </PRE>
3232 <P>The dnattr <TT>&lt;who&gt;</TT> selector says that the access applies to entries listed in the <TT>member</TT> attribute. The <TT>selfwrite</TT> access selector says that such members can only add or delete their own DN from the attribute, not other values. The addition of the entry attribute is required because access to the entry is required to access any of the entry's attributes.</P>
3233 <H3><A NAME="Access Control Ordering">7.3.6. Access Control Ordering</A></H3>
3234 <P>Since the ordering of <TT>olcAccess</TT> directives is essential to their proper evaluation, but LDAP attributes normally do not preserve the ordering of their values, OpenLDAP uses a custom schema extension to maintain a fixed ordering of these values. This ordering is maintained by prepending a <TT>&quot;{X}&quot;</TT> numeric index to each value, similarly to the approach used for ordering the configuration entries. These index tags are maintained automatically by slapd and do not need to be specified when originally defining the values. For example, when you create the settings</P>
3235 <PRE>
3236     olcAccess: to attrs=member,entry
3237          by dnattr=member selfwrite
3238     olcAccess: to dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3239          by * search
3240     olcAccess: to dn.children=&quot;dc=com&quot;
3241          by * read
3242 </PRE>
3243 <P>when you read them back using slapcat or ldapsearch they will contain</P>
3244 <PRE>
3245     olcAccess: {0}to attrs=member,entry
3246          by dnattr=member selfwrite
3247     olcAccess: {1}to dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3248          by * search
3249     olcAccess: {2}to dn.children=&quot;dc=com&quot;
3250          by * read
3251 </PRE>
3252 <P>The numeric index may be used to specify a particular value to change when using ldapmodify to edit the access rules. This index can be used instead of (or in addition to) the actual access value. Using this numeric index is very helpful when multiple access rules are being managed.</P>
3253 <P>For example, if we needed to change the second rule above to grant write access instead of search, we could try this LDIF:</P>
3254 <PRE>
3255     changetype: modify
3256     delete: olcAccess
3257     olcAccess: to dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; by * search
3258     -
3259     add: olcAccess
3260     olcAccess: to dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; by * write
3261     -
3262 </PRE>
3263 <P>But this example <B>will not</B> guarantee that the existing values remain in their original order, so it will most likely yield a broken security configuration. Instead, the numeric index should be used:</P>
3264 <PRE>
3265     changetype: modify
3266     delete: olcAccess
3267     olcAccess: {1}
3268     -
3269     add: olcAccess
3270     olcAccess: {1}to dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; by * write
3271     -
3272 </PRE>
3273 <P>This example deletes whatever rule is in value #1 of the <TT>olcAccess</TT> attribute (regardless of its value) and adds a new value that is explicitly inserted as value #1. The result will be</P>
3274 <PRE>
3275     olcAccess: {0}to attrs=member,entry
3276          by dnattr=member selfwrite
3277     olcAccess: {1}to dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3278          by * write
3279     olcAccess: {2}to dn.children=&quot;dc=com&quot;
3280          by * read
3281 </PRE>
3282 <P>which is exactly what was intended.</P>
3283 <H3><A NAME="Configuration Example">7.3.7. Configuration Example</A></H3>
3284 <P>The following is an example configuration, interspersed with explanatory text. It defines two databases to handle different parts of the <TERM>X.500</TERM> tree; both are <TERM>BDB</TERM> database instances. The line numbers shown are provided for reference only and are not included in the actual file. First, the global configuration section:</P>
3285 <PRE>
3286   1.    # example config file - global configuration entry
3287   2.    dn: cn=config
3288   3.    objectClass: olcGlobal
3289   4.    cn: config
3290   5.    olcReferral: ldap://root.openldap.org
3291   6.
3292 </PRE>
3293 <P>Line 1 is a comment. Lines 2-4 identify this as the global configuration entry. The <TT>olcReferral:</TT> directive on line 5 means that queries not local to one of the databases defined below will be referred to the LDAP server running on the standard port (389) at the host <TT>root.openldap.org</TT>. Line 6 is a blank line, indicating the end of this entry.</P>
3294 <PRE>
3295   7.    # internal schema
3296   8.    dn: cn=schema,cn=config
3297   9.    objectClass: olcSchemaConfig
3298  10.    cn: schema
3299  11.
3300 </PRE>
3301 <P>Line 7 is a comment. Lines 8-10 identify this as the root of the schema subtree. The actual schema definitions in this entry are hardcoded into slapd so no additional attributes are specified here. Line 11 is a blank line, indicating the end of this entry.</P>
3302 <PRE>
3303  12.    # include the core schema
3304  13.    include: file:///usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.ldif
3305  14.
3306 </PRE>
3307 <P>Line 12 is a comment. Line 13 is an LDIF include directive which accesses the <EM>core</EM> schema definitions in LDIF format. Line 14 is a blank line.</P>
3308 <P>Next comes the database definitions. The first database is the special <TT>frontend</TT> database whose settings are applied globally to all the other databases.</P>
3309 <PRE>
3310  15.    # global database parameters
3311  16.    dn: olcDatabase=frontend,cn=config
3312  17.    objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig
3313  18.    olcDatabase: frontend
3314  19.    olcAccess: to * by * read
3315  20.
3316 </PRE>
3317 <P>Line 15 is a comment. Lines 16-18 identify this entry as the global database entry. Line 19 is a global access control. It applies to all entries (after any applicable database-specific access controls).</P>
3318 <P>The next entry defines a BDB backend that will handle queries for things in the &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; portion of the tree. Indices are to be maintained for several attributes, and the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute is to be protected from unauthorized access.</P>
3319 <PRE>
3320  21.    # BDB definition for example.com
3321  22.    dn: olcDatabase=bdb,cn=config
3322  23.    objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig
3323  24.    objectClass: olcBdbConfig
3324  25.    olcDatabase: bdb
3325  26.    olcSuffix: &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3326  27.    olcDbDirectory: /usr/local/var/openldap-data
3327  28.    olcRootDN: &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3328  29.    olcRootPW: secret
3329  30.    olcDbIndex: uid pres,eq
3330  31.    olcDbIndex: cn,sn,uid pres,eq,approx,sub
3331  32.    olcDbIndex: objectClass eq
3332  33.    olcAccess: to attrs=userPassword
3333  34.      by self write
3334  35.      by anonymous auth
3335  36.      by dn.base=&quot;cn=Admin,dc=example,dc=com&quot; write
3336  37.      by * none
3337  38.    olcAccess: to *
3338  39.      by self write
3339  40.      by dn.base=&quot;cn=Admin,dc=example,dc=com&quot; write
3340  41.      by * read
3341  42.
3342 </PRE>
3343 <P>Line 21 is a comment. Lines 22-25 identify this entry as a BDB database configuration entry.  Line 26 specifies the DN suffix for queries to pass to this database. Line 27 specifies the directory in which the database files will live.</P>
3344 <P>Lines 28 and 29 identify the database <EM>super-user</EM> entry and associated password. This entry is not subject to access control or size or time limit restrictions.</P>
3345 <P>Lines 30 through 32 indicate the indices to maintain for various attributes.</P>
3346 <P>Lines 33 through 41 specify access control for entries in this database.  As this is the first database, the controls also apply to entries not held in any database (such as the Root DSE).  For all applicable entries, the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute is writable by the entry itself and by the &quot;admin&quot; entry.  It may be used for authentication/authorization purposes, but is otherwise not readable. All other attributes are writable by the entry and the &quot;admin&quot; entry, but may be read by all users (authenticated or not).</P>
3347 <P>Line 42 is a blank line, indicating the end of this entry.</P>
3348 <P>The next section of the example configuration file defines another BDB database. This one handles queries involving the <TT>dc=example,dc=net</TT> subtree but is managed by the same entity as the first database.  Note that without line 52, the read access would be allowed due to the global access rule at line 19.</P>
3349 <PRE>
3350  43.    # BDB definition for example.net
3351  44.    dn: olcDatabase=bdb,cn=config
3352  45.    objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig
3353  46.    objectClass: olcBdbConfig
3354  47.    olcDatabase: bdb
3355  48.    olcSuffix: &quot;dc=example,dc=net&quot;
3356  49.    olcDbDirectory: /usr/local/var/openldap-data-net
3357  50.    olcRootDN: &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3358  51.    olcDbIndex: objectClass eq
3359  52.    olcAccess: to * by users read
3360 </PRE>
3361 <H3><A NAME="Converting from {{slapd.conf}}(5) to a {{B:cn=config}} directory format">7.3.8. Converting from <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) to a <B>cn=config</B> directory format</A></H3>
3362 <P>Discuss slap* -f slapd.conf -F slapd.d/  (man slapd-config)</P>
3363 <H2><A NAME="Access Control Common Examples">7.4. Access Control Common Examples</A></H2>
3364 <H3><A NAME="Basic ACLs">7.4.1. Basic ACLs</A></H3>
3365 <P>Generally one should start with some basic ACLs such as:</P>
3366 <PRE>
3367     access to attr=userPassword
3368         by self =xw
3369         by anonymous auth
3370         by * none
3371
3372
3373       access to *
3374         by self write
3375         by users read
3376         by * none
3377 </PRE>
3378 <P>The first ACL allows users to update (but not read) their passwords, anonymous users to authenticate against this attribute, and (implicitly) denying all access to others.</P>
3379 <P>The second ACL allows users full access to their entry, authenticated users read access to anything, and (implicitly) denying all access to others (in this case, anonymous users).</P>
3380 <H3><A NAME="Matching Anonymous and Authenticated users">7.4.2. Matching Anonymous and Authenticated users</A></H3>
3381 <P>An anonymous user has a empty DN. While the <EM>dn.exact=&quot;&quot;</EM> or <EM>dn.regex=&quot;^$&quot;</EM> could be used, <EM>slapd</EM>(8)) offers an anonymous shorthand which should be used instead.</P>
3382 <PRE>
3383     access to *
3384       by anonymous none
3385       by * read
3386 </PRE>
3387 <P>denies all access to anonymous users while granting others read.</P>
3388 <P>Authenticated users have a subject DN. While <EM>dn.regex=&quot;.+&quot;</EM> will match any authenticated user, OpenLDAP provides the users short hand which should be used instead.</P>
3389 <PRE>
3390     access to *
3391       by users read
3392       by * none
3393 </PRE>
3394 <P>This ACL grants read permissions to authenticated users while denying others (i.e.: anonymous users).</P>
3395 <H3><A NAME="Controlling rootdn access">7.4.3. Controlling rootdn access</A></H3>
3396 <P>You could specify the <EM>rootdn</EM> in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) or {[slapd.d}} without specifying a <EM>rootpw</EM>. Then you have to add an actual directory entry with the same dn, e.g.:</P>
3397 <PRE>
3398     dn: cn=Manager,o=MyOrganization
3399     cn: Manager
3400     sn: Manager
3401     objectClass: person
3402     objectClass: top
3403     userPassword: {SSHA}someSSHAdata
3404 </PRE>
3405 <P>Then binding as the <EM>rootdn</EM> will require a regular bind to that DN, which in turn requires auth access to that entry's DN and <EM>userPassword</EM>, and this can be restricted via ACLs. E.g.:</P>
3406 <PRE>
3407     access to dn.base=&quot;cn=Manager,o=MyOrganization&quot;
3408       by peername.regex=127\.0\.0\.1 auth
3409       by peername.regex=192\.168\.0\..* auth
3410       by users none
3411       by * none
3412 </PRE>
3413 <P>The ACLs above will only allow binding using rootdn from localhost and 192.168.0.0/24.</P>
3414 <H3><A NAME="Managing access with Groups">7.4.4. Managing access with Groups</A></H3>
3415 <P>There are a few ways to do this. One approach is illustrated here. Consider the following DIT layout:</P>
3416 <PRE>
3417     +-dc=example,dc=com
3418     +---cn=administrators,dc=example,dc=com
3419     +---cn=fred blogs,dc=example,dc=com
3420 </PRE>
3421 <P>and the following group object (in LDIF format):</P>
3422 <PRE>
3423     dn: cn=administrators,dc=example,dc=com
3424     cn: administrators of this region
3425     objectclass: groupOfNames  (important for the group acl feature)
3426     member: cn=fred blogs,dc=example,dc=com
3427     member: cn=somebody else,dc=example,dc=com
3428 </PRE>
3429 <P>One can then grant access to the members of this this group by adding appropriate <EM>by group</EM> clause to an access directive in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5). For instance,</P>
3430 <PRE>
3431     access to dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3432         by self write
3433         by group.exact=&quot;cn=Administrators,dc=example,dc=com&quot; write
3434         by * auth
3435 </PRE>
3436 <P>Like by {[dn}} clauses, one can also use <EM>expand</EM> to expand the group name based upon the regular expression matching of the target, that is, the to <EM>dn.regex</EM>). For instance,</P>
3437 <PRE>
3438     access to dn.regex=&quot;(.+,)?ou=People,(dc=[^,]+,dc=[^,]+)$&quot;
3439              attrs=children,entry,uid
3440         by group.expand=&quot;cn=Managers,$2&quot; write
3441         by users read
3442         by * auth
3443 </PRE>
3444 <P>The above illustration assumed that the group members are to be found in the <EM>member</EM> attribute type of the <EM>groupOfNames</EM> object class. If you need to use a different group object and/or a different attribute type then use the following <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) (abbreviated) syntax:</P>
3445 <PRE>
3446     access to &lt;what&gt;
3447             by group/&lt;objectclass&gt;/&lt;attributename&gt;=&lt;DN&gt; &lt;access&gt;
3448 </PRE>
3449 <P>For example:</P>
3450 <PRE>
3451     access to *
3452       by group/organizationalRole/roleOccupant=&quot;cn=Administrator,dc=example,dc=com&quot; write
3453 </PRE>
3454 <P>In this case, we have an ObjectClass <EM>organizationalRole</EM> which contains the administrator DN's in the <EM>roleOccupant</EM> attribute. For instance:</P>
3455 <PRE>
3456     dn: cn=Administrator,dc=example,dc=com
3457     cn: Administrator
3458     objectclass: organizationalRole
3459     roleOccupant: cn=Jane Doe,dc=example,dc=com
3460 </PRE>
3461 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
3462 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>the specified member attribute type MUST be of DN or <EM>NameAndOptionalUID</EM> syntax, and the specified object class SHOULD allow the attribute type.
3463 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
3464 <P>Dynamic Groups are also supported in Access Control. Please see <EM>slapo-dynlist</EM>(5) and the <A HREF="#Dynamic Lists">Dynamic Lists</A> overlay section.</P>
3465 <H3><A NAME="Granting access to a subset of attributes">7.4.5. Granting access to a subset of attributes</A></H3>
3466 <P>You can grant access to a set of attributes by specifying a list of attribute names in the ACL <EM>to</EM> clause. To be useful, you also need to grant access to the <EM>entry</EM> itself. Also note how <EM>children</EM> controls the ability to add, delete, and rename entries.</P>
3467 <PRE>
3468     # mail: self may write, authenticated users may read
3469     access to attrs=mail
3470       by self write
3471       by users read
3472       by * none
3473
3474     # cn, sn: self my write, all may read
3475     access to attrs=cn,sn
3476       by self write
3477       by * read
3478
3479     # immediate children: only self can add/delete entries under this entry
3480     access to attrs=children
3481       by self write
3482
3483     # entry itself: self may write, all may read
3484     access to attrs=entry
3485       by self write
3486       by * read
3487
3488     # other attributes: self may write, others have no access
3489     access to *
3490       by self write
3491       by * none
3492 </PRE>
3493 <P>ObjectClass names may also be specified in this list, which will affect all the attributes that are required and/or allowed by that <EM>objectClass</EM>. Actually, names in <EM>attrlist</EM> that are prefixed by <EM>@</EM> are directly treated as objectClass names. A name prefixed by <EM>!</EM> is also treated as an objectClass, but in this case the access rule affects the attributes that are not required nor allowed by that <EM>objectClass</EM>.</P>
3494 <H3><A NAME="Allowing a user write to all entries below theirs">7.4.6. Allowing a user write to all entries below theirs</A></H3>
3495 <P>For a setup where a user can write to its own record and to all of its children:</P>
3496 <PRE>
3497     access to dn.regex=&quot;(.+,)?(uid=[^,]+,o=Company)$&quot;
3498        by dn.exact,expand=&quot;$2&quot; write
3499        by anonymous auth
3500 </PRE>
3501 <P>(Add more examples for above)</P>
3502 <H3><A NAME="Allowing entry creation">7.4.7. Allowing entry creation</A></H3>
3503 <P>Let's say, you have it like this:</P>
3504 <PRE>
3505         o=&lt;basedn&gt;
3506             ou=domains
3507                 associatedDomain=&lt;somedomain&gt;
3508                     ou=users
3509                         uid=&lt;someuserid&gt;
3510                         uid=&lt;someotheruserid&gt;
3511                     ou=addressbooks
3512                         uid=&lt;someuserid&gt;
3513                             cn=&lt;someone&gt;
3514                             cn=&lt;someoneelse&gt;
3515 </PRE>
3516 <P>and, for another domain &lt;someotherdomain&gt;:</P>
3517 <PRE>
3518         o=&lt;basedn&gt;
3519             ou=domains
3520                 associatedDomain=&lt;someotherdomain&gt;
3521                     ou=users
3522                         uid=&lt;someuserid&gt;
3523                         uid=&lt;someotheruserid&gt;
3524                     ou=addressbooks
3525                         uid=&lt;someotheruserid&gt;
3526                             cn=&lt;someone&gt;
3527                             cn=&lt;someoneelse&gt;
3528 </PRE>
3529 <P>then, if you wanted user <EM>uid=&lt;someuserid&gt;</EM> to <B>ONLY</B> create an entry for its own thing, you could write an ACL like this:</P>
3530 <PRE>
3531     # this rule lets users of &quot;associatedDomain=&lt;matcheddomain&gt;&quot;
3532     # write under &quot;ou=addressbook,associatedDomain=&lt;matcheddomain&gt;,ou=domains,o=&lt;basedn&gt;&quot;,
3533     # i.e. a user can write ANY entry below its domain's address book;
3534     # this permission is necessary, but not sufficient, the next
3535     # will restrict this permission further
3536
3537
3538     access to dn.regex=&quot;^ou=addressbook,associatedDomain=([^,]+),ou=domains,o=&lt;basedn&gt;$&quot; attrs=children
3539             by dn.regex=&quot;^uid=([^,]+),ou=users,associatedDomain=$1,ou=domains,o=&lt;basedn&gt;$$&quot; write
3540             by * none
3541
3542
3543     # Note that above the &quot;by&quot; clause needs a &quot;regex&quot; style to make sure
3544     # it expands to a DN that starts with a &quot;uid=&lt;someuserid&gt;&quot; pattern
3545     # while substituting the associatedDomain submatch from the &quot;what&quot; clause.
3546
3547
3548     # This rule lets a user with &quot;uid=&lt;matcheduid&gt;&quot; of &quot;&lt;associatedDomain=matcheddomain&gt;&quot;
3549     # write (i.e. add, modify, delete) the entry whose DN is exactly
3550     # &quot;uid=&lt;matcheduid&gt;,ou=addressbook,associatedDomain=&lt;matcheddomain&gt;,ou=domains,o=&lt;basedn&gt;&quot;
3551     # and ANY entry as subtree of it
3552
3553
3554     access to dn.regex=&quot;^(.+,)?uid=([^,]+),ou=addressbook,associatedDomain=([^,]+),ou=domains,o=&lt;basedn&gt;$&quot;
3555             by dn.exact,expand=&quot;uid=$2,ou=users,associatedDomain=$3,ou=domains,o=&lt;basedn&gt;&quot; write
3556             by * none
3557
3558
3559     # Note that above the &quot;by&quot; clause uses the &quot;exact&quot; style with the &quot;expand&quot;
3560     # modifier because now the whole pattern can be rebuilt by means of the
3561     # submatches from the &quot;what&quot; clause, so a &quot;regex&quot; compilation and evaluation
3562     # is no longer required.
3563 </PRE>
3564 <H3><A NAME="Tips for using regular expressions in Access Control">7.4.8. Tips for using regular expressions in Access Control</A></H3>
3565 <P>Always use <EM>dn.regex=&lt;pattern&gt;</EM> when you intend to use regular expression matching. <EM>dn=&lt;pattern&gt;</EM> alone defaults to <EM>dn.exact&lt;pattern&gt;</EM>.</P>
3566 <P>Use <EM>(.+)</EM> instead of <EM>(.*)</EM> when you want at least one char to be matched. <EM>(.*)</EM> matches the empty string as well.</P>
3567 <P>Don't use regular expressions for matches that can be done otherwise in a safer and cheaper manner. Examples:</P>
3568 <PRE>
3569     dn.regex=&quot;.*dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3570 </PRE>
3571 <P>is unsafe and expensive:</P>
3572 <UL>
3573 <LI>unsafe because any string containing <EM>dc=example,dc=com </EM>will match, not only those that end with the desired pattern; use <EM>.*dc=example,dc=com$</EM> instead.
3574 <LI>unsafe also because it would allow any <EM>attributeType</EM> ending with <EM>dc</EM> as naming attribute for the first RDN in the string, e.g. a custom attributeType <EM>mydc</EM> would match as well. If you really need a regular expression that allows just <EM>dc=example,dc=com</EM> or any of its subtrees, use <EM>^(.+,)?dc=example,dc=com$</EM>, which means: anything to the left of dc=..., if any (the question mark after the pattern within brackets), must end with a comma;
3575 <LI>expensive because if you don't need submatches, you could use scoping styles, e.g.</UL>
3576 <PRE>
3577     dn.subtree=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3578 </PRE>
3579 <P>to include <EM>dc=example,dc=com</EM> in the matching patterns,</P>
3580 <PRE>
3581     dn.children=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3582 </PRE>
3583 <P>to exclude <EM>dc=example,dc=com</EM> from the matching patterns, or</P>
3584 <PRE>
3585     dn.onelevel=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3586 </PRE>
3587 <P>to allow exactly one sublevel matches only.</P>
3588 <P>Always use <EM>^</EM> and <EM>$</EM> in regexes, whenever appropriate, because <EM>ou=(.+),ou=(.+),ou=addressbooks,o=basedn</EM> will match <EM>something=bla,ou=xxx,ou=yyy,ou=addressbooks,o=basedn,ou=addressbooks,o=basedn,dc=some,dc=org</EM></P>
3589 <P>Always use <EM>([^,]+)</EM> to indicate exactly one RDN, because <EM>(.+)</EM> can include any number of RDNs; e.g. <EM>ou=(.+),dc=example,dc=com</EM> will match <EM>ou=My,o=Org,dc=example,dc=com</EM>, which might not be what you want.</P>
3590 <P>Never add the rootdn to the by clauses. ACLs are not even processed for operations performed with rootdn identity (otherwise there would be no reason to define a rootdn at all).</P>
3591 <P>Use shorthands. The user directive matches authenticated users and the anonymous directive matches anonymous users.</P>
3592 <P>Don't use the <EM>dn.regex</EM> form for &lt;by&gt; clauses if all you need is scoping and/or substring replacement; use scoping styles (e.g. <EM>exact</EM>, <EM>onelevel</EM>, <EM>children</EM> or <EM>subtree</EM>) and the style modifier expand to cause substring expansion.</P>
3593 <P>For instance,</P>
3594 <PRE>
3595     access to dn.regex=&quot;.+,dc=([^,]+),dc=([^,]+)$&quot;
3596       by dn.regex=&quot;^[^,],ou=Admin,dc=$1,dc=$2$$&quot; write
3597 </PRE>
3598 <P>although correct, can be safely and efficiently replaced by</P>
3599 <PRE>
3600     access to dn.regex=&quot;.+,(dc=[^,]+,dc=[^,]+)$&quot;
3601       by dn.onelevel,expand=&quot;ou=Admin,$1&quot; write
3602 </PRE>
3603 <P>where the regex in the <EM>&lt;what&gt;</EM> clause is more compact, and the one in the <EM>&lt;by&gt;</EM> clause is replaced by a much more efficient scoping style of onelevel with substring expansion.</P>
3604 <H3><A NAME="Granting and Denying access based on security strength factors (ssf)">7.4.9. Granting and Denying access based on security strength factors (ssf)</A></H3>
3605 <P>You can restrict access based on the security strength factor (SSF)</P>
3606 <PRE>
3607     access to dn=&quot;cn=example,cn=edu&quot;
3608           by * ssf=256 read
3609 </PRE>
3610 <P>0 (zero) implies no protection, 1 implies integrity protection only, 56 DES or other weak ciphers, 112 triple DES and other strong ciphers, 128 RC4, Blowfish and other modern strong ciphers.</P>
3611 <P>Other possibilities:</P>
3612 <PRE>
3613     transport_ssf=&lt;n&gt;
3614     tls_ssf=&lt;n&gt;
3615     sasl_ssf=&lt;n&gt;
3616 </PRE>
3617 <P>256 is recommended.</P>
3618 <P>See <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) for information on <EM>ssf</EM>.</P>
3619 <H3><A NAME="When things aren\'t working as expected">7.4.10. When things aren't working as expected</A></H3>
3620 <P>Consider this example:</P>
3621 <PRE>
3622     access to *
3623       by anonymous auth
3624
3625     access to *
3626       by self write
3627
3628     access to *
3629       by users read
3630 </PRE>
3631 <P>You may think this will allow any user to login, to read everything and change his own data if he is logged in. But in this example only the login works and an ldapsearch returns no data. The Problem is that SLAPD goes through its access config line by line and stops as soon as it finds a match in the part of the access rule.(here: <EM>to *</EM>)</P>
3632 <P>To get what we wanted the file has to read:</P>
3633 <PRE>
3634     access to *
3635       by anonymous auth
3636       by self write
3637       by users read
3638 </PRE>
3639 <P>The general rule is: &quot;special access rules first, generic access rules last&quot;</P>
3640 <P>See also <EM>slapd.access</EM>(8), loglevel 128 and <EM>slapacl</EM>(8) for debugging information.</P>
3641 <H2><A NAME="Sets - Granting rights based on relationships">7.5. Sets - Granting rights based on relationships</A></H2>
3642 <P>Sets are best illustrated via examples. The following sections will present a few set ACL examples in order to facilitate their understanding.</P>
3643 <P>(Sets in Access Controls FAQ Entry: <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/1133.html">http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/1133.html</A>)</P>
3644 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
3645 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Sets are considered experimental.
3646 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
3647 <H3><A NAME="Groups of Groups">7.5.1. Groups of Groups</A></H3>
3648 <P>The OpenLDAP ACL for groups doesn't expand groups within groups, which are groups that have another group as a member. For example:</P>
3649 <PRE>
3650  dn: cn=sudoadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com
3651  cn: sudoadm
3652  objectClass: groupOfNames
3653  member: uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com
3654  member: cn=accountadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com
3655
3656  dn: cn=accountadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com
3657  cn: accountadm
3658  objectClass: groupOfNames
3659  member: uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com
3660 </PRE>
3661 <P>If we use standard group ACLs with the above entries and allow members of the <TT>sudoadm</TT> group to write somewhere, <TT>mary</TT> won't be included:</P>
3662 <PRE>
3663  access to dn.subtree=&quot;ou=sudoers,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3664          by group.exact=&quot;cn=sudoadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com&quot; write
3665          by * read
3666 </PRE>
3667 <P>With sets we can make the ACL be recursive and consider group within groups. So for each member that is a group, it is further expanded:</P>
3668 <PRE>
3669  access to dn.subtree=&quot;ou=sudoers,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3670        by set=&quot;[cn=sudoadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com]/member* &amp; user&quot; write
3671        by * read
3672 </PRE>
3673 <P>This set ACL means: take the <TT>cn=sudoadm</TT> DN, check its <TT>member</TT> attribute(s) (where the &quot;<TT>*</TT>&quot; means recursively) and intersect the result with the authenticated user's DN. If the result is non-empty, the ACL is considered a match and write access is granted.</P>
3674 <P>The following drawing explains how this set is built:</P>
3675 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="set-recursivegroup.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
3676 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Populating a recursive group set</P>
3677 <P>First we get the <TT>uid=john</TT> DN. This entry doesn't have a <TT>member</TT> attribute, so the expansion stops here.  Now we get to <TT>cn=accountadm</TT>. This one does have a <TT>member</TT> attribute, which is <TT>uid=mary</TT>. The <TT>uid=mary</TT> entry, however, doesn't have member, so we stop here again. The end comparison is:</P>
3678 <PRE>
3679  {&quot;uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com&quot;,&quot;uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com&quot;} &amp; user
3680 </PRE>
3681 <P>If the authenticated user's DN is any one of those two, write access is granted. So this set will include <TT>mary</TT> in the <TT>sudoadm</TT> group and she will be allowed the write access.</P>
3682 <H3><A NAME="Group ACLs without DN syntax">7.5.2. Group ACLs without DN syntax</A></H3>
3683 <P>The traditional group ACLs, and even the previous example about recursive groups, require that the members are specified as DNs instead of just usernames.</P>
3684 <P>With sets, however, it's also possible to use simple names in group ACLs, as this example will show.</P>
3685 <P>Let's say we want to allow members of the <TT>sudoadm</TT> group to write to the <TT>ou=suders</TT> branch of our tree. But our group definition now is using <TT>memberUid</TT> for the group members:</P>
3686 <PRE>
3687  dn: cn=sudoadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com
3688  cn: sudoadm
3689  objectClass: posixGroup
3690  gidNumber: 1000
3691  memberUid: john
3692 </PRE>
3693 <P>With this type of group, we can't use group ACLs. But with a set ACL we can grant the desired access:</P>
3694 <PRE>
3695  access to dn.subtree=&quot;ou=sudoers,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3696        by set=&quot;[cn=sudoadm,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com]/memberUid &amp; user/uid&quot; write
3697        by * read
3698 </PRE>
3699 <P>We use a simple intersection where we compare the <TT>uid</TT> attribute of the connecting (and authenticated) user with the <TT>memberUid</TT> attributes of the group. If they match, the intersection is non-empty and the ACL will grant write access.</P>
3700 <P>This drawing illustrates this set when the connecting user is authenticated as <TT>uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com</TT>:</P>
3701 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="set-memberUid.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
3702 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Sets with <TT>memberUid</TT></P>
3703 <P>In this case, it's a match. If it were <TT>mary</TT> authenticating, however, she would be denied write access to <TT>ou=sudoers</TT> because her <TT>uid</TT> attribute is not listed in the group's <TT>memberUid</TT>.</P>
3704 <H3><A NAME="Following references">7.5.3. Following references</A></H3>
3705 <P>We will now show a quite powerful example of what can be done with sets. This example tends to make OpenLDAP administrators smile after they have understood it and its implications.</P>
3706 <P>Let's start with an user entry:</P>
3707 <PRE>
3708  dn: uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com
3709  uid: john
3710  objectClass: inetOrgPerson
3711  givenName: John
3712  sn: Smith
3713  cn: john
3714  manager: uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com
3715 </PRE>
3716 <P>Writing an ACL to allow the manager to update some attributes is quite simple using sets:</P>
3717 <PRE>
3718  access to dn.exact=&quot;uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3719     attrs=carLicense,homePhone,mobile,pager,telephoneNumber
3720     by self write
3721     by set=&quot;this/manager &amp; user&quot; write
3722     by * read
3723 </PRE>
3724 <P>In that set, <TT>this</TT> expands to the entry being accessed, so that <TT>this/manager</TT> expands to <TT>uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com</TT> when john's entry is accessed.  If the manager herself is accessing John's entry, the ACL will match and write access to those attributes will be granted.</P>
3725 <P>So far, this same behavior can be obtained with the <TT>dnattr</TT> keyword. With sets, however, we can further enhance this ACL. Let's say we want to allow the secretary of the manager to also update these attributes. This is how we do it:</P>
3726 <PRE>
3727  access to dn.exact=&quot;uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3728     attrs=carLicense,homePhone,mobile,pager,telephoneNumber
3729     by self write
3730     by set=&quot;this/manager &amp; user&quot; write
3731     by set=&quot;this/manager/secretary &amp; user&quot; write
3732     by * read
3733 </PRE>
3734 <P>Now we need a picture to help explain what is happening here (entries shortened for clarity):</P>
3735 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="set-following-references.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
3736 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Sets jumping through entries</P>
3737 <P>In this example, Jane is the secretary of Mary, which is the manager of John. This whole relationship is defined with the <TT>manager</TT> and <TT>secretary</TT> attributes, which are both of the distinguishedName syntax (i.e., full DNs). So, when the <TT>uid=john</TT> entry is being accessed, the <TT>this/manager/secretary</TT> set becomes <TT>{&quot;uid=jane,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com&quot;</TT>} (follow the references in the picture):</P>
3738 <PRE>
3739  this = [uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com]
3740  this/manager = \
3741    [uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com]/manager = uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com
3742  this/manager/secretary = \
3743    [uid=mary,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com]/secretary = uid=jane,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com
3744 </PRE>
3745 <P>The end result is that when Jane accesses John's entry, she will be granted write access to the specified attributes. Better yet, this will happen to any entry she accesses which has Mary as the manager.</P>
3746 <P>This is all cool and nice, but perhaps gives to much power to secretaries. Maybe we need to further restrict it. For example, let's only allow executive secretaries to have this power:</P>
3747 <PRE>
3748  access to dn.exact=&quot;uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3749    attrs=carLicense,homePhone,mobile,pager,telephoneNumber
3750    by self write
3751    by set=&quot;this/manager &amp; user&quot; write
3752    by set=&quot;this/manager/secretary &amp;
3753            [cn=executive,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com]/member* &amp;
3754            user&quot; write
3755    by * read
3756 </PRE>
3757 <P>It's almost the same ACL as before, but we now also require that the connecting user be a member of the (possibly nested) <TT>cn=executive</TT> group.</P>
3758 <P></P>
3759 <HR>
3760 <H1><A NAME="Running slapd">8. Running slapd</A></H1>
3761 <P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) is designed to be run as a standalone service.  This allows the server to take advantage of caching, manage concurrency issues with underlying databases, and conserve system resources. Running from <EM>inetd</EM>(8) is <EM>NOT</EM> an option.</P>
3762 <H2><A NAME="Command-Line Options">8.1. Command-Line Options</A></H2>
3763 <P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports a number of command-line options as detailed in the manual page.  This section details a few commonly used options.</P>
3764 <PRE>
3765         -f &lt;filename&gt;
3766 </PRE>
3767 <P>This option specifies an alternate configuration file for slapd. The default is normally <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.conf</TT>.</P>
3768 <PRE>
3769         -F &lt;slapd-config-directory&gt;
3770 </PRE>
3771 <P>Specifies the slapd configuration directory. The default is <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.d</TT></P>
3772 <P>If both <TT>-f</TT> and <TT>-F</TT> are specified, the config file will be read and converted to config directory format and written to the specified directory. If neither option is specified, slapd will attempt to read the default config directory before trying to use the default config file. If a valid config directory exists then the default config file is ignored. All of the slap tools that use the config options observe this same behavior.</P>
3773 <PRE>
3774         -h &lt;URLs&gt;
3775 </PRE>
3776 <P>This option specifies alternative listener configurations.  The default is <TT>ldap:///</TT> which implies <TERM>LDAP</TERM> over <TERM>TCP</TERM> on all interfaces on the default LDAP port 389.  You can specify specific host-port pairs or other protocol schemes (such as <TT>ldaps://</TT> or <TT>ldapi://</TT>).  For example, <TT>-h &quot;ldaps:// ldap://127.0.0.1:666&quot;</TT> will create two listeners: one for the (non-standard) <TT>ldaps://</TT> scheme on all interfaces on the default <TT>ldaps://</TT> port 636, and one for the standard <TT>ldap://</TT> scheme on the <TT>localhost</TT> (<EM>loopback</EM>) interface on port 666.  Hosts may be specified using using hostnames or <TERM>IPv4</TERM> or <TERM>IPv6</TERM> addresses.  Port values must be numeric.</P>
3777 <PRE>
3778         -n &lt;service-name&gt;
3779 </PRE>
3780 <P>This option specifies the service name used for logging and other purposes. The default service name is <TT>slapd</TT>.</P>
3781 <PRE>
3782         -l &lt;syslog-local-user&gt;
3783 </PRE>
3784 <P>This option specifies the local user for the <EM>syslog</EM>(8) facility.  Values can be <TT>LOCAL0</TT>, <TT>LOCAL1</TT>, <TT>LOCAL2</TT>, ..., and <TT>LOCAL7</TT>.  The default is <TT>LOCAL4</TT>.  This option may not be supported on all systems.</P>
3785 <PRE>
3786         -u user -g group
3787 </PRE>
3788 <P>These options specify the user and group, respectively, to run as.  <TT>user</TT> can be either a user name or uid.  <TT>group</TT> can be either a group name or gid.</P>
3789 <PRE>
3790         -r directory
3791 </PRE>
3792 <P>This option specifies a run-time directory.  slapd will <EM>chroot</EM>(2) to this directory after opening listeners but before reading any configuration files or initializing any backends.</P>
3793 <UL>
3794 </UL>
3795 <PRE>
3796         -d &lt;level&gt; | ?
3797 </PRE>
3798 <P>This option sets the slapd debug level to &lt;level&gt;. When level is a `?' character, the various debugging levels are printed and slapd exits, regardless of any other options you give it. Current debugging levels are</P>
3799 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
3800 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 7.1: Debugging Levels</CAPTION>
3801 <TR CLASS="heading">
3802 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3803 <STRONG>Level</STRONG>
3804 </TD>
3805 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3806 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
3807 </TD>
3808 </TR>
3809 <TR>
3810 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3811 -1
3812 </TD>
3813 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3814 enable all debugging
3815 </TD>
3816 </TR>
3817 <TR>
3818 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3819 0
3820 </TD>
3821 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3822 no debugging
3823 </TD>
3824 </TR>
3825 <TR>
3826 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3827 1
3828 </TD>
3829 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3830 trace function calls
3831 </TD>
3832 </TR>
3833 <TR>
3834 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3835 2
3836 </TD>
3837 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3838 debug packet handling
3839 </TD>
3840 </TR>
3841 <TR>
3842 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3843 4
3844 </TD>
3845 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3846 heavy trace debugging
3847 </TD>
3848 </TR>
3849 <TR>
3850 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3851 8
3852 </TD>
3853 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3854 connection management
3855 </TD>
3856 </TR>
3857 <TR>
3858 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3859 16
3860 </TD>
3861 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3862 print out packets sent and received
3863 </TD>
3864 </TR>
3865 <TR>
3866 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3867 32
3868 </TD>
3869 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3870 search filter processing
3871 </TD>
3872 </TR>
3873 <TR>
3874 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3875 64
3876 </TD>
3877 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3878 configuration file processing
3879 </TD>
3880 </TR>
3881 <TR>
3882 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3883 128
3884 </TD>
3885 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3886 access control list processing
3887 </TD>
3888 </TR>
3889 <TR>
3890 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3891 256
3892 </TD>
3893 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3894 stats log connections/operations/results
3895 </TD>
3896 </TR>
3897 <TR>
3898 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3899 512
3900 </TD>
3901 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3902 stats log entries sent
3903 </TD>
3904 </TR>
3905 <TR>
3906 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3907 1024
3908 </TD>
3909 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3910 print communication with shell backends
3911 </TD>
3912 </TR>
3913 <TR>
3914 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
3915 2048
3916 </TD>
3917 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
3918 print entry parsing debugging
3919 </TD>
3920 </TR>
3921 </TABLE>
3922
3923 <P>You may enable multiple levels by specifying the debug option once for each desired level.  Or, since debugging levels are additive, you can do the math yourself. That is, if you want to trace function calls and watch the config file being processed, you could set level to the sum of those two levels (in this case, <TT> -d 65</TT>).  Or, you can let slapd do the math, (e.g. <TT> -d 1 -d 64</TT>).  Consult <TT>&lt;ldap_log.h&gt;</TT> for more details.</P>
3924 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
3925 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>slapd must have been compiled with <TT>-DLDAP_DEBUG</TT> defined for any debugging information beyond the two stats levels to be available.
3926 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
3927 <H2><A NAME="Starting slapd">8.2. Starting slapd</A></H2>
3928 <P>In general, slapd is run like this:</P>
3929 <PRE>
3930         /usr/local/libexec/slapd [&lt;option&gt;]*
3931 </PRE>
3932 <P>where <TT>/usr/local/libexec</TT> is determined by <TT>configure</TT> and &lt;option&gt; is one of the options described above (or in <EM>slapd</EM>(8)). Unless you have specified a debugging level (including level <TT>0</TT>), slapd will automatically fork and detach itself from its controlling terminal and run in the background.</P>
3933 <H2><A NAME="Stopping slapd">8.3. Stopping slapd</A></H2>
3934 <P>To kill off <EM>slapd</EM>(8) safely, you should give a command like this</P>
3935 <PRE>
3936         kill -INT `cat /usr/local/var/slapd.pid`
3937 </PRE>
3938 <P>where <TT>/usr/local/var</TT> is determined by <TT>configure</TT>.</P>
3939 <P>Killing slapd by a more drastic method may cause information loss or database corruption.</P>
3940 <P></P>
3941 <HR>
3942 <H1><A NAME="Database Creation and Maintenance Tools">9. Database Creation and Maintenance Tools</A></H1>
3943 <P>This section tells you how to create a slapd database from scratch, and how to do trouble shooting if you run into problems. There are two ways to create a database. First, you can create the database on-line using <TERM>LDAP</TERM>. With this method, you simply start up slapd and add entries using the LDAP client of your choice. This method is fine for relatively small databases (a few hundred or thousand entries, depending on your requirements). This method works for database types which support updates.</P>
3944 <P>The second method of database creation is to do it off-line using special utilities provided with <EM>slapd</EM>(8). This method is best if you have many thousands of entries to create, which would take an unacceptably long time using the LDAP method, or if you want to ensure the database is not accessed while it is being created. Note that not all database types support these utilities.</P>
3945 <H2><A NAME="Creating a database over LDAP">9.1. Creating a database over LDAP</A></H2>
3946 <P>With this method, you use the LDAP client of your choice (e.g., the <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1)) to add entries, just like you would once the database is created.  You should be sure to set the following options in the configuration file before starting <EM>slapd</EM>(8).</P>
3947 <PRE>
3948         suffix &lt;dn&gt;
3949 </PRE>
3950 <P>As described in the <A HREF="#General Database Directives">General Database Directives</A> section, this option defines which entries are to be held by this database. You should set this to the DN of the root of the subtree you are trying to create.  For example:</P>
3951 <PRE>
3952         suffix &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3953 </PRE>
3954 <P>You should be sure to specify a directory where the index files should be created:</P>
3955 <PRE>
3956         directory &lt;directory&gt;
3957 </PRE>
3958 <P>For example:</P>
3959 <PRE>
3960         directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data
3961 </PRE>
3962 <P>You need to create this directory with appropriate permissions such that slapd can write to it.</P>
3963 <P>You need to configure slapd so that you can connect to it as a directory user with permission to add entries. You can configure the directory to support a special <EM>super-user</EM> or <EM>root</EM> user just for this purpose. This is done through the following two options in the database definition:</P>
3964 <PRE>
3965         rootdn &lt;dn&gt;
3966         rootpw &lt;passwd&gt;
3967 </PRE>
3968 <P>For example:</P>
3969 <PRE>
3970         rootdn &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
3971         rootpw secret
3972 </PRE>
3973 <P>These options specify a DN and password that can be used to authenticate as the <EM>super-user</EM> entry of the database (i.e., the entry allowed to do anything). The DN and password specified here will always work, regardless of whether the entry named actually exists or has the password given. This solves the chicken-and-egg problem of how to authenticate and add entries before any entries yet exist.</P>
3974 <P>Finally, you should make sure that the database definition contains the index definitions you want:</P>
3975 <PRE>
3976         index {&lt;attrlist&gt; | default} [pres,eq,approx,sub,none]
3977 </PRE>
3978 <P>For example, to index the <TT>cn</TT>, <TT>sn</TT>, <TT>uid</TT> and <TT>objectclass</TT> attributes, the following <TT>index</TT> directives could be used:</P>
3979 <PRE>
3980         index cn,sn,uid pres,eq,approx,sub
3981         index objectClass eq
3982 </PRE>
3983 <P>This would create presence, equality, approximate, and substring indices for the <TT>cn</TT>, <TT>sn</TT>, and <TT>uid</TT> attributes and an equality index for the <TT>objectClass</TT> attribute.  Note that not all index types are available with all attribute types.  See <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> section for more information on this option.</P>
3984 <P>Once you have configured things to your liking, start up slapd, connect with your LDAP client, and start adding entries.  For example, to add an organization entry and an organizational role entry using the <I>ldapadd</I> tool, you could create an <TERM>LDIF</TERM> file called <TT>entries.ldif</TT> with the contents:</P>
3985 <PRE>
3986         # Organization for Example Corporation
3987         dn: dc=example,dc=com
3988         objectClass: dcObject
3989         objectClass: organization
3990         dc: example
3991         o: Example Corporation
3992         description: The Example Corporation
3993
3994         # Organizational Role for Directory Manager
3995         dn: cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com
3996         objectClass: organizationalRole
3997         cn: Manager
3998         description: Directory Manager
3999 </PRE>
4000 <P>and then use a command like this to actually create the entry:</P>
4001 <PRE>
4002         ldapadd -f entries.ldif -x -D &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot; -w secret
4003 </PRE>
4004 <P>The above command assumes settings provided in the above examples.</P>
4005 <H2><A NAME="Creating a database off-line">9.2. Creating a database off-line</A></H2>
4006 <P>The second method of database creation is to do it off-line, using the slapd database tools described below. This method is best if you have many thousands of entries to create, which would take an unacceptably long time to add using the LDAP method described above. These tools read the slapd configuration file and an input file containing a text representation of the entries to add. For database types which support the tools, they produce the database files directly (otherwise you must use the on-line method above). There are several important configuration options you will want to be sure and set in the config file database definition first:</P>
4007 <PRE>
4008         suffix &lt;dn&gt;
4009 </PRE>
4010 <P>As described in the <A HREF="#General Database Directives">General Database Directives</A> section, this option defines which entries are to be held by this database. You should set this to the DN of the root of the subtree you are trying to create.  For example:</P>
4011 <PRE>
4012         suffix &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4013 </PRE>
4014 <P>You should be sure to specify a directory where the index files should be created:</P>
4015 <PRE>
4016         directory &lt;directory&gt;
4017 </PRE>
4018 <P>For example:</P>
4019 <PRE>
4020         directory /usr/local/var/openldap-data
4021 </PRE>
4022 <P>Finally, you need to specify which indices you want to build.  This is done by one or more index options.</P>
4023 <PRE>
4024         index {&lt;attrlist&gt; | default} [pres,eq,approx,sub,none]
4025 </PRE>
4026 <P>For example:</P>
4027 <PRE>
4028         index cn,sn,uid pres,eq,approx,sub
4029         index objectClass eq
4030 </PRE>
4031 <P>This would create presence, equality, approximate, and substring indices for the <TT>cn</TT>, <TT>sn</TT>, and <TT>uid</TT> attributes and an equality index for the <TT>objectClass</TT> attribute.  Note that not all index types are available with all attribute types.  See <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> section for more information on this option.</P>
4032 <H3><A NAME="The {{EX:slapadd}} program">9.2.1. The <TT>slapadd</TT> program</A></H3>
4033 <P>Once you've configured things to your liking, you create the primary database and associated indices by running the <EM>slapadd</EM>(8) program:</P>
4034 <PRE>
4035         slapadd -l &lt;inputfile&gt; -f &lt;slapdconfigfile&gt;
4036                 [-d &lt;debuglevel&gt;] [-n &lt;integer&gt;|-b &lt;suffix&gt;]
4037 </PRE>
4038 <P>The arguments have the following meanings:</P>
4039 <PRE>
4040         -l &lt;inputfile&gt;
4041 </PRE>
4042 <P>Specifies the <TERM>LDIF</TERM> input file containing the entries to add in text form (described below in the <A HREF="#The LDIF text entry format">The LDIF text entry format</A> section).</P>
4043 <PRE>
4044         -f &lt;slapdconfigfile&gt;
4045 </PRE>
4046 <P>Specifies the slapd configuration file that tells where to create the indices, what indices to create, etc.</P>
4047 <PRE>
4048         -F &lt;slapdconfdirectory&gt;
4049 </PRE>
4050 <P>Specifies a config directory.  If both <TT>-f</TT> and <TT>-F</TT> are specified, the config file will be read and converted to config  directory format and written to the specified directory.  If neither option is specified, an attempt to read the default config directory will be made before trying to use the default config file. If a valid config directory exists then the default config file is ignored. If dryrun mode is also specified, no conversion will occur.</P>
4051 <PRE>
4052         -d &lt;debuglevel&gt;
4053 </PRE>
4054 <P>Turn on debugging, as specified by <TT>&lt;debuglevel&gt;</TT>. The debug levels are the same as for slapd.  See the <A HREF="#Command-Line Options">Command-Line Options</A> section in <A HREF="#Running slapd">Running slapd</A>.</P>
4055 <PRE>
4056         -n &lt;databasenumber&gt;
4057 </PRE>
4058 <P>An optional argument that specifies which database to modify.  The first database listed in the configuration file is <TT>1</TT>, the second <TT>2</TT>, etc. By default, the first database in the configuration file is used. Should not be used in conjunction with <TT>-b</TT>.</P>
4059 <PRE>
4060         -b &lt;suffix&gt;
4061 </PRE>
4062 <P>An optional argument that specifies which database to modify.  The provided suffix is matched against a database <TT>suffix</TT> directive to determine the database number. Should not be used in conjunction with <TT>-n</TT>.</P>
4063 <H3><A NAME="The {{EX:slapindex}} program">9.2.2. The <TT>slapindex</TT> program</A></H3>
4064 <P>Sometimes it may be necessary to regenerate indices (such as after modifying <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5)). This is possible using the <EM>slapindex</EM>(8) program.  <EM>slapindex</EM> is invoked like this</P>
4065 <PRE>
4066         slapindex -f &lt;slapdconfigfile&gt;
4067                 [-d &lt;debuglevel&gt;] [-n &lt;databasenumber&gt;|-b &lt;suffix&gt;]
4068 </PRE>
4069 <P>Where the <TT>-f</TT>, <TT>-d</TT>, <TT>-n</TT> and <TT>-b</TT> options are the same as for the <EM>slapadd</EM>(1) program.  <EM>slapindex</EM> rebuilds all indices based upon the current database contents.</P>
4070 <H3><A NAME="The {{EX:slapcat}} program">9.2.3. The <TT>slapcat</TT> program</A></H3>
4071 <P>The <TT>slapcat</TT> program is used to dump the database to an <TERM>LDIF</TERM> file.  This can be useful when you want to make a human-readable backup of your database or when you want to edit your database off-line.  The program is invoked like this:</P>
4072 <PRE>
4073         slapcat -l &lt;filename&gt; -f &lt;slapdconfigfile&gt;
4074                 [-d &lt;debuglevel&gt;] [-n &lt;databasenumber&gt;|-b &lt;suffix&gt;]
4075 </PRE>
4076 <P>where <TT>-n</TT> or <TT>-b</TT> is used to select the database in the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) specified using <TT>-f</TT>.  The corresponding <TERM>LDIF</TERM> output is written to standard output or to the file specified using the <TT>-l</TT> option.</P>
4077 <H2><A NAME="The LDIF text entry format">9.3. The LDIF text entry format</A></H2>
4078 <P>The <TERM>LDAP Data Interchange Format</TERM> (LDIF) is used to represent LDAP entries in a simple text format.  This section provides a brief description of the LDIF entry format which complements <EM>ldif</EM>(5) and the technical specification <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2849.txt">RFC2849</A>.</P>
4079 <P>The basic form of an entry is:</P>
4080 <PRE>
4081         # comment
4082         dn: &lt;distinguished name&gt;
4083         &lt;attrdesc&gt;: &lt;attrvalue&gt;
4084         &lt;attrdesc&gt;: &lt;attrvalue&gt;
4085
4086         ...
4087 </PRE>
4088 <P>Lines starting with a '<TT>#</TT>' character are comments.  An attribute description may be a simple attribute type like <TT>cn</TT> or <TT>objectClass</TT> or <TT>1.2.3</TT> (an <TERM>OID</TERM> associated with an attribute type) or may include options such as <TT>cn;lang_en_US</TT> or <TT>userCertificate;binary</TT>.</P>
4089 <P>A line may be continued by starting the next line with a <EM>single</EM> space or tab character.  For example:</P>
4090 <PRE>
4091         dn: cn=Barbara J Jensen,dc=example,dc=
4092          com
4093         cn: Barbara J
4094           Jensen
4095 </PRE>
4096 <P>is equivalent to:</P>
4097 <PRE>
4098         dn: cn=Barbara J Jensen,dc=example,dc=com
4099         cn: Barbara J Jensen
4100 </PRE>
4101 <P>Multiple attribute values are specified on separate lines. e.g.,</P>
4102 <PRE>
4103         cn: Barbara J Jensen
4104         cn: Babs Jensen
4105 </PRE>
4106 <P>If an <TT>&lt;attrvalue&gt;</TT> contains non-printing characters or begins with a space, a colon ('<TT>:</TT>'), or a less than ('<TT>&lt;</TT>'), the <TT>&lt;attrdesc&gt;</TT> is followed by a double colon and the base64 encoding of the value.  For example, the value &quot;<TT> begins with a space</TT>&quot; would be encoded like this:</P>
4107 <PRE>
4108         cn:: IGJlZ2lucyB3aXRoIGEgc3BhY2U=
4109 </PRE>
4110 <P>You can also specify a <TERM>URL</TERM> containing the attribute value. For example, the following specifies the <TT>jpegPhoto</TT> value should be obtained from the file <TT>/path/to/file.jpeg</TT>.</P>
4111 <PRE>
4112         cn:&lt; file:///path/to/file.jpeg
4113 </PRE>
4114 <P>Multiple entries within the same LDIF file are separated by blank lines. Here's an example of an LDIF file containing three entries.</P>
4115 <PRE>
4116         # Barbara's Entry
4117         dn: cn=Barbara J Jensen,dc=example,dc=com
4118         cn: Barbara J Jensen
4119         cn: Babs Jensen
4120         objectClass: person
4121         sn: Jensen
4122
4123         # Bjorn's Entry
4124         dn: cn=Bjorn J Jensen,dc=example,dc=com
4125         cn: Bjorn J Jensen
4126         cn: Bjorn Jensen
4127         objectClass: person
4128         sn: Jensen
4129         # Base64 encoded JPEG photo
4130         jpegPhoto:: /9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAAAAAQABAAD/2wBDABALD
4131          A4MChAODQ4SERATGCgaGBYWGDEjJR0oOjM9PDkzODdASFxOQ
4132          ERXRTc4UG1RV19iZ2hnPk1xeXBkeFxlZ2P/2wBDARESEhgVG
4133
4134         # Jennifer's Entry
4135         dn: cn=Jennifer J Jensen,dc=example,dc=com
4136         cn: Jennifer J Jensen
4137         cn: Jennifer Jensen
4138         objectClass: person
4139         sn: Jensen
4140         # JPEG photo from file
4141         jpegPhoto:&lt; file:///path/to/file.jpeg
4142 </PRE>
4143 <P>Notice that the <TT>jpegPhoto</TT> in Bjorn's entry is base 64 encoded and the <TT>jpegPhoto</TT> in Jennifer's entry is obtained from the location indicated by the URL.</P>
4144 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
4145 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Trailing spaces are not trimmed from values in an LDIF file. Nor are multiple internal spaces compressed. If you don't want them in your data, don't put them there.
4146 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
4147 <P></P>
4148 <HR>
4149 <H1><A NAME="Backends">10. Backends</A></H1>
4150 <H2><A NAME="Berkeley DB Backends">10.1. Berkeley DB Backends</A></H2>
4151 <H3><A NAME="Overview">10.1.1. Overview</A></H3>
4152 <P>The <EM>bdb</EM> backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is the recommended primary backend for a normal <EM>slapd</EM> database.  It uses the Oracle Berkeley DB (<TERM>BDB</TERM>) package to store data. It makes extensive use of indexing and caching (see the <A HREF="#Tuning">Tuning</A> section) to speed data access.</P>
4153 <P><EM>hdb</EM> is a variant of the <EM>bdb</EM> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout which supports subtree renames. It is otherwise identical to the <EM>bdb</EM> behavior, and all the same configuration options apply.</P>
4154 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
4155 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>An <EM>hdb</EM> database needs a large <EM>idlcachesize</EM> for good search performance, typically three times the <EM>cachesize</EM> (entry cache size) or larger.
4156 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
4157 <H3><A NAME="back-bdb/back-hdb Configuration">10.1.2. back-bdb/back-hdb Configuration</A></H3>
4158 <P>MORE LATER</P>
4159 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">10.1.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4160 <P><EM>slapd-bdb</EM>(5)</P>
4161 <H2><A NAME="LDAP">10.2. LDAP</A></H2>
4162 <H3><A NAME="Overview">10.2.1. Overview</A></H3>
4163 <P>The LDAP backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is not an actual database; instead it acts as a proxy to forward incoming requests to another LDAP server. While processing requests it will also chase referrals, so that referrals are fully processed instead of being returned to the <EM>slapd</EM> client.</P>
4164 <P>Sessions that explicitly <EM>Bind</EM> to the <EM>back-ldap</EM> database always create their own private connection to the remote LDAP server. Anonymous sessions will share a single anonymous connection to the remote server. For sessions bound through other mechanisms, all sessions with the same DN will share the same connection. This connection pooling strategy can enhance the proxy's efficiency by reducing the overhead of repeatedly making/breaking multiple connections.</P>
4165 <P>The ldap database can also act as an information service, i.e. the identity of locally authenticated clients is asserted to the remote server, possibly in some modified form. For this purpose, the proxy binds to the remote server with some administrative identity, and, if required, authorizes the asserted identity.</P>
4166 <P>It is heavily used by a lot of other <A HREF="#Backends">Backends</A> and <A HREF="#Overlays">Overlays</A>.</P>
4167 <H3><A NAME="back-ldap Configuration">10.2.2. back-ldap Configuration</A></H3>
4168 <P>As previously mentioned, <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> is used behind the scenes by many other <A HREF="#Backends">Backends</A> and <A HREF="#Overlays">Overlays</A>. Some of them merely provide a few configuration directive themselves, but have available to the administrator the whole of the <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> options.</P>
4169 <P>For example, the <A HREF="#Translucent Proxy">Translucent Proxy</A>, which retrieves entries from a remote LDAP server that can be partially overridden by the defined database, has only four specific <EM>translucent-</EM> directives, but can be configured using any of the normal <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> options. See {[slapo-translucent(5)}} for details.</P>
4170 <P>Other <A HREF="#Overlays">Overlays</A> allow you to tag directives in front of a normal <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> directive. For example, the <EM>slapo-chain(5)</EM> overlay does this:</P>
4171 <P><EM>&quot;There are very few chain overlay specific directives; however, directives related to the instances of the ldap backend that may be implicitly instantiated by the overlay may assume a special meaning when used in conjunction with this overlay.  They are described in slapd-ldap(5), and they also need to be prefixed by chain-.&quot;</EM></P>
4172 <P>You may have also seen the <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> backend used and described in the <A HREF="#Push Based">Push Based</A> <A HREF="#Replication">Replication</A> section of the guide.</P>
4173 <P>It should therefore be obvious that the <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> backend is extremely flexible and heavily used throughout the OpenLDAP Suite.</P>
4174 <P>The following is a very simple example, but already the power of the <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM> backend is seen by use of a <EM>uri list</EM>:</P>
4175 <PRE>
4176         database        ldap
4177         suffix          &quot;dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
4178         rootdn          &quot;cn=slapd-ldap&quot;
4179         uri             ldap://localhost/ ldap://remotehost ldap://remotehost2
4180 </PRE>
4181 <P>The URI list is space or comma-separated. Whenever the server that responds is not the first one in the list, the list is rearranged and the responsive server is moved to the head, so that it will be first contacted the next time a connection needs be created.</P>
4182 <P>This feature can be used to provide a form of load balancing when using <A HREF="#MirrorMode replication">MirrorMode replication</A>.</P>
4183 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">10.2.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4184 <P><EM>slapd-ldap</EM>(5)</P>
4185 <H2><A NAME="LDIF">10.3. LDIF</A></H2>
4186 <H3><A NAME="Overview">10.3.1. Overview</A></H3>
4187 <P>The LDIF backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is a basic storage backend that stores entries in text files in LDIF format, and exploits the filesystem to create the tree structure of the database. It is intended as a cheap, low performance easy to use backend.</P>
4188 <P>When using the <EM>cn=config</EM> dynamic configuration database with persistent storage, the configuration data is stored using this backend. See <EM>slapd-config</EM>(5) for more information</P>
4189 <H3><A NAME="back-ldif Configuration">10.3.2. back-ldif Configuration</A></H3>
4190 <P>Like many other backends, the LDIF backend can be instantiated with very few configuration lines:</P>
4191 <PRE>
4192         include ./schema/core.schema
4193
4194         database  ldif
4195         directory &quot;./ldif&quot;
4196         suffix    &quot;dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
4197         rootdn    &quot;cn=LDIF,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
4198         rootpw    LDIF
4199 </PRE>
4200 <P>You'll notice that when compared to examples below, there is no:</P>
4201 <PRE>
4202    moduleload  back_ldif.la
4203 </PRE>
4204 <P>directive. This is because <EM>back_ldif</EM> is always built in by default as it is used by <EM>slapd-config(5)</EM>, which again is built in by default.</P>
4205 <P>If we add the <EM>dcObject</EM> for <EM>dc=suretecsystems,dc=com</EM>, you can see how this is added behind the scenes on the file system:</P>
4206 <PRE>
4207    dn: dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4208    objectClass: dcObject
4209    objectClass: organization
4210    dc: suretecsystems
4211    o: Suretec Systems Ltd
4212 </PRE>
4213 <P>Now we add it to the directory:</P>
4214 <PRE>
4215    ldapadd -x -H ldap://localhost:9011 -f suretec.ldif -D &quot;cn=LDIF,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot; -w LDIF
4216    adding new entry &quot;dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
4217 </PRE>
4218 <P>And inside <TT>./ldif</TT> we have:</P>
4219 <PRE>
4220    ls ./ldif
4221    dc=suretecsystems,dc=com.ldif
4222 </PRE>
4223 <P>which again contains:</P>
4224 <PRE>
4225    cat ldif/dc\=suretecsystems\,dc\=com.ldif
4226
4227    dn: dc=suretecsystems
4228    objectClass: dcObject
4229    objectClass: organization
4230    dc: suretecsystems
4231    o: Suretec Systems Ltd.
4232    structuralObjectClass: organization
4233    entryUUID: 2134b714-e3a1-102c-9a15-f96ee263886d
4234    creatorsName: cn=LDIF,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4235    createTimestamp: 20080711142643Z
4236    entryCSN: 20080711142643.661124Z#000000#000#000000
4237    modifiersName: cn=LDIF,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4238    modifyTimestamp: 20080711142643Z
4239 </PRE>
4240 <P>This is the complete format you would get when exporting your directory using <TT>slapcat</TT> etc.</P>
4241 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">10.3.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4242 <P><EM>slapd-ldif</EM>(5)</P>
4243 <H2><A NAME="Metadirectory">10.4. Metadirectory</A></H2>
4244 <H3><A NAME="Overview">10.4.1. Overview</A></H3>
4245 <P>The meta backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) performs basic LDAP proxying with respect to a set of remote LDAP servers, called &quot;targets&quot;. The information contained in these servers can be presented as belonging to a single Directory Information Tree (<TERM>DIT</TERM>).</P>
4246 <P>A basic knowledge of the functionality of the <EM>slapd-ldap</EM>(5) backend is recommended. This backend has been designed as an enhancement of the ldap backend. The two backends share many features (actually they also share portions of code). While the ldap backend is intended to proxy operations directed to a single server, the meta backend is mainly intended for proxying of multiple servers and possibly naming context  masquerading.</P>
4247 <P>These features, although useful in many scenarios, may result in excessive overhead for some applications, so its use should be carefully considered.</P>
4248 <H3><A NAME="back-meta Configuration">10.4.2. back-meta Configuration</A></H3>
4249 <P>LATER</P>
4250 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">10.4.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4251 <P><EM>slapd-meta</EM>(5)</P>
4252 <H2><A NAME="Monitor">10.5. Monitor</A></H2>
4253 <H3><A NAME="Overview">10.5.1. Overview</A></H3>
4254 <P>The monitor backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is not an actual database; if enabled, it is automatically generated and dynamically maintained by slapd with information about the running status of the daemon.</P>
4255 <P>To inspect all monitor information, issue a subtree search with base <EM>cn=Monitor</EM>, requesting that attributes &quot;+&quot; and &quot;*&quot; are returned. The monitor backend produces mostly operational attributes, and LDAP only returns operational attributes that are explicitly requested.  Requesting attribute &quot;+&quot; is an extension which requests all operational attributes.</P>
4256 <P>See the <A HREF="#Monitoring">Monitoring</A> section.</P>
4257 <H3><A NAME="back-monitor Configuration">10.5.2. back-monitor Configuration</A></H3>
4258 <P>The monitor database can be instantiated only once, i.e. only one occurrence of &quot;database monitor&quot; can occur in the <EM>slapd.conf(5)</EM> file.  Also the suffix is automatically set to <EM>&quot;cn=Monitor&quot;</EM>.</P>
4259 <P>You can however set a <EM>rootdn</EM> and <EM>rootpw</EM>. The following is all that is needed to instantiate a monitor backend:</P>
4260 <PRE>
4261         include ./schema/core.schema
4262
4263         modulepath  /usr/local/libexec/openldap
4264         moduleload  back_monitor.la
4265
4266         database monitor
4267         rootdn &quot;cn=monitoring,cn=Monitor&quot;
4268         rootpw monitoring
4269 </PRE>
4270 <P>You can also apply Access Control to this database like any other database, for example:</P>
4271 <PRE>
4272         access to dn.subtree=&quot;cn=Monitor&quot;
4273              by dn.exact=&quot;uid=Admin,dc=my,dc=org&quot; write
4274              by users read
4275              by * none
4276 </PRE>
4277 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
4278 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The <TT>core.schema</TT> must be loaded for the monitor database to work.
4279 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
4280 <P>A small example of the data returned via <EM>ldapsearch</EM> would be:</P>
4281 <PRE>
4282         ldapsearch -x -H ldap://localhost:9011 -b 'cn=Monitor'
4283         # extended LDIF
4284         #
4285         # LDAPv3
4286         # base &lt;cn=Monitor&gt; with scope subtree
4287         # filter: (objectclass=*)
4288         # requesting: ALL
4289         #
4290
4291         # Monitor
4292         dn: cn=Monitor
4293         objectClass: monitorServer
4294         cn: Monitor
4295         description: This subtree contains monitoring/managing objects.
4296         description: This object contains information about this server.
4297         description: Most of the information is held in operational attributes, which
4298          must be explicitly requested.
4299
4300         # Backends, Monitor
4301         dn: cn=Backends,cn=Monitor
4302         objectClass: monitorContainer
4303         cn: Backends
4304         description: This subsystem contains information about available backends.
4305 </PRE>
4306 <P>Please see the <A HREF="#Monitoring">Monitoring</A> section for complete examples of information available via this backend.</P>
4307 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">10.5.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4308 <P><EM>slapd-monitor</EM>(5)</P>
4309 <H2><A NAME="Null">10.6. Null</A></H2>
4310 <H3><A NAME="Overview">10.6.1. Overview</A></H3>
4311 <P>The Null backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is surely the most useful part of slapd:</P>
4312 <UL>
4313 <LI>Searches return success but no entries.
4314 <LI>Compares return compareFalse.
4315 <LI>Updates return success (unless readonly is on) but do nothing.
4316 <LI>Binds other than as the rootdn fail unless the database option &quot;bind on&quot; is given.
4317 <LI>The slapadd(8) and slapcat(8) tools are equally exciting.</UL>
4318 <P>Inspired by the <TT>/dev/null</TT> device.</P>
4319 <H3><A NAME="back-null Configuration">10.6.2. back-null Configuration</A></H3>
4320 <P>This has to be one of the shortest configurations you'll ever do. In order to test this, your <TT>slapd.conf</TT> file would look like:</P>
4321 <PRE>
4322         modulepath  /usr/local/libexec/openldap
4323         moduleload  back_null.la
4324         database null
4325         suffix &quot;cn=Nothing&quot;
4326         bind on
4327 </PRE>
4328 <P>The first two directives are only applicable if you've enabled module support and haven't &quot;built-in&quot; <EM>slapd-null(5)</EM> support (why would you?).</P>
4329 <P><EM>bind on</EM> means:</P>
4330 <P><EM>&quot;Allow binds as any DN in this backend's suffix, with any password. The default is &quot;off&quot;.&quot;</EM></P>
4331 <P>To test this backend with <EM>ldapsearch</EM>:</P>
4332 <PRE>
4333         ldapsearch -x -H ldap://localhost:9011 -D &quot;uid=none,cn=Nothing&quot; -w testing -b 'cn=Nothing'
4334         # extended LDIF
4335         #
4336         # LDAPv3
4337         # base &lt;cn=Nothing&gt; with scope subtree
4338         # filter: (objectclass=*)
4339         # requesting: ALL
4340         #
4341
4342         # search result
4343         search: 2
4344         result: 0 Success
4345
4346         # numResponses: 1
4347 </PRE>
4348 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">10.6.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4349 <P><EM>slapd-null</EM>(5)</P>
4350 <H2><A NAME="Passwd">10.7. Passwd</A></H2>
4351 <H3><A NAME="Overview">10.7.1. Overview</A></H3>
4352 <P>The PASSWD backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) serves up the user account information listed in the system <EM>passwd</EM>(5) file (defaulting to <TT>/etc/passwd</TT>).</P>
4353 <P>This backend is provided for demonstration purposes only. The DN of each entry is &quot;uid=&lt;username&gt;,&lt;suffix&gt;&quot;.</P>
4354 <H3><A NAME="back-passwd Configuration">10.7.2. back-passwd Configuration</A></H3>
4355 <P>The configuration using <TT>slapd.conf</TT> a slightly longer, but not much. For example:</P>
4356 <PRE>
4357         include ./schema/core.schema
4358
4359         modulepath  /usr/local/libexec/openldap
4360         moduleload  back_passwd.la
4361
4362         database passwd
4363         suffix &quot;cn=passwd&quot;
4364 </PRE>
4365 <P>Again, testing this with <EM>ldapsearch</EM> would result in something like:</P>
4366 <PRE>
4367         ldapsearch -x -H ldap://localhost:9011 -b 'cn=passwd'
4368         # extended LDIF
4369         #
4370         # LDAPv3
4371         # base &lt;cn=passwd&gt; with scope subtree
4372         # filter: (objectclass=*)
4373         # requesting: ALL
4374         #
4375
4376         # passwd
4377         dn: cn=passwd
4378         cn: passwd
4379         objectClass: organizationalUnit
4380
4381         # root, passwd
4382         dn: uid=root,cn=passwd
4383         objectClass: person
4384         objectClass: uidObject
4385         uid: root
4386         cn: root
4387         sn: root
4388         description: root
4389 </PRE>
4390 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">10.7.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4391 <P><EM>slapd-passwd</EM>(5)</P>
4392 <H2><A NAME="Perl/Shell">10.8. Perl/Shell</A></H2>
4393 <H3><A NAME="Overview">10.8.1. Overview</A></H3>
4394 <P>The Perl backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) works by embedding a <EM>perl</EM>(1) interpreter into <EM>slapd</EM>(8). Any perl database section of the configuration file <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) must then specify what Perl module to use. Slapd then creates a new Perl object that handles all the requests for that particular instance of the backend.</P>
4395 <P>The Shell backend to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) executes external programs to implement operations, and is designed to make it easy to tie an existing database to the slapd front-end. This backend is is primarily intended to be used in prototypes.</P>
4396 <H3><A NAME="back-perl/back-shell Configuration">10.8.2. back-perl/back-shell Configuration</A></H3>
4397 <P>LATER</P>
4398 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">10.8.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4399 <P><EM>slapd-shell</EM>(5) and <EM>slapd-perl</EM>(5)</P>
4400 <H2><A NAME="Relay">10.9. Relay</A></H2>
4401 <H3><A NAME="Overview">10.9.1. Overview</A></H3>
4402 <P>The primary purpose of this <EM>slapd</EM>(8) backend is to map a naming context defined in a database running in the same <EM>slapd</EM>(8) instance into a virtual naming context, with attributeType and objectClass manipulation, if required. It requires the rwm overlay.</P>
4403 <P>This backend and the above mentioned overlay are experimental.</P>
4404 <H3><A NAME="back-relay Configuration">10.9.2. back-relay Configuration</A></H3>
4405 <P>LATER</P>
4406 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">10.9.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4407 <P><EM>slapd-relay</EM>(5)</P>
4408 <H2><A NAME="SQL">10.10. SQL</A></H2>
4409 <H3><A NAME="Overview">10.10.1. Overview</A></H3>
4410 <P>The primary purpose of this <EM>slapd</EM>(8) backend is to PRESENT information stored in some RDBMS as an LDAP subtree without any programming (some SQL and maybe stored procedures can't be considered programming, anyway ;).</P>
4411 <P>That is, for example, when you (some ISP) have account information you use in an RDBMS, and want to use modern solutions that expect such information in LDAP (to authenticate users, make email lookups etc.). Or you want to synchronize or distribute information between different sites/applications that use RDBMSes and/or LDAP. Or whatever else...</P>
4412 <P>It is <B>NOT</B> designed as a general-purpose backend that uses RDBMS instead of BerkeleyDB (as the standard BDB backend does), though it can be used as such with several limitations. Please see <A HREF="#LDAP vs RDBMS">LDAP vs RDBMS</A> for discussion.</P>
4413 <P>The idea is to use some meta-information to translate LDAP queries to SQL queries, leaving relational schema untouched, so that old applications can continue using it without any modifications. This allows SQL and LDAP applications to interoperate without replication, and exchange data as needed.</P>
4414 <P>The SQL backend is designed to be tunable to virtually any relational schema without having to change source (through that meta-information mentioned). Also, it uses ODBC to connect to RDBMSes, and is highly configurable for SQL dialects RDBMSes may use, so it may be used for integration and distribution of data on different RDBMSes, OSes, hosts etc., in other words, in highly heterogeneous environments.</P>
4415 <P>This backend is experimental.</P>
4416 <H3><A NAME="back-sql Configuration">10.10.2. back-sql Configuration</A></H3>
4417 <P>This backend has to be one of the most abused and complex backends there is. Therefore, we will go through a simple, small example that comes with the OpenLDAP source and can be found in <TT>servers/slapd/back-sql/rdbms_depend/README</TT></P>
4418 <P>For this example we will be using PostgreSQL.</P>
4419 <P>First, we add to <TT>/etc/odbc.ini</TT> a block of the form:</P>
4420 <PRE>
4421         [example]                        &lt;===
4422         Description         = Example for OpenLDAP's back-sql
4423         Driver              = PostgreSQL
4424         Trace               = No
4425         Database            = example    &lt;===
4426         Servername          = localhost
4427         UserName            = manager    &lt;===
4428         Password            = secret     &lt;===
4429         Port                = 5432
4430         ;Protocol            = 6.4
4431         ReadOnly            = No
4432         RowVersioning       = No
4433         ShowSystemTables    = No
4434         ShowOidColumn       = No
4435         FakeOidIndex        = No
4436         ConnSettings        =
4437 </PRE>
4438 <P>The relevant information for our test setup is highlighted with '&lt;===' on the right above.</P>
4439 <P>Next, we add to <TT>/etc/odbcinst.ini</TT> a block of the form:</P>
4440 <PRE>
4441         [PostgreSQL]
4442         Description     = ODBC for PostgreSQL
4443         Driver          = /usr/lib/libodbcpsql.so
4444         Setup           = /usr/lib/libodbcpsqlS.so
4445         FileUsage       = 1
4446 </PRE>
4447 <P>We will presume you know how to create a database and user in PostgreSQL and how to set a password. Also, we'll presume you can populate the 'example' database you've just created with the following files, as found in <TT>servers/slapd/back-sql/rdbms_depend/pgsql </TT></P>
4448 <PRE>
4449         backsql_create.sql, testdb_create.sql, testdb_data.sql, testdb_metadata.sql
4450 </PRE>
4451 <P>Lastly, run the test:</P>
4452 <PRE>
4453         [root@localhost]# cd $SOURCES/tests
4454         [root@localhost]# SLAPD_USE_SQL=pgsql ./run sql-test000
4455 </PRE>
4456 <P>Briefly, you should see something like (cut short for space):</P>
4457 <PRE>
4458         Cleaning up test run directory leftover from previous run.
4459         Running ./scripts/sql-test000-read...
4460         running defines.sh
4461         Starting slapd on TCP/IP port 9011...
4462         Testing SQL backend read operations...
4463         Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start...
4464         Testing correct bind... dn:cn=Mitya Kovalev,dc=example,dc=com
4465         Testing incorrect bind (should fail)... ldap_bind: Invalid credentials (49)
4466
4467         ......
4468
4469         Filtering original ldif...
4470         Comparing filter output...
4471         &gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt; Test succeeded
4472 </PRE>
4473 <P>The test is basically readonly; this can be performed by all RDBMSes (listed above).</P>
4474 <P>There is another test, sql-test900-write, which is currently enabled only for PostgreSQL and IBM db2.</P>
4475 <P>Using <TT>sql-test000</TT>, files in <TT>servers/slapd/back-sql/rdbms_depend/pgsql/</TT> and the man page, you should be set.</P>
4476 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
4477 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>This backend is experimental.
4478 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
4479 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">10.10.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4480 <P><EM>slapd-sql</EM>(5) and <TT>servers/slapd/back-sql/rdbms_depend/README</TT></P>
4481 <P></P>
4482 <HR>
4483 <H1><A NAME="Overlays">11. Overlays</A></H1>
4484 <P>Overlays are software components that provide hooks to functions analogous to those provided by backends, which can be stacked on top of the backend calls and as callbacks on top of backend responses to alter their behavior.</P>
4485 <P>Overlays may be compiled statically into <EM>slapd</EM>, or when module support is enabled, they may be dynamically loaded. Most of the overlays are only allowed to be configured on individual databases.</P>
4486 <P>Some can be stacked on the <TT>frontend</TT> as well, for global use. This means that they can be executed after a request is parsed and validated, but right before the appropriate database is selected. The main purpose is to affect operations regardless of the database they will be handled by, and, in some cases, to influence the selection of the database by massaging the request DN.</P>
4487 <P>Essentially, overlays represent a means to:</P>
4488 <UL>
4489 <LI>customize the behavior of existing backends without changing the backend code and without requiring one to write a new custom backend with complete functionality
4490 <LI>write functionality of general usefulness that can be applied to different backend types</UL>
4491 <P>When using <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5), overlays that are configured before any other databases are considered global, as mentioned above. In fact they are implicitly stacked on top of the <TT>frontend</TT> database. They can also be explicitly configured as such:</P>
4492 <PRE>
4493         database frontend
4494         overlay &lt;overlay name&gt;
4495 </PRE>
4496 <P>Overlays are usually documented by separate specific man pages in section 5; the naming convention is</P>
4497 <PRE>
4498         slapo-&lt;overlay name&gt;
4499 </PRE>
4500 <P>All distributed core overlays have a man page. Feel free to contribute to any, if you think there is anything missing in describing the behavior of the component and the implications of all the related configuration directives.</P>
4501 <P>Official overlays are located in</P>
4502 <PRE>
4503         servers/slapd/overlays/
4504 </PRE>
4505 <P>That directory also contains the file slapover.txt, which describes the rationale of the overlay implementation, and may serve as a guideline for the development of custom overlays.</P>
4506 <P>Contribware overlays are located in</P>
4507 <PRE>
4508         contrib/slapd-modules/&lt;overlay name&gt;/
4509 </PRE>
4510 <P>along with other types of run-time loadable components; they are officially distributed, but not maintained by the project.</P>
4511 <P>All the current overlays in OpenLDAP are listed and described in detail in the following sections.</P>
4512 <H2><A NAME="Access Logging">11.1. Access Logging</A></H2>
4513 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.1.1. Overview</A></H3>
4514 <P>This overlay can record accesses to a given backend database on another database.</P>
4515 <P>This allows all of the activity on a given database to be reviewed using arbitrary LDAP queries, instead of just logging to local flat text files. Configuration options are available for selecting a subset of operation types to log, and to automatically prune older log records from the logging database. Log records are stored with audit schema to assure their readability whether viewed as LDIF or in raw form.</P>
4516 <P>It is also used for <A HREF="#delta-syncrepl replication">delta-syncrepl replication</A></P>
4517 <H3><A NAME="Access Logging Configuration">11.1.2. Access Logging Configuration</A></H3>
4518 <P>The following is a basic example that implements Access Logging:</P>
4519 <PRE>
4520         database bdb
4521         suffix dc=example,dc=com
4522         ...
4523         overlay accesslog
4524         logdb cn=log
4525         logops writes reads
4526         logold (objectclass=person)
4527
4528         database bdb
4529         suffix cn=log
4530         ...
4531         index reqStart eq
4532         access to *
4533           by dn.base=&quot;cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com&quot; read
4534 </PRE>
4535 <P>The following is an example used for <A HREF="#delta-syncrepl replication">delta-syncrepl replication</A>:</P>
4536 <PRE>
4537         database hdb
4538         suffix cn=accesslog
4539         directory /usr/local/var/openldap-accesslog
4540         rootdn cn=accesslog
4541         index default eq
4542         index entryCSN,objectClass,reqEnd,reqResult,reqStart
4543 </PRE>
4544 <P>Accesslog overlay definitions for the primary db</P>
4545 <PRE>
4546         database bdb
4547         suffix dc=example,dc=com
4548         ...
4549         overlay accesslog
4550         logdb cn=accesslog
4551         logops writes
4552         logsuccess TRUE
4553         # scan the accesslog DB every day, and purge entries older than 7 days
4554         logpurge 07+00:00 01+00:00
4555 </PRE>
4556 <P>An example search result against <B>cn=accesslog</B> might look like:</P>
4557 <PRE>
4558         [ghenry@suretec ghenry]# ldapsearch -x -b cn=accesslog
4559         # extended LDIF
4560         #
4561         # LDAPv3
4562         # base &lt;cn=accesslog&gt; with scope subtree
4563         # filter: (objectclass=*)
4564         # requesting: ALL
4565         #
4566
4567         # accesslog
4568         dn: cn=accesslog
4569         objectClass: auditContainer
4570         cn: accesslog
4571
4572         # 20080110163829.000004Z, accesslog
4573         dn: reqStart=20080110163829.000004Z,cn=accesslog
4574         objectClass: auditModify
4575         reqStart: 20080110163829.000004Z
4576         reqEnd: 20080110163829.000005Z
4577         reqType: modify
4578         reqSession: 196696
4579         reqAuthzID: cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4580         reqDN: uid=suretec-46022f8$,ou=Users,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4581         reqResult: 0
4582         reqMod: sambaPwdCanChange:- ###CENSORED###
4583         reqMod: sambaPwdCanChange:+ ###CENSORED###
4584         reqMod: sambaNTPassword:- ###CENSORED###
4585         reqMod: sambaNTPassword:+ ###CENSORED###
4586         reqMod: sambaPwdLastSet:- ###CENSORED###
4587         reqMod: sambaPwdLastSet:+ ###CENSORED###
4588         reqMod: entryCSN:= 20080110163829.095157Z#000000#000#000000
4589         reqMod: modifiersName:= cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4590         reqMod: modifyTimestamp:= 20080110163829Z
4591
4592         # search result
4593         search: 2
4594         result: 0 Success
4595
4596         # numResponses: 3
4597         # numEntries: 2
4598 </PRE>
4599 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.1.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4600 <P><EM>slapo-accesslog(5)</EM> and the <A HREF="#delta-syncrepl replication">delta-syncrepl replication</A> section.</P>
4601 <H2><A NAME="Audit Logging">11.2. Audit Logging</A></H2>
4602 <P>The Audit Logging overlay can be used to record all changes on a given backend database to a specified log file.</P>
4603 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.2.1. Overview</A></H3>
4604 <P>If the need arises whereby changes need to be logged as standard LDIF, then the auditlog overlay <B>slapo-auditlog (5)</B> can be used. Full examples are available in the man page <B>slapo-auditlog (5)</B></P>
4605 <H3><A NAME="Audit Logging Configuration">11.2.2. Audit Logging Configuration</A></H3>
4606 <P>If the directory is running vi <TT>slapd.d</TT>, then the following LDIF could be used to add the overlay to the overlay list in <B>cn=config</B> and set what file the <TERM>LDIF</TERM> gets logged to (adjust to suit)</P>
4607 <PRE>
4608        dn: olcOverlay=auditlog,olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config
4609        changetype: add
4610        objectClass: olcOverlayConfig
4611        objectClass: olcAuditLogConfig
4612        olcOverlay: auditlog
4613        olcAuditlogFile: /tmp/auditlog.ldif
4614 </PRE>
4615 <P>In this example for testing, we are logging changes to <TT>/tmp/auditlog.ldif</TT></P>
4616 <P>A typical <TERM>LDIF</TERM> file created by <B>slapo-auditlog(5)</B> would look like:</P>
4617 <PRE>
4618        # add 1196797576 dc=suretecsystems,dc=com cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4619        dn: dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4620        changetype: add
4621        objectClass: dcObject
4622        objectClass: organization
4623        dc: suretecsystems
4624        o: Suretec Systems Ltd.
4625        structuralObjectClass: organization
4626        entryUUID: 1606f8f8-f06e-1029-8289-f0cc9d81e81a
4627        creatorsName: cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4628        modifiersName: cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4629        createTimestamp: 20051123130912Z
4630        modifyTimestamp: 20051123130912Z
4631        entryCSN: 20051123130912.000000Z#000001#000#000000
4632        auditContext: cn=accesslog
4633        # end add 1196797576
4634
4635        # add 1196797577 dc=suretecsystems,dc=com cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4636        dn: ou=Groups,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4637        changetype: add
4638        objectClass: top
4639        objectClass: organizationalUnit
4640        ou: Groups
4641        structuralObjectClass: organizationalUnit
4642        entryUUID: 160aaa2a-f06e-1029-828a-f0cc9d81e81a
4643        creatorsName: cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4644        modifiersName: cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com
4645        createTimestamp: 20051123130912Z
4646        modifyTimestamp: 20051123130912Z
4647        entryCSN: 20051123130912.000000Z#000002#000#000000
4648        # end add 1196797577
4649 </PRE>
4650 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.2.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4651 <P><EM>slapo-auditlog(5)</EM></P>
4652 <H2><A NAME="Chaining">11.3. Chaining</A></H2>
4653 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.3.1. Overview</A></H3>
4654 <P>The chain overlay provides basic chaining capability to the underlying database.</P>
4655 <P>What is chaining? It indicates the capability of a DSA to follow referrals on behalf of the client, so that distributed systems are viewed as a single virtual DSA by clients that are otherwise unable to &quot;chase&quot; (i.e. follow) referrals by themselves.</P>
4656 <P>The chain overlay is built on top of the ldap backend; it is compiled by default when <B>--enable-ldap</B>.</P>
4657 <H3><A NAME="Chaining Configuration">11.3.2. Chaining Configuration</A></H3>
4658 <P>In order to demonstrate how this overlay works, we shall discuss a typical scenario which might be one master server and three Syncrepl slaves.</P>
4659 <P>On each replica, add this near the top of the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file (global), before any database definitions:</P>
4660 <PRE>
4661         overlay                    chain
4662         chain-uri                  &quot;ldap://ldapmaster.example.com&quot;
4663         chain-idassert-bind        bindmethod=&quot;simple&quot;
4664                                    binddn=&quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4665                                    credentials=&quot;&lt;secret&gt;&quot;
4666                                    mode=&quot;self&quot;
4667         chain-tls                  start
4668         chain-return-error         TRUE
4669 </PRE>
4670 <P>Add this below your <EM>syncrepl</EM> statement:</P>
4671 <PRE>
4672         updateref                  &quot;ldap://ldapmaster.example.com/&quot;
4673 </PRE>
4674 <P>The <B>chain-tls</B> statement enables TLS from the slave to the ldap master. The DITs are exactly the same between these machines, therefore whatever user bound to the slave will also exist on the master. If that DN does not have update privileges on the master, nothing will happen.</P>
4675 <P>You will need to restart the slave after these <EM>slapd.conf</EM> changes. Then, if you are using <EM>loglevel stats</EM> (256), you can monitor an <EM>ldapmodify</EM> on the slave and the master. (If you're using <EM>cn=config</EM> no restart is required.)</P>
4676 <P>Now start an <EM>ldapmodify</EM> on the slave and watch the logs. You should expect something like:</P>
4677 <PRE>
4678         Sep  6 09:27:25 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 fd=31 ACCEPT from IP=143.199.102.216:45181 (IP=143.199.102.216:389)
4679         Sep  6 09:27:25 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=0 STARTTLS
4680         Sep  6 09:27:25 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=0 RESULT oid= err=0 text=
4681         Sep  6 09:27:25 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 fd=31 TLS established tls_ssf=256 ssf=256
4682         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=1 BIND dn=&quot;uid=user1,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com&quot; method=128
4683         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=1 BIND dn=&quot;uid=user1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com&quot; mech=SIMPLE ssf=0
4684         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=1 RESULT tag=97 err=0 text=
4685         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=2 MOD dn=&quot;uid=user1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4686         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=2 MOD attr=mail
4687         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=2 RESULT tag=103 err=0 text=
4688         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 op=3 UNBIND
4689         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: conn=11 fd=31 closed
4690         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: syncrepl_entry: LDAP_RES_SEARCH_ENTRY(LDAP_SYNC_MODIFY)
4691         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: syncrepl_entry: be_search (0)
4692         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: syncrepl_entry: uid=user1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com
4693         Sep  6 09:27:28 slave1 slapd[29274]: syncrepl_entry: be_modify (0)
4694 </PRE>
4695 <P>And on the master you will see this:</P>
4696 <PRE>
4697         Sep  6 09:23:57 ldapmaster slapd[2961]: conn=55902 op=3 PROXYAUTHZ dn=&quot;uid=user1,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4698         Sep  6 09:23:57 ldapmaster slapd[2961]: conn=55902 op=3 MOD dn=&quot;uid=user1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4699         Sep  6 09:23:57 ldapmaster slapd[2961]: conn=55902 op=3 MOD attr=mail
4700         Sep  6 09:23:57 ldapmaster slapd[2961]: conn=55902 op=3 RESULT tag=103 err=0 text=
4701 </PRE>
4702 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
4703 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>You can clearly see the PROXYAUTHZ line on the master, indicating the proper identity assertion for the update on the master. Also note the slave immediately receiving the Syncrepl update from the master.
4704 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
4705 <H3><A NAME="Handling Chaining Errors">11.3.3. Handling Chaining Errors</A></H3>
4706 <P>By default, if chaining fails, the original referral is returned to the client under the assumption that the client might want to try and follow the referral.</P>
4707 <P>With the following directive however, if the chaining fails at the provider side, the actual error is returned to the client.</P>
4708 <PRE>
4709         chain-return-error TRUE
4710 </PRE>
4711 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.3.4. Further Information</A></H3>
4712 <P><EM>slapo-chain(5)</EM></P>
4713 <H2><A NAME="Constraints">11.4. Constraints</A></H2>
4714 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.4.1. Overview</A></H3>
4715 <P>This overlay enforces a regular expression constraint on all values of specified attributes during an LDAP modify request that contains add or modify commands. It is used to enforce a more rigorous syntax when the underlying attribute syntax is too general.</P>
4716 <H3><A NAME="Constraint Configuration">11.4.2. Constraint Configuration</A></H3>
4717 <P>Configuration via <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) would look like:</P>
4718 <PRE>
4719         overlay constraint
4720         constraint_attribute mail regex ^[:alnum:]+@mydomain.com$
4721         constraint_attribute title uri
4722         ldap:///dc=catalog,dc=example,dc=com?title?sub?(objectClass=titleCatalog)
4723 </PRE>
4724 <P>A specification like the above would reject any <EM>mail</EM> attribute which did not look like <EM>&lt;alpha-numeric string&gt;@mydomain.com</EM>.</P>
4725 <P>It would also reject any title attribute whose values were not listed in the title attribute of any <EM>titleCatalog</EM> entries in the given scope.</P>
4726 <P>An example for use with <EM>cn=config</EM>:</P>
4727 <PRE>
4728        dn: olcOverlay=constraint,olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config
4729        changetype: add
4730        objectClass: olcOverlayConfig
4731        objectClass: olcConstraintConfig
4732        olcOverlay: constraint
4733        olcConstraintAttribute: mail regex ^[:alnum:]+@mydomain.com$
4734        olcConstraintAttribute: title uri ldap:///dc=catalog,dc=example,dc=com?title?sub?(objectClass=titleCatalog)
4735 </PRE>
4736 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.4.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4737 <P><EM>slapo-constraint(5)</EM></P>
4738 <H2><A NAME="Dynamic Directory Services">11.5. Dynamic Directory Services</A></H2>
4739 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.5.1. Overview</A></H3>
4740 <P>The <EM>dds</EM> overlay to <EM>slapd</EM>(8) implements dynamic objects as per <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2589.txt">RFC2589</A>. The name <EM>dds</EM> stands for Dynamic Directory Services. It allows to define dynamic objects, characterized by the <EM>dynamicObject</EM> objectClass.</P>
4741 <P>Dynamic objects have a limited lifetime, determined by a time-to-live (TTL) that can be refreshed by means of a specific refresh extended operation. This operation allows to set the Client Refresh Period (CRP), namely the period between refreshes that is required to preserve the dynamic object from expiration. The expiration time is computed by adding the requested TTL to the current time. When dynamic objects reach the end of their lifetime without being further refreshed, they are automatically <EM>deleted</EM>. There is no guarantee of immediate deletion, so clients should not count on it.</P>
4742 <H3><A NAME="Dynamic Directory Service Configuration">11.5.2. Dynamic Directory Service Configuration</A></H3>
4743 <P>A usage of dynamic objects might be to implement dynamic meetings; in this case, all the participants to the meeting are allowed to refresh the meeting object, but only the creator can delete it (otherwise it will be deleted when the TTL expires).</P>
4744 <P>If we add the overlay to an example database, specifying a Max TTL of 1 day, a min of 10 seconds, with a default TTL of 1 hour. We'll also specify an interval of 120 (less than 60s might be too small) seconds between expiration checks and a tolerance of 5 second (lifetime of a dynamic object will be <EM>entryTtl + tolerance</EM>).</P>
4745 <PRE>
4746        overlay dds
4747        dds-max-ttl     1d
4748        dds-min-ttl     10s
4749        dds-default-ttl 1h
4750        dds-interval    120s
4751        dds-tolerance   5s
4752 </PRE>
4753 <P>and add an index:</P>
4754 <PRE>
4755        entryExpireTimestamp
4756 </PRE>
4757 <P>Creating a meeting is as simple as adding the following:</P>
4758 <PRE>
4759        dn: cn=OpenLDAP Documentation Meeting,ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com
4760        objectClass: groupOfNames
4761        objectClass: dynamicObject
4762        cn: OpenLDAP Documentation Meeting
4763        member: uid=ghenry,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com
4764        member: uid=hyc,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com
4765 </PRE>
4766 <H4><A NAME="Dynamic Directory Service ACLs">11.5.2.1. Dynamic Directory Service ACLs</A></H4>
4767 <P>Allow users to start a meeting and to join it; restrict refresh to the <EM>member</EM>; restrict delete to the creator:</P>
4768 <PRE>
4769        access to attrs=userPassword
4770           by self write
4771           by * read
4772
4773        access to dn.base=&quot;ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4774                  attrs=children
4775             by users write
4776
4777        access to dn.onelevel=&quot;ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4778                  attrs=entry
4779             by dnattr=creatorsName write
4780             by * read
4781
4782        access to dn.onelevel=&quot;ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4783                  attrs=participant
4784             by dnattr=creatorsName write
4785             by users selfwrite
4786             by * read
4787
4788        access to dn.onelevel=&quot;ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4789                  attrs=entryTtl
4790             by dnattr=member manage
4791             by * read
4792 </PRE>
4793 <P>In simple terms, the user who created the <EM>OpenLDAP Documentation Meeting</EM> can add new attendees, refresh the meeting using (basically complete control):</P>
4794 <PRE>
4795        ldapexop -x -H ldap://ldaphost &quot;refresh&quot; &quot;cn=OpenLDAP Documentation Meeting,ou=Meetings,dc=example,dc=com&quot; &quot;120&quot; -D &quot;uid=ghenry,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com&quot; -W
4796 </PRE>
4797 <P>Any user can join the meeting, but not add another attendee, but they can refresh the meeting. The ACLs above are quite straight forward to understand.</P>
4798 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.5.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4799 <P><EM>slapo-dds(5)</EM></P>
4800 <H2><A NAME="Dynamic Groups">11.6. Dynamic Groups</A></H2>
4801 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.6.1. Overview</A></H3>
4802 <P>This overlay extends the Compare operation to detect members of a dynamic group. This overlay is now deprecated as all of its functions are available using the <A HREF="#Dynamic Lists">Dynamic Lists</A> overlay.</P>
4803 <H3><A NAME="Dynamic Group Configuration">11.6.2. Dynamic Group Configuration</A></H3>
4804 <H2><A NAME="Dynamic Lists">11.7. Dynamic Lists</A></H2>
4805 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.7.1. Overview</A></H3>
4806 <P>This overlay allows expansion of dynamic groups and lists. Instead of having the group members or list attributes hard coded, this overlay allows us to define an LDAP search whose results will make up the group or list.</P>
4807 <H3><A NAME="Dynamic List Configuration">11.7.2. Dynamic List Configuration</A></H3>
4808 <P>This module can behave both as a dynamic list and dynamic group, depending on the configuration. The syntax is as follows:</P>
4809 <PRE>
4810        overlay dynlist
4811        dynlist-attrset &lt;group-oc&gt; &lt;URL-ad&gt; [member-ad]
4812 </PRE>
4813 <P>The parameters to the <TT>dynlist-attrset</TT> directive have the following meaning:</P>
4814 <UL>
4815 <LI><TT>&lt;group-oc&gt;</TT>: specifies which object class triggers the subsequent LDAP search. Whenever an entry with this object class is retrieved, the search is performed.
4816 <LI><TT>&lt;URL-ad&gt;</TT>: is the name of the attribute which holds the search URI. It has to be a subtype of <TT>labeledURI</TT>. The attributes and values present in the search result are added to the entry unless <TT>member-ad</TT> is used (see below).
4817 <LI><TT>member-ad</TT>: if present, changes the overlay behavior into a dynamic group. Instead of inserting the results of the search in the entry, the distinguished name of the results are added as values of this attribute.</UL>
4818 <P>Here is an example which will allow us to have an email alias which automatically expands to all user's emails according to our LDAP filter:</P>
4819 <P>In <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5):</P>
4820 <PRE>
4821        overlay dynlist
4822        dynlist-attrset nisMailAlias labeledURI
4823 </PRE>
4824 <P>This means that whenever an entry which has the <TT>nisMailAlias</TT> object class is retrieved, the search specified in the <TT>labeledURI</TT> attribute is performed.</P>
4825 <P>Let's say we have this entry in our directory:</P>
4826 <PRE>
4827        cn=all,ou=aliases,dc=example,dc=com
4828        cn: all
4829        objectClass: nisMailAlias
4830        labeledURI: ldap:///ou=People,dc=example,dc=com?mail?one?(objectClass=inetOrgPerson)
4831 </PRE>
4832 <P>If this entry is retrieved, the search specified in <TT>labeledURI</TT> will be performed and the results will be added to the entry just as if they have always been there. In this case, the search filter selects all entries directly under <TT>ou=People</TT> that have the <TT>inetOrgPerson</TT> object class and retrieves the <TT>mail</TT> attribute, if it exists.</P>
4833 <P>This is what gets added to the entry when we have two users under <TT>ou=People</TT> that match the filter:</P>
4834 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="allmail-en.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
4835 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Dynamic List for all emails</P>
4836 <P>The configuration for a dynamic group is similar. Let's see an example which would automatically populate an <TT>allusers</TT> group with all the user accounts in the directory.</P>
4837 <P>In <TT>slapd.conf</TT>(5):</P>
4838 <PRE>
4839        overlay dynlist
4840        dynlist-attrset groupOfNames labeledURI member
4841 </PRE>
4842 <P>Let's apply it to the following entry:</P>
4843 <PRE>
4844        cn=allusers,ou=group,dc=example,dc=com
4845        cn: all
4846        objectClass: groupOfNames
4847        labeledURI: ldap:///ou=people,dc=example,dc=com??one?(objectClass=inetOrgPerson)
4848 </PRE>
4849 <P>The behavior is similar to the dynamic list configuration we had before: whenever an entry with the <TT>groupOfNames</TT> object class is retrieved, the search specified in the <TT>labeledURI</TT> attribute is performed. But this time, only the distinguished names of the results are added, and as values of the <TT>member</TT> attribute.</P>
4850 <P>This is what we get:</P>
4851 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="allusersgroup-en.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
4852 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Dynamic Group for all users</P>
4853 <P>Note that a side effect of this scheme of dynamic groups is that the members need to be specified as full DNs. So, if you are planning in using this for <TT>posixGroup</TT>s, be sure to use RFC2307bis and some attribute which can hold distinguished names. The <TT>memberUid</TT> attribute used in the <TT>posixGroup</TT> object class can hold only names, not DNs, and is therefore not suitable for dynamic groups.</P>
4854 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.7.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4855 <P><EM>slapo-dynlist(5)</EM></P>
4856 <H2><A NAME="Reverse Group Membership Maintenance">11.8. Reverse Group Membership Maintenance</A></H2>
4857 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.8.1. Overview</A></H3>
4858 <P>In some scenarios, it may be desirable for a client to be able to determine which groups an entry is a member of, without performing an additional search. Examples of this are applications using the <TERM>DIT</TERM> for access control based on group authorization.</P>
4859 <P>The <B>memberof</B> overlay updates an attribute (by default <B>memberOf</B>) whenever changes occur to the membership attribute (by default <B>member</B>) of entries of the objectclass (by default <B>groupOfNames</B>) configured to trigger updates.</P>
4860 <P>Thus, it provides maintenance of the list of groups an entry is a member of, when usual maintenance of groups is done by modifying the members on the group entry.</P>
4861 <H3><A NAME="Member Of Configuration">11.8.2. Member Of Configuration</A></H3>
4862 <P>The typical use of this overlay requires just enabling the overlay for a specific database. For example, with the following minimal slapd.conf:</P>
4863 <PRE>
4864         include /usr/share/openldap/schema/core.schema
4865         include /usr/share/openldap/schema/cosine.schema
4866         modulepath      /usr/lib/openldap
4867         moduleload      memberof.la
4868         authz-regexp &quot;gidNumber=0\\\+uidNumber=0,cn=peercred,cn=external,cn=auth&quot;
4869                 &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4870         database        bdb
4871         suffix          &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4872         rootdn          &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4873         rootpw          secret
4874         directory       /var/lib/ldap2.4
4875         checkpoint 256 5
4876         index   objectClass   eq
4877         index   uid           eq,sub
4878
4879         overlay memberof
4880 </PRE>
4881 <P>adding the following ldif:</P>
4882 <PRE>
4883         cat memberof.ldif
4884         dn: dc=example,dc=com
4885         objectclass: domain
4886         dc: example
4887
4888         dn: ou=Group,dc=example,dc=com
4889         objectclass: organizationalUnit
4890         ou: Group
4891
4892         dn: ou=People,dc=example,dc=com
4893         objectclass: organizationalUnit
4894         ou: People
4895
4896         dn: uid=test1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com
4897         objectclass: account
4898         uid: test1
4899
4900         dn: cn=testgroup,ou=Group,dc=example,dc=com
4901         objectclass: groupOfNames
4902         cn: testgroup
4903         member: uid=test1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com
4904 </PRE>
4905 <P>Results in the following output from a search on the test1 user:</P>
4906 <PRE>
4907  # ldapsearch -LL -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:/// &quot;(uid=test1)&quot; -b dc=example,dc=com memberOf
4908  SASL/EXTERNAL authentication started
4909  SASL username: gidNumber=0+uidNumber=0,cn=peercred,cn=external,cn=auth
4910  SASL SSF: 0
4911  version: 1
4912
4913  dn: uid=test1,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com
4914  memberOf: cn=testgroup,ou=Group,dc=example,dc=com
4915 </PRE>
4916 <P>Note that the <B>memberOf</B> attribute is an operational attribute, so it must be requested explicitly.</P>
4917 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.8.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4918 <P><EM>slapo-memberof(5)</EM></P>
4919 <H2><A NAME="The Proxy Cache Engine">11.9. The Proxy Cache Engine</A></H2>
4920 <P><TERM>LDAP</TERM> servers typically hold one or more subtrees of a <TERM>DIT</TERM>. Replica (or shadow) servers hold shadow copies of entries held by one or more master servers.  Changes are propagated from the master server to replica (slave) servers using LDAP Sync replication.  An LDAP cache is a special type of replica which holds entries corresponding to search filters instead of subtrees.</P>
4921 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.9.1. Overview</A></H3>
4922 <P>The proxy cache extension of slapd is designed to improve the responsiveness of the ldap and meta backends. It handles a search request (query) by first determining whether it is contained in any cached search filter. Contained requests are answered from the proxy cache's local database. Other requests are passed on to the underlying ldap or meta backend and processed as usual.</P>
4923 <P>E.g. <TT>(shoesize&gt;=9)</TT> is contained in <TT>(shoesize&gt;=8)</TT> and <TT>(sn=Richardson)</TT> is contained in <TT>(sn=Richards*)</TT></P>
4924 <P>Correct matching rules and syntaxes are used while comparing assertions for query containment. To simplify the query containment problem, a list of cacheable &quot;templates&quot; (defined below) is specified at configuration time. A query is cached or answered only if it belongs to one of these templates. The entries corresponding to cached queries are stored in the proxy cache local database while its associated meta information (filter, scope, base, attributes) is stored in main memory.</P>
4925 <P>A template is a prototype for generating LDAP search requests. Templates are described by a prototype search filter and a list of attributes which are required in queries generated from the template. The representation for prototype filter is similar to <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt">RFC4515</A>, except that the assertion values are missing. Examples of prototype filters are: (sn=),(&amp;(sn=)(givenname=)) which are instantiated by search filters (sn=Doe) and (&amp;(sn=Doe)(givenname=John)) respectively.</P>
4926 <P>The cache replacement policy removes the least recently used (LRU) query and entries belonging to only that query. Queries are allowed a maximum time to live (TTL) in the cache thus providing weak consistency. A background task periodically checks the cache for expired queries and removes them.</P>
4927 <P>The Proxy Cache paper (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/pub/kapurva/proxycaching.pdf">http://www.openldap.org/pub/kapurva/proxycaching.pdf</A>) provides design and implementation details.</P>
4928 <H3><A NAME="Proxy Cache Configuration">11.9.2. Proxy Cache Configuration</A></H3>
4929 <P>The cache configuration specific directives described below must appear after a <TT>overlay proxycache</TT> directive within a <TT>&quot;database meta&quot;</TT> or <TT>database ldap</TT> section of the server's <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file.</P>
4930 <H4><A NAME="Setting cache parameters">11.9.2.1. Setting cache parameters</A></H4>
4931 <PRE>
4932  proxyCache &lt;DB&gt; &lt;maxentries&gt; &lt;nattrsets&gt; &lt;entrylimit&gt; &lt;period&gt;
4933 </PRE>
4934 <P>This directive enables proxy caching and sets general cache parameters.  The &lt;DB&gt; parameter specifies which underlying database is to be used to hold cached entries.  It should be set to <TT>bdb</TT> or <TT>hdb</TT>.  The &lt;maxentries&gt; parameter specifies the total number of entries which may be held in the cache.  The &lt;nattrsets&gt; parameter specifies the total number of attribute sets (as specified by the <TT>proxyAttrSet</TT> directive) that may be defined.  The &lt;entrylimit&gt; parameter specifies the maximum number of entries in a cacheable query.  The &lt;period&gt; specifies the consistency check period (in seconds).  In each period, queries with expired TTLs are removed.</P>
4935 <H4><A NAME="Defining attribute sets">11.9.2.2. Defining attribute sets</A></H4>
4936 <PRE>
4937  proxyAttrset &lt;index&gt; &lt;attrs...&gt;
4938 </PRE>
4939 <P>Used to associate a set of attributes to an index. Each attribute set is associated with an index number from 0 to &lt;numattrsets&gt;-1. These indices are used by the proxyTemplate directive to define cacheable templates.</P>
4940 <H4><A NAME="Specifying cacheable templates">11.9.2.3. Specifying cacheable templates</A></H4>
4941 <PRE>
4942  proxyTemplate &lt;prototype_string&gt; &lt;attrset_index&gt; &lt;TTL&gt;
4943 </PRE>
4944 <P>Specifies a cacheable template and the &quot;time to live&quot; (in sec) &lt;TTL&gt; for queries belonging to the template. A template is described by its prototype filter string and set of required attributes identified by &lt;attrset_index&gt;.</P>
4945 <H4><A NAME="Example">11.9.2.4. Example</A></H4>
4946 <P>An example <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) database section for a caching server which proxies for the <TT>&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;</TT> subtree held at server <TT>ldap.example.com</TT>.</P>
4947 <PRE>
4948         database        ldap
4949         suffix          &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4950         rootdn          &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
4951         uri             ldap://ldap.example.com/
4952         overlay proxycache
4953         proxycache    bdb 100000 1 1000 100
4954         proxyAttrset  0 mail postaladdress telephonenumber
4955         proxyTemplate (sn=) 0 3600
4956         proxyTemplate (&amp;(sn=)(givenName=)) 0 3600
4957         proxyTemplate (&amp;(departmentNumber=)(secretary=*)) 0 3600
4958
4959         cachesize 20
4960         directory ./testrun/db.2.a
4961         index       objectClass eq
4962         index       cn,sn,uid,mail  pres,eq,sub
4963 </PRE>
4964 <H5><A NAME="Cacheable Queries">11.9.2.4.1. Cacheable Queries</A></H5>
4965 <P>A LDAP search query is cacheable when its filter matches one of the templates as defined in the &quot;proxyTemplate&quot; statements and when it references only the attributes specified in the corresponding attribute set. In the example above the attribute set number 0 defines that only the attributes: <TT>mail postaladdress telephonenumber</TT> are cached for the following proxyTemplates.</P>
4966 <H5><A NAME="Examples:">11.9.2.4.2. Examples:</A></H5>
4967 <PRE>
4968         Filter: (&amp;(sn=Richard*)(givenName=jack))
4969         Attrs: mail telephoneNumber
4970 </PRE>
4971 <P>is cacheable, because it matches the template <TT>(&amp;(sn=)(givenName=))</TT> and its attributes are contained in proxyAttrset 0.</P>
4972 <PRE>
4973         Filter: (&amp;(sn=Richard*)(telephoneNumber))
4974         Attrs: givenName
4975 </PRE>
4976 <P>is not cacheable, because the filter does not match the template, nor is the attribute givenName stored in the cache</P>
4977 <PRE>
4978         Filter: (|(sn=Richard*)(givenName=jack))
4979         Attrs: mail telephoneNumber
4980 </PRE>
4981 <P>is not cacheable, because the filter does not match the template ( logical OR &quot;|&quot; condition instead of logical AND &quot;&amp;&quot; )</P>
4982 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.9.3. Further Information</A></H3>
4983 <P><EM>slapo-pcache(5)</EM></P>
4984 <H2><A NAME="Password Policies">11.10. Password Policies</A></H2>
4985 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.10.1. Overview</A></H3>
4986 <P>This overlay follows the specifications contained in the draft RFC titled draft-behera-ldap-password-policy-09. While the draft itself is expired, it has been implemented in several directory servers, including slapd. Nonetheless, it is important to note that it is a draft, meaning that it is subject to change and is a work-in-progress.</P>
4987 <P>The key abilities of the password policy overlay are as follows:</P>
4988 <UL>
4989 <LI>Enforce a minimum length for new passwords
4990 <LI>Make sure passwords are not changed too frequently
4991 <LI>Cause passwords to expire, provide warnings before they need to be changed, and allow a fixed number of 'grace' logins to allow them to be changed after they have expired
4992 <LI>Maintain a history of passwords to prevent password re-use
4993 <LI>Prevent password guessing by locking a password for a specified period of time after repeated authentication failures
4994 <LI>Force a password to be changed at the next authentication
4995 <LI>Set an administrative lock on an account
4996 <LI>Support multiple password policies on a default or a per-object basis.
4997 <LI>Perform arbitrary quality checks using an external loadable module. This is a non-standard extension of the draft RFC.</UL>
4998 <H3><A NAME="Password Policy Configuration">11.10.2. Password Policy Configuration</A></H3>
4999 <P>Instantiate the module in the database where it will be used, after adding the new ppolicy schema and loading the ppolicy module. The following example shows the ppolicy module being added to the database that handles the naming context &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;. In this example we are also specifying the DN of a policy object to use if none other is specified in a user's object.</P>
5000 <PRE>
5001        database bdb
5002        suffix &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
5003        [...additional database configuration directives go here...]
5004
5005        overlay ppolicy
5006        ppolicy_default &quot;cn=default,ou=policies,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
5007 </PRE>
5008 <P>Now we need a container for the policy objects. In our example the password policy objects are going to be placed in a section of the tree called &quot;ou=policies,dc=example,dc=com&quot;:</P>
5009 <PRE>
5010        dn: ou=policies,dc=example,dc=com
5011        objectClass: organizationalUnit
5012        objectClass: top
5013        ou: policies
5014 </PRE>
5015 <P>The default policy object that we are creating defines the following policies:</P>
5016 <UL>
5017 <LI>The user is allowed to change his own password. Note that the directory ACLs for this attribute can also affect this ability (pwdAllowUserChange: TRUE).
5018 <LI>The name of the password attribute is &quot;userPassword&quot; (pwdAttribute: userPassword). Note that this is the only value that is accepted by OpenLDAP for this attribute.
5019 <LI>The server will check the syntax of the password. If the server is unable to check the syntax (i.e., it was hashed or otherwise encoded by the client) it will return an error refusing the password (pwdCheckQuality: 2).
5020 <LI>When a client includes the Password Policy Request control with a bind request, the server will respond with a password expiration warning if it is going to expire in ten minutes or less (pwdExpireWarning: 600). The warnings themselves are returned in a Password Policy Response control.
5021 <LI>When the password for a DN has expired, the server will allow five additional &quot;grace&quot; logins (pwdGraceAuthNLimit: 5).
5022 <LI>The server will maintain a history of the last five passwords that were used for a DN (pwdInHistory: 5).
5023 <LI>The server will lock the account after the maximum number of failed bind attempts has been exceeded (pwdLockout: TRUE).
5024 <LI>When the server has locked an account, the server will keep it locked until an administrator unlocks it (pwdLockoutDuration: 0)
5025 <LI>The server will reset its failed bind count after a period of 30 seconds.
5026 <LI>Passwords will not expire (pwdMaxAge: 0).
5027 <LI>Passwords can be changed as often as desired (pwdMinAge: 0).
5028 <LI>Passwords must be at least 5 characters in length (pwdMinLength: 5).
5029 <LI>The password does not need to be changed at the first bind or when the administrator has reset the password (pwdMustChange: FALSE)
5030 <LI>The current password does not need to be included with password change requests (pwdSafeModify: FALSE)
5031 <LI>The server will only allow five failed binds in a row for a particular DN (pwdMaxFailure: 5).</UL>
5032 <P>The actual policy would be:</P>
5033 <PRE>
5034        dn: cn=default,ou=policies,dc=example,dc=com
5035        cn: default
5036        objectClass: pwdPolicy
5037        objectClass: person
5038        objectClass: top
5039        pwdAllowUserChange: TRUE
5040        pwdAttribute: userPassword
5041        pwdCheckQuality: 2
5042        pwdExpireWarning: 600
5043        pwdFailureCountInterval: 30
5044        pwdGraceAuthNLimit: 5
5045        pwdInHistory: 5
5046        pwdLockout: TRUE
5047        pwdLockoutDuration: 0
5048        pwdMaxAge: 0
5049        pwdMaxFailure: 5
5050        pwdMinAge: 0
5051        pwdMinLength: 5
5052        pwdMustChange: FALSE
5053        pwdSafeModify: FALSE
5054        sn: dummy value
5055 </PRE>
5056 <P>You can create additional policy objects as needed.</P>
5057 <P>There are two ways password policy can be applied to individual objects:</P>
5058 <P>1. The pwdPolicySubentry in a user's object - If a user's object has a pwdPolicySubEntry attribute specifying the DN of a policy object, then the policy defined by that object is applied.</P>
5059 <P>2. Default password policy - If there is no specific pwdPolicySubentry set for an object, and the password policy module was configured with the DN of a default policy object and if that object exists, then the policy defined in that object is applied.</P>
5060 <P>Please see <EM>slapo-ppolicy(5)</EM> for complete explanations of features and discussion of &quot;Password Management Issues&quot; at <A HREF="http://www.connexitor.com/forums/viewtopic.php?f=6&amp;t=25">http://www.connexitor.com/forums/viewtopic.php?f=6&amp;t=25</A></P>
5061 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.10.3. Further Information</A></H3>
5062 <P><EM>slapo-ppolicy(5)</EM></P>
5063 <H2><A NAME="Referential Integrity">11.11. Referential Integrity</A></H2>
5064 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.11.1. Overview</A></H3>
5065 <P>This overlay can be used with a backend database such as slapd-bdb(5) to maintain the cohesiveness of a schema which utilizes reference attributes.</P>
5066 <P>Whenever a <EM>modrdn</EM> or <EM>delete</EM> is performed, that is, when an entry's DN is renamed or an entry is removed, the server will search the directory for references to this DN (in selected attributes: see below) and update them accordingly. If it was a <EM>delete</EM> operation, the reference is deleted. If it was a <EM>modrdn</EM> operation, then the reference is updated with the new DN.</P>
5067 <P>For example, a very common administration task is to maintain group membership lists, specially when users are removed from the directory. When an user account is deleted or renamed, all groups this user is a member of have to be updated. LDAP administrators usually have scripts for that. But we can use the <TT>refint</TT> overlay to automate this task. In this example, if the user is removed from the directory, the overlay will take care to remove the user from all the groups he/she was a member of. No more scripting for this.</P>
5068 <H3><A NAME="Referential Integrity Configuration">11.11.2. Referential Integrity Configuration</A></H3>
5069 <P>The configuration for this overlay is as follows:</P>
5070 <PRE>
5071        overlay refint
5072        refint_attributes &lt;attribute [attribute ...]&gt;
5073        refint_nothing &lt;string&gt;
5074 </PRE>
5075 <UL>
5076 <LI><TT>refint_attributes</TT>: this parameter specifies a space separated list of attributes which will have the referential integrity maintained. When an entry is removed or has its DN renamed, the server will do an internal search for any of the <TT>refint_attributes</TT> that point to the affected DN and update them accordingly. IMPORTANT: the attributes listed here must have the <TT>distinguishedName</TT> syntax, that is, hold DNs as values.
5077 <LI><TT>refint_nothing</TT>: some times, while trying to maintain the referential integrity, the server has to remove the last attribute of its kind from an entry. This may be prohibited by the schema: for example, the <TT>groupOfNames</TT> object class requires at least one member. In these cases, the server will add the attribute value specified in <TT>refint_nothing</TT> to the entry.</UL>
5078 <P>To illustrate this overlay, we will use the group membership scenario.</P>
5079 <P>In <TT>slapd.conf</TT>:</P>
5080 <PRE>
5081        overlay refint
5082        refint_attributes member
5083        refint_nothing &quot;cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
5084 </PRE>
5085 <P>This configuration tells the overlay to maintain the referential integrity of the <TT>member</TT> attribute. This attribute is used in the <TT>groupOfNames</TT> object class which always needs a member, so we add the <TT>refint_nothing</TT> directive to fill in the group with a standard member should all the members vanish.</P>
5086 <P>If we have the following group membership, the refint overlay will automatically remove <TT>john</TT> from the group if his entry is removed from the directory:</P>
5087 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="refint.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
5088 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Maintaining referential integrity in groups</P>
5089 <P>Notice that if we rename (<TT>modrdn</TT>) the <TT>john</TT> entry to, say, <TT>jsmith</TT>, the refint overlay will also rename the reference in the <TT>member</TT> attribute, so the group membership stays correct.</P>
5090 <P>If we removed all users from the directory who are a member of this group, then the end result would be a single member in the group: <TT>cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com</TT>. This is the <TT>refint_nothing</TT> parameter kicking into action so that the schema is not violated.</P>
5091 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.11.3. Further Information</A></H3>
5092 <P><EM>slapo-refint(5)</EM></P>
5093 <H2><A NAME="Return Code">11.12. Return Code</A></H2>
5094 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.12.1. Overview</A></H3>
5095 <P>This overlay is useful to test the behavior of clients when server-generated erroneous and/or unusual responses occur, for example; error codes, referrals, excessive response times and so on.</P>
5096 <P>This would be classed as a debugging tool whilst developing client software or additional Overlays.</P>
5097 <P>For detailed information, please see the <EM>slapo-retcode(5)</EM> man page.</P>
5098 <H3><A NAME="Return Code Configuration">11.12.2. Return Code Configuration</A></H3>
5099 <P>The retcode overlay utilizes the &quot;return code&quot; schema described in the man page. This schema is specifically designed for use with this overlay and is not intended to be used otherwise.</P>
5100 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5101 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The necessary schema is loaded automatically by the overlay.
5102 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5103 <P>An example configuration might be:</P>
5104 <PRE>
5105        overlay         retcode
5106        retcode-parent  &quot;ou=RetCodes,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
5107        include         ./retcode.conf
5108
5109        retcode-item    &quot;cn=Unsolicited&quot;                0x00 unsolicited=&quot;0&quot;
5110        retcode-item    &quot;cn=Notice of Disconnect&quot;       0x00 unsolicited=&quot;1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.20036&quot;
5111        retcode-item    &quot;cn=Pre-disconnect&quot;             0x34 flags=&quot;pre-disconnect&quot;
5112        retcode-item    &quot;cn=Post-disconnect&quot;            0x34 flags=&quot;post-disconnect&quot;
5113 </PRE>
5114 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5115 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG><EM>retcode.conf</EM> can be found in the openldap source at: <TT>tests/data/retcode.conf</TT>
5116 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5117 <P>An excerpt of a <TT>retcode.conf</TT> would be something like:</P>
5118 <PRE>
5119        retcode-item    &quot;cn=success&quot;                            0x00
5120
5121        retcode-item    &quot;cn=success w/ delay&quot;                   0x00    sleeptime=2
5122
5123        retcode-item    &quot;cn=operationsError&quot;                    0x01
5124        retcode-item    &quot;cn=protocolError&quot;                      0x02
5125        retcode-item    &quot;cn=timeLimitExceeded&quot;                  0x03    op=search
5126        retcode-item    &quot;cn=sizeLimitExceeded&quot;                  0x04    op=search
5127        retcode-item    &quot;cn=compareFalse&quot;                       0x05    op=compare
5128        retcode-item    &quot;cn=compareTrue&quot;                        0x06    op=compare
5129        retcode-item    &quot;cn=authMethodNotSupported&quot;             0x07
5130        retcode-item    &quot;cn=strongAuthNotSupported&quot;             0x07    text=&quot;same as authMethodNotSupported&quot;
5131        retcode-item    &quot;cn=strongAuthRequired&quot;                 0x08
5132        retcode-item    &quot;cn=strongerAuthRequired&quot;               0x08    text=&quot;same as strongAuthRequired&quot;
5133 </PRE>
5134 <P>Please see <TT>tests/data/retcode.conf</TT> for a complete <TT>retcode.conf</TT></P>
5135 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.12.3. Further Information</A></H3>
5136 <P><EM>slapo-retcode(5)</EM></P>
5137 <H2><A NAME="Rewrite/Remap">11.13. Rewrite/Remap</A></H2>
5138 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.13.1. Overview</A></H3>
5139 <P>It performs basic DN/data rewrite and objectClass/attributeType mapping. Its usage is mostly intended to provide virtual views of existing data either remotely, in conjunction with the proxy backend described in <EM>slapd-ldap(5)</EM>, or locally, in conjunction with the relay backend described in <EM>slapd-relay(5)</EM>.</P>
5140 <P>This overlay is extremely configurable and advanced, therefore recommended reading is the <EM>slapo-rwm(5)</EM> man page.</P>
5141 <H3><A NAME="Rewrite/Remap Configuration">11.13.2. Rewrite/Remap Configuration</A></H3>
5142 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.13.3. Further Information</A></H3>
5143 <P><EM>slapo-rwm(5)</EM></P>
5144 <H2><A NAME="Sync Provider">11.14. Sync Provider</A></H2>
5145 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.14.1. Overview</A></H3>
5146 <P>This overlay implements the provider-side support for syncrepl replication, including persistent search functionality</P>
5147 <H3><A NAME="Sync Provider Configuration">11.14.2. Sync Provider Configuration</A></H3>
5148 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.14.3. Further Information</A></H3>
5149 <P><EM>slapo-syncprov(5)</EM></P>
5150 <H2><A NAME="Translucent Proxy">11.15. Translucent Proxy</A></H2>
5151 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.15.1. Overview</A></H3>
5152 <P>This overlay can be used with a backend database such as slapd-bdb (5) to create a &quot;translucent proxy&quot;.</P>
5153 <P>Content of entries retrieved from a remote LDAP server can be partially overridden by the database.</P>
5154 <H3><A NAME="Translucent Proxy Configuration">11.15.2. Translucent Proxy Configuration</A></H3>
5155 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.15.3. Further Information</A></H3>
5156 <P><EM>slapo-translucent(5)</EM></P>
5157 <H2><A NAME="Attribute Uniqueness">11.16. Attribute Uniqueness</A></H2>
5158 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.16.1. Overview</A></H3>
5159 <P>This overlay can be used with a backend database such as slapd-bdb (5) to enforce the uniqueness of some or all attributes within a subtree.</P>
5160 <H3><A NAME="Attribute Uniqueness Configuration">11.16.2. Attribute Uniqueness Configuration</A></H3>
5161 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.16.3. Further Information</A></H3>
5162 <P><EM>slapo-unique(5)</EM></P>
5163 <H2><A NAME="Value Sorting">11.17. Value Sorting</A></H2>
5164 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.17.1. Overview</A></H3>
5165 <P>This overlay can be used to enforce a specific order for the values of an attribute when it is returned in a search.</P>
5166 <H3><A NAME="Value Sorting Configuration">11.17.2. Value Sorting Configuration</A></H3>
5167 <H3><A NAME="Further Information">11.17.3. Further Information</A></H3>
5168 <P><EM>slapo-valsort(5)</EM></P>
5169 <H2><A NAME="Overlay Stacking">11.18. Overlay Stacking</A></H2>
5170 <H3><A NAME="Overview">11.18.1. Overview</A></H3>
5171 <P>Overlays can be stacked, which means that more than one overlay can be instantiated for each database, or for the <TT>frontend</TT>. As a consequence, each overlays function is called, if defined, when overlay execution is invoked. Multiple overlays are executed in reverse order (as a stack) with respect to their definition in slapd.conf (5), or with respect to their ordering in the config database, as documented in slapd-config (5).</P>
5172 <H3><A NAME="Example Scenarios">11.18.2. Example Scenarios</A></H3>
5173 <H4><A NAME="Samba">11.18.2.1. Samba</A></H4>
5174 <P></P>
5175 <HR>
5176 <H1><A NAME="Schema Specification">12. Schema Specification</A></H1>
5177 <P>This chapter describes how to extend the user schema used by <EM>slapd</EM>(8).  The chapter assumes the reader is familiar with the <TERM>LDAP</TERM>/<TERM>X.500</TERM> information model.</P>
5178 <P>The first section, <A HREF="#Distributed Schema Files">Distributed Schema Files</A> details optional schema definitions provided in the distribution and where to obtain other definitions. The second section, <A HREF="#Extending Schema">Extending Schema</A>, details how to define new schema items.</P>
5179 <P>This chapter does not discuss how to extend system schema used by <EM>slapd</EM>(8) as this requires source code modification.  System schema includes all operational attribute types or any object class which allows or requires an operational attribute (directly or indirectly).</P>
5180 <H2><A NAME="Distributed Schema Files">12.1. Distributed Schema Files</A></H2>
5181 <P>OpenLDAP Software is distributed with a set of schema specifications for your use.  Each set is defined in a file suitable for inclusion (using the <TT>include</TT> directive) in your <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file.  These schema files are normally installed in the <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/schema</TT> directory.</P>
5182 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
5183 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 8.1: Provided Schema Specifications</CAPTION>
5184 <TR CLASS="heading">
5185 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5186 <STRONG>File</STRONG>
5187 </TD>
5188 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5189 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
5190 </TD>
5191 </TR>
5192 <TR>
5193 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5194 <TT>core.schema</TT>
5195 </TD>
5196 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5197 OpenLDAP <EM>core</EM> (required)
5198 </TD>
5199 </TR>
5200 <TR>
5201 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5202 <TT>cosine.schema</TT>
5203 </TD>
5204 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5205 Cosine and Internet X.500 (useful)
5206 </TD>
5207 </TR>
5208 <TR>
5209 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5210 <TT>inetorgperson.schema</TT>
5211 </TD>
5212 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5213 InetOrgPerson (useful)
5214 </TD>
5215 </TR>
5216 <TR>
5217 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5218 <TT>misc.schema</TT>
5219 </TD>
5220 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5221 Assorted (experimental)
5222 </TD>
5223 </TR>
5224 <TR>
5225 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5226 <TT>nis.schema</TT>
5227 </TD>
5228 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5229 Network Information Services (FYI)
5230 </TD>
5231 </TR>
5232 <TR>
5233 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5234 <TT>openldap.schema</TT>
5235 </TD>
5236 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5237 OpenLDAP Project (experimental)
5238 </TD>
5239 </TR>
5240 </TABLE>
5241
5242 <P>To use any of these schema files, you only need to include the desired file in the global definitions portion of your <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file.  For example:</P>
5243 <PRE>
5244         # include schema
5245         include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.schema
5246         include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema
5247         include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema
5248 </PRE>
5249 <P>Additional files may be available.  Please consult the OpenLDAP <TERM>FAQ</TERM> (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/">http://www.openldap.org/faq/</A>).</P>
5250 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5251 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>You should not modify any of the schema items defined in provided files.
5252 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5253 <H2><A NAME="Extending Schema">12.2. Extending Schema</A></H2>
5254 <P>Schema used by <EM>slapd</EM>(8) may be extended to support additional syntaxes, matching rules, attribute types, and object classes.  This chapter details how to add user application attribute types and object classes using the syntaxes and matching rules already supported by slapd.  slapd can also be extended to support additional syntaxes, matching rules and system schema, but this requires some programming and hence is not discussed here.</P>
5255 <P>There are five steps to defining new schema:</P>
5256 <OL>
5257 <LI>obtain Object Identifier
5258 <LI>choose a name prefix
5259 <LI>create local schema file
5260 <LI>define custom attribute types (if necessary)
5261 <LI>define custom object classes</OL>
5262 <H3><A NAME="Object Identifiers">12.2.1. Object Identifiers</A></H3>
5263 <P>Each schema element is identified by a globally unique <TERM>Object Identifier</TERM> (OID).  OIDs are also used to identify other objects.  They are commonly found in protocols described by <TERM>ASN.1</TERM>.  In particular, they are heavily used by the <TERM>Simple Network Management Protocol</TERM> (SNMP). As OIDs are hierarchical, your organization can obtain one OID and branch it as needed.  For example, if your organization were assigned OID <TT>1.1</TT>, you could branch the tree as follows:</P>
5264 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
5265 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 8.2: Example OID hierarchy</CAPTION>
5266 <TR CLASS="heading">
5267 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5268 <STRONG>OID</STRONG>
5269 </TD>
5270 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5271 <STRONG>Assignment</STRONG>
5272 </TD>
5273 </TR>
5274 <TR>
5275 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5276 <TT>1.1</TT>
5277 </TD>
5278 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5279 Organization's OID
5280 </TD>
5281 </TR>
5282 <TR>
5283 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5284 <TT>1.1.1</TT>
5285 </TD>
5286 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5287 SNMP Elements
5288 </TD>
5289 </TR>
5290 <TR>
5291 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5292 <TT>1.1.2</TT>
5293 </TD>
5294 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5295 LDAP Elements
5296 </TD>
5297 </TR>
5298 <TR>
5299 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5300 <TT>1.1.2.1</TT>
5301 </TD>
5302 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5303 AttributeTypes
5304 </TD>
5305 </TR>
5306 <TR>
5307 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5308 <TT>1.1.2.1.1</TT>
5309 </TD>
5310 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5311 x-my-Attribute
5312 </TD>
5313 </TR>
5314 <TR>
5315 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5316 <TT>1.1.2.2</TT>
5317 </TD>
5318 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5319 ObjectClasses
5320 </TD>
5321 </TR>
5322 <TR>
5323 <TD ALIGN='Left'>
5324 <TT>1.1.2.2.1</TT>
5325 </TD>
5326 <TD ALIGN='Right'>
5327 x-my-ObjectClass
5328 </TD>
5329 </TR>
5330 </TABLE>
5331
5332 <P>You are, of course, free to design a hierarchy suitable to your organizational needs under your organization's OID. No matter what hierarchy you choose, you should maintain a registry of assignments you make.  This can be a simple flat file or something more sophisticated such as the <EM>OpenLDAP OID Registry</EM> (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/index.cgi?file=197">http://www.openldap.org/faq/index.cgi?file=197</A>).</P>
5333 <P>For more information about Object Identifiers (and a listing service) see <A HREF="http://www.alvestrand.no/harald/objectid/">http://www.alvestrand.no/harald/objectid/</A>.</P>
5334 <UL>
5335 <EM>Under no circumstances should you hijack OID namespace!</EM></UL>
5336 <P>To obtain a registered OID at <EM>no cost</EM>, apply for a OID under the <A HREF="http://www.iana.org/">Internet Assigned Numbers Authority</A> (ORG:IANA) maintained <EM>Private Enterprise</EM> arc. Any private enterprise (organization) may request a <TERM>Private Enterprise Number</TERM> (PEN) to be assigned under this arc. Just fill out the IANA form at <A HREF="http://pen.iana.org/pen/PenApplication.page">http://pen.iana.org/pen/PenApplication.page</A> and your official PEN will be sent to you usually within a few days. Your base OID will be something like <TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.X</TT> where <TT>X</TT> is an integer.</P>
5337 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5338 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>PENs obtained using this form may be used for any purpose including identifying LDAP schema elements.
5339 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5340 <P>Alternatively, OID name space may be available from a national authority (e.g., <A HREF="http://www.ansi.org/">ANSI</A>, <A HREF="http://www.bsi-global.com/">BSI</A>).</P>
5341 <H3><A NAME="Naming Elements">12.2.2. Naming Elements</A></H3>
5342 <P>In addition to assigning a unique object identifier to each schema element, you should provide a least one textual name for each element.  Names should be registered with the <A HREF="http://www.iana.org/">IANA</A> or prefixed with &quot;x-&quot; to place in the &quot;private use&quot; name space.</P>
5343 <P>The name should be both descriptive and not likely to clash with names of other schema elements.  In particular, any name you choose should not clash with present or future Standard Track names (this is assured if you registered names or use names beginning with &quot;x-&quot;).</P>
5344 <P>It is noted that you can obtain your own registered name prefix so as to avoid having to register your names individually. See <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4520.txt">RFC4520</A> for details.</P>
5345 <P>In the examples below, we have used a short prefix '<TT>x-my-</TT>'. Such a short prefix would only be suitable for a very large, global organization.  In general, we recommend something like '<TT>x-de-Firm-</TT>' (German company) or '<TT>x-com-Example</TT>' (elements associated with organization associated with <TT>example.com</TT>).</P>
5346 <H3><A NAME="Local schema file">12.2.3. Local schema file</A></H3>
5347 <P>The <TT>objectclass</TT> and <TT>attributeTypes</TT> configuration file directives can be used to define schema rules on entries in the directory.  It is customary to create a file to contain definitions of your custom schema items.  We recommend you create a file <TT>local.schema</TT> in <TT>/usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/local.schema</TT> and then include this file in your <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file immediately after other schema <TT>include</TT> directives.</P>
5348 <PRE>
5349         # include schema
5350         include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.schema
5351         include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema
5352         include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema
5353         # include local schema
5354         include /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/local.schema
5355 </PRE>
5356 <H3><A NAME="Attribute Type Specification">12.2.4. Attribute Type Specification</A></H3>
5357 <P>The <EM>attributetype</EM> directive is used to define a new attribute type.  The directive uses the same Attribute Type Description (as defined in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A>) used by the attributeTypes attribute found in the subschema subentry, e.g.:</P>
5358 <PRE>
5359         attributetype &lt;<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Attribute Type Description&gt;
5360 </PRE>
5361 <P>where Attribute Type Description is defined by the following <TERM>ABNF</TERM>:</P>
5362 <PRE>
5363       AttributeTypeDescription = &quot;(&quot; whsp
5364             numericoid whsp              ; AttributeType identifier
5365           [ &quot;NAME&quot; qdescrs ]             ; name used in AttributeType
5366           [ &quot;DESC&quot; qdstring ]            ; description
5367           [ &quot;OBSOLETE&quot; whsp ]
5368           [ &quot;SUP&quot; woid ]                 ; derived from this other
5369                                          ; AttributeType
5370           [ &quot;EQUALITY&quot; woid              ; Matching Rule name
5371           [ &quot;ORDERING&quot; woid              ; Matching Rule name
5372           [ &quot;SUBSTR&quot; woid ]              ; Matching Rule name
5373           [ &quot;SYNTAX&quot; whsp noidlen whsp ] ; Syntax OID
5374           [ &quot;SINGLE-VALUE&quot; whsp ]        ; default multi-valued
5375           [ &quot;COLLECTIVE&quot; whsp ]          ; default not collective
5376           [ &quot;NO-USER-MODIFICATION&quot; whsp ]; default user modifiable
5377           [ &quot;USAGE&quot; whsp AttributeUsage ]; default userApplications
5378           whsp &quot;)&quot;
5379
5380       AttributeUsage =
5381           &quot;userApplications&quot;     /
5382           &quot;directoryOperation&quot;   /
5383           &quot;distributedOperation&quot; / ; DSA-shared
5384           &quot;dSAOperation&quot;          ; DSA-specific, value depends on server
5385
5386 </PRE>
5387 <P>where whsp is a space ('<TT> </TT>'), numericoid is a globally unique OID in dotted-decimal form (e.g. <TT>1.1.0</TT>), qdescrs is one or more names, woid is either the name or OID optionally followed by a length specifier (e.g <TT>{10</TT>}).</P>
5388 <P>For example, the attribute types <TT>name</TT> and <TT>cn</TT> are defined in <TT>core.schema</TT> as:</P>
5389 <PRE>
5390         attributeType ( 2.5.4.41 NAME 'name'
5391                 DESC 'name(s) associated with the object'
5392                 EQUALITY caseIgnoreMatch
5393                 SUBSTR caseIgnoreSubstringsMatch
5394                 SYNTAX 1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.15{32768} )
5395         attributeType ( 2.5.4.3 NAME ( 'cn' 'commonName' )
5396                 DESC 'common name(s) assciated with the object'
5397                 SUP name )
5398 </PRE>
5399 <P>Notice that each defines the attribute's OID, provides a short name, and a brief description.  Each name is an alias for the OID. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) returns the first listed name when returning results.</P>
5400 <P>The first attribute, <TT>name</TT>, holds values of <TT>directoryString</TT> (<TERM>UTF-8</TERM> encoded Unicode) syntax.  The syntax is specified by OID (1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.15 identifies the directoryString syntax).  A length recommendation of 32768 is specified.  Servers should support values of this length, but may support longer values The field does NOT specify a size constraint, so is ignored on servers (such as slapd) which don't impose such size limits.  In addition, the equality and substring matching uses case ignore rules.  Below are tables listing commonly used syntax and matching rules (<EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports these and many more).</P>
5401 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
5402 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 8.3: Commonly Used Syntaxes</CAPTION>
5403 <TR CLASS="heading">
5404 <TD>
5405 <STRONG>Name</STRONG>
5406 </TD>
5407 <TD>
5408 <STRONG>OID</STRONG>
5409 </TD>
5410 <TD>
5411 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
5412 </TD>
5413 </TR>
5414 <TR>
5415 <TD>
5416 <TT>boolean</TT>
5417 </TD>
5418 <TD>
5419 <TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.7</TT>
5420 </TD>
5421 <TD>
5422 boolean value
5423 </TD>
5424 </TR>
5425 <TR>
5426 <TD>
5427 <TT>directoryString</TT>
5428 </TD>
5429 <TD>
5430 <TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.15</TT>
5431 </TD>
5432 <TD>
5433 Unicode (UTF-8) string
5434 </TD>
5435 </TR>
5436 <TR>
5437 <TD>
5438 <TT>distinguishedName</TT>
5439 </TD>
5440 <TD>
5441 <TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.12</TT>
5442 </TD>
5443 <TD>
5444 LDAP <TERM>DN</TERM>
5445 </TD>
5446 </TR>
5447 <TR>
5448 <TD>
5449 <TT>integer</TT>
5450 </TD>
5451 <TD>
5452 <TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.27</TT>
5453 </TD>
5454 <TD>
5455 integer
5456 </TD>
5457 </TR>
5458 <TR>
5459 <TD>
5460 <TT>numericString</TT>
5461 </TD>
5462 <TD>
5463 <TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.36</TT>
5464 </TD>
5465 <TD>
5466 numeric string
5467 </TD>
5468 </TR>
5469 <TR>
5470 <TD>
5471 <TT>OID</TT>
5472 </TD>
5473 <TD>
5474 <TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.38</TT>
5475 </TD>
5476 <TD>
5477 object identifier
5478 </TD>
5479 </TR>
5480 <TR>
5481 <TD>
5482 <TT>octetString</TT>
5483 </TD>
5484 <TD>
5485 <TT>1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.40</TT>
5486 </TD>
5487 <TD>
5488 arbitrary octets
5489 </TD>
5490 </TR>
5491 </TABLE>
5492
5493 <PRE>
5494
5495 </PRE>
5496 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
5497 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 8.4: Commonly Used Matching Rules</CAPTION>
5498 <TR CLASS="heading">
5499 <TD>
5500 <STRONG>Name</STRONG>
5501 </TD>
5502 <TD>
5503 <STRONG>Type</STRONG>
5504 </TD>
5505 <TD>
5506 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
5507 </TD>
5508 </TR>
5509 <TR>
5510 <TD>
5511 <TT>booleanMatch</TT>
5512 </TD>
5513 <TD>
5514 equality
5515 </TD>
5516 <TD>
5517 boolean
5518 </TD>
5519 </TR>
5520 <TR>
5521 <TD>
5522 <TT>caseIgnoreMatch</TT>
5523 </TD>
5524 <TD>
5525 equality
5526 </TD>
5527 <TD>
5528 case insensitive, space insensitive
5529 </TD>
5530 </TR>
5531 <TR>
5532 <TD>
5533 <TT>caseIgnoreOrderingMatch</TT>
5534 </TD>
5535 <TD>
5536 ordering
5537 </TD>
5538 <TD>
5539 case insensitive, space insensitive
5540 </TD>
5541 </TR>
5542 <TR>
5543 <TD>
5544 <TT>caseIgnoreSubstringsMatch</TT>
5545 </TD>
5546 <TD>
5547 substrings
5548 </TD>
5549 <TD>
5550 case insensitive, space insensitive
5551 </TD>
5552 </TR>
5553 <TR>
5554 <TD>
5555 <TT>caseExactMatch</TT>
5556 </TD>
5557 <TD>
5558 equality
5559 </TD>
5560 <TD>
5561 case sensitive, space insensitive
5562 </TD>
5563 </TR>
5564 <TR>
5565 <TD>
5566 <TT>caseExactOrderingMatch</TT>
5567 </TD>
5568 <TD>
5569 ordering
5570 </TD>
5571 <TD>
5572 case sensitive, space insensitive
5573 </TD>
5574 </TR>
5575 <TR>
5576 <TD>
5577 <TT>caseExactSubstringsMatch</TT>
5578 </TD>
5579 <TD>
5580 substrings
5581 </TD>
5582 <TD>
5583 case sensitive, space insensitive
5584 </TD>
5585 </TR>
5586 <TR>
5587 <TD>
5588 <TT>distinguishedNameMatch</TT>
5589 </TD>
5590 <TD>
5591 equality
5592 </TD>
5593 <TD>
5594 distinguished name
5595 </TD>
5596 </TR>
5597 <TR>
5598 <TD>
5599 <TT>integerMatch</TT>
5600 </TD>
5601 <TD>
5602 equality
5603 </TD>
5604 <TD>
5605 integer
5606 </TD>
5607 </TR>
5608 <TR>
5609 <TD>
5610 <TT>integerOrderingMatch</TT>
5611 </TD>
5612 <TD>
5613 ordering
5614 </TD>
5615 <TD>
5616 integer
5617 </TD>
5618 </TR>
5619 <TR>
5620 <TD>
5621 <TT>numericStringMatch</TT>
5622 </TD>
5623 <TD>
5624 equality
5625 </TD>
5626 <TD>
5627 numerical
5628 </TD>
5629 </TR>
5630 <TR>
5631 <TD>
5632 <TT>numericStringOrderingMatch</TT>
5633 </TD>
5634 <TD>
5635 ordering
5636 </TD>
5637 <TD>
5638 numerical
5639 </TD>
5640 </TR>
5641 <TR>
5642 <TD>
5643 <TT>numericStringSubstringsMatch</TT>
5644 </TD>
5645 <TD>
5646 substrings
5647 </TD>
5648 <TD>
5649 numerical
5650 </TD>
5651 </TR>
5652 <TR>
5653 <TD>
5654 <TT>octetStringMatch</TT>
5655 </TD>
5656 <TD>
5657 equality
5658 </TD>
5659 <TD>
5660 octet string
5661 </TD>
5662 </TR>
5663 <TR>
5664 <TD>
5665 <TT>octetStringOrderingStringMatch</TT>
5666 </TD>
5667 <TD>
5668 ordering
5669 </TD>
5670 <TD>
5671 octet string
5672 </TD>
5673 </TR>
5674 <TR>
5675 <TD>
5676 <TT>octetStringSubstringsStringMatch</TT>
5677 </TD>
5678 <TD>
5679 ordering
5680 </TD>
5681 <TD>
5682 octet string
5683 </TD>
5684 </TR>
5685 <TR>
5686 <TD>
5687 <TT>objectIdentiferMatch</TT>
5688 </TD>
5689 <TD>
5690 equality
5691 </TD>
5692 <TD>
5693 object identifier
5694 </TD>
5695 </TR>
5696 </TABLE>
5697
5698 <P>The second attribute, <TT>cn</TT>, is a subtype of <TT>name</TT> hence it inherits the syntax, matching rules, and usage of <TT>name</TT>. <TT>commonName</TT> is an alternative name.</P>
5699 <P>Neither attribute is restricted to a single value.  Both are meant for usage by user applications.  Neither is obsolete nor collective.</P>
5700 <P>The following subsections provide a couple of examples.</P>
5701 <H4><A NAME="x-my-UniqueName">12.2.4.1. x-my-UniqueName</A></H4>
5702 <P>Many organizations maintain a single unique name for each user. Though one could use <TT>displayName</TT> (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt">RFC2798</A>), this attribute is really meant to be controlled by the user, not the organization.  We could just copy the definition of <TT>displayName</TT> from <TT>inetorgperson.schema</TT> and replace the OID, name, and description, e.g:</P>
5703 <PRE>
5704         attributetype ( 1.1.2.1.1 NAME 'x-my-UniqueName'
5705                 DESC 'unique name with my organization'
5706                 EQUALITY caseIgnoreMatch
5707                 SUBSTR caseIgnoreSubstringsMatch
5708                 SYNTAX 1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.15
5709                 SINGLE-VALUE )
5710 </PRE>
5711 <P>However, if we want this name to be used in <TT>name</TT> assertions, e.g. <TT>(name=*Jane*)</TT>, the attribute could alternatively be defined as a subtype of <TT>name</TT>, e.g.:</P>
5712 <PRE>
5713         attributetype ( 1.1.2.1.1 NAME 'x-my-UniqueName'
5714                 DESC 'unique name with my organization'
5715                 SUP name )
5716 </PRE>
5717 <H4><A NAME="x-my-Photo">12.2.4.2. x-my-Photo</A></H4>
5718 <P>Many organizations maintain a photo of each each user.  A <TT>x-my-Photo</TT> attribute type could be defined to hold a photo. Of course, one could use just use <TT>jpegPhoto</TT> (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt">RFC2798</A>) (or a subtype) to hold the photo.  However, you can only do this if the photo is in <EM>JPEG File Interchange Format</EM>. Alternatively, an attribute type which uses the <EM>Octet String</EM> syntax can be defined, e.g.:</P>
5719 <PRE>
5720         attributetype ( 1.1.2.1.2 NAME 'x-my-Photo'
5721                 DESC 'a photo (application defined format)'
5722                 SYNTAX 1.3.6.1.4.1.1466.115.121.1.40
5723                 SINGLE-VALUE )
5724 </PRE>
5725 <P>In this case, the syntax doesn't specify the format of the photo. It's assumed (maybe incorrectly) that all applications accessing this attribute agree on the handling of values.</P>
5726 <P>If you wanted to support multiple photo formats, you could define a separate attribute type for each format, prefix the photo with some typing information, or describe the value using <TERM>ASN.1</TERM> and use the <TT>;binary</TT> transfer option.</P>
5727 <P>Another alternative is for the attribute to hold a <TERM>URI</TERM> pointing to the photo.  You can model such an attribute after <TT>labeledURI</TT> (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2079.txt">RFC2079</A>) or simply create a subtype, e.g.:</P>
5728 <PRE>
5729         attributetype ( 1.1.2.1.3 NAME 'x-my-PhotoURI'
5730                 DESC 'URI and optional label referring to a photo'
5731                 SUP labeledURI )
5732 </PRE>
5733 <H3><A NAME="Object Class Specification">12.2.5. Object Class Specification</A></H3>
5734 <P>The <EM>objectclasses</EM> directive is used to define a new object class.  The directive uses the same Object Class Description (as defined in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A>) used by the objectClasses attribute found in the subschema subentry, e.g.:</P>
5735 <PRE>
5736         objectclass &lt;<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A> Object Class Description&gt;
5737 </PRE>
5738 <P>where Object Class Description is defined by the following <TERM>ABNF</TERM>:</P>
5739 <PRE>
5740         ObjectClassDescription = &quot;(&quot; whsp
5741                 numericoid whsp      ; ObjectClass identifier
5742                 [ &quot;NAME&quot; qdescrs ]
5743                 [ &quot;DESC&quot; qdstring ]
5744                 [ &quot;OBSOLETE&quot; whsp ]
5745                 [ &quot;SUP&quot; oids ]       ; Superior ObjectClasses
5746                 [ ( &quot;ABSTRACT&quot; / &quot;STRUCTURAL&quot; / &quot;AUXILIARY&quot; ) whsp ]
5747                         ; default structural
5748                 [ &quot;MUST&quot; oids ]      ; AttributeTypes
5749                 [ &quot;MAY&quot; oids ]       ; AttributeTypes
5750                 whsp &quot;)&quot;
5751 </PRE>
5752 <P>where whsp is a space ('<TT> </TT>'), numericoid is a globally unique OID in dotted-decimal form (e.g. <TT>1.1.0</TT>), qdescrs is one or more names, and oids is one or more names and/or OIDs.</P>
5753 <H4><A NAME="x-my-PhotoObject">12.2.5.1. x-my-PhotoObject</A></H4>
5754 <P>To define an <EM>auxiliary</EM> object class which allows x-my-Photo to be added to any existing entry.</P>
5755 <PRE>
5756         objectclass ( 1.1.2.2.1 NAME 'x-my-PhotoObject'
5757                 DESC 'mixin x-my-Photo'
5758                 AUXILIARY
5759                 MAY x-my-Photo )
5760 </PRE>
5761 <H4><A NAME="x-my-Person">12.2.5.2. x-my-Person</A></H4>
5762 <P>If your organization would like have a private <EM>structural</EM> object class to instantiate users, you can subclass one of the existing person classes, such as <TT>inetOrgPerson</TT> (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt">RFC2798</A>), and add any additional attributes which you desire.</P>
5763 <PRE>
5764         objectclass ( 1.1.2.2.2 NAME 'x-my-Person'
5765                 DESC 'my person'
5766                 SUP inetOrgPerson
5767                 MUST ( x-my-UniqueName $ givenName )
5768                 MAY x-my-Photo )
5769 </PRE>
5770 <P>The object class inherits the required/allowed attribute types of <TT>inetOrgPerson</TT> but requires <TT>x-my-UniqueName</TT> and <TT>givenName</TT> and allows <TT>x-my-Photo</TT>.</P>
5771 <H3><A NAME="OID Macros">12.2.6. OID Macros</A></H3>
5772 <P>To ease the management and use of OIDs, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports <EM>Object Identifier</EM> macros.  The <TT>objectIdentifier</TT> directive is used to equate a macro (name) with a OID.  The OID may possibly be derived from a previously defined OID macro.   The <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) syntax is:</P>
5773 <PRE>
5774         objectIdentifier &lt;name&gt; { &lt;oid&gt; | &lt;name&gt;[:&lt;suffix&gt;] }
5775 </PRE>
5776 <P>The following demonstrates definition of a set of OID macros and their use in defining schema elements:</P>
5777 <PRE>
5778         objectIdentifier myOID  1.1
5779         objectIdentifier mySNMP myOID:1
5780         objectIdentifier myLDAP myOID:2
5781         objectIdentifier myAttributeType        myLDAP:1
5782         objectIdentifier myObjectClass  myLDAP:2
5783         attributetype ( myAttributeType:3 NAME 'x-my-PhotoURI'
5784                 DESC 'URI and optional label referring to a photo'
5785                 SUP labeledURI )
5786         objectclass ( myObjectClass:1 NAME 'x-my-PhotoObject'
5787                 DESC 'mixin x-my-Photo'
5788                 AUXILIARY
5789                 MAY x-my-Photo )
5790 </PRE>
5791 <P></P>
5792 <HR>
5793 <H1><A NAME="Security Considerations">13. Security Considerations</A></H1>
5794 <P>OpenLDAP Software is designed to run in a wide variety of computing environments from tightly-controlled closed networks to the global Internet.  Hence, OpenLDAP Software supports many different security mechanisms.  This chapter describes these mechanisms and discusses security considerations for using OpenLDAP Software.</P>
5795 <H2><A NAME="Network Security">13.1. Network Security</A></H2>
5796 <H3><A NAME="Selective Listening">13.1.1. Selective Listening</A></H3>
5797 <P>By default, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) will listen on both the IPv4 and IPv6 &quot;any&quot; addresses.  It is often desirable to have <EM>slapd</EM> listen on select address/port pairs.  For example, listening only on the IPv4 address <TT>127.0.0.1</TT> will disallow remote access to the directory server. E.g.:</P>
5798 <PRE>
5799         slapd -h ldap://127.0.0.1
5800 </PRE>
5801 <P>While the server can be configured to listen on a particular interface address, this doesn't necessarily restrict access to the server to only those networks accessible via that interface.   To selective restrict remote access, it is recommend that an <A HREF="#IP Firewall">IP Firewall</A> be used to restrict access.</P>
5802 <P>See <A HREF="#Command-line Options">Command-line Options</A> and <EM>slapd</EM>(8) for more information.</P>
5803 <H3><A NAME="IP Firewall">13.1.2. IP Firewall</A></H3>
5804 <P><TERM>IP</TERM> firewall capabilities of the server system can be used to restrict access based upon the client's IP address and/or network interface used to communicate with the client.</P>
5805 <P>Generally, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) listens on port 389/tcp for <A HREF="ldap://">ldap://</A> sessions and port 636/tcp for <A HREF="ldaps://">ldaps://</A>) sessions.  <EM>slapd</EM>(8) may be configured to listen on other ports.</P>
5806 <P>As specifics of how to configure IP firewall are dependent on the particular kind of IP firewall used, no examples are provided here. See the document associated with your IP firewall.</P>
5807 <H3><A NAME="TCP Wrappers">13.1.3. TCP Wrappers</A></H3>
5808 <P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports <TERM>TCP</TERM> Wrappers.  TCP Wrappers provide a rule-based access control system for controlling TCP/IP access to the server.  For example, the <EM>host_options</EM>(5) rule:</P>
5809 <PRE>
5810         slapd: 10.0.0.0/255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 : ALLOW
5811         slapd: ALL : DENY
5812 </PRE>
5813 <P>allows only incoming connections from the private network <TT>10.0.0.0</TT> and localhost (<TT>127.0.0.1</TT>) to access the directory service.</P>
5814 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5815 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>IP addresses are used as <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is not normally configured to perform reverse lookups.
5816 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5817 <P>It is noted that TCP wrappers require the connection to be accepted. As significant processing is required just to deny a connection, it is generally advised that IP firewall protection be used instead of TCP wrappers.</P>
5818 <P>See <EM>hosts_access</EM>(5) for more information on TCP wrapper rules.</P>
5819 <H2><A NAME="Data Integrity and Confidentiality Protection">13.2. Data Integrity and Confidentiality Protection</A></H2>
5820 <P><TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM> (TLS) can be used to provide data integrity and confidentiality protection.  OpenLDAP supports negotiation of <TERM>TLS</TERM> (<TERM>SSL</TERM>) via both StartTLS and <A HREF="ldaps://">ldaps://</A>. See the <A HREF="#Using TLS">Using TLS</A> chapter for more information.  StartTLS is the standard track mechanism.</P>
5821 <P>A number of <TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM> (SASL) mechanisms, such as <TERM>DIGEST-MD5</TERM> and <TERM>GSSAPI</TERM>, also provide data integrity and confidentiality protection.  See the <A HREF="#Using SASL">Using SASL</A> chapter for more information.</P>
5822 <H3><A NAME="Security Strength Factors">13.2.1. Security Strength Factors</A></H3>
5823 <P>The server uses <TERM>Security Strength Factor</TERM>s (SSF) to indicate the relative strength of protection.  A SSF of zero (0) indicates no protections are in place.  A SSF of one (1) indicates integrity protection are in place.  A SSF greater than one (&gt;1) roughly correlates to the effective encryption key length.  For example, <TERM>DES</TERM> is 56, <TERM>3DES</TERM> is 112, and <TERM>AES</TERM> 128, 192, or 256.</P>
5824 <P>A number of administrative controls rely on SSFs associated with TLS and SASL protection in place on an LDAP session.</P>
5825 <P><TT>security</TT> controls disallow operations when appropriate protections are not in place.  For example:</P>
5826 <PRE>
5827         security ssf=1 update_ssf=112
5828 </PRE>
5829 <P>requires integrity protection for all operations and encryption protection, 3DES equivalent, for update operations (e.g. add, delete, modify, etc.).  See <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) for details.</P>
5830 <P>For fine-grained control, SSFs may be used in access controls. See <A HREF="#The access Configuration Directive">The access Configuration Directive</A> section of the <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> for more information.</P>
5831 <H2><A NAME="Authentication Methods">13.3. Authentication Methods</A></H2>
5832 <H3><A NAME="&quot;simple&quot; method">13.3.1. &quot;simple&quot; method</A></H3>
5833 <P>The LDAP &quot;simple&quot; method has three modes of operation:</P>
5834 <UL>
5835 <LI>anonymous,
5836 <LI>unauthenticated, and
5837 <LI>user/password authenticated.</UL>
5838 <P>Anonymous access is requested by providing no name and no password to the &quot;simple&quot; bind operation.  Unauthenticated access is requested by providing a name but no password.  Authenticated access is requested by providing a valid name and password.</P>
5839 <P>An anonymous bind results in an <EM>anonymous</EM> authorization association.  Anonymous bind mechanism is enabled by default, but can be disabled by specifying &quot;<TT>disallow bind_anon</TT>&quot; in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5).</P>
5840 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5841 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Disabling the anonymous bind mechanism does not prevent anonymous access to the directory. To require authentication to access the directory, one should instead specify &quot;<TT>require authc</TT>&quot;.
5842 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5843 <P>An unauthenticated bind also results in an <EM>anonymous</EM> authorization association.  Unauthenticated bind mechanism is disabled by default, but can be enabled by specifying &quot;<TT>allow bind_anon_cred</TT>&quot; in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5).  As a number of LDAP applications mistakenly generate unauthenticated bind request when authenticated access was intended (that is, they do not ensure a password was provided), this mechanism should generally remain disabled.</P>
5844 <P>A successful user/password authenticated bind results in a user authorization identity, the provided name, being associated with the session.  User/password authenticated bind is enabled by default. However, as this mechanism itself offers no eavesdropping protection (e.g., the password is set in the clear), it is recommended that it be used only in tightly controlled systems or when the LDAP session is protected by other means (e.g., TLS, <TERM>IPsec</TERM>). Where the administrator relies on TLS to protect the password, it is recommended that unprotected authentication be disabled.  This is done using the <TT>security</TT> directive's <TT>simple_bind</TT> option, which provides fine grain control over the level of confidential protection to require for <EM>simple</EM> user/password authentication. E.g., using <TT>security simple_bind=56</TT> would require <EM>simple</EM> binds to use encryption of DES equivalent or better.</P>
5845 <P>The user/password authenticated bind mechanism can be completely disabled by setting &quot;<TT>disallow bind_simple</TT>&quot;.</P>
5846 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5847 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>An unsuccessful bind always results in the session having an <EM>anonymous</EM> authorization association.
5848 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5849 <H3><A NAME="SASL method">13.3.2. SASL method</A></H3>
5850 <P>The LDAP <TERM>SASL</TERM> method allows the use of any SASL authentication mechanism. The <A HREF="#Using SASL">Using SASL</A> section discusses the use of SASL.</P>
5851 <H2><A NAME="Password Storage">13.4. Password Storage</A></H2>
5852 <P>LDAP passwords are normally stored in the <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute. <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4519.txt">RFC4519</A> specifies that passwords are not stored in encrypted (or hashed) form.  This allows a wide range of password-based authentication mechanisms, such as <TT>DIGEST-MD5</TT> to be used. This is also the most interoperable storage scheme.</P>
5853 <P>However, it may be desirable to store a hash of password instead. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports a variety of storage schemes for the administrator to choose from.</P>
5854 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5855 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Values of password attributes, regardless of storage scheme used, should be protected as if they were clear text.  Hashed passwords are subject to <EM>dictionary attacks</EM> and <EM>brute-force attacks</EM>.
5856 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5857 <P>The <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute is allowed to have more than one value, and it is possible for each value to be stored in a different form. During authentication, <EM>slapd</EM> will iterate through the values until it finds one that matches the offered password or until it runs out of values to inspect.  The storage scheme is stored as a prefix on the value, so a hashed password using the Salted SHA1 (<TT>SSHA</TT>) scheme looks like:</P>
5858 <PRE>
5859  userPassword: {SSHA}DkMTwBl+a/3DQTxCYEApdUtNXGgdUac3
5860 </PRE>
5861 <P>The advantage of hashed passwords is that an attacker which discovers the hash does not have direct access to the actual password. Unfortunately, as dictionary and brute force attacks are generally quite easy for attackers to successfully mount, this advantage is marginal at best (this is why all modern Unix systems use shadow password files).</P>
5862 <P>The disadvantages of hashed storage is that they are non-standard, may cause interoperability problem, and generally preclude the use of stronger than Simple (or SASL/PLAIN) password-based authentication mechanisms such as <TT>DIGEST-MD5</TT>.</P>
5863 <H3><A NAME="SSHA password storage scheme">13.4.1. SSHA password storage scheme</A></H3>
5864 <P>This is the salted version of the SHA scheme. It is believed to be the most secure password storage scheme supported by <EM>slapd</EM>.</P>
5865 <P>These values represent the same password:</P>
5866 <PRE>
5867  userPassword: {SSHA}DkMTwBl+a/3DQTxCYEApdUtNXGgdUac3
5868  userPassword: {SSHA}d0Q0626PSH9VUld7yWpR0k6BlpQmtczb
5869 </PRE>
5870 <H3><A NAME="CRYPT password storage scheme">13.4.2. CRYPT password storage scheme</A></H3>
5871 <P>This scheme uses the operating system's <EM>crypt(3)</EM> hash function. It normally produces the traditional Unix-style 13 character hash, but on systems with <TT>glibc2</TT> it can also generate the more secure 34-byte MD5 hash.</P>
5872 <PRE>
5873  userPassword: {CRYPT}aUihad99hmev6
5874  userPassword: {CRYPT}$1$czBJdDqS$TmkzUAb836oMxg/BmIwN.1
5875 </PRE>
5876 <P>The advantage of the CRYPT scheme is that passwords can be transferred to or from an existing Unix password file without having to know the cleartext form. Both forms of <EM>crypt</EM> include salt so they have some resistance to dictionary attacks.</P>
5877 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5878 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Since this scheme uses the operating system's <EM>crypt(3)</EM> hash function, it is therefore operating system specific.
5879 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5880 <H3><A NAME="MD5 password storage scheme">13.4.3. MD5 password storage scheme</A></H3>
5881 <P>This scheme simply takes the MD5 hash of the password and stores it in base64 encoded form:</P>
5882 <PRE>
5883  userPassword: {MD5}Xr4ilOzQ4PCOq3aQ0qbuaQ==
5884 </PRE>
5885 <P>Although safer than cleartext storage, this is not a very secure scheme. The MD5 algorithm is fast, and because there is no salt the scheme is vulnerable to a dictionary attack.</P>
5886 <H3><A NAME="SMD5 password storage scheme">13.4.4. SMD5 password storage scheme</A></H3>
5887 <P>This improves on the basic MD5 scheme by adding salt (random data which means that there are many possible representations of a given plaintext password). For example, both of these values represent the same password:</P>
5888 <PRE>
5889  userPassword: {SMD5}4QWGWZpj9GCmfuqEvm8HtZhZS6E=
5890  userPassword: {SMD5}g2/J/7D5EO6+oPdklp5p8YtNFk4=
5891 </PRE>
5892 <H3><A NAME="SHA password storage scheme">13.4.5. SHA password storage scheme</A></H3>
5893 <P>Like the MD5 scheme, this simply feeds the password through an SHA hash process. SHA is thought to be more secure than MD5, but the lack of salt leaves the scheme exposed to dictionary attacks.</P>
5894 <PRE>
5895  userPassword: {SHA}5en6G6MezRroT3XKqkdPOmY/BfQ=
5896 </PRE>
5897 <H3><A NAME="SASL password storage scheme">13.4.6. SASL password storage scheme</A></H3>
5898 <P>This is not really a password storage scheme at all. It uses the value of the <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute to delegate password verification to another process. See below for more information.</P>
5899 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5900 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>This is not the same as using SASL to authenticate the LDAP session.
5901 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5902 <H3><A NAME="KERBEROS password storage scheme">13.4.7. KERBEROS password storage scheme</A></H3>
5903 <P>This is not really a password storage scheme at all. It uses the value of the <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute to delegate password verification to Kerberos.</P>
5904 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5905 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>This is not the same as using Kerberos authentication of the LDAP session.
5906 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5907 <P>This scheme could be said to defeat the advantages of Kerberos by causing the Kerberos password to be exposed to the <EM>slapd</EM> server (and possibly on the network as well).</P>
5908 <H2><A NAME="Pass-Through authentication">13.5. Pass-Through authentication</A></H2>
5909 <P>Since OpenLDAP 2.0 <EM>slapd</EM> has had the ability to delegate password verification to a separate process. This uses the <EM>sasl_checkpass(3)</EM> function so it can use any back-end server that Cyrus SASL supports for checking passwords. The choice is very wide, as one option is to use <EM>saslauthd(8)</EM> which in turn can use local files, Kerberos, an IMAP server, another LDAP server, or anything supported by the PAM mechanism.</P>
5910 <P>The server must be built with the <TT>--enable-spasswd</TT> configuration option to enable pass-through authentication.</P>
5911 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5912 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>This is not the same as using a SASL mechanism to authenticate the LDAP session.
5913 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5914 <P>Pass-Through authentication works only with plaintext passwords, as used in the &quot;simple bind&quot; and &quot;SASL PLAIN&quot; authentication mechanisms.}}</P>
5915 <P>Pass-Through authentication is selective: it only affects users whose <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute has a value marked with the &quot;{SASL}&quot; scheme. The format of the attribute is:</P>
5916 <PRE>
5917  userPassword: {SASL}username@realm
5918 </PRE>
5919 <P>The <EM>username</EM> and <EM>realm</EM> are passed to the SASL authentication mechanism and are used to identify the account whose password is to be verified. This allows arbitrary mapping between entries in OpenLDAP and accounts known to the backend authentication service.</P>
5920 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
5921 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>There is no support for changing passwords in the backend via <EM>slapd</EM>.
5922 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
5923 <P>It would be wise to use access control to prevent users from changing their passwords through LDAP where they have pass-through authentication enabled.</P>
5924 <H3><A NAME="Configuring slapd to use an authentication provider">13.5.1. Configuring slapd to use an authentication provider</A></H3>
5925 <P>Where an entry has a &quot;{SASL}&quot; password value, OpenLDAP delegates the whole process of validating that entry's password to Cyrus SASL. All the configuration is therefore done in SASL config files.</P>
5926 <P>The first file to be considered is confusingly named <EM>slapd.conf</EM> and is typically found in the SASL library directory, often <TT>/usr/lib/sasl2/slapd.conf</TT> This file governs the use of SASL when talking LDAP to <EM>slapd</EM> as well as the use of SASL backends for pass-through authentication. See <TT>options.html</TT> in the <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A> docs for full details. Here is a simple example for a server that will use <EM>saslauthd</EM> to verify passwords:</P>
5927 <PRE>
5928  mech_list: plain
5929  pwcheck_method: saslauthd
5930  saslauthd_path: /var/run/sasl2/mux
5931 </PRE>
5932 <H3><A NAME="Configuring saslauthd">13.5.2. Configuring saslauthd</A></H3>
5933 <P><EM>saslauthd</EM> is capable of using many different authentication services: see <EM>saslauthd(8)</EM> for details. A common requirement is to delegate some or all authentication to another LDAP server. Here is a sample <TT>saslauthd.conf</TT> that uses Microsoft Active Directory (AD):</P>
5934 <PRE>
5935  ldap_servers: ldap://dc1.example.com/ ldap://dc2.example.com/
5936
5937  ldap_search_base: cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com
5938  ldap_filter: (userPrincipalName=%u)
5939
5940  ldap_bind_dn: cn=saslauthd,cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com
5941  ldap_password: secret
5942 </PRE>
5943 <P>In this case, <EM>saslauthd</EM> is run with the <TT>ldap</TT> authentication mechanism and is set to combine the SASL realm with the login name:</P>
5944 <PRE>
5945  saslauthd -a ldap -r
5946 </PRE>
5947 <P>This means that the &quot;username@realm&quot; string from the <EM>userPassword</EM> attribute ends up being used to search AD for &quot;userPrincipalName=username@realm&quot; - the password is then verified by attempting to bind to AD using the entry found by the search and the password supplied by the LDAP client.</P>
5948 <H3><A NAME="Testing pass-through authentication">13.5.3. Testing pass-through authentication</A></H3>
5949 <P>It is usually best to start with the back-end authentication provider and work through <EM>saslauthd</EM> and <EM>slapd</EM> towards the LDAP client.</P>
5950 <P>In the AD example above, first check that the DN and password that <EM>saslauthd</EM> will use when it connects to AD are valid:</P>
5951 <PRE>
5952  ldapsearch -x -H ldap://dc1.example.com/ \
5953       -D cn=saslauthd,cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com \
5954       -w secret \
5955       -b '' \
5956       -s base
5957 </PRE>
5958 <P>Next check that a sample AD user can be found:</P>
5959 <PRE>
5960  ldapsearch -x -H ldap://dc1.example.com/ \
5961       -D cn=saslauthd,cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com \
5962       -w secret \
5963       -b cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com \
5964       &quot;(userPrincipalName=user@ad.example.com)&quot;
5965 </PRE>
5966 <P>Check that the user can bind to AD:</P>
5967 <PRE>
5968  ldapsearch -x -H ldap://dc1.example.com/ \
5969       -D cn=user,cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com \
5970       -w userpassword \
5971       -b cn=user,cn=Users,DC=ad,DC=example,DC=com \
5972       -s base \
5973         &quot;(objectclass=*)&quot;
5974 </PRE>
5975 <P>If all that works then <EM>saslauthd</EM> should be able to do the same:</P>
5976 <PRE>
5977  testsaslauthd -u user@ad.example.com -p userpassword
5978  testsaslauthd -u user@ad.example.com -p wrongpassword
5979 </PRE>
5980 <P>Now put the magic token into an entry in OpenLDAP:</P>
5981 <PRE>
5982  userPassword: {SASL}user@ad.example.com
5983 </PRE>
5984 <P>It should now be possible to bind to OpenLDAP using the DN of that entry and the password of the AD user.</P>
5985 <P></P>
5986 <HR>
5987 <H1><A NAME="Using SASL">14. Using SASL</A></H1>
5988 <P>OpenLDAP clients and servers are capable of authenticating via the <TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM> (<TERM>SASL</TERM>) framework, which is detailed in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4422.txt">RFC4422</A>.   This chapter describes how to make use of SASL in OpenLDAP.</P>
5989 <P>There are several industry standard authentication mechanisms that can be used with SASL, including <TERM>GSSAPI</TERM> for <TERM>Kerberos</TERM> V, <TERM>DIGEST-MD5</TERM>, and <TERM>PLAIN</TERM> and <TERM>EXTERNAL</TERM> for use with <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM> (TLS).</P>
5990 <P>The standard client tools provided with OpenLDAP Software, such as <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) and <EM>ldapmodify</EM>(1), will by default attempt to authenticate the user to the <TERM>LDAP</TERM> directory server using SASL.  Basic authentication service can be set up by the LDAP administrator with a few steps, allowing users to be authenticated to the slapd server as their LDAP entry.  With a few extra steps, some users and services can be allowed to exploit SASL's proxy authorization feature, allowing them to authenticate themselves and then switch their identity to that of another user or service.</P>
5991 <P>This chapter assumes you have read <EM>Cyrus SASL for System Administrators</EM>, provided with the <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A> package (in <TT>doc/sysadmin.html</TT>) and have a working Cyrus SASL installation.  You should use the Cyrus SASL <TT>sample_client</TT> and <TT>sample_server</TT> to test your SASL installation before attempting to make use of it with OpenLDAP Software.</P>
5992 <P>Note that in the following text the term <EM>user</EM> is used to describe a person or application entity who is connecting to the LDAP server via an LDAP client, such as <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1).  That is, the term <EM>user</EM> not only applies to both an individual using an LDAP client, but to an application entity which issues LDAP client operations without direct user control.  For example, an e-mail server which uses LDAP operations to access information held in an LDAP server is an application entity.</P>
5993 <H2><A NAME="SASL Security Considerations">14.1. SASL Security Considerations</A></H2>
5994 <P>SASL offers many different authentication mechanisms.  This section briefly outlines security considerations.</P>
5995 <P>Some mechanisms, such as PLAIN and LOGIN, offer no greater security over LDAP <EM>simple</EM> authentication.  Like LDAP <EM>simple</EM> authentication, such mechanisms should not be used unless you have adequate security protections in place.  It is recommended that these mechanisms be used only in conjunction with <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM> (TLS).  Use of PLAIN and LOGIN are not discussed further in this document.</P>
5996 <P>The DIGEST-MD5 mechanism is the mandatory-to-implement authentication mechanism for LDAPv3.  Though DIGEST-MD5 is not a strong authentication mechanism in comparison with trusted third party authentication systems (such as <TERM>Kerberos</TERM> or public key systems), it does offer significant protections against a number of attacks.  Unlike the <TERM>CRAM-MD5</TERM> mechanism, it prevents chosen plaintext attacks.  DIGEST-MD5 is favored over the use of plaintext password mechanisms.  The CRAM-MD5 mechanism is deprecated in favor of DIGEST-MD5.  Use of <A HREF="#DIGEST-MD5">DIGEST-MD5</A> is discussed below.</P>
5997 <P>The GSSAPI mechanism utilizes <TERM>GSS-API</TERM> <TERM>Kerberos</TERM> V to provide secure authentication services.  The KERBEROS_V4 mechanism is available for those using Kerberos IV.  Kerberos is viewed as a secure, distributed authentication system suitable for both small and large enterprises.  Use of <A HREF="#GSSAPI">GSSAPI</A> and <A HREF="#KERBEROS_V4">KERBEROS_V4</A> are discussed below.</P>
5998 <P>The EXTERNAL mechanism utilizes authentication services provided by lower level network services such as <TERM>TLS</TERM> (TLS).  When used in conjunction with <TERM>TLS</TERM> <TERM>X.509</TERM>-based public key technology, EXTERNAL offers strong authentication.  Use of EXTERNAL is discussed in the <A HREF="#Using TLS">Using TLS</A> chapter.</P>
5999 <P>There are other strong authentication mechanisms to choose from, including <TERM>OTP</TERM> (one time passwords) and <TERM>SRP</TERM> (secure remote passwords).  These mechanisms are not discussed in this document.</P>
6000 <H2><A NAME="SASL Authentication">14.2. SASL Authentication</A></H2>
6001 <P>Getting basic SASL authentication running involves a few steps. The first step configures your slapd server environment so that it can communicate with client programs using the security system in place at your site. This usually involves setting up a service key, a public key, or other form of secret. The second step concerns mapping authentication identities to LDAP <TERM>DN</TERM>'s, which depends on how entries are laid out in your directory. An explanation of the first step will be given in the next section using Kerberos V4 as an example mechanism. The steps necessary for your site's authentication mechanism will be similar, but a guide to every mechanism available under SASL is beyond the scope of this chapter. The second step is described in the section <A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">Mapping Authentication Identities</A>.</P>
6002 <H3><A NAME="GSSAPI">14.2.1. GSSAPI</A></H3>
6003 <P>This section describes the use of the SASL GSSAPI mechanism and Kerberos V with OpenLDAP.  It will be assumed that you have Kerberos V deployed, you are familiar with the operation of the system, and that your users are trained in its use.  This section also assumes you have familiarized yourself with the use of the GSSAPI mechanism by reading <EM>Configuring GSSAPI and Cyrus SASL</EM> (provided with Cyrus SASL in the <TT>doc/gssapi</TT> file) and successfully experimented with the Cyrus provided <TT>sample_server</TT> and <TT>sample_client</TT> applications.  General information about Kerberos is available at <A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/</A>.</P>
6004 <P>To use the GSSAPI mechanism with <EM>slapd</EM>(8) one must create a service key with a principal for <EM>ldap</EM> service within the realm for the host on which the service runs.  For example, if you run <EM>slapd</EM> on <TT>directory.example.com</TT> and your realm is <TT>EXAMPLE.COM</TT>, you need to create a service key with the principal:</P>
6005 <PRE>
6006         ldap/directory.example.com@EXAMPLE.COM
6007 </PRE>
6008 <P>When <EM>slapd</EM>(8) runs, it must have access to this key.  This is generally done by placing the key into a keytab file, <TT>/etc/krb5.keytab</TT>.  See your Kerberos and Cyrus SASL documentation for information regarding keytab location settings.</P>
6009 <P>To use the GSSAPI mechanism to authenticate to the directory, the user obtains a Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT) prior to running the LDAP client.  When using OpenLDAP client tools, the user may mandate use of the GSSAPI mechanism by specifying <TT>-Y GSSAPI</TT> as a command option.</P>
6010 <P>For the purposes of authentication and authorization, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) associates an authentication request DN of the form:</P>
6011 <PRE>
6012         uid=&lt;primary[/instance]&gt;,cn=&lt;realm&gt;,cn=gssapi,cn=auth
6013 </PRE>
6014 <P>Continuing our example, a user with the Kerberos principal <TT>kurt@EXAMPLE.COM</TT> would have the associated DN:</P>
6015 <PRE>
6016         uid=kurt,cn=example.com,cn=gssapi,cn=auth
6017 </PRE>
6018 <P>and the principal <TT>ursula/admin@FOREIGN.REALM</TT> would have the associated DN:</P>
6019 <PRE>
6020         uid=ursula/admin,cn=foreign.realm,cn=gssapi,cn=auth
6021 </PRE>
6022 <P>The authentication request DN can be used directly ACLs and <TT>groupOfNames</TT> &quot;member&quot; attributes, since it is of legitimate LDAP DN format.  Or alternatively, the authentication DN could be mapped before use.  See the section <A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">Mapping Authentication Identities</A> for details.</P>
6023 <H3><A NAME="KERBEROS_V4">14.2.2. KERBEROS_V4</A></H3>
6024 <P>This section describes the use of the SASL KERBEROS_V4 mechanism with OpenLDAP.  It will be assumed that you are familiar with the workings of the Kerberos IV security system, and that your site has Kerberos IV deployed.  Your users should be familiar with authentication policy, how to receive credentials in a Kerberos ticket cache, and how to refresh expired credentials.</P>
6025 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
6026 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>KERBEROS_V4 and Kerberos IV are deprecated in favor of GSSAPI and Kerberos V.
6027 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
6028 <P>Client programs will need to be able to obtain a session key for use when connecting to your LDAP server. This allows the LDAP server to know the identity of the user, and allows the client to know it is connecting to a legitimate server. If encryption layers are to be used, the session key can also be used to help negotiate that option.</P>
6029 <P>The slapd server runs the service called &quot;<EM>ldap</EM>&quot;, and the server will require a srvtab file with a service key.  SASL aware client programs will be obtaining an &quot;ldap&quot; service ticket with the user's ticket granting ticket (TGT), with the instance of the ticket matching the hostname of the OpenLDAP server. For example, if your realm is named <TT>EXAMPLE.COM</TT> and the slapd server is running on the host named <TT>directory.example.com</TT>, the <TT>/etc/srvtab</TT> file on the server will have a service key</P>
6030 <PRE>
6031         ldap.directory@EXAMPLE.COM
6032 </PRE>
6033 <P>When an LDAP client is authenticating a user to the directory using the KERBEROS_IV mechanism, it will request a session key for that same principal, either from the ticket cache or by obtaining a new one from the Kerberos server.  This will require the TGT to be available and valid in the cache as well.  If it is not present or has expired, the client may print out the message:</P>
6034 <PRE>
6035         ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Local error
6036 </PRE>
6037 <P>When the service ticket is obtained, it will be passed to the LDAP server as proof of the user's identity.  The server will extract the identity and realm out of the service ticket using SASL library calls, and convert them into an <EM>authentication request DN</EM> of the form</P>
6038 <PRE>
6039         uid=&lt;username&gt;,cn=&lt;realm&gt;,cn=&lt;mechanism&gt;,cn=auth
6040 </PRE>
6041 <P>So in our above example, if the user's name were &quot;adamson&quot;, the authentication request DN would be:</P>
6042 <PRE>
6043         uid=adamsom,cn=example.com,cn=kerberos_v4,cn=auth
6044 </PRE>
6045 <P>This authentication request DN can be used directly ACLs or, alternatively, mapped prior to use.  See the section <A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">Mapping Authentication Identities</A> for details.</P>
6046 <H3><A NAME="DIGEST-MD5">14.2.3. DIGEST-MD5</A></H3>
6047 <P>This section describes the use of the SASL DIGEST-MD5 mechanism using secrets stored either in the directory itself or in Cyrus SASL's own database. DIGEST-MD5 relies on the client and the server sharing a &quot;secret&quot;, usually a password. The server generates a challenge and the client a response proving that it knows the shared secret. This is much more secure than simply sending the secret over the wire.</P>
6048 <P>Cyrus SASL supports several shared-secret mechanisms. To do this, it needs access to the plaintext password (unlike mechanisms which pass plaintext passwords over the wire, where the server can store a hashed version of the password).</P>
6049 <P>The server's copy of the shared-secret may be stored in Cyrus SASL's own <EM>sasldb</EM> database, in an external system accessed via <EM>saslauthd</EM>, or in LDAP database itself.  In either case it is very important to apply file access controls and LDAP access controls to prevent exposure of the passwords.  The configuration and commands discussed in this section assume the use of Cyrus SASL 2.1.</P>
6050 <P>To use secrets stored in <EM>sasldb</EM>, simply add users with the <EM>saslpasswd2</EM> command:</P>
6051 <PRE>
6052        saslpasswd2 -c &lt;username&gt;
6053 </PRE>
6054 <P>The passwords for such users must be managed with the <EM>saslpasswd2</EM> command.</P>
6055 <P>To use secrets stored in the LDAP directory, place plaintext passwords in the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute.  It will be necessary to add an option to <TT>slapd.conf</TT> to make sure that passwords set using the LDAP Password Modify Operation are stored in plaintext:</P>
6056 <PRE>
6057        password-hash   {CLEARTEXT}
6058 </PRE>
6059 <P>Passwords stored in this way can be managed either with <EM>ldappasswd</EM>(1) or by simply modifying the <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute.  Regardless of where the passwords are stored, a mapping will be needed from authentication request DN to user's DN.</P>
6060 <P>The DIGEST-MD5 mechanism produces authentication IDs of the form:</P>
6061 <PRE>
6062         uid=&lt;username&gt;,cn=&lt;realm&gt;,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth
6063 </PRE>
6064 <P>If the default realm is used, the realm name is omitted from the ID, giving:</P>
6065 <PRE>
6066         uid=&lt;username&gt;,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth
6067 </PRE>
6068 <P>See <A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">Mapping Authentication Identities</A> below for information on optional mapping of identities.</P>
6069 <P>With suitable mappings in place, users can specify SASL IDs when performing LDAP operations and sldb}} and the directory itself will be used to verify the authentication.  For example, the user identified by the directory entry:</P>
6070 <PRE>
6071        dn: cn=Andrew Findlay+uid=u000997,dc=example,dc=com
6072        objectclass: inetOrgPerson
6073        objectclass: person
6074        sn: Findlay
6075        uid: u000997
6076        userPassword: secret
6077 </PRE>
6078 <P>can issue commands of the form:</P>
6079 <PRE>
6080        ldapsearch -Y DIGEST-MD5 -U u000997 ...
6081 </PRE>
6082 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
6083 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>in each of the above cases, no authorization identity (e.g. <TT>-X</TT>) was provided.   Unless you are attempting <A HREF="#SASL Proxy Authorization">SASL Proxy Authorization</A>, no authorization identity should be specified. The server will infer an authorization identity from authentication identity (as described below).
6084 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
6085 <H3><A NAME="Mapping Authentication Identities">14.2.4. Mapping Authentication Identities</A></H3>
6086 <P>The authentication mechanism in the slapd server will use SASL library calls to obtain the authenticated user's &quot;username&quot;, based on whatever underlying authentication mechanism was used.  This username is in the namespace of the authentication mechanism, and not in the normal LDAP namespace. As stated in the sections above, that username is reformatted into an authentication request DN of the form</P>
6087 <PRE>
6088         uid=&lt;username&gt;,cn=&lt;realm&gt;,cn=&lt;mechanism&gt;,cn=auth
6089 </PRE>
6090 <P>or</P>
6091 <PRE>
6092         uid=&lt;username&gt;,cn=&lt;mechanism&gt;,cn=auth
6093 </PRE>
6094 <P>depending on whether or not &lt;mechanism&gt; employs the concept of &quot;realms&quot;.  Note also that the realm part will be omitted if the default realm was used in the authentication.</P>
6095 <P>The <EM>ldapwhoami</EM>(1) command may be used to determine the identity associated with the user.  It is very useful for determining proper function of mappings.</P>
6096 <P>It is not intended that you should add LDAP entries of the above form to your LDAP database.  Chances are you have an LDAP entry for each of the persons that will be authenticating to LDAP, laid out in your directory tree, and the tree does not start at cn=auth. But if your site has a clear mapping between the &quot;username&quot; and an LDAP entry for the person, you will be able to configure your LDAP server to automatically map a authentication request DN to the user's <EM>authentication DN</EM>.</P>
6097 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
6098 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>it is not required that the authentication request DN nor the user's authentication DN resulting from the mapping refer to an entry held in the directory.  However, additional capabilities become available (see below).
6099 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
6100 <P>The LDAP administrator will need to tell the slapd server how to map an authentication request DN to a user's authentication DN. This is done by adding one or more <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directives to the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file.  This directive takes two arguments:</P>
6101 <PRE>
6102         authz-regexp   &lt;search pattern&gt;   &lt;replacement pattern&gt;
6103 </PRE>
6104 <P>The authentication request DN is compared to the search pattern using the regular expression functions <EM>regcomp</EM>() and <EM>regexec</EM>(), and if it matches, it is rewritten as the replacement pattern. If there are multiple <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directives, only the first whose search pattern matches the authentication identity is used. The string that is output from the replacement pattern should be the authentication DN of the user or an LDAP URL.  If replacement string produces a DN, the entry named by this DN need not be held by this server.  If the replace string produces an LDAP URL, that LDAP URL must evaluate to one and only one entry held by this server.</P>
6105 <P>The search pattern can contain any of the regular expression characters listed in <EM>regexec</EM>(3C). The main characters of note are dot &quot;.&quot;, asterisk &quot;*&quot;, and the open and close parenthesis &quot;(&quot; and &quot;)&quot;.  Essentially, the dot matches any character, the asterisk allows zero or more repeats of the immediately preceding character or pattern, and terms in parenthesis are remembered for the replacement pattern.</P>
6106 <P>The replacement pattern will produce either a DN or URL referring to the user.  Anything from the authentication request DN that matched a string in parenthesis in the search pattern is stored in the variable &quot;$1&quot;. That variable &quot;$1&quot; can appear in the replacement pattern, and will be replaced by the string from the authentication request DN. If there were multiple sets of parentheses in the search pattern, the variables $2, $3, etc are used.</P>
6107 <H3><A NAME="Direct Mapping">14.2.5. Direct Mapping</A></H3>
6108 <P>Where possible, direct mapping of the authentication request DN to the user's DN is generally recommended.  Aside from avoiding the expense of searching for the user's DN, it allows mapping to DNs which refer to entries not held by this server.</P>
6109 <P>Suppose the authentication request DN is written as:</P>
6110 <PRE>
6111         uid=adamson,cn=example.com,cn=gssapi,cn=auth
6112 </PRE>
6113 <P>and the user's actual LDAP entry is:</P>
6114 <PRE>
6115         uid=adamson,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com
6116 </PRE>
6117 <P>then the following <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directive in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) would provide for direct mapping.</P>
6118 <PRE>
6119         authz-regexp
6120           uid=([^,]*),cn=example.com,cn=gssapi,cn=auth
6121           uid=$1,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com
6122 </PRE>
6123 <P>An even more lenient rule could be written as</P>
6124 <PRE>
6125         authz-regexp
6126           uid=([^,]*),cn=[^,]*,cn=auth
6127           uid=$1,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com
6128 </PRE>
6129 <P>Be careful about setting the search pattern too leniently, however, since it may mistakenly allow persons to become authenticated as a DN to which they should not have access.  It is better to write several strict directives than one lenient directive which has security holes.  If there is only one authentication mechanism in place at your site, and zero or one realms in use, you might be able to map between authentication identities and LDAP DN's with a single <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directive.</P>
6130 <P>Don't forget to allow for the case where the realm is omitted as well as the case with an explicitly specified realm. This may well require a separate <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directive for each case, with the explicit-realm entry being listed first.</P>
6131 <H3><A NAME="Search-based mappings">14.2.6. Search-based mappings</A></H3>
6132 <P>There are a number of cases where mapping to a LDAP URL may be appropriate.  For instance, some sites may have person objects located in multiple areas of the LDAP tree, such as if there were an <TT>ou=accounting</TT> tree and an <TT>ou=engineering</TT> tree, with persons interspersed between them.  Or, maybe the desired mapping must be based upon information in the user's information. Consider the need to map the above authentication request DN to user whose entry is as follows:</P>
6133 <PRE>
6134         dn: cn=Mark Adamson,ou=People,dc=Example,dc=COM
6135         objectclass: person
6136         cn: Mark Adamson
6137         uid: adamson
6138 </PRE>
6139 <P>The information in the authentication request DN is insufficient to allow the user's DN to be directly derived, instead the user's DN must be searched for.  For these situations, a replacement pattern which produces a LDAP URL can be used in the <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directives.  This URL will then be used to perform an internal search of the LDAP database to find the person's authentication DN.</P>
6140 <P>An LDAP URL, similar to other URL's, is of the form</P>
6141 <PRE>
6142         ldap://&lt;host&gt;/&lt;base&gt;?&lt;attrs&gt;?&lt;scope&gt;?&lt;filter&gt;
6143 </PRE>
6144 <P>This contains all of the elements necessary to perform an LDAP search:  the name of the server &lt;host&gt;, the LDAP DN search base &lt;base&gt;, the LDAP attributes to retrieve &lt;attrs&gt;, the search scope &lt;scope&gt; which is one of the three options &quot;base&quot;, &quot;one&quot;, or &quot;sub&quot;, and lastly an LDAP search filter &lt;filter&gt;.  Since the search is for an LDAP DN within the current server, the &lt;host&gt; portion should be empty.  The &lt;attrs&gt; field is also ignored since only the DN is of concern.  These two elements are left in the format of the URL to maintain the clarity of what information goes where in the string.</P>
6145 <P>Suppose that the person in the example from above did in fact have an authentication username of &quot;adamson&quot; and that information was kept in the attribute &quot;uid&quot; in their LDAP entry. The <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directive might be written as</P>
6146 <PRE>
6147         authz-regexp
6148           uid=([^,]*),cn=example.com,cn=gssapi,cn=auth
6149           ldap:///ou=people,dc=example,dc=com??one?(uid=$1)
6150 </PRE>
6151 <P>This will initiate an internal search of the LDAP database inside the slapd server. If the search returns exactly one entry, it is accepted as being the DN of the user. If there are more than one entries returned, or if there are zero entries returned, the authentication fails and the user's connection is left bound as the authentication request DN.</P>
6152 <P>The attributes that are used in the search filter &lt;filter&gt; in the URL should be indexed to allow faster searching. If they are not, the authentication step alone can take uncomfortably long periods, and users may assume the server is down.</P>
6153 <P>A more complex site might have several realms in use, each mapping to a different subtree in the directory.  These can be handled with statements of the form:</P>
6154 <PRE>
6155         # Match Engineering realm
6156         authz-regexp
6157            uid=([^,]*),cn=engineering.example.com,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth
6158            ldap:///dc=eng,dc=example,dc=com??one?(&amp;(uid=$1)(objectClass=person))
6159
6160         # Match Accounting realm
6161         authz-regexp
6162            uid=([^,].*),cn=accounting.example.com,cn=digest-md5,cn=auth
6163            ldap:///dc=accounting,dc=example,dc=com??one?(&amp;(uid=$1)(objectClass=person))
6164
6165         # Default realm is customers.example.com
6166         authz-regexp
6167            uid=([^,]*),cn=digest-md5,cn=auth
6168            ldap:///dc=customers,dc=example,dc=com??one?(&amp;(uid=$1)(objectClass=person))
6169 </PRE>
6170 <P>Note that the explicitly-named realms are handled first, to avoid the realm name becoming part of the UID.  Also note the use of scope and filters to limit matching to desirable entries.</P>
6171 <P>Note as well that <TT>authz-regexp</TT> internal search are subject to access controls.  Specifically, the authentication identity must have <TT>auth</TT> access.</P>
6172 <P>See <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) for more detailed information.</P>
6173 <H2><A NAME="SASL Proxy Authorization">14.3. SASL Proxy Authorization</A></H2>
6174 <P>The SASL offers a feature known as <EM>proxy authorization</EM>, which allows an authenticated user to request that they act on the behalf of another user.  This step occurs after the user has obtained an authentication DN, and involves sending an authorization identity to the server. The server will then make a decision on whether or not to allow the authorization to occur. If it is allowed, the user's LDAP connection is switched to have a binding DN derived from the authorization identity, and the LDAP session proceeds with the access of the new authorization DN.</P>
6175 <P>The decision to allow an authorization to proceed depends on the rules and policies of the site where LDAP is running, and thus cannot be made by SASL alone. The SASL library leaves it up to the server to make the decision. The LDAP administrator sets the guidelines of who can authorize to what identity by adding information into the LDAP database entries. By default, the authorization features are disabled, and must be explicitly configured by the LDAP administrator before use.</P>
6176 <H3><A NAME="Uses of Proxy Authorization">14.3.1. Uses of Proxy Authorization</A></H3>
6177 <P>This sort of service is useful when one entity needs to act on the behalf of many other users. For example, users may be directed to a web page to make changes to their personal information in their LDAP entry. The users authenticate to the web server to establish their identity, but the web server CGI cannot authenticate to the LDAP server as that user to make changes for them. Instead, the web server authenticates itself to the LDAP server as a service identity, say,</P>
6178 <PRE>
6179         cn=WebUpdate,dc=example,dc=com
6180 </PRE>
6181 <P>and then it will SASL authorize to the DN of the user. Once so authorized, the CGI makes changes to the LDAP entry of the user, and as far as the slapd server can tell for its ACLs, it is the user themself on the other end of the connection. The user could have connected to the LDAP server directly and authenticated as themself, but that would require the user to have more knowledge of LDAP clients, knowledge which the web page provides in an easier format.</P>
6182 <P>Proxy authorization can also be used to limit access to an account that has greater access to the database. Such an account, perhaps even the root DN specified in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5), can have a strict list of people who can authorize to that DN. Changes to the LDAP database could then be only allowed by that DN, and in order to become that DN, users must first authenticate as one of the persons on the list. This allows for better auditing of who made changes to the LDAP database.  If people were allowed to authenticate directly to the privileged account, possibly through the <TT>rootpw</TT> <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) directive or through a <TT>userPassword</TT> attribute, then auditing becomes more difficult.</P>
6183 <P>Note that after a successful proxy authorization, the original authentication DN of the LDAP connection is overwritten by the new DN from the authorization request. If a service program is able to authenticate itself as its own authentication DN and then authorize to other DN's, and it is planning on switching to several different identities during one LDAP session, it will need to authenticate itself each time before authorizing to another DN (or use a different proxy authorization mechanism).  The slapd server does not keep record of the service program's ability to switch to other DN's. On authentication mechanisms like Kerberos this will not require multiple connections being made to the Kerberos server, since the user's TGT and &quot;ldap&quot; session key are valid for multiple uses for the several hours of the ticket lifetime.</P>
6184 <H3><A NAME="SASL Authorization Identities">14.3.2. SASL Authorization Identities</A></H3>
6185 <P>The SASL authorization identity is sent to the LDAP server via the <TT>-X</TT> switch for <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) and other tools, or in the <TT>*authzid</TT> parameter to the <EM>lutil_sasl_defaults</EM>() call. The identity can be in one of two forms, either</P>
6186 <PRE>
6187         u:&lt;username&gt;
6188 </PRE>
6189 <P>or</P>
6190 <PRE>
6191         dn:&lt;dn&gt;
6192 </PRE>
6193 <P>In the first form, the &lt;username&gt; is from the same namespace as the authentication identities above. It is the user's username as it is referred to by the underlying authentication mechanism. Authorization identities of this form are converted into a DN format by the same function that the authentication process used, producing an <EM>authorization request DN</EM> of the form</P>
6194 <PRE>
6195         uid=&lt;username&gt;,cn=&lt;realm&gt;,cn=&lt;mechanism&gt;,cn=auth
6196 </PRE>
6197 <P>That authorization request DN is then run through the same <TT>authz-regexp</TT> process to convert it into a legitimate authorization DN from the database. If it cannot be converted due to a failed search from an LDAP URL, the authorization request fails with &quot;inappropriate access&quot;.  Otherwise, the DN string is now a legitimate authorization DN ready to undergo approval.</P>
6198 <P>If the authorization identity was provided in the second form, with a <TT>&quot;dn:&quot;</TT> prefix, the string after the prefix is already in authorization DN form, ready to undergo approval.</P>
6199 <H3><A NAME="Proxy Authorization Rules">14.3.3. Proxy Authorization Rules</A></H3>
6200 <P>Once slapd has the authorization DN, the actual approval process begins. There are two attributes that the LDAP administrator can put into LDAP entries to allow authorization:</P>
6201 <PRE>
6202         authzTo
6203         authzFrom
6204 </PRE>
6205 <P>Both can be multivalued.  The <TT>authzTo</TT> attribute is a source rule, and it is placed into the entry associated with the authentication DN to tell what authorization DNs the authenticated DN is allowed to assume.  The second attribute is a destination rule, and it is placed into the entry associated with the requested authorization DN to tell which authenticated DNs may assume it.</P>
6206 <P>The choice of which authorization policy attribute to use is up to the administrator.  Source rules are checked first in the person's authentication DN entry, and if none of the <TT>authzTo</TT> rules specify the authorization is permitted, the <TT>authzFrom</TT> rules in the authorization DN entry are then checked. If neither case specifies that the request be honored, the request is denied. Since the default behavior is to deny authorization requests, rules only specify that a request be allowed; there are no negative rules telling what authorizations to deny.</P>
6207 <P>The value(s) in the two attributes are of the same form as the output of the replacement pattern of a <TT>authz-regexp</TT> directive: either a DN or an LDAP URL. For example, if a <TT>authzTo</TT> value is a DN, that DN is one the authenticated user can authorize to. On the other hand, if the <TT>authzTo</TT> value is an LDAP URL, the URL is used as an internal search of the LDAP database, and the authenticated user can become ANY DN returned by the search. If an LDAP entry looked like:</P>
6208 <PRE>
6209         dn: cn=WebUpdate,dc=example,dc=com
6210         authzTo: ldap:///dc=example,dc=com??sub?(objectclass=person)
6211 </PRE>
6212 <P>then any user who authenticated as <TT>cn=WebUpdate,dc=example,dc=com</TT> could authorize to any other LDAP entry under the search base <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT> which has an objectClass of <TT>Person</TT>.</P>
6213 <H4><A NAME="Notes on Proxy Authorization Rules">14.3.3.1. Notes on Proxy Authorization Rules</A></H4>
6214 <P>An LDAP URL in a <TT>authzTo</TT> or <TT>authzFrom</TT> attribute will return a set of DNs.  Each DN returned will be checked.  Searches which return a large set can cause the authorization process to take an uncomfortably long time. Also, searches should be performed on attributes that have been indexed by slapd.</P>
6215 <P>To help produce more sweeping rules for <TT>authzFrom</TT> and <TT>authzTo</TT>, the values of these attributes are allowed to be DNs with regular expression characters in them. This means a source rule like</P>
6216 <PRE>
6217         authzTo: dn.regex=^uid=[^,]*,dc=example,dc=com$
6218 </PRE>
6219 <P>would allow that authenticated user to authorize to any DN that matches the regular expression pattern given. This regular expression comparison can be evaluated much faster than an LDAP search for <TT>(uid=*)</TT>.</P>
6220 <P>Also note that the values in an authorization rule must be one of the two forms: an LDAP URL or a DN (with or without regular expression characters). Anything that does not begin with &quot;<TT>ldap://</TT>&quot; is taken as a DN. It is not permissible to enter another authorization identity of the form &quot;<TT>u:&lt;username&gt;</TT>&quot; as an authorization rule.</P>
6221 <H4><A NAME="Policy Configuration">14.3.3.2. Policy Configuration</A></H4>
6222 <P>The decision of which type of rules to use, <TT>authzFrom</TT> or <TT>authzTo</TT>, will depend on the site's situation. For example, if the set of people who may become a given identity can easily be written as a search filter, then a single destination rule could be written. If the set of people is not easily defined by a search filter, and the set of people is small, it may be better to write a source rule in the entries of each of those people who should be allowed to perform the proxy authorization.</P>
6223 <P>By default, processing of proxy authorization rules is disabled. The <TT>authz-policy</TT> directive must be set in the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file to enable authorization. This directive can be set to <TT>none</TT> for no rules (the default), <TT>to</TT> for source rules, <TT>from</TT> for destination rules, or <TT>both</TT> for both source and destination rules.</P>
6224 <P>Source rules are extremely powerful. If ordinary users have access to write the <TT>authzTo</TT> attribute in their own entries, then they can write rules that would allow them to authorize as anyone else.  As such, when using source rules, the <TT>authzTo</TT> attribute should be protected with an ACL that only allows privileged users to set its values.</P>
6225 <P></P>
6226 <HR>
6227 <H1><A NAME="Using TLS">15. Using TLS</A></H1>
6228 <P>OpenLDAP clients and servers are capable of using the <TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM> (<TERM>TLS</TERM>) framework to provide integrity and confidentiality protections and to support LDAP authentication using the <TERM>SASL</TERM> <TERM>EXTERNAL</TERM> mechanism. TLS is defined in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4346.txt">RFC4346</A>.</P>
6229 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
6230 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>For generating certifcates, please reference <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/185.html">http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/185.html</A>
6231 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
6232 <H2><A NAME="TLS Certificates">15.1. TLS Certificates</A></H2>
6233 <P>TLS uses <TERM>X.509</TERM> certificates to carry client and server identities.  All servers are required to have valid certificates, whereas client certificates are optional.  Clients must have a valid certificate in order to authenticate via SASL EXTERNAL. For more information on creating and managing certificates, see the <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A> documentation.</P>
6234 <H3><A NAME="Server Certificates">15.1.1. Server Certificates</A></H3>
6235 <P>The <TERM>DN</TERM> of a server certificate must use the <TT>CN</TT> attribute to name the server, and the <TT>CN</TT> must carry the server's fully qualified domain name. Additional alias names and wildcards may be present in the <TT>subjectAltName</TT> certificate extension.  More details on server certificate names are in <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4513.txt">RFC4513</A>.</P>
6236 <H3><A NAME="Client Certificates">15.1.2. Client Certificates</A></H3>
6237 <P>The DN of a client certificate can be used directly as an authentication DN. Since X.509 is a part of the <TERM>X.500</TERM> standard and LDAP is also based on X.500, both use the same DN formats and generally the DN in a user's X.509 certificate should be identical to the DN of their LDAP entry. However, sometimes the DNs may not be exactly the same, and so the mapping facility described in <A HREF="#Mapping Authentication Identities">Mapping Authentication Identities</A> can be applied to these DNs as well.</P>
6238 <H2><A NAME="TLS Configuration">15.2. TLS Configuration</A></H2>
6239 <P>After obtaining the required certificates, a number of options must be configured on both the client and the server to enable TLS and make use of the certificates.  At a minimum, the clients must be configured with the name of the file containing all of the <TERM>Certificate Authority</TERM> (CA) certificates it will trust. The server must be configured with the <TERM>CA</TERM> certificates and also its own server certificate and private key.</P>
6240 <P>Typically a single CA will have issued the server certificate and all of the trusted client certificates, so the server only needs to trust that one signing CA. However, a client may wish to connect to a variety of secure servers managed by different organizations, with server certificates generated by many different CAs. As such, a client is likely to need a list of many different trusted CAs in its configuration.</P>
6241 <H3><A NAME="Server Configuration">15.2.1. Server Configuration</A></H3>
6242 <P>The configuration directives for slapd belong in the global directives section of <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5).</P>
6243 <H4><A NAME="TLSCACertificateFile &lt;filename&gt;">15.2.1.1. TLSCACertificateFile &lt;filename&gt;</A></H4>
6244 <P>This directive specifies the <TERM>PEM</TERM>-format file containing certificates for the CA's that slapd will trust. The certificate for the CA that signed the server certificate must be included among these certificates. If the signing CA was not a top-level (root) CA, certificates for the entire sequence of CA's from the signing CA to the top-level CA should be present. Multiple certificates are simply appended to the file; the order is not significant.</P>
6245 <H4><A NAME="TLSCACertificatePath &lt;path&gt;">15.2.1.2. TLSCACertificatePath &lt;path&gt;</A></H4>
6246 <P>This directive specifies the path of a directory that contains individual <TERM>CA</TERM> certificates in separate files.  In addition, this directory must be specially managed using the OpenSSL <EM>c_rehash</EM> utility. When using this feature, the OpenSSL library will attempt to locate certificate files based on a hash of their name and serial number. The <EM>c_rehash</EM> utility is used to generate symbolic links with the hashed names that point to the actual certificate files. As such, this option can only be used with a filesystem that actually supports symbolic links. In general, it is simpler to use the <TT>TLSCACertificateFile</TT> directive instead.</P>
6247 <H4><A NAME="TLSCertificateFile &lt;filename&gt;">15.2.1.3. TLSCertificateFile &lt;filename&gt;</A></H4>
6248 <P>This directive specifies the file that contains the slapd server certificate. Certificates are generally public information and require no special protection.</P>
6249 <H4><A NAME="TLSCertificateKeyFile &lt;filename&gt;">15.2.1.4. TLSCertificateKeyFile &lt;filename&gt;</A></H4>
6250 <P>This directive specifies the file that contains the private key that matches the certificate stored in the <TT>TLSCertificateFile</TT> file. Private keys themselves are sensitive data and are usually password encrypted for protection. However, the current implementation doesn't support encrypted keys so the key must not be encrypted and the file itself must be protected carefully.</P>
6251 <H4><A NAME="TLSCipherSuite &lt;cipher-suite-spec&gt;">15.2.1.5. TLSCipherSuite &lt;cipher-suite-spec&gt;</A></H4>
6252 <P>This directive configures what ciphers will be accepted and the preference order. <TT>&lt;cipher-suite-spec&gt;</TT> should be a cipher specification for OpenSSL. You can use the command</P>
6253 <PRE>
6254         openssl ciphers -v ALL
6255 </PRE>
6256 <P>to obtain a verbose list of available cipher specifications.</P>
6257 <P>To obtain the list of ciphers in GNUtls use:</P>
6258 <PRE>
6259         gnutls-cli -l
6260 </PRE>
6261 <P>Besides the individual cipher names, the specifiers <TT>HIGH</TT>, <TT>MEDIUM</TT>, <TT>LOW</TT>, <TT>EXPORT</TT>, and <TT>EXPORT40</TT> may be helpful, along with <TT>TLSv1</TT>, <TT>SSLv3</TT>, and <TT>SSLv2</TT>.</P>
6262 <H4><A NAME="TLSRandFile &lt;filename&gt;">15.2.1.6. TLSRandFile &lt;filename&gt;</A></H4>
6263 <P>This directive specifies the file to obtain random bits from when <TT>/dev/urandom</TT> is not available. If the system provides <TT>/dev/urandom</TT> then this option is not needed, otherwise a source of random data must be configured.  Some systems (e.g. Linux) provide <TT>/dev/urandom</TT> by default, while others (e.g. Solaris) require the installation of a patch to provide it, and others may not support it at all. In the latter case, EGD or PRNGD should be installed, and this directive should specify the name of the EGD/PRNGD socket. The environment variable <TT>RANDFILE</TT> can also be used to specify the filename. Also, in the absence of these options, the <TT>.rnd</TT> file in the slapd user's home directory may be used if it exists. To use the <TT>.rnd</TT> file, just create the file and copy a few hundred bytes of arbitrary data into the file. The file is only used to provide a seed for the pseudo-random number generator, and it doesn't need very much data to work.</P>
6264 <H4><A NAME="TLSEphemeralDHParamFile &lt;filename&gt;">15.2.1.7. TLSEphemeralDHParamFile &lt;filename&gt;</A></H4>
6265 <P>This directive specifies the file that contains parameters for Diffie-Hellman ephemeral key exchange.  This is required in order to use a DSA certificate on the server side (i.e. <TT>TLSCertificateKeyFile</TT> points to a DSA key).  Multiple sets of parameters can be included in the file; all of them will be processed.  Parameters can be generated using the following command</P>
6266 <PRE>
6267         openssl dhparam [-dsaparam] -out &lt;filename&gt; &lt;numbits&gt;
6268 </PRE>
6269 <H4><A NAME="TLSVerifyClient { never | allow | try | demand }">15.2.1.8. TLSVerifyClient { never | allow | try | demand }</A></H4>
6270 <P>This directive specifies what checks to perform on client certificates in an incoming TLS session, if any. This option is set to <TT>never</TT> by default, in which case the server never asks the client for a certificate. With a setting of <TT>allow</TT> the server will ask for a client certificate; if none is provided the session proceeds normally. If a certificate is provided but the server is unable to verify it, the certificate is ignored and the session proceeds normally, as if no certificate had been provided. With a setting of <TT>try</TT> the certificate is requested, and if none is provided, the session proceeds normally. If a certificate is provided and it cannot be verified, the session is immediately terminated. With a setting of <TT>demand</TT> the certificate is requested and a valid certificate must be provided, otherwise the session is immediately terminated.</P>
6271 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
6272 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The server must request a client certificate in order to use the SASL EXTERNAL authentication mechanism with a TLS session. As such, a non-default <TT>TLSVerifyClient</TT> setting must be configured before SASL EXTERNAL authentication may be attempted, and the SASL EXTERNAL mechanism will only be offered to the client if a valid client certificate was received.
6273 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
6274 <H3><A NAME="Client Configuration">15.2.2. Client Configuration</A></H3>
6275 <P>Most of the client configuration directives parallel the server directives. The names of the directives are different, and they go into <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) instead of <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5), but their functionality is mostly the same. Also, while most of these options may be configured on a system-wide basis, they may all be overridden by individual users in their <EM>.ldaprc</EM> files.</P>
6276 <P>The LDAP Start TLS operation is used in LDAP to initiate TLS negotiation.  All OpenLDAP command line tools support a <TT>-Z</TT> and <TT>-ZZ</TT> flag to indicate whether a Start TLS operation is to be issued.  The latter flag indicates that the tool is to cease processing if TLS cannot be started while the former allows the command to continue.</P>
6277 <P>In LDAPv2 environments, TLS is normally started using the LDAP Secure URI scheme (<TT>ldaps://</TT>) instead of the normal LDAP URI scheme (<TT>ldap://</TT>).  OpenLDAP command line tools allow either scheme to used with the <TT>-H</TT> flag and with the <TT>URI</TT> <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) option.</P>
6278 <H4><A NAME="TLS_CACERT &lt;filename&gt;">15.2.2.1. TLS_CACERT &lt;filename&gt;</A></H4>
6279 <P>This is equivalent to the server's <TT>TLSCACertificateFile</TT> option. As noted in the <A HREF="#TLS Configuration">TLS Configuration</A> section, a client typically may need to know about more CAs than a server, but otherwise the same considerations apply.</P>
6280 <H4><A NAME="TLS_CACERTDIR &lt;path&gt;">15.2.2.2. TLS_CACERTDIR &lt;path&gt;</A></H4>
6281 <P>This is equivalent to the server's <TT>TLSCACertificatePath</TT> option. The specified directory must be managed with the OpenSSL <EM>c_rehash</EM> utility as well.</P>
6282 <H4><A NAME="TLS_CERT &lt;filename&gt;">15.2.2.3. TLS_CERT &lt;filename&gt;</A></H4>
6283 <P>This directive specifies the file that contains the client certificate. This is a user-only directive and can only be specified in a user's <EM>.ldaprc</EM> file.</P>
6284 <H4><A NAME="TLS_KEY &lt;filename&gt;">15.2.2.4. TLS_KEY &lt;filename&gt;</A></H4>
6285 <P>This directive specifies the file that contains the private key that matches the certificate stored in the <TT>TLS_CERT</TT> file. The same constraints mentioned for <TT>TLSCertificateKeyFile</TT> apply here. This is also a user-only directive.</P>
6286 <H4><A NAME="TLS_RANDFILE &lt;filename&gt;">15.2.2.5. TLS_RANDFILE &lt;filename&gt;</A></H4>
6287 <P>This directive is the same as the server's <TT>TLSRandFile</TT> option.</P>
6288 <H4><A NAME="TLS_REQCERT { never | allow | try | demand }">15.2.2.6. TLS_REQCERT { never | allow | try | demand }</A></H4>
6289 <P>This directive is equivalent to the server's <TT>TLSVerifyClient</TT> option. However, for clients the default value is <TT>demand</TT> and there generally is no good reason to change this setting.</P>
6290 <P></P>
6291 <HR>
6292 <H1><A NAME="Constructing a Distributed Directory Service">16. Constructing a Distributed Directory Service</A></H1>
6293 <P>For many sites, running one or more <EM>slapd</EM>(8) that hold an entire subtree of data is sufficient. But often it is desirable to have one <EM>slapd</EM> refer to other directory services for a certain part of the tree (which may or may not be running <EM>slapd</EM>).</P>
6294 <P><EM>slapd</EM> supports <EM>subordinate</EM> and <EM>superior</EM> knowledge information. Subordinate knowledge information is held in <TT>referral</TT> objects (<A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3296.txt">RFC3296</A>).</P>
6295 <H2><A NAME="Subordinate Knowledge Information">16.1. Subordinate Knowledge Information</A></H2>
6296 <P>Subordinate knowledge information may be provided to delegate a subtree. Subordinate knowledge information is maintained in the directory as a special <EM>referral</EM> object at the delegate point. The referral object acts as a delegation point, gluing two services together. This mechanism allows for hierarchical directory services to be constructed.</P>
6297 <P>A referral object has a structural object class of <TT>referral</TT> and has the same <TERM>Distinguished Name</TERM> as the delegated subtree.  Generally, the referral object will also provide the auxiliary object class <TT>extensibleObject</TT>. This allows the entry to contain appropriate <TERM>Relative Distinguished Name</TERM> values.  This is best demonstrated by example.</P>
6298 <P>If the server <TT>a.example.net</TT> holds <TT>dc=example,dc=net</TT> and wished to delegate the subtree <TT>ou=subtree,dc=example,dc=net</TT> to another server <TT>b.example.net</TT>, the following named referral object would be added to <TT>a.example.net</TT>:</P>
6299 <PRE>
6300         dn: dc=subtree,dc=example,dc=net
6301         objectClass: referral
6302         objectClass: extensibleObject
6303         dc: subtree
6304         ref: ldap://b.example.net/dc=subtree,dc=example,dc=net
6305 </PRE>
6306 <P>The server uses this information to generate referrals and search continuations to subordinate servers.</P>
6307 <P>For those familiar with <TERM>X.500</TERM>, a <EM>named referral</EM> object is similar to an X.500 knowledge reference held in a <EM>subr</EM> <TERM>DSE</TERM>.</P>
6308 <H2><A NAME="Superior Knowledge Information">16.2. Superior Knowledge Information</A></H2>
6309 <P>Superior knowledge information may be specified using the <TT>referral</TT> directive.  The value is a list of <TERM>URI</TERM>s referring to superior directory services.  For servers without immediate superiors, such as for <TT>a.example.net</TT> in the example above, the server can be configured to use a directory service with <EM>global knowledge</EM>, such as the <EM>OpenLDAP Root Service</EM> (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/index.cgi?file=393">http://www.openldap.org/faq/index.cgi?file=393</A>).</P>
6310 <PRE>
6311         referral        ldap://root.openldap.org/
6312 </PRE>
6313 <P>However, as <TT>a.example.net</TT> is the <EM>immediate superior</EM> to <TT>b.example.net</TT>, <EM>b.example.net</EM> would be configured as follows:</P>
6314 <PRE>
6315         referral        ldap://a.example.net/
6316 </PRE>
6317 <P>The server uses this information to generate referrals for operations acting upon entries not within or subordinate to any of the naming contexts held by the server.</P>
6318 <P>For those familiar with <TERM>X.500</TERM>, this use of the <TT>ref</TT> attribute is similar to an X.500 knowledge reference held in a <EM>Supr</EM> <TERM>DSE</TERM>.</P>
6319 <H2><A NAME="The ManageDsaIT Control">16.3. The ManageDsaIT Control</A></H2>
6320 <P>Adding, modifying, and deleting referral objects is generally done using <EM>ldapmodify</EM>(1) or similar tools which support the ManageDsaIT control.  The ManageDsaIT control informs the server that you intend to manage the referral object as a regular entry.  This keeps the server from sending a referral result for requests which interrogate or update referral objects.</P>
6321 <P>The ManageDsaIT control should not be specified when managing regular entries.</P>
6322 <P>The <TT>-M</TT> option of <EM>ldapmodify</EM>(1) (and other tools) enables ManageDsaIT.  For example:</P>
6323 <PRE>
6324         ldapmodify -M -f referral.ldif -x -D &quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=net&quot; -W
6325 </PRE>
6326 <P>or with <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1):</P>
6327 <PRE>
6328         ldapsearch -M -b &quot;dc=example,dc=net&quot; -x &quot;(objectclass=referral)&quot; '*' ref
6329 </PRE>
6330 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
6331 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>the <TT>ref</TT> attribute is operational and must be explicitly requested when desired in search results.
6332 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
6333 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
6334 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>the use of referrals to construct a Distributed Directory Service is extremely clumsy and not well supported by common clients. If an existing installation has already been built using referrals, the use of the <EM>chain</EM> overlay to hide the referrals will greatly improve the usability of the Directory system. A better approach would be to use explicitly defined local and proxy databases in <EM>subordinate</EM> configurations to provide a seamless view of the Distributed Directory.
6335 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
6336 <P></P>
6337 <HR>
6338 <H1><A NAME="Replication">17. Replication</A></H1>
6339 <P>Replicated directories are a fundamental requirement for delivering a resilient enterprise deployment.</P>
6340 <P><A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A> has various configuration options for creating a replicated directory. The following sections will discuss these.</P>
6341 <H2><A NAME="Push Based">17.1. Push Based</A></H2>
6342 <H3><A NAME="Replacing Slurpd">17.1.1. Replacing Slurpd</A></H3>
6343 <P><EM>Slurpd</EM> replication has been deprecated in favor of Syncrepl replication and has been completely removed from OpenLDAP 2.4.</P>
6344 <P><EM>Why was it replaced?</EM></P>
6345 <P>The <EM>slurpd</EM> daemon was the original replication mechanism inherited from UMich's LDAP and operates in push mode: the master pushes changes to the slaves. It has been replaced for many reasons, in brief:</P>
6346 <UL>
6347 <LI>It is not reliable
6348 <LI>It is extremely sensitive to the ordering of records in the replog
6349 <LI>It can easily go out of sync, at which point manual intervention is required to resync the slave database with the master directory
6350 <LI>It isn't very tolerant of unavailable servers. If a slave goes down for a long time, the replog may grow to a size that's too large for slurpd to process</UL>
6351 <P><EM>What was it replaced with?</EM></P>
6352 <P>Syncrepl</P>
6353 <P><EM>Why is Syncrepl better?</EM></P>
6354 <UL>
6355 <LI>Syncrepl is self-synchronizing; you can start with a database in any state from totally empty to fully synced and it will automatically do the right thing to achieve and maintain synchronization
6356 <LI>Syncrepl can operate in either direction
6357 <LI>Data updates can be minimal or maximal</UL>
6358 <P><EM>How do I implement a pushed based replication system using Syncrepl?</EM></P>
6359 <P>The easiest way is to point an LDAP backend (<A HREF="#Backends">Backends</A> and <EM>slapd-ldap(8)</EM>) to your slave directory and setup Syncrepl to point to your Master database.</P>
6360 <P>If you imagine Syncrepl pulling down changes from the Master server, and then pushing those changes out to your slave servers via <EM>slapd-ldap(8)</EM>. This is called Syncrepl Proxy Mode. You can also use Syncrepl Multi-proxy mode:</P>
6361 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="push-based-complete.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
6362 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Replacing slurpd</P>
6363 <P>The following example is for a self-contained push-based replication solution:</P>
6364 <PRE>
6365         #######################################################################
6366         # Standard OpenLDAP Master/Provider
6367         #######################################################################
6368
6369         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.schema
6370         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema
6371         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/nis.schema
6372         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema
6373
6374         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.acl
6375
6376         modulepath  /usr/local/libexec/openldap
6377         moduleload  back_hdb.la
6378         moduleload  syncprov.la
6379         moduleload  back_monitor.la
6380         moduleload  back_ldap.la
6381
6382         pidfile     /usr/local/var/slapd.pid
6383         argsfile    /usr/local/var/slapd.args
6384
6385         loglevel    sync stats
6386
6387         database    hdb
6388         suffix      &quot;dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6389         directory   /usr/local/var/openldap-data
6390
6391         checkpoint      1024 5
6392         cachesize       10000
6393         idlcachesize    10000
6394
6395         index       objectClass eq
6396         # rest of indexes
6397         index       default     sub
6398
6399         rootdn          &quot;cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6400         rootpw          testing
6401
6402         # syncprov specific indexing
6403         index entryCSN eq
6404         index entryUUID eq
6405
6406         # syncrepl Provider for primary db
6407         overlay syncprov
6408         syncprov-checkpoint 1000 60
6409
6410         # Let the replica DN have limitless searches
6411         limits dn.exact=&quot;cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot; time.soft=unlimited time.hard=unlimited size.soft=unlimited size.hard=unlimited
6412
6413         database    monitor
6414
6415         database    config
6416         rootpw          testing
6417
6418         ##############################################################################
6419         # Consumer Proxy that pulls in data via Syncrepl and pushes out via slapd-ldap
6420         ##############################################################################
6421
6422         database        ldap
6423         # ignore conflicts with other databases, as we need to push out to same suffix
6424         hidden              on
6425         suffix          &quot;dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6426         rootdn          &quot;cn=slapd-ldap&quot;
6427         uri             ldap://localhost:9012/
6428
6429         lastmod         on
6430
6431         # We don't need any access to this DSA
6432         restrict        all
6433
6434         acl-bind        bindmethod=simple
6435                         binddn=&quot;cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6436                         credentials=testing
6437
6438         syncrepl        rid=001
6439                         provider=ldap://localhost:9011/
6440                         binddn=&quot;cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6441                         bindmethod=simple
6442                         credentials=testing
6443                         searchbase=&quot;dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6444                         type=refreshAndPersist
6445                         retry=&quot;5 5 300 5&quot;
6446
6447         overlay         syncprov
6448 </PRE>
6449 <P>A replica configuration for this type of setup could be:</P>
6450 <PRE>
6451         #######################################################################
6452         # Standard OpenLDAP Slave without Syncrepl
6453         #######################################################################
6454
6455         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.schema
6456         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema
6457         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/nis.schema
6458         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema
6459
6460         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.acl
6461
6462         modulepath  /usr/local/libexec/openldap
6463         moduleload  back_hdb.la
6464         moduleload  syncprov.la
6465         moduleload  back_monitor.la
6466         moduleload  back_ldap.la
6467
6468         pidfile     /usr/local/var/slapd.pid
6469         argsfile    /usr/local/var/slapd.args
6470
6471         loglevel    sync stats
6472
6473         database    hdb
6474         suffix      &quot;dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6475         directory   /usr/local/var/openldap-slave/data
6476
6477         checkpoint      1024 5
6478         cachesize       10000
6479         idlcachesize    10000
6480
6481         index       objectClass eq
6482         # rest of indexes
6483         index       default     sub
6484
6485         rootdn          &quot;cn=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6486         rootpw          testing
6487
6488         # Let the replica DN have limitless searches
6489         limits dn.exact=&quot;cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot; time.soft=unlimited time.hard=unlimited size.soft=unlimited size.hard=unlimited
6490
6491         updatedn &quot;cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6492
6493         # Refer updates to the master
6494         updateref   ldap://localhost:9011
6495
6496         database    monitor
6497
6498         database    config
6499         rootpw          testing
6500 </PRE>
6501 <P>You can see we use the <EM>updatedn</EM> directive here and example ACLs (<TT>usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.acl</TT>) for this could be:</P>
6502 <PRE>
6503         # Give the replica DN unlimited read access.  This ACL may need to be
6504         # merged with other ACL statements.
6505
6506         access to *
6507              by dn.base=&quot;cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot; write
6508              by * break
6509
6510         access to dn.base=&quot;&quot;
6511                 by * read
6512
6513         access to dn.base=&quot;cn=Subschema&quot;
6514                 by * read
6515
6516         access to dn.subtree=&quot;cn=Monitor&quot;
6517             by dn.exact=&quot;uid=admin,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot; write
6518             by users read
6519             by * none
6520
6521         access to *
6522                 by self write
6523                 by * read
6524 </PRE>
6525 <P>In order to support more replicas, just add more <EM>database ldap</EM> sections and increment the <EM>syncrepl rid</EM> number accordingly.</P>
6526 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
6527 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>You must populate the Master and Slave directories with the same data, unlike when using normal Syncrepl
6528 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
6529 <P>If you do not have access to modify the master directory configuration you can configure a standalone ldap proxy, which might look like:</P>
6530 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="push-based-standalone.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
6531 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: Replacing slurpd with a standalone version</P>
6532 <P>The following configuration is an example of a standalone LDAP Proxy:</P>
6533 <PRE>
6534         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/core.schema
6535         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/cosine.schema
6536         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/nis.schema
6537         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema
6538
6539         include     /usr/local/etc/openldap/slapd.acl
6540
6541         modulepath  /usr/local/libexec/openldap
6542         moduleload  syncprov.la
6543         moduleload  back_ldap.la
6544
6545         ##############################################################################
6546         # Consumer Proxy that pulls in data via Syncrepl and pushes out via slapd-ldap
6547         ##############################################################################
6548
6549         database        ldap
6550         # ignore conflicts with other databases, as we need to push out to same suffix
6551         hidden              on
6552         suffix          &quot;dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6553         rootdn          &quot;cn=slapd-ldap&quot;
6554         uri             ldap://localhost:9012/
6555
6556         lastmod         on
6557
6558         # We don't need any access to this DSA
6559         restrict        all
6560
6561         acl-bind        bindmethod=simple
6562                         binddn=&quot;cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6563                         credentials=testing
6564
6565         syncrepl        rid=001
6566                         provider=ldap://localhost:9011/
6567                         binddn=&quot;cn=replicator,dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6568                         bindmethod=simple
6569                         credentials=testing
6570                         searchbase=&quot;dc=suretecsystems,dc=com&quot;
6571                         type=refreshAndPersist
6572                         retry=&quot;5 5 300 5&quot;
6573
6574         overlay         syncprov
6575 </PRE>
6576 <P>As you can see, you can let your imagination go wild using Syncrepl and <EM>slapd-ldap(8)</EM> tailoring your replication to fit your specific network topology.</P>
6577 <H2><A NAME="Pull Based">17.2. Pull Based</A></H2>
6578 <H3><A NAME="LDAP Sync Replication">17.2.1. LDAP Sync Replication</A></H3>
6579 <P>The <TERM>LDAP Sync</TERM> Replication engine, <TERM>syncrepl</TERM> for short, is a consumer-side replication engine that enables the consumer <TERM>LDAP</TERM> server to maintain a shadow copy of a <TERM>DIT</TERM> fragment. A syncrepl engine resides at the consumer-side as one of the <EM>slapd</EM>(8) threads. It creates and maintains a consumer replica by connecting to the replication provider to perform the initial DIT content load followed either by periodic content polling or by timely updates upon content changes.</P>
6580 <P>Syncrepl uses the LDAP Content Synchronization (or LDAP Sync for short) protocol as the replica synchronization protocol.  It provides a stateful replication which supports both pull-based and push-based synchronization and does not mandate the use of a history store.</P>
6581 <P>Syncrepl keeps track of the status of the replication content by maintaining and exchanging synchronization cookies. Because the syncrepl consumer and provider maintain their content status, the consumer can poll the provider content to perform incremental synchronization by asking for the entries required to make the consumer replica up-to-date with the provider content. Syncrepl also enables convenient management of replicas by maintaining replica status.  The consumer replica can be constructed from a consumer-side or a provider-side backup at any synchronization status. Syncrepl can automatically resynchronize the consumer replica up-to-date with the current provider content.</P>
6582 <P>Syncrepl supports both pull-based and push-based synchronization. In its basic refreshOnly synchronization mode, the provider uses pull-based synchronization where the consumer servers need not be tracked and no history information is maintained.  The information required for the provider to process periodic polling requests is contained in the synchronization cookie of the request itself.  To optimize the pull-based synchronization, syncrepl utilizes the present phase of the LDAP Sync protocol as well as its delete phase, instead of falling back on frequent full reloads. To further optimize the pull-based synchronization, the provider can maintain a per-scope session log as a history store. In its refreshAndPersist mode of synchronization, the provider uses a push-based synchronization. The provider keeps track of the consumer servers that have requested a persistent search and sends them necessary updates as the provider replication content gets modified.</P>
6583 <P>With syncrepl, a consumer server can create a replica without changing the provider's configurations and without restarting the provider server, if the consumer server has appropriate access privileges for the DIT fragment to be replicated. The consumer server can stop the replication also without the need for provider-side changes and restart.</P>
6584 <P>Syncrepl supports both partial and sparse replications.  The shadow DIT fragment is defined by a general search criteria consisting of base, scope, filter, and attribute list.  The replica content is also subject to the access privileges of the bind identity of the syncrepl replication connection.</P>
6585 <H4><A NAME="The LDAP Content Synchronization Protocol">17.2.1.1. The LDAP Content Synchronization Protocol</A></H4>
6586 <P>The LDAP Sync protocol allows a client to maintain a synchronized copy of a DIT fragment. The LDAP Sync operation is defined as a set of controls and other protocol elements which extend the LDAP search operation. This section introduces the LDAP Content Sync protocol only briefly.  For more information, refer to <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt">RFC4533</A>.</P>
6587 <P>The LDAP Sync protocol supports both polling and listening for changes by defining two respective synchronization operations: <EM>refreshOnly</EM> and <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM>.  Polling is implemented by the <EM>refreshOnly</EM> operation.  The client copy is synchronized to the server copy at the time of polling.  The server finishes the search operation by returning <EM>SearchResultDone</EM> at the end of the search operation as in the normal search.  The listening is implemented by the <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> operation.  Instead of finishing the search after returning all entries currently matching the search criteria, the synchronization search remains persistent in the server. Subsequent updates to the synchronization content in the server cause additional entry updates to be sent to the client.</P>
6588 <P>The <EM>refreshOnly</EM> operation and the refresh stage of the <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> operation can be performed with a present phase or a delete phase.</P>
6589 <P>In the present phase, the server sends the client the entries updated within the search scope since the last synchronization. The server sends all requested attributes, be it changed or not, of the updated entries.  For each unchanged entry which remains in the scope, the server sends a present message consisting only of the name of the entry and the synchronization control representing state present. The present message does not contain any attributes of the entry. After the client receives all update and present entries, it can reliably determine the new client copy by adding the entries added to the server, by replacing the entries modified at the server, and by deleting entries in the client copy which have not been updated nor specified as being present at the server.</P>
6590 <P>The transmission of the updated entries in the delete phase is the same as in the present phase. The server sends all the requested attributes of the entries updated within the search scope since the last synchronization to the client. In the delete phase, however, the server sends a delete message for each entry deleted from the search scope, instead of sending present messages.  The delete message consists only of the name of the entry and the synchronization control representing state delete.  The new client copy can be determined by adding, modifying, and removing entries according to the synchronization control attached to the <EM>SearchResultEntry</EM> message.</P>
6591 <P>In the case that the LDAP Sync server maintains a history store and can determine which entries are scoped out of the client copy since the last synchronization time, the server can use the delete phase. If the server does not maintain any history store, cannot determine the scoped-out entries from the history store, or the history store does not cover the outdated synchronization state of the client, the server should use the present phase.  The use of the present phase is much more efficient than a full content reload in terms of the synchronization traffic.  To reduce the synchronization traffic further, the LDAP Sync protocol also provides several optimizations such as the transmission of the normalized <TT>entryUUID</TT>s and the transmission of multiple <TT>entryUUIDs</TT> in a single <EM>syncIdSet</EM> message.</P>
6592 <P>At the end of the <EM>refreshOnly</EM> synchronization, the server sends a synchronization cookie to the client as a state indicator of the client copy after the synchronization is completed.  The client will present the received cookie when it requests the next incremental synchronization to the server.</P>
6593 <P>When <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> synchronization is used, the server sends a synchronization cookie at the end of the refresh stage by sending a Sync Info message with TRUE refreshDone.  It also sends a synchronization cookie by attaching it to <EM>SearchResultEntry</EM> generated in the persist stage of the synchronization search. During the persist stage, the server can also send a Sync Info message containing the synchronization cookie at any time the server wants to update the client-side state indicator.  The server also updates a synchronization indicator of the client at the end of the persist stage.</P>
6594 <P>In the LDAP Sync protocol, entries are uniquely identified by the <TT>entryUUID</TT> attribute value. It can function as a reliable identifier of the entry. The DN of the entry, on the other hand, can be changed over time and hence cannot be considered as the reliable identifier.  The <TT>entryUUID</TT> is attached to each <EM>SearchResultEntry</EM> or <EM>SearchResultReference</EM> as a part of the synchronization control.</P>
6595 <H4><A NAME="Syncrepl Details">17.2.1.2. Syncrepl Details</A></H4>
6596 <P>The syncrepl engine utilizes both the <EM>refreshOnly</EM> and the <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> operations of the LDAP Sync protocol.  If a syncrepl specification is included in a database definition, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) launches a syncrepl engine as a <EM>slapd</EM>(8) thread and schedules its execution. If the <EM>refreshOnly</EM> operation is specified, the syncrepl engine will be rescheduled at the interval time after a synchronization operation is completed.  If the <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> operation is specified, the engine will remain active and process the persistent synchronization messages from the provider.</P>
6597 <P>The syncrepl engine utilizes both the present phase and the delete phase of the refresh synchronization. It is possible to configure a per-scope session log in the provider server which stores the <TT>entryUUID</TT>s of a finite number of entries deleted from a replication content.  Multiple replicas of single provider content share the same per-scope session log. The syncrepl engine uses the delete phase if the session log is present and the state of the consumer server is recent enough that no session log entries are truncated after the last synchronization of the client.  The syncrepl engine uses the present phase if no session log is configured for the replication content or if the consumer replica is too outdated to be covered by the session log.  The current design of the session log store is memory based, so the information contained in the session log is not persistent over multiple provider invocations. It is not currently supported to access the session log store by using LDAP operations. It is also not currently supported to impose access control to the session log.</P>
6598 <P>As a further optimization, even in the case the synchronization search is not associated with any session log, no entries will be transmitted to the consumer server when there has been no update in the replication context.</P>
6599 <P>The syncrepl engine, which is a consumer-side replication engine, can work with any backends. The LDAP Sync provider can be configured as an overlay on any backend, but works best with the <EM>back-bdb</EM> or <EM>back-hdb</EM> backend.</P>
6600 <P>The LDAP Sync provider maintains a <TT>contextCSN</TT> for each database as the current synchronization state indicator of the provider content.  It is the largest <TT>entryCSN</TT> in the provider context such that no transactions for an entry having smaller <TT>entryCSN</TT> value remains outstanding.  The <TT>contextCSN</TT> could not just be set to the largest issued <TT>entryCSN</TT> because <TT>entryCSN</TT> is obtained before a transaction starts and transactions are not committed in the issue order.</P>
6601 <P>The provider stores the <TT>contextCSN</TT> of a context in the <TT>contextCSN</TT> attribute of the context suffix entry. The attribute is not written to the database after every update operation though; instead it is maintained primarily in memory. At database start time the provider reads the last saved <TT>contextCSN</TT> into memory and uses the in-memory copy exclusively thereafter. By default, changes to the <TT>contextCSN</TT> as a result of database updates will not be written to the database until the server is cleanly shut down. A checkpoint facility exists to cause the contextCSN to be written out more frequently if desired.</P>
6602 <P>Note that at startup time, if the provider is unable to read a <TT>contextCSN</TT> from the suffix entry, it will scan the entire database to determine the value, and this scan may take quite a long time on a large database. When a <TT>contextCSN</TT> value is read, the database will still be scanned for any <TT>entryCSN</TT> values greater than it, to make sure the <TT>contextCSN</TT> value truly reflects the greatest committed <TT>entryCSN</TT> in the database. On databases which support inequality indexing, setting an eq index on the <TT>entryCSN</TT> attribute and configuring <EM>contextCSN</EM> checkpoints will greatly speed up this scanning step.</P>
6603 <P>If no <TT>contextCSN</TT> can be determined by reading and scanning the database, a new value will be generated. Also, if scanning the database yielded a greater <TT>entryCSN</TT> than was previously recorded in the suffix entry's <TT>contextCSN</TT> attribute, a checkpoint will be immediately written with the new value.</P>
6604 <P>The consumer also stores its replica state, which is the provider's <TT>contextCSN</TT> received as a synchronization cookie, in the <TT>contextCSN</TT> attribute of the suffix entry.  The replica state maintained by a consumer server is used as the synchronization state indicator when it performs subsequent incremental synchronization with the provider server. It is also used as a provider-side synchronization state indicator when it functions as a secondary provider server in a cascading replication configuration.  Since the consumer and provider state information are maintained in the same location within their respective databases, any consumer can be promoted to a provider (and vice versa) without any special actions.</P>
6605 <P>Because a general search filter can be used in the syncrepl specification, some entries in the context may be omitted from the synchronization content.  The syncrepl engine creates a glue entry to fill in the holes in the replica context if any part of the replica content is subordinate to the holes. The glue entries will not be returned in the search result unless <EM>ManageDsaIT</EM> control is provided.</P>
6606 <P>Also as a consequence of the search filter used in the syncrepl specification, it is possible for a modification to remove an entry from the replication scope even though the entry has not been deleted on the provider. Logically the entry must be deleted on the consumer but in <EM>refreshOnly</EM> mode the provider cannot detect and propagate this change without the use of the session log.</P>
6607 <P>For configuration, please see the <A HREF="#Syncrepl">Syncrepl</A> section.</P>
6608 <H3><A NAME="Delta-syncrepl replication">17.2.2. Delta-syncrepl replication</A></H3>
6609 <UL>
6610 <LI>Disadvantages of Syncrepl replication:</UL>
6611 <P>OpenLDAP's syncrepl replication is an object-based replication mechanism. When any attribute value in a replicated object is changed on the provider, each consumer fetches and processes the complete changed object {B:both changed and unchanged attribute values} during replication. This works well, but has drawbacks in some situations.</P>
6612 <P>For example, suppose you have a database consisting of 100,000 objects of 1 KB each. Further, suppose you routinely run a batch job to change the value of a single two-byte attribute value that appears in each of the 100,000 objects on the master. Not counting LDAP and TCP/IP protocol overhead, each time you run this job each consumer will transfer and process {B:1 GB} of data to process {B:200KB of changes! }</P>
6613 <P>99.98% of the data that is transmitted and processed in a case like this will be redundant, since it represents values that did not change. This is a waste of valuable transmission and processing bandwidth and can cause an unacceptable replication backlog to develop. While this situation is extreme, it serves to demonstrate a very real problem that is encountered in some LDAP deployments.</P>
6614 <UL>
6615 <LI>Where Delta-syncrepl comes in:</UL>
6616 <P>Delta-syncrepl, a changelog-based variant of syncrepl, is designed to address situations like the one described above. Delta-syncrepl works by maintaining a changelog of a selectable depth on the provider. The replication consumer on each consumer checks the changelog for the changes it needs and, as long as the changelog contains the needed changes, the delta-syncrepl consumer fetches them from the changelog and applies them to its database. If, however, a replica is too far out of sync (or completely empty), conventional syncrepl is used to bring it up to date and replication then switches to the delta-syncrepl mode.</P>
6617 <P>For configuration, please see the <A HREF="#Delta-syncrepl">Delta-syncrepl</A> section.</P>
6618 <H2><A NAME="Mixture of both Pull and Push based">17.3. Mixture of both Pull and Push based</A></H2>
6619 <H3><A NAME="N-Way Multi-Master replication">17.3.1. N-Way Multi-Master replication</A></H3>
6620 <P>Multi-Master replication is a replication technique using Syncrepl to replicate data to multiple Master Directory servers.</P>
6621 <UL>
6622 <LI>Advantages of Multi-Master replication:<UL>
6623 <LI>If any master fails, other masters will continue to accept updates
6624 <LI>Avoids a single point of failure
6625 <LI>Masters can be located in several physical sites i.e. distributed across the network/globe.
6626 <LI>Good for Automatic failover/High Availability</UL>
6627 <LI>Disadvantages of Multi-Master replication:<UL>
6628 <LI>It has <B>NOTHING</B> to do with load balancing
6629 <LI><A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/1240.html">http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/1240.html</A>
6630 <LI>If connectivity with a master is lost because of a network partition, then &quot;automatic failover&quot; can just compound the problem
6631 <LI>Typically, a particular machine cannot distinguish between losing contact with a peer because that peer crashed, or because the network link has failed
6632 <LI>If a network is partitioned and multiple clients start writing to each of the &quot;masters&quot; then reconciliation will be a pain; it may be best to simply deny writes to the clients that are partitioned from the single master
6633 <LI>Masters <B>must</B> propagate writes to <B>all</B> the other servers, which means the network traffic and write load is constant and spreads across all of the servers</UL></UL>
6634 <P>For configuration, please see the <A HREF="#N-Way Multi-Master">N-Way Multi-Master</A> section below</P>
6635 <H3><A NAME="MirrorMode replication">17.3.2. MirrorMode replication</A></H3>
6636 <P>MirrorMode is a hybrid configuration that provides all of the consistency guarantees of single-master replication, while also providing the high availability of multi-master. In MirrorMode two masters are set up to replicate from each other (as a multi-master configuration) but an external frontend is employed to direct all writes to only one of the two servers. The second master will only be used for writes if the first master crashes, at which point the frontend will switch to directing all writes to the second master. When a crashed master is repaired and restarted it will automatically catch up to any changes on the running master and resync.</P>
6637 <H4><A NAME="Arguments for MirrorMode">17.3.2.1. Arguments for MirrorMode</A></H4>
6638 <UL>
6639 <LI>Provides a high-availability (HA) solution for directory writes (replicas handle reads)
6640 <LI>As long as one Master is operational, writes can safely be accepted
6641 <LI>Master nodes replicate from each other, so they are always up to date and can be ready to take over (hot standby)
6642 <LI>Syncrepl also allows the master nodes to re-synchronize after any downtime
6643 <LI>Delta-Syncrepl can be used</UL>
6644 <H4><A NAME="Arguments against MirrorMode">17.3.2.2. Arguments against MirrorMode</A></H4>
6645 <UL>
6646 <LI>MirrorMode is not what is termed as a Multi-Master solution. This is because writes have to go to one of the mirror nodes at a time
6647 <LI>MirrorMode can be termed as Active-Active Hot-Standby, therefor an external server (slapd in proxy mode) or device (hardware load balancer) to manage which master is currently active
6648 <LI>While syncrepl can recover from a completely empty database, slapadd is much faster
6649 <LI>Does not provide faster or more scalable write performance (neither could any Multi-Master solution)
6650 <LI>Backups are managed slightly differently<UL>
6651 <LI>If backing up the Berkeley database itself and periodically backing up the transaction log files, then the same member of the mirror pair needs to be used to collect logfiles until the next database backup is taken
6652 <LI>To ensure that both databases are consistent, each database might have to be put in read-only mode while performing a slapcat.
6653 <LI>When using slapcat, the generated LDIF files can be rather large. This can happen with a non-MirrorMode deployment also.</UL></UL>
6654 <P>For configuration, please see the <A HREF="#MirrorMode">MirrorMode</A> section below</P>
6655 <H2><A NAME="Configuring the different replication types">17.4. Configuring the different replication types</A></H2>
6656 <H3><A NAME="Syncrepl">17.4.1. Syncrepl</A></H3>
6657 <H4><A NAME="Syncrepl configuration">17.4.1.1. Syncrepl configuration</A></H4>
6658 <P>Because syncrepl is a consumer-side replication engine, the syncrepl specification is defined in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) of the consumer server, not in the provider server's configuration file.  The initial loading of the replica content can be performed either by starting the syncrepl engine with no synchronization cookie or by populating the consumer replica by adding an <TERM>LDIF</TERM> file dumped as a backup at the provider.</P>
6659 <P>When loading from a backup, it is not required to perform the initial loading from the up-to-date backup of the provider content. The syncrepl engine will automatically synchronize the initial consumer replica to the current provider content. As a result, it is not required to stop the provider server in order to avoid the replica inconsistency caused by the updates to the provider content during the content backup and loading process.</P>
6660 <P>When replicating a large scale directory, especially in a bandwidth constrained environment, it is advised to load the consumer replica from a backup instead of performing a full initial load using syncrepl.</P>
6661 <H4><A NAME="Set up the provider slapd">17.4.1.2. Set up the provider slapd</A></H4>
6662 <P>The provider is implemented as an overlay, so the overlay itself must first be configured in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) before it can be used. The provider has only two configuration directives, for setting checkpoints on the <TT>contextCSN</TT> and for configuring the session log.  Because the LDAP Sync search is subject to access control, proper access control privileges should be set up for the replicated content.</P>
6663 <P>The <TT>contextCSN</TT> checkpoint is configured by the</P>
6664 <PRE>
6665         syncprov-checkpoint &lt;ops&gt; &lt;minutes&gt;
6666 </PRE>
6667 <P>directive. Checkpoints are only tested after successful write operations.  If <EM>&lt;ops&gt;</EM> operations or more than <EM>&lt;minutes&gt;</EM> time has passed since the last checkpoint, a new checkpoint is performed.</P>
6668 <P>The session log is configured by the</P>
6669 <PRE>
6670         syncprov-sessionlog &lt;size&gt;
6671 </PRE>
6672 <P>directive, where <EM>&lt;size&gt;</EM> is the maximum number of session log entries the session log can record. When a session log is configured, it is automatically used for all LDAP Sync searches within the database.</P>
6673 <P>Note that using the session log requires searching on the <EM>entryUUID</EM> attribute. Setting an eq index on this attribute will greatly benefit the performance of the session log on the provider.</P>
6674 <P>A more complete example of the <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) content is thus:</P>
6675 <PRE>
6676         database bdb
6677         suffix dc=Example,dc=com
6678         rootdn dc=Example,dc=com
6679         directory /var/ldap/db
6680         index objectclass,entryCSN,entryUUID eq
6681
6682         overlay syncprov
6683         syncprov-checkpoint 100 10
6684         syncprov-sessionlog 100
6685 </PRE>
6686 <H4><A NAME="Set up the consumer slapd">17.4.1.3. Set up the consumer slapd</A></H4>
6687 <P>The syncrepl replication is specified in the database section of <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) for the replica context.  The syncrepl engine is backend independent and the directive can be defined with any database type.</P>
6688 <PRE>
6689         database hdb
6690         suffix dc=Example,dc=com
6691         rootdn dc=Example,dc=com
6692         directory /var/ldap/db
6693         index objectclass,entryCSN,entryUUID eq
6694
6695         syncrepl rid=123
6696                 provider=ldap://provider.example.com:389
6697                 type=refreshOnly
6698                 interval=01:00:00:00
6699                 searchbase=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
6700                 filter=&quot;(objectClass=organizationalPerson)&quot;
6701                 scope=sub
6702                 attrs=&quot;cn,sn,ou,telephoneNumber,title,l&quot;
6703                 schemachecking=off
6704                 bindmethod=simple
6705                 binddn=&quot;cn=syncuser,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
6706                 credentials=secret
6707 </PRE>
6708 <P>In this example, the consumer will connect to the provider <EM>slapd</EM>(8) at port 389 of <A HREF="ldap://provider.example.com">ldap://provider.example.com</A> to perform a polling (<EM>refreshOnly</EM>) mode of synchronization once a day.  It will bind as <TT>cn=syncuser,dc=example,dc=com</TT> using simple authentication with password &quot;secret&quot;.  Note that the access control privilege of <TT>cn=syncuser,dc=example,dc=com</TT> should be set appropriately in the provider to retrieve the desired replication content. Also the search limits must be high enough on the provider to allow the syncuser to retrieve a complete copy of the requested content.  The consumer uses the rootdn to write to its database so it always has full permissions to write all content.</P>
6709 <P>The synchronization search in the above example will search for the entries whose objectClass is organizationalPerson in the entire subtree rooted at <TT>dc=example,dc=com</TT>. The requested attributes are <TT>cn</TT>, <TT>sn</TT>, <TT>ou</TT>, <TT>telephoneNumber</TT>, <TT>title</TT>, and <TT>l</TT>. The schema checking is turned off, so that the consumer <EM>slapd</EM>(8) will not enforce entry schema checking when it process updates from the provider <EM>slapd</EM>(8).</P>
6710 <P>For more detailed information on the syncrepl directive, see the <A HREF="#syncrepl">syncrepl</A> section of <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> chapter of this admin guide.</P>
6711 <H4><A NAME="Start the provider and the consumer slapd">17.4.1.4. Start the provider and the consumer slapd</A></H4>
6712 <P>The provider <EM>slapd</EM>(8) is not required to be restarted. <EM>contextCSN</EM> is automatically generated as needed: it might be originally contained in the <TERM>LDIF</TERM> file, generated by <EM>slapadd</EM> (8), generated upon changes in the context, or generated when the first LDAP Sync search arrives at the provider.  If an LDIF file is being loaded which did not previously contain the <EM>contextCSN</EM>, the <EM>-w</EM> option should be used with <EM>slapadd</EM> (8) to cause it to be generated. This will allow the server to startup a little quicker the first time it runs.</P>
6713 <P>When starting a consumer <EM>slapd</EM>(8), it is possible to provide a synchronization cookie as the <EM>-c cookie</EM> command line option in order to start the synchronization from a specific state.  The cookie is a comma separated list of name=value pairs. Currently supported syncrepl cookie fields are <EM>csn=&lt;csn&gt;</EM> and <EM>rid=&lt;rid&gt;</EM>. <EM>&lt;csn&gt;</EM> represents the current synchronization state of the consumer replica.  <EM>&lt;rid&gt;</EM> identifies a consumer replica locally within the consumer server. It is used to relate the cookie to the syncrepl definition in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) which has the matching replica identifier.  The <EM>&lt;rid&gt;</EM> must have no more than 3 decimal digits.  The command line cookie overrides the synchronization cookie stored in the consumer replica database.</P>
6714 <H3><A NAME="Delta-syncrepl">17.4.2. Delta-syncrepl</A></H3>
6715 <H4><A NAME="Delta-syncrepl Master configuration">17.4.2.1. Delta-syncrepl Master configuration</A></H4>
6716 <P>Setting up delta-syncrepl requires configuration changes on both the master and replica servers:</P>
6717 <PRE>
6718      # Give the replica DN unlimited read access.  This ACL may need to be
6719      # merged with other ACL statements.
6720
6721      access to *
6722         by dn.base=&quot;cn=replicator,dc=symas,dc=com&quot; read
6723         by * break
6724
6725      # Set the module path location
6726      modulepath /opt/symas/lib/openldap
6727
6728      # Load the hdb backend
6729      moduleload back_hdb.la
6730
6731      # Load the accesslog overlay
6732      moduleload accesslog.la
6733
6734      #Load the syncprov overlay
6735      moduleload syncprov.la
6736
6737      # Accesslog database definitions
6738      database hdb
6739      suffix cn=accesslog
6740      directory /db/accesslog
6741      rootdn cn=accesslog
6742      index default eq
6743      index entryCSN,objectClass,reqEnd,reqResult,reqStart
6744
6745      overlay syncprov
6746      syncprov-nopresent TRUE
6747      syncprov-reloadhint TRUE
6748
6749      # Let the replica DN have limitless searches
6750      limits dn.exact=&quot;cn=replicator,dc=symas,dc=com&quot; time.soft=unlimited time.hard=unlimited size.soft=unlimited size.hard=unlimited
6751
6752      # Primary database definitions
6753      database hdb
6754      suffix &quot;dc=symas,dc=com&quot;
6755      rootdn &quot;cn=manager,dc=symas,dc=com&quot;
6756
6757      ## Whatever other configuration options are desired
6758
6759      # syncprov specific indexing
6760      index entryCSN eq
6761      index entryUUID eq
6762
6763      # syncrepl Provider for primary db
6764      overlay syncprov
6765      syncprov-checkpoint 1000 60
6766
6767      # accesslog overlay definitions for primary db
6768      overlay accesslog
6769      logdb cn=accesslog
6770      logops writes
6771      logsuccess TRUE
6772      # scan the accesslog DB every day, and purge entries older than 7 days
6773      logpurge 07+00:00 01+00:00
6774
6775      # Let the replica DN have limitless searches
6776      limits dn.exact=&quot;cn=replicator,dc=symas,dc=com&quot; time.soft=unlimited time.hard=unlimited size.soft=unlimited size.hard=unlimited
6777 </PRE>
6778 <P>For more information, always consult the relevant man pages (slapo-accesslog and slapd.conf)</P>
6779 <H4><A NAME="Delta-syncrepl Replica configuration">17.4.2.2. Delta-syncrepl Replica configuration</A></H4>
6780 <PRE>
6781      # Primary replica database configuration
6782      database hdb
6783      suffix &quot;dc=symas,dc=com&quot;
6784      rootdn &quot;cn=manager,dc=symas,dc=com&quot;
6785
6786      ## Whatever other configuration bits for the replica, like indexing
6787      ## that you want
6788
6789      # syncrepl specific indices
6790      index entryUUID eq
6791
6792      # syncrepl directives
6793      syncrepl  rid=0
6794                provider=ldap://ldapmaster.symas.com:389
6795                bindmethod=simple
6796                binddn=&quot;cn=replicator,dc=symas,dc=com&quot;
6797                credentials=secret
6798                searchbase=&quot;dc=symas,dc=com&quot;
6799                logbase=&quot;cn=accesslog&quot;
6800                logfilter=&quot;(&amp;(objectClass=auditWriteObject)(reqResult=0))&quot;
6801                schemachecking=on
6802                type=refreshAndPersist
6803                retry=&quot;60 +&quot;
6804                syncdata=accesslog
6805
6806      # Refer updates to the master
6807      updateref               ldap://ldapmaster.symas.com
6808 </PRE>
6809 <P>The above configuration assumes that you have a replicator identity defined in your database that can be used to bind to the master with. In addition, all of the databases (primary master, primary replica, and the accesslog storage database) should also have properly tuned <EM>DB_CONFIG</EM> files that meet your needs.</P>
6810 <H3><A NAME="N-Way Multi-Master">17.4.3. N-Way Multi-Master</A></H3>
6811 <P>For the following example we will be using 3 Master nodes. Keeping in line with <B>test050-syncrepl-multimaster</B> of the OpenLDAP test suite, we will be configuring <EM>slapd(8)</EM> via <B>cn=config</B></P>
6812 <P>This sets up the config database:</P>
6813 <PRE>
6814      dn: cn=config
6815      objectClass: olcGlobal
6816      cn: config
6817      olcServerID: 1
6818
6819      dn: olcDatabase={0}config,cn=config
6820      objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig
6821      olcDatabase: {0}config
6822      olcRootPW: secret
6823 </PRE>
6824 <P>second and third servers will have a different olcServerID obviously:</P>
6825 <PRE>
6826      dn: cn=config
6827      objectClass: olcGlobal
6828      cn: config
6829      olcServerID: 2
6830
6831      dn: olcDatabase={0}config,cn=config
6832      objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig
6833      olcDatabase: {0}config
6834      olcRootPW: secret
6835 </PRE>
6836 <P>This sets up syncrepl as a provider (since these are all masters):</P>
6837 <PRE>
6838      dn: cn=module,cn=config
6839      objectClass: olcModuleList
6840      cn: module
6841      olcModulePath: /usr/local/libexec/openldap
6842      olcModuleLoad: syncprov.la
6843 </PRE>
6844 <P>Now we setup the first Master Node (replace $URI1, $URI2 and $URI3 etc. with your actual ldap urls):</P>
6845 <PRE>
6846      dn: cn=config
6847      changetype: modify
6848      replace: olcServerID
6849      olcServerID: 1 $URI1
6850      olcServerID: 2 $URI2
6851      olcServerID: 3 $URI3
6852
6853      dn: olcOverlay=syncprov,olcDatabase={0}config,cn=config
6854      changetype: add
6855      objectClass: olcOverlayConfig
6856      objectClass: olcSyncProvConfig
6857      olcOverlay: syncprov
6858
6859      dn: olcDatabase={0}config,cn=config
6860      changetype: modify
6861      add: olcSyncRepl
6862      olcSyncRepl: rid=001 provider=$URI1 binddn=&quot;cn=config&quot; bindmethod=simple
6863        credentials=secret searchbase=&quot;cn=config&quot; type=refreshAndPersist
6864        retry=&quot;5 5 300 5&quot; timeout=1
6865      olcSyncRepl: rid=002 provider=$URI2 binddn=&quot;cn=config&quot; bindmethod=simple
6866        credentials=secret searchbase=&quot;cn=config&quot; type=refreshAndPersist
6867        retry=&quot;5 5 300 5&quot; timeout=1
6868      olcSyncRepl: rid=003 provider=$URI3 binddn=&quot;cn=config&quot; bindmethod=simple
6869        credentials=secret searchbase=&quot;cn=config&quot; type=refreshAndPersist
6870        retry=&quot;5 5 300 5&quot; timeout=1
6871      -
6872      add: olcMirrorMode
6873      olcMirrorMode: TRUE
6874 </PRE>
6875 <P>Now start up the Master and a consumer/s, also add the above LDIF to the first consumer, second consumer etc. It will then replicate <B>cn=config</B>. You now have N-Way Multimaster on the config database.</P>
6876 <P>We still have to replicate the actual data, not just the config, so add to the master (all active and configured consumers/masters will pull down this config, as they are all syncing). Also, replace all <EM>${</EM>} variables with whatever is applicable to your setup:</P>
6877 <PRE>
6878      dn: olcDatabase={1}$BACKEND,cn=config
6879      objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig
6880      objectClass: olc${BACKEND}Config
6881      olcDatabase: {1}$BACKEND
6882      olcSuffix: $BASEDN
6883      olcDbDirectory: ./db
6884      olcRootDN: $MANAGERDN
6885      olcRootPW: $PASSWD
6886      olcSyncRepl: rid=004 provider=$URI1 binddn=&quot;$MANAGERDN&quot; bindmethod=simple
6887        credentials=$PASSWD searchbase=&quot;$BASEDN&quot; type=refreshOnly
6888        interval=00:00:00:10 retry=&quot;5 5 300 5&quot; timeout=1
6889      olcSyncRepl: rid=005 provider=$URI2 binddn=&quot;$MANAGERDN&quot; bindmethod=simple
6890        credentials=$PASSWD searchbase=&quot;$BASEDN&quot; type=refreshOnly
6891        interval=00:00:00:10 retry=&quot;5 5 300 5&quot; timeout=1
6892      olcSyncRepl: rid=006 provider=$URI3 binddn=&quot;$MANAGERDN&quot; bindmethod=simple
6893        credentials=$PASSWD searchbase=&quot;$BASEDN&quot; type=refreshOnly
6894        interval=00:00:00:10 retry=&quot;5 5 300 5&quot; timeout=1
6895      olcMirrorMode: TRUE
6896
6897      dn: olcOverlay=syncprov,olcDatabase={1}${BACKEND},cn=config
6898      changetype: add
6899      objectClass: olcOverlayConfig
6900      objectClass: olcSyncProvConfig
6901      olcOverlay: syncprov
6902 </PRE>
6903 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
6904 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>You must have all your server set to the same time via <A HREF="http://www.ntp.org/">http://www.ntp.org/</A>
6905 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
6906 <H3><A NAME="MirrorMode">17.4.4. MirrorMode</A></H3>
6907 <P>MirrorMode configuration is actually very easy. If you have ever setup a normal slapd syncrepl provider, then the only change is the following two directives:</P>
6908 <PRE>
6909        mirrormode  on
6910        serverID    1
6911 </PRE>
6912 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
6913 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>You need to make sure that the <EM>serverID</EM> of each mirror node pair is different and add it as a global configuration option.
6914 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
6915 <H4><A NAME="Mirror Node Configuration">17.4.4.1. Mirror Node Configuration</A></H4>
6916 <P>This is the same as the <A HREF="#Set up the provider slapd">Set up the provider slapd</A> section.</P>
6917 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
6918 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Delta-syncrepl is not yet supported with MirrorMode.
6919 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
6920 <P>Here's a specific cut down example using <A HREF="#LDAP Sync Replication">LDAP Sync Replication</A> in <EM>refreshAndPersist</EM> mode:</P>
6921 <P>MirrorMode node 1:</P>
6922 <PRE>
6923        # Global section
6924        serverID    1
6925        # database section
6926
6927        # syncrepl directives
6928        syncrepl      rid=001
6929                      provider=ldap://ldap-ridr1.example.com
6930                      bindmethod=simple
6931                      binddn=&quot;cn=mirrormode,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
6932                      credentials=mirrormode
6933                      searchbase=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
6934                      schemachecking=on
6935                      type=refreshAndPersist
6936                      retry=&quot;60 +&quot;
6937
6938        syncrepl      rid=002
6939                      provider=ldap://ldap-rid2.example.com
6940                      bindmethod=simple
6941                      binddn=&quot;cn=mirrormode,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
6942                      credentials=mirrormode
6943                      searchbase=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
6944                      schemachecking=on
6945                      type=refreshAndPersist
6946                      retry=&quot;60 +&quot;
6947
6948        mirrormode on
6949 </PRE>
6950 <P>MirrorMode node 2:</P>
6951 <PRE>
6952        # Global section
6953        serverID    2
6954        # database section
6955
6956        # syncrepl directives
6957        syncrepl      rid=001
6958                      provider=ldap://ldap-ridr1.example.com
6959                      bindmethod=simple
6960                      binddn=&quot;cn=mirrormode,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
6961                      credentials=mirrormode
6962                      searchbase=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
6963                      schemachecking=on
6964                      type=refreshAndPersist
6965                      retry=&quot;60 +&quot;
6966
6967        syncrepl      rid=002
6968                      provider=ldap://ldap-rid2.example.com
6969                      bindmethod=simple
6970                      binddn=&quot;cn=mirrormode,dc=example,dc=com&quot;
6971                      credentials=mirrormode
6972                      searchbase=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
6973                      schemachecking=on
6974                      type=refreshAndPersist
6975                      retry=&quot;60 +&quot;
6976
6977        mirrormode on
6978 </PRE>
6979 <P>It's simple really; each MirrorMode node is setup <B>exactly</B> the same, except that the <EM>serverID</EM> is unique.</P>
6980 <H5><A NAME="Failover Configuration">17.4.4.1.1. Failover Configuration</A></H5>
6981 <P>There are generally 2 choices for this; 1.  Hardware proxies/load-balancing or dedicated proxy software, 2. using a Back-LDAP proxy as a syncrepl provider</P>
6982 <P>A typical enterprise example might be:</P>
6983 <P><CENTER><IMG SRC="dual_dc.png" ALIGN="center"></CENTER></P>
6984 <P ALIGN="Center">Figure X.Y: MirrorMode in a Dual Data Center Configuration</P>
6985 <H5><A NAME="Normal Consumer Configuration">17.4.4.1.2. Normal Consumer Configuration</A></H5>
6986 <P>This is exactly the same as the <A HREF="#Set up the consumer slapd">Set up the consumer slapd</A> section. It can either setup in normal <A HREF="#syncrepl replication">syncrepl replication</A> mode, or in <A HREF="#delta-syncrepl replication">delta-syncrepl replication</A> mode.</P>
6987 <H4><A NAME="MirrorMode Summary">17.4.4.2. MirrorMode Summary</A></H4>
6988 <P>Hopefully you will now have a directory architecture that provides all of the consistency guarantees of single-master replication, whilst also providing the high availability of multi-master replication.</P>
6989 <P></P>
6990 <HR>
6991 <H1><A NAME="Maintenance">18. Maintenance</A></H1>
6992 <P>System Administration is all about maintenance, so it is only fair that we discuss how to correctly maintain an OpenLDAP deployment.</P>
6993 <H2><A NAME="Directory Backups">18.1. Directory Backups</A></H2>
6994 <P>Backup strategies largely depend on the amount of change in the database and how much of that change an administrator might be willing to lose in a catastrophic failure. There are two basic methods that can be used:</P>
6995 <P>1. Backup the Berkeley database itself and periodically back up the transaction log files:</P>
6996 <P>Berkeley DB produces transaction logs that can be used to reconstruct changes from a given point in time. For example, if an administrator were willing to only lose one hour's worth of changes, they could take down the server in the middle of the night, copy the Berkeley database files offsite, and bring the server back online. Then, on an hourly basis, they could force a database checkpoint, capture the log files that have been generated in the past hour, and copy them offsite. The accumulated log files, in combination with the previous database backup, could be used with db_recover to reconstruct the database up to the time the last collection of log files was copied offsite. This method affords good protection, with minimal space overhead.</P>
6997 <P>2. Periodically run slapcat and back up the LDIF file:</P>
6998 <P>Slapcat can be run while slapd is active. However, one runs the risk of an inconsistent database- not from the point of slapd, but from the point of the applications using LDAP. For example, if a provisioning application performed tasks that consisted of several LDAP operations, and the slapcat took place concurrently with those operations, then there might be inconsistencies in the LDAP database from the point of view of that provisioning application and applications that depended on it. One must, therefore, be convinced something like that won't happen. One way to do that would be to put the database in read-only mode while performing the slapcat. The other disadvantage of this approach is that the generated LDIF files can be rather large and the accumulation of the day's backups could add up to a substantial amount of space.</P>
6999 <P>You can use <EM>slapcat</EM>(8) to generate an LDIF file for each of your <EM>slapd</EM>(8) back-bdb or back-hdb databases.</P>
7000 <PRE>
7001     slapcat -f slapd.conf -b &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
7002 </PRE>
7003 <P>For back-bdb and back-hdb, this command may be ran while slapd(8) is running.</P>
7004 <P>MORE on actual Berkeley DB backups later covering db_recover etc.</P>
7005 <H2><A NAME="Berkeley DB Logs">18.2. Berkeley DB Logs</A></H2>
7006 <P>Berkeley DB log files grow, and the administrator has to deal with it. The procedure is known as log file archival or log file rotation.</P>
7007 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7008 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The actual log file rotation is handled by the Berkeley DB engine.
7009 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7010 <P>Logs of current transactions need to be stored into files so that the database can be recovered in the event of an application crash. Administrators can change the size limit of a single log file (by default 10MB), and have old log files removed automatically, by setting up DB environment (see below). The reason Berkeley DB never deletes any log files by default is that the administrator may wish to backup the log files before removal to make database recovery possible even after a catastrophic failure, such as file system corruption.</P>
7011 <P>Log file names are <TT>log.XXXXXXXXXX</TT> (X is a digit). By default the log files are located in the BDB backend directory. The <TT>db_archive</TT> tool knows what log files are used in current transactions, and what are not. Administrators can move unused log files to a backup media, and delete them. To have them removed automatically, place set_flags <EM>DB_LOG_AUTOREMOVE</EM> directive in <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT>.</P>
7012 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7013 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>If the log files are removed automatically, recovery after a catastrophic failure is likely to be impossible.
7014 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7015 <P>The files with names <TT>__db.001</TT>, <TT>__db.002</TT>, etc are just shared memory regions (or whatever). These ARE NOT 'logs', they must be left alone. Don't be afraid of them, they do not grow like logs do.</P>
7016 <P>To understand the <TT>db_archive</TT> interface, the reader should refer to chapter 9 of the Berkeley DB guide. In particular, the following chapters are recommended:</P>
7017 <UL>
7018 <LI>Database and log file archival - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/archival.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/archival.html</A>
7019 <LI>Log file removal - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/logfile.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/logfile.html</A>
7020 <LI>Recovery procedures - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/recovery.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/recovery.html</A>
7021 <LI>Hot failover - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/hotfail.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/transapp/hotfail.html</A>
7022 <LI>Complete list of Berkeley DB flags - <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/api_c/env_set_flags.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/api_c/env_set_flags.html</A></UL>
7023 <P>Advanced installations can use special environment settings to fine-tune some Berkeley DB options (change the log file limit, etc). This can be done by using the <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> file. This magic file can be created in BDB backend directory set up by <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5). More information on this file can be found in File naming chapter. Specific directives can be found in C Interface, look for <EM>DB_ENV-&gt;set_XXXX</EM> calls.</P>
7024 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7025 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>options set in <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> file override options set by OpenLDAP. Use them with extreme caution. Do not use them unless You know what You are doing.
7026 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7027 <P>The advantages of <TT>DB_CONFIG</TT> usage can be the following:</P>
7028 <UL>
7029 <LI>to keep data files and log files on different mediums (i.e. disks) to improve performance and/or reliability;
7030 <LI>to fine-tune some specific options (such as shared memory region sizes);
7031 <LI>to set the log file limit (please read Log file limits before doing this).</UL>
7032 <P>To figure out the best-practice BDB backup scenario, the reader is highly recommended to read the whole Chapter 9: Berkeley DB Transactional Data Store Applications. This chapter is a set of small pages with examples in C language. Non-programming people can skip this examples without loss of knowledge.</P>
7033 <H2><A NAME="Checkpointing">18.3. Checkpointing</A></H2>
7034 <P>MORE/TIDY</P>
7035 <P>If you put &quot;checkpoint 1024 5&quot; in slapd.conf (to checkpoint after 1024kb or 5 minutes, for example), this does not checkpoint every 5 minutes as you may think. The explanation from Howard is:</P>
7036 <P>'In OpenLDAP 2.1 and 2.2 the checkpoint directive acts as follows - *when there is a write operation*, and more than &lt;check&gt; minutes have occurred since the last checkpoint, perform the checkpoint. If more than &lt;check&gt; minutes pass after a write without any other write operations occurring, no checkpoint is performed, so it's possible to lose the last write that occurred.''</P>
7037 <P>In other words, a write operation occurring less than &quot;check&quot; minutes after the last checkpoint will not be checkpointed until the next write occurs after &quot;check&quot; minutes have passed since the checkpoint.</P>
7038 <P>This has been modified in 2.3 to indeed checkpoint every so often; in the meantime a workaround is to invoke &quot;db_checkpoint&quot; from a cron script every so often, say 5 minutes.</P>
7039 <H2><A NAME="Migration">18.4. Migration</A></H2>
7040 <P>Exporting to a new system......</P>
7041 <P></P>
7042 <HR>
7043 <H1><A NAME="Monitoring">19. Monitoring</A></H1>
7044 <P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) supports an optional <TERM>LDAP</TERM> monitoring interface you can use to obtain information regarding the current state of your <EM>slapd</EM> instance.  For instance, the interface allows you to determine how many clients are connected to the server currently. The monitoring information is provided by a specialized backend, the <EM>monitor</EM> backend.  A manual page, <EM>slapd-monitor</EM>(5) is available.</P>
7045 <P>When the monitoring interface is enabled, LDAP clients may be used to access information provided by the <EM>monitor</EM> backend, subject to access and other controls.</P>
7046 <P>When enabled, the <EM>monitor</EM> backend dynamically generates and returns objects in response to search requests in the <EM>cn=Monitor</EM> subtree.  Each object contains information about a particular aspect of the server.  The information is held in a combination of user applications and operational attributes.   This information can be access with <EM>ldapsearch(1)</EM>, with any general-purpose LDAP browser, or with specialized monitoring tools.  The <A HREF="#Accessing Monitoring Information">Accessing Monitoring Information</A> section provides a brief tutorial on how to use <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) to access monitoring information, while the <A HREF="#Monitor information">Monitor information</A> section details monitoring information base and its organization.</P>
7047 <P>While support for the monitor backend is included in default builds of slapd(8), this support requires some configuration to become active.  This may be done using either <TT>cn=config</TT> or <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5).  The former is discussed in the <A HREF="#Monitor configuration via cn=config">Monitor configuration via cn=config</A> section of this of this chapter.  The latter is discussed in the <A HREF="#Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)">Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)</A> section of this chapter.  These sections assume monitor backend is built into <EM>slapd</EM> (e.g., <TT>--enable-monitor=yes</TT>, the default).  If the monitor backend was built as a module (e.g., <TT>--enable-monitor=mod</TT>, this module must loaded.  Loading of modules is discussed in the <A HREF="#Configuring slapd">Configuring slapd</A> and <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> chapters.</P>
7048 <H2><A NAME="Monitor configuration via cn=config(5)">19.1. Monitor configuration via cn=config(5)</A></H2>
7049 <P><EM>This section has yet to be written.</EM></P>
7050 <H2><A NAME="Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)">19.2. Monitor configuration via slapd.conf(5)</A></H2>
7051 <P>Configuration of the slapd.conf(5) to support LDAP monitoring is quite simple.</P>
7052 <P>First, ensure <EM>core.schema</EM> schema configuration file is included by your <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) file.  The <EM>monitor</EM> backend requires it.</P>
7053 <P>Second, instantiate the <EM>monitor backend</EM> by adding a <EM>database monitor</EM> directive below your existing database sections.  For instance:</P>
7054 <PRE>
7055         database monitor
7056 </PRE>
7057 <P>Lastly, add additional global or database directives as needed.</P>
7058 <P>Like most other database backends, the monitor backend does honor slapd(8) access and other administrative controls.   As some monitor information may be sensitive, it is generally recommend access to cn=monitor be restricted to directory administrators and their monitoring agents.  Adding an <EM>access</EM> directive immediately below the <EM>database monitor</EM> directive is a clear and effective approach for controlling access.  For instance, the addition of the following <EM>access</EM> directive immediately below the <EM>database monitor</EM> directive restricts access to monitoring information to the specified directory manager.</P>
7059 <PRE>
7060         access to *
7061                 by dn.exact=&quot;cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com
7062                 by * none
7063 </PRE>
7064 <P>More information on <EM>slapd</EM>(8) access controls, see <EM>The access Control Directive</EM> section of the <A HREF="#The slapd Configuration File">The slapd Configuration File</A> chapter and <EM>slapd.access</EM>(5).</P>
7065 <P>After restarting <EM>slapd</EM>(8), you are ready to start exploring the monitoring information provided in <TT>cn=config</TT> as discussed in the <A HREF="#Accessing Monitoring Information">Accessing Monitoring Information</A> section of this chapter.</P>
7066 <P>One can verify slapd(8) is properly configured to provide monitoring information by attempting to read the <TT>cn=monitor</TT> object. For instance, if the following <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) command returns the cn=monitor object (with, as requested, no attributes), it's working.</P>
7067 <PRE>
7068         ldapsearch -x -D 'cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com' -W \
7069                 -b 'cn=Monitor' -s base 1.1
7070 </PRE>
7071 <P>Note that unlike general purpose database backends, the database suffix is hardcoded.  It's always <TT>cn=Monitor</TT>.  So no <EM>suffix</EM> directive should be provided.  Also note that general purpose database backends, the monitor backend cannot be instantiated multiple times.  That is, there can only be one (or zero) occurrences of <TT>database monitor</TT> in the server's configuration.</P>
7072 <H2><A NAME="Accessing Monitoring Information">19.3. Accessing Monitoring Information</A></H2>
7073 <P>As previously discussed, when enabled, the <EM>monitor</EM> backend dynamically generates and returns objects in response to search requests in the <EM>cn=Monitor</EM> subtree.  Each object contains information about a particular aspect of the server.  The information is held in a combination of user applications and operational attributes.  This information can be access with <EM>ldapsearch(1)</EM>, with any general-purpose LDAP browser, or with specialized monitoring tools.</P>
7074 <P>This section provides a provides a brief tutorial on how to use <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) to access monitoring information.</P>
7075 <P>To inspect any particular monitor object, one performs search operation on the object with a baseObject scope and a <TT>(objectClass=*)</TT> filter.  As the monitoring information is contained in a combination of user applications and operational attributes, the return all user applications attributes (e.g., <TT>'*'</TT>) and all operational attributes (e.g., <TT>'+'</TT>) should be requested.   For instance, to read the <TT>cn=Monitor</TT> object itself, the <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1) command (modified to fit your configuration) can be used:</P>
7076 <PRE>
7077         ldapsearch -x -D 'cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com' -W \
7078                 -b 'cn=Monitor' -s base '(objectClass=*)' '*' '+'
7079 </PRE>
7080 <P>When run against your server, this should produce output similar to:</P>
7081 <PRE>
7082         dn: cn=Monitor
7083         objectClass: monitorServer
7084         structuralObjectClass: monitorServer
7085         cn: Monitor
7086         creatorsName:
7087         modifiersName:
7088         createTimestamp: 20061208223558Z
7089         modifyTimestamp: 20061208223558Z
7090         description: This subtree contains monitoring/managing objects.
7091         description: This object contains information about this server.
7092         description: Most of the information is held in operational attributes, which
7093          must be explicitly requested.
7094         monitoredInfo: OpenLDAP: slapd 2.4 (Dec  7 2006 17:30:29)
7095         entryDN: cn=Monitor
7096         subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7097         hasSubordinates: TRUE
7098 </PRE>
7099 <P>To reduce the number of uninteresting attributes returned, one can be more selective when requesting which attributes are to be returned.  For instance, one could request the return of all attributes allowed by the <EM>monitorServer</EM> object class (e.g., <TT>@objectClass</TT>) instead of all user and all operational attributes:</P>
7100 <PRE>
7101         ldapsearch -x -D 'cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com' -W \
7102                 -b 'cn=Monitor' -s base '(objectClass=*)' '@monitorServer'
7103 </PRE>
7104 <P>This limits the output as follows:</P>
7105 <PRE>
7106         dn: cn=Monitor
7107         objectClass: monitorServer
7108         cn: Monitor
7109         description: This subtree contains monitoring/managing objects.
7110         description: This object contains information about this server.
7111         description: Most of the information is held in operational attributes, which
7112          must be explicitly requested.
7113         monitoredInfo: OpenLDAP: slapd 2.X (Dec  7 2006 17:30:29)
7114 </PRE>
7115 <P>To return the names of all the monitoring objects, one performs a search of <TT>cn=Monitor</TT> with subtree scope and <TT>(objectClass=*)</TT> filter and requesting no attributes (e.g., <TT>1.1</TT>) be returned.</P>
7116 <PRE>
7117         ldapsearch -x -D 'cn=Manager,dc=example,dc=com' -W -b 'cn=Monitor' -s sub 1.1
7118 </PRE>
7119 <P>If you run this command you will discover that there are many objects in the <EM>cn=Monitor</EM> subtree.  The following section describes some of the commonly available monitoring objects.</P>
7120 <H2><A NAME="Monitor Information">19.4. Monitor Information</A></H2>
7121 <P>The <EM>monitor</EM> backend provides a wealth of information useful for monitoring the slapd(8) contained in set of monitor objects. Each object contains information about a particular aspect of the server, such as a backends, a connection, or a thread. Some objects serve as containers for other objects and used to construct a hierarchy of objects.</P>
7122 <P>In this hierarchy, the most superior object is {cn=Monitor}. While this object primarily serves as a container for other objects, most of which are containers, this object provides information about this server.  In particular, it provides the slapd(8) version string.  Example:</P>
7123 <PRE>
7124         dn: cn=Monitor
7125         monitoredInfo: OpenLDAP: slapd 2.X (Dec  7 2006 17:30:29)
7126 </PRE>
7127 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7128 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Examples in this section (and its subsections) have been trimmed to show only key information.
7129 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7130 <H3><A NAME="Backends">19.4.1. Backends</A></H3>
7131 <P>The <TT>cn=Backends,cn=Monitor</TT> object, itself, provides a list of available backends.  The list of available backends all builtin backends, as well as backends loaded by modules.  For example:</P>
7132 <PRE>
7133         dn: cn=Backends,cn=Monitor
7134         monitoredInfo: config
7135         monitoredInfo: ldif
7136         monitoredInfo: monitor
7137         monitoredInfo: bdb
7138         monitoredInfo: hdb
7139 </PRE>
7140 <P>This indicates the <EM>config</EM>, <EM>ldif</EM>, <EM>monitor</EM>, <EM>bdb</EM>, and <EM>hdb</EM> backends are available.</P>
7141 <P>The <TT>cn=Backends,cn=Monitor</TT> object is also a container for available backend objects.  Each available backend object contains information about a particular backend.  For example:</P>
7142 <PRE>
7143         dn: cn=Backend 0,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor
7144         monitoredInfo: config
7145         monitorRuntimeConfig: TRUE
7146         supportedControl: 2.16.840.1.113730.3.4.2
7147         seeAlso: cn=Database 0,cn=Databases,cn=Monitor
7148
7149         dn: cn=Backend 1,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor
7150         monitoredInfo: ldif
7151         monitorRuntimeConfig: TRUE
7152         supportedControl: 2.16.840.1.113730.3.4.2
7153
7154         dn: cn=Backend 2,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor
7155         monitoredInfo: monitor
7156         monitorRuntimeConfig: TRUE
7157         supportedControl: 2.16.840.1.113730.3.4.2
7158         seeAlso: cn=Database 2,cn=Databases,cn=Monitor
7159
7160         dn: cn=Backend 3,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor
7161         monitoredInfo: bdb
7162         monitorRuntimeConfig: TRUE
7163         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.12
7164         supportedControl: 2.16.840.1.113730.3.4.2
7165         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.666.5.2
7166         supportedControl: 1.2.840.113556.1.4.319
7167         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.13.1
7168         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.13.2
7169         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.1.10.1
7170         supportedControl: 1.2.840.113556.1.4.1413
7171         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.666.11.7.2
7172         seeAlso: cn=Database 1,cn=Databases,cn=Monitor
7173
7174         dn: cn=Backend 4,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor
7175         monitoredInfo: hdb
7176         monitorRuntimeConfig: TRUE
7177         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.12
7178         supportedControl: 2.16.840.1.113730.3.4.2
7179         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.666.5.2
7180         supportedControl: 1.2.840.113556.1.4.319
7181         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.13.1
7182         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.1.13.2
7183         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.1.10.1
7184         supportedControl: 1.2.840.113556.1.4.1413
7185         supportedControl: 1.3.6.1.4.1.4203.666.11.7.2
7186 </PRE>
7187 <P>For each of these objects, monitorInfo indicates which backend the information in the object is about.  For instance, the <TT>cn=Backend 3,cn=Backends,cn=Monitor</TT> object contains (in the example) information about the <EM>bdb</EM> backend.</P>
7188 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER>
7189 <TR CLASS="heading">
7190 <TD>
7191 <STRONG>Attribute</STRONG>
7192 </TD>
7193 <TD>
7194 <STRONG>Description</STRONG>
7195 </TD>
7196 </TR>
7197 <TR>
7198 <TD>
7199 monitoredInfo
7200 </TD>
7201 <TD>
7202 Name of backend
7203 </TD>
7204 </TR>
7205 <TR>
7206 <TD>
7207 supportedControl
7208 </TD>
7209 <TD>
7210 supported LDAP control extensions
7211 </TD>
7212 </TR>
7213 <TR>
7214 <TD>
7215 seeAlso
7216 </TD>
7217 <TD>
7218 Database objects of instances of this backend
7219 </TD>
7220 </TR>
7221 </TABLE>
7222
7223 <H3><A NAME="Connections">19.4.2. Connections</A></H3>
7224 <P>The main entry is empty; it should contain some statistics on the number of connections.</P>
7225 <P>Dynamic child entries are created for each open connection, with stats on the activity on that connection (the format will be detailed later). There are two special child entries that show the number of total and current connections respectively.</P>
7226 <P>For example:</P>
7227 <P>Total Connections:</P>
7228 <PRE>
7229    dn: cn=Total,cn=Connections,cn=Monitor
7230    structuralObjectClass: monitorCounterObject
7231    monitorCounter: 4
7232    entryDN: cn=Total,cn=Connections,cn=Monitor
7233    subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7234    hasSubordinates: FALSE
7235 </PRE>
7236 <P>Current Connections:</P>
7237 <PRE>
7238    dn: cn=Current,cn=Connections,cn=Monitor
7239    structuralObjectClass: monitorCounterObject
7240    monitorCounter: 2
7241    entryDN: cn=Current,cn=Connections,cn=Monitor
7242    subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7243    hasSubordinates: FALSE
7244 </PRE>
7245 <H3><A NAME="Databases">19.4.3. Databases</A></H3>
7246 <P>The main entry contains the naming context of each configured database; the child entries contain, for each database, the type and the naming context.</P>
7247 <P>For example:</P>
7248 <PRE>
7249    dn: cn=Database 2,cn=Databases,cn=Monitor
7250    structuralObjectClass: monitoredObject
7251    monitoredInfo: monitor
7252    monitorIsShadow: FALSE
7253    monitorContext: cn=Monitor
7254    readOnly: FALSE
7255    entryDN: cn=Database 2,cn=Databases,cn=Monitor
7256    subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7257    hasSubordinates: FALSE
7258 </PRE>
7259 <H3><A NAME="Listener">19.4.4. Listener</A></H3>
7260 <P>It contains the description of the devices the server is currently listening on:</P>
7261 <PRE>
7262    dn: cn=Listener 0,cn=Listeners,cn=Monitor
7263    structuralObjectClass: monitoredObject
7264    monitorConnectionLocalAddress: IP=0.0.0.0:389
7265    entryDN: cn=Listener 0,cn=Listeners,cn=Monitor
7266    subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7267    hasSubordinates: FALSE
7268 </PRE>
7269 <H3><A NAME="Log">19.4.5. Log</A></H3>
7270 <P>It contains the currently active log items.  The <EM>Log</EM> subsystem allows user modify operations on the <EM>description</EM> attribute, whose values <EM>MUST</EM> be in the list of admittable log switches:</P>
7271 <PRE>
7272    Trace
7273    Packets
7274    Args
7275    Conns
7276    BER
7277    Filter
7278    Config
7279    ACL
7280    Stats
7281    Stats2
7282    Shell
7283    Parse
7284    Sync
7285 </PRE>
7286 <P>These values can be added, replaced or deleted; they affect what messages are sent to the syslog device. Custom values could be added by custom modules.</P>
7287 <H3><A NAME="Operations">19.4.6. Operations</A></H3>
7288 <P>It shows some statistics on the operations performed by the server:</P>
7289 <PRE>
7290    Initiated
7291    Completed
7292 </PRE>
7293 <P>and for each operation type, i.e.:</P>
7294 <PRE>
7295    Bind
7296    Unbind
7297    Add
7298    Delete
7299    Modrdn
7300    Modify
7301    Compare
7302    Search
7303    Abandon
7304    Extended
7305 </PRE>
7306 <P>There are too many types to list example here, so please try for yourself using <A HREF="#Monitor search example">Monitor search example</A></P>
7307 <H3><A NAME="Overlays">19.4.7. Overlays</A></H3>
7308 <P>The main entry contains the type of overlays available at run-time; the child entries, for each overlay, contain the type of the overlay.</P>
7309 <P>It should also contain the modules that have been loaded if dynamic overlays are enabled:</P>
7310 <PRE>
7311    # Overlays, Monitor
7312    dn: cn=Overlays,cn=Monitor
7313    structuralObjectClass: monitorContainer
7314    monitoredInfo: syncprov
7315    monitoredInfo: accesslog
7316    monitoredInfo: glue
7317    entryDN: cn=Overlays,cn=Monitor
7318    subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7319    hasSubordinates: TRUE
7320 </PRE>
7321 <H3><A NAME="SASL">19.4.8. SASL</A></H3>
7322 <P>Currently empty.</P>
7323 <H3><A NAME="Statistics">19.4.9. Statistics</A></H3>
7324 <P>It shows some statistics on the data sent by the server:</P>
7325 <PRE>
7326    Bytes
7327    PDU
7328    Entries
7329    Referrals
7330 </PRE>
7331 <P>e.g.</P>
7332 <PRE>
7333    # Entries, Statistics, Monitor
7334    dn: cn=Entries,cn=Statistics,cn=Monitor
7335    structuralObjectClass: monitorCounterObject
7336    monitorCounter: 612248
7337    entryDN: cn=Entries,cn=Statistics,cn=Monitor
7338    subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7339    hasSubordinates: FALSE
7340 </PRE>
7341 <H3><A NAME="Threads">19.4.10. Threads</A></H3>
7342 <P>It contains the maximum number of threads enabled at startup and the current backload.</P>
7343 <P>e.g.</P>
7344 <PRE>
7345    # Max, Threads, Monitor
7346    dn: cn=Max,cn=Threads,cn=Monitor
7347    structuralObjectClass: monitoredObject
7348    monitoredInfo: 16
7349    entryDN: cn=Max,cn=Threads,cn=Monitor
7350    subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7351    hasSubordinates: FALSE
7352 </PRE>
7353 <H3><A NAME="Time">19.4.11. Time</A></H3>
7354 <P>It contains two child entries with the start time and the current time of the server.</P>
7355 <P>e.g.</P>
7356 <P>Start time:</P>
7357 <PRE>
7358    dn: cn=Start,cn=Time,cn=Monitor
7359    structuralObjectClass: monitoredObject
7360    monitorTimestamp: 20061205124040Z
7361    entryDN: cn=Start,cn=Time,cn=Monitor
7362    subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7363    hasSubordinates: FALSE
7364 </PRE>
7365 <P>Current time:</P>
7366 <PRE>
7367    dn: cn=Current,cn=Time,cn=Monitor
7368    structuralObjectClass: monitoredObject
7369    monitorTimestamp: 20061207120624Z
7370    entryDN: cn=Current,cn=Time,cn=Monitor
7371    subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7372    hasSubordinates: FALSE
7373 </PRE>
7374 <H3><A NAME="TLS">19.4.12. TLS</A></H3>
7375 <P>Currently empty.</P>
7376 <H3><A NAME="Waiters">19.4.13. Waiters</A></H3>
7377 <P>It contains the number of current read waiters.</P>
7378 <P>e.g.</P>
7379 <P>Read waiters:</P>
7380 <PRE>
7381    dn: cn=Read,cn=Waiters,cn=Monitor
7382    structuralObjectClass: monitorCounterObject
7383    monitorCounter: 7
7384    entryDN: cn=Read,cn=Waiters,cn=Monitor
7385    subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7386    hasSubordinates: FALSE
7387 </PRE>
7388 <P>Write waiters:</P>
7389 <PRE>
7390    dn: cn=Write,cn=Waiters,cn=Monitor
7391    structuralObjectClass: monitorCounterObject
7392    monitorCounter: 0
7393    entryDN: cn=Write,cn=Waiters,cn=Monitor
7394    subschemaSubentry: cn=Subschema
7395    hasSubordinates: FALSE
7396 </PRE>
7397 <P>Add new monitored things here and discuss, referencing man pages and present examples</P>
7398 <P></P>
7399 <HR>
7400 <H1><A NAME="Tuning">20. Tuning</A></H1>
7401 <P>This is perhaps one of the most important chapters in the guide, because if you have not tuned <EM>slapd</EM>(8) correctly or grasped how to design your directory and environment, you can expect very poor performance.</P>
7402 <P>Reading, understanding and experimenting using the instructions and information in the following sections, will enable you to fully understand how to tailor your directory server to your specific requirements.</P>
7403 <P>It should be noted that the following information has been collected over time from our community based FAQ. So obviously the benefit of this real world experience and advice should be of great value to the reader.</P>
7404 <H2><A NAME="Performance Factors">20.1. Performance Factors</A></H2>
7405 <P>Various factors can play a part in how your directory performs on your chosen hardware and environment. We will attempt to discuss these here.</P>
7406 <H3><A NAME="Memory">20.1.1. Memory</A></H3>
7407 <P>Scale your cache to use available memory and increase system memory if you can.</P>
7408 <P>See <A HREF="#Caching">Caching</A></P>
7409 <H3><A NAME="Disks">20.1.2. Disks</A></H3>
7410 <P>Use fast subsystems. Put each database and logs on separate disks configurable via <EM>DB_CONFIG</EM>:</P>
7411 <PRE>
7412        # Data Directory
7413        set_data_dir /data/db
7414
7415        # Transaction Log settings
7416        set_lg_dir /logs
7417 </PRE>
7418 <H3><A NAME="Network Topology">20.1.3. Network Topology</A></H3>
7419 <P>http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/363.html</P>
7420 <P>Drawing here.</P>
7421 <H3><A NAME="Directory Layout Design">20.1.4. Directory Layout Design</A></H3>
7422 <P>Reference to other sections and good/bad drawing here.</P>
7423 <H3><A NAME="Expected Usage">20.1.5. Expected Usage</A></H3>
7424 <P>Discussion.</P>
7425 <H2><A NAME="Indexes">20.2. Indexes</A></H2>
7426 <H3><A NAME="Understanding how a search works">20.2.1. Understanding how a search works</A></H3>
7427 <P>If you're searching on a filter that has been indexed, then the search reads the index and pulls exactly the entries that are referenced by the index. If the filter term has not been indexed, then the search must read every single entry in the target scope and test to see if each entry matches the filter. Obviously indexing can save a lot of work when it's used correctly.</P>
7428 <H3><A NAME="What to index">20.2.2. What to index</A></H3>
7429 <P>You should create indices to match the actual filter terms used in search queries.</P>
7430 <PRE>
7431         index cn,sn,givenname,mail eq
7432 </PRE>
7433 <P>Each attribute index can be tuned further by selecting the set of index types to generate. For example, substring and approximate search for organizations (o) may make little sense (and isn't like done very often). And searching for <EM>userPassword</EM> likely makes no sense what so ever.</P>
7434 <P>General rule: don't go overboard with indexes. Unused indexes must be maintained and hence can only slow things down.</P>
7435 <P>See <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(8) and <EM>slapdindex</EM>(8) for more information</P>
7436 <H3><A NAME="Presence indexing">20.2.3. Presence indexing</A></H3>
7437 <P>If your client application uses presence filters and if the target attribute exists on the majority of entries in your target scope, then all of those entries are going to be read anyway, because they are valid members of the result set. In a subtree where 100% of the entries are going to contain the same attributes, the presence index does absolutely NOTHING to benefit the search, because 100% of the entries match that presence filter.</P>
7438 <P>So the resource cost of generating the index is a complete waste of CPU time, disk, and memory. Don't do it unless you know that it will be used, and that the attribute in question occurs very infrequently in the target data.</P>
7439 <P>Almost no applications use presence filters in their search queries. Presence indexing is pointless when the target attribute exists on the majority of entries in the database. In most LDAP deployments, presence indexing should not be done, it's just wasted overhead.</P>
7440 <P>See the <EM>Logging</EM> section below on what to watch our for if you have a frequently searched for attribute that is unindexed.</P>
7441 <H2><A NAME="Logging">20.3. Logging</A></H2>
7442 <H3><A NAME="What log level to use">20.3.1. What log level to use</A></H3>
7443 <P>The default of <EM>loglevel stats</EM> (256) is really the best bet. There's a corollary to this when problems *do* arise, don't try to trace them using syslog. Use the debug flag instead, and capture slapd's stderr output. syslog is too slow for debug tracing, and it's inherently lossy - it will throw away messages when it can't keep up.</P>
7444 <P>Contrary to popular belief, <EM>loglevel 0</EM> is not ideal for production as you won't be able to track when problems first arise.</P>
7445 <H3><A NAME="What to watch out for">20.3.2. What to watch out for</A></H3>
7446 <P>The most common message you'll see that you should pay attention to is:</P>
7447 <PRE>
7448        &quot;&lt;= bdb_equality_candidates: (foo) index_param failed (18)&quot;
7449 </PRE>
7450 <P>That means that some application tried to use an equality filter (<EM>foo=&lt;somevalue&gt;</EM>) and attribute <EM>foo</EM> does not have an equality index. If you see a lot of these messages, you should add the index. If you see one every month or so, it may be acceptable to ignore it.</P>
7451 <P>The default syslog level is stats (256) which logs the basic parameters of each request; it usually produces 1-3 lines of output. On Solaris and systems that only provide synchronous syslog, you may want to turn it off completely, but usually you want to leave it enabled so that you'll be able to see index messages whenever they arise. On Linux you can configure syslogd to run asynchronously, in which case the performance hit for moderate syslog traffic pretty much disappears.</P>
7452 <H3><A NAME="Improving throughput">20.3.3. Improving throughput</A></H3>
7453 <P>You can improve logging performance on some systems by configuring syslog not to sync the file system with every write (<EM>man syslogd/syslog.conf</EM>). In Linux, you can prepend the log file name with a &quot;-&quot; in <EM>syslog.conf</EM>. For example, if you are using the default LOCAL4 logging you could try:</P>
7454 <PRE>
7455        # LDAP logs
7456        LOCAL4.*         -/var/log/ldap
7457 </PRE>
7458 <P>For syslog-ng, add or modify the following line in <EM>syslog-ng.conf</EM>:</P>
7459 <PRE>
7460        options { sync(n); };
7461 </PRE>
7462 <P>where n is the number of lines which will be buffered before a write.</P>
7463 <H2><A NAME="Caching">20.4. Caching</A></H2>
7464 <P>We all know what caching is, don't we?</P>
7465 <P>In brief, &quot;A cache is a block of memory for temporary storage of data likely to be used again&quot; - <A HREF="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cache">http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cache</A></P>
7466 <P>There are 3 types of caches, BerkeleyDB's own cache, <EM>slapd</EM>(8) entry cache and <TERM>IDL</TERM> (IDL) cache.</P>
7467 <H3><A NAME="Berkeley DB Cache">20.4.1. Berkeley DB Cache</A></H3>
7468 <P>There are two ways to tune for the BDB cachesize:</P>
7469 <P>(a) BDB cache size necessary to load the database via slapadd in optimal time</P>
7470 <P>(b) BDB cache size necessary to have a high performing running slapd once the data is loaded</P>
7471 <P>For (a), the optimal cachesize is the size of the entire database.  If you already have the database loaded, this is simply a</P>
7472 <PRE>
7473        du -c -h *.bdb
7474 </PRE>
7475 <P>in the directory containing the OpenLDAP (<EM>/usr/local/var/openldap-data</EM>) data.</P>
7476 <P>For (b), the optimal cachesize is just the size of the <EM>id2entry.bdb</EM> file, plus about 10% for growth.</P>
7477 <P>The tuning of <EM>DB_CONFIG</EM> should be done for each BDB type database instantiated (back-bdb, back-hdb).</P>
7478 <P>Note that while the <TERM>BDB</TERM> cache is just raw chunks of memory and configured as a memory size, the <EM>slapd</EM>(8) entry cache holds parsed entries, and the size of each entry is variable.</P>
7479 <P>There is also an IDL cache which is used for Index Data Lookups. If you can fit all of your database into slapd's entry cache, and all of your index lookups fit in the IDL cache, that will provide the maximum throughput.</P>
7480 <P>If not, but you can fit the entire database into the BDB cache, then you should do that and shrink the slapd entry cache as appropriate.</P>
7481 <P>Failing that, you should balance the BDB cache against the entry cache.</P>
7482 <P>It is worth noting that it is not absolutely necessary to configure a BerkeleyDB cache equal in size to your entire database. All that you need is a cache that's large enough for your &quot;working set.&quot;</P>
7483 <P>That means, large enough to hold all of the most frequently accessed data, plus a few less-frequently accessed items.</P>
7484 <P>For more information, please see: <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/am_conf/cachesize.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/ref/am_conf/cachesize.html</A></P>
7485 <H4><A NAME="Calculating Cachesize">20.4.1.1. Calculating Cachesize</A></H4>
7486 <P>The back-bdb database lives in two main files, <TT>dn2id.bdb</TT> and <TT>id2entry.bdb</TT>. These are B-tree databases. We have never documented the back-bdb internal layout before, because it didn't seem like something anyone should have to worry about, nor was it necessarily cast in stone. But here's how it works today, in OpenLDAP 2.4.</P>
7487 <P>A B-tree is a balanced tree; it stores data in its leaf nodes and bookkeeping data in its interior nodes (If you don't know what tree data structures look like in general, Google for some references, because that's getting far too elementary for the purposes of this discussion).</P>
7488 <P>For decent performance, you need enough cache memory to contain all the nodes along the path from the root of the tree down to the particular data item you're accessing. That's enough cache for a single search. For the general case, you want enough cache to contain all the internal nodes in the database.</P>
7489 <PRE>
7490        db_stat -d
7491 </PRE>
7492 <P>will tell you how many internal pages are present in a database. You should check this number for both dn2id and id2entry.</P>
7493 <P>Also note that <EM>id2entry</EM> always uses 16KB per &quot;page&quot;, while <EM>dn2id</EM> uses whatever the underlying filesystem uses, typically 4 or 8KB. To avoid thrashing the, your cache must be at least as large as the number of internal pages in both the <EM>dn2id</EM> and <EM>id2entry</EM> databases, plus some extra space to accommodate the actual leaf data pages.</P>
7494 <P>For example, in my OpenLDAP 2.4 test database, I have an input LDIF file that's about 360MB. With the back-hdb backend this creates a <EM>dn2id.bdb</EM> that's 68MB, and an <EM>id2entry</EM> that's 800MB. db_stat tells me that <EM>dn2id</EM> uses 4KB pages, has 433 internal pages, and 6378 leaf pages. The id2entry uses 16KB pages, has 52 internal pages, and 45912 leaf pages. In order to efficiently retrieve any single entry in this database, the cache should be at least</P>
7495 <PRE>
7496        (433+1) * 4KB + (52+1) * 16KB in size: 1736KB + 848KB =~ 2.5MB.
7497 </PRE>
7498 <P>This doesn't take into account other library overhead, so this is even lower than the barest minimum. The default cache size, when nothing is configured, is only 256KB.</P>
7499 <P>This 2.5MB number also doesn't take indexing into account. Each indexed attribute uses another database file of its own, using a Hash structure.</P>
7500 <P>Unlike the B-trees, where you only need to touch one data page to find an entry of interest, doing an index lookup generally touches multiple keys, and the point of a hash structure is that the keys are evenly distributed across the data space. That means there's no convenient compact subset of the database that you can keep in the cache to insure quick operation, you can pretty much expect references to be scattered across the whole thing. My strategy here would be to provide enough cache for at least 50% of all of the hash data.</P>
7501 <PRE>
7502    (Number of hash buckets + number of overflow pages + number of duplicate pages) * page size / 2.
7503 </PRE>
7504 <P>The objectClass index for my example database is 5.9MB and uses 3 hash buckets and 656 duplicate pages. So:</P>
7505 <PRE>
7506    ( 3 + 656 ) * 4KB / 2 =~ 1.3MB.
7507 </PRE>
7508 <P>With only this index enabled, I'd figure at least a 4MB cache for this backend. (Of course you're using a single cache shared among all of the database files, so the cache pages will most likely get used for something other than what you accounted for, but this gives you a fighting chance.)</P>
7509 <P>With this 4MB cache I can slapcat this entire database on my 1.3GHz PIII in 1 minute, 40 seconds. With the cache doubled to 8MB, it still takes the same 1:40s. Once you've got enough cache to fit the B-tree internal pages, increasing it further won't have any effect until the cache really is large enough to hold 100% of the data pages. I don't have enough free RAM to hold all the 800MB id2entry data, so 4MB is good enough.</P>
7510 <P>With back-bdb and back-hdb you can use &quot;db_stat -m&quot; to check how well the database cache is performing.</P>
7511 <P>For more information on <EM>db_stat</EM>: <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/utility/db_stat.html">http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/utility/db_stat.html</A></P>
7512 <H3><A NAME="{{slapd}}(8) Entry Cache (cachesize)">20.4.2. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) Entry Cache (cachesize)</A></H3>
7513 <P>The <EM>slapd</EM>(8) entry cache operates on decoded entries. The rationale - entries in the entry cache can be used directly, giving the fastest response. If an entry isn't in the entry cache but can be extracted from the BDB page cache, that will avoid an I/O but it will still require parsing, so this will be slower.</P>
7514 <P>If the entry is in neither cache then BDB will have to flush some of its current cached pages and bring in the needed pages, resulting in a couple of expensive I/Os as well as parsing.</P>
7515 <P>The most optimal value is of course, the entire number of entries in the database. However, most directory servers don't consistently serve out their entire database, so setting this to a lesser number that more closely matches the believed working set of data is sufficient. This is the second most important parameter for the DB.</P>
7516 <P>As far as balancing the entry cache vs the BDB cache - parsed entries in memory are generally about twice as large as they are on disk.</P>
7517 <P>As we have already mentioned, not having a proper database cache size will cause performance issues. These issues are not an indication of corruption occurring in the database. It is merely the fact that the cache is thrashing itself that causes performance/response time to slowdown.</P>
7518 <H3><A NAME="{{TERM:IDL}} Cache (idlcachesize)">20.4.3. <TERM>IDL</TERM> Cache (idlcachesize)</A></H3>
7519 <P>Each IDL holds the search results from a given query, so the IDL cache will end up holding the most frequently requested search results.  For back-bdb, it is generally recommended to match the &quot;cachesize&quot; setting.  For back-hdb, it is generally recommended to be 3x&quot;cachesize&quot;.</P>
7520 <P>{NOTE: The idlcachesize setting directly affects search performance}</P>
7521 <H3><A NAME="{{slapd}}(8) Threads">20.4.4. <EM>slapd</EM>(8) Threads</A></H3>
7522 <P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) can process requests via a configurable number of thread, which in turn affects the in/out rate of connections.</P>
7523 <P>This value should generally be a function of the number of &quot;real&quot; cores on the system, for example on a server with 2 CPUs with one core each, set this to 8, or 4 threads per real core.  This is a &quot;read&quot; maximized value. The more threads that are configured per core, the slower <EM>slapd</EM>(8) responds for &quot;read&quot; operations.  On the flip side, it appears to handle write operations faster in a heavy write/low read scenario.</P>
7524 <P>The upper bound for good read performance appears to be 16 threads (which also happens to be the default setting).</P>
7525 <P></P>
7526 <HR>
7527 <H1><A NAME="Troubleshooting">21. Troubleshooting</A></H1>
7528 <P>If you're having trouble using OpenLDAP, get onto the OpenLDAP-Software mailing list, or:</P>
7529 <UL>
7530 <LI>Browse the list archives at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/lists/#archives">http://www.openldap.org/lists/#archives</A>
7531 <LI>Search the FAQ at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/">http://www.openldap.org/faq/</A>
7532 <LI>Search the Issue Tracking System at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">http://www.openldap.org/its/</A></UL>
7533 <P>Chances are the problem has been solved and explained in detail many times before.</P>
7534 <H2><A NAME="User or Software errors">21.1. User or Software errors?</A></H2>
7535 <P>More often than not, an error is caused by a configuration problem or a misunderstanding of what you are trying to implement and/or achieve.</P>
7536 <P>We will now attempt to discuss common user errors.</P>
7537 <H2><A NAME="Checklist">21.2. Checklist</A></H2>
7538 <P>The following checklist can help track down your problem. Please try to use if <B>before</B> posting to the list, or in the rare circumstances of reporting a bug.</P>
7539 <UL>
7540 &nbsp;</UL><OL>
7541 <LI><B>Use the <EM>slaptest</EM> tool to verify configurations before starting <EM>slapd</EM></B>
7542 <BR>
7543 &nbsp;
7544 <LI><B>Verify that <EM>slapd</EM> is listening to the specified port(s) (389 and 636, generally) before trying the <EM>ldapsearch</EM></B>
7545 <BR>
7546 &nbsp;
7547 <LI><B>Can you issue an <EM>ldapsearch</EM>?</B>
7548 <BR>
7549 &nbsp;
7550 <LI><B>If not, have you enabled complex ACLs without fully understanding them?</B>
7551 <BR>
7552 &nbsp;
7553 <LI><B>Do you have a system wide LDAP setting pointing to the wrong LDAP Directory?</B>
7554 <BR>
7555 &nbsp;
7556 <LI><B>Are you using TLS?</B>
7557 <BR>
7558 &nbsp;
7559 <LI><B>Have your certificates expired?</B></OL>
7560 <H2><A NAME="OpenLDAP Bugs">21.3. OpenLDAP Bugs</A></H2>
7561 <P>Sometimes you may encounter an actual OpenLDAP bug, in which case please visit our Issue Tracking system <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">http://www.openldap.org/its/</A> and report it. However, make sure it's not already a known bug or a common user problem.</P>
7562 <UL>
7563 <LI>bugs in historic versions of OpenLDAP will not be considered;
7564 <LI>bugs in released versions that are no longer present in HEAD code, either because they have been fixed or because they no longer apply, will not be considered as well;
7565 <LI>bugs in distributions of OpenLDAP software that are not related to the software as provided by OpenLDAP will not be considered; in those cases please refer to the distributor.</UL>
7566 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7567 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>Our Issue Tracking system is <B>NOT</B> for OpenLDAP <B>Support</B>, please join our mailing Lists: <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/lists/">http://www.openldap.org/lists/</A> for that.
7568 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7569 <P>The information you should provide in your bug report is discussed in our FAQ-O-MATIC at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/59.html">http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/59.html</A></P>
7570 <H2><A NAME="3rd party software error">21.4. 3rd party software error</A></H2>
7571 <P>The OpenLDAP Project only supports OpenLDAP software.</P>
7572 <P>You may however seek commercial support (<A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/support/">http://www.openldap.org/support/</A>) or join the general LDAP forum for non-commercial discussions and information relating to LDAP at: <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/mailinglist.html">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/mailinglist.html</A></P>
7573 <H2><A NAME="How to contact the OpenLDAP Project">21.5. How to contact the OpenLDAP Project</A></H2>
7574 <UL>
7575 <LI>Mailing Lists: <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/lists/">http://www.openldap.org/lists/</A>
7576 <LI>Project: <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/project/">http://www.openldap.org/project/</A>
7577 <LI>Issue Tracking: <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">http://www.openldap.org/its/</A></UL>
7578 <H2><A NAME="How to present your problem">21.6. How to present your problem</A></H2>
7579 <H2><A NAME="Debugging {{slapd}}(8)">21.7. Debugging <EM>slapd</EM>(8)</A></H2>
7580 <P>After reading through the above sections and before e-mailing the OpenLDAP lists, you might want to try out some of the following to track down the cause of your problems:</P>
7581 <UL>
7582 <LI>Loglevel stats (256) is generally a good first loglevel to try for getting information useful to list members on issues
7583 <LI>Running <EM>slapd -d -1</EM> can often track down fairly simple issues, such as missing schemas and incorrect file permissions for the <EM>slapd</EM> user to things like certs
7584 <LI>Check your logs for errors, as discussed at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/358.html">http://www.openldap.org/faq/data/cache/358.html</A></UL>
7585 <H2><A NAME="Commercial Support">21.8. Commercial Support</A></H2>
7586 <P>The firms listed at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/support/">http://www.openldap.org/support/</A> offer technical support services catering to OpenLDAP community.</P>
7587 <P>The listing of any given firm should not be viewed as an endorsement or recommendation of any kind, nor as otherwise indicating there exists a business relationship or an affiliation between any listed firm and the OpenLDAP Foundation or the OpenLDAP Project or its contributors.</P>
7588 <P></P>
7589 <HR>
7590 <H1><A NAME="Changes Since Previous Release">A. Changes Since Previous Release</A></H1>
7591 <P>The following sections attempt to summarize the new features and changes in OpenLDAP software since the 2.3.x release and the OpenLDAP Admin Guide.</P>
7592 <H2><A NAME="New Guide Sections">A.1. New Guide Sections</A></H2>
7593 <P>In order to make the Admin Guide more thorough and cover the majority of questions asked on the OpenLDAP mailing lists and scenarios discussed there, we have added the following new sections:</P>
7594 <UL>
7595 <LI><A HREF="#When should I use LDAP">When should I use LDAP?</A>
7596 <LI><A HREF="#When should I not use LDAP">When should I not use LDAP?</A>
7597 <LI><A HREF="#LDAP vs RDBMS">LDAP vs RDBMS</A>
7598 <LI><A HREF="#Access Control">Access Control</A>
7599 <LI><A HREF="#Backends">Backends</A>
7600 <LI><A HREF="#Overlays">Overlays</A>
7601 <LI><A HREF="#Replication">Replication</A>
7602 <LI><A HREF="#Maintenance">Maintenance</A>
7603 <LI><A HREF="#Monitoring">Monitoring</A>
7604 <LI><A HREF="#Tuning">Tuning</A>
7605 <LI><A HREF="#Troubleshooting">Troubleshooting</A>
7606 <LI><A HREF="#Changes Since Previous Release">Changes Since Previous Release</A>
7607 <LI><A HREF="#Upgrading from 2.3.x">Upgrading from 2.3.x</A>
7608 <LI><A HREF="#Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software">Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software</A>
7609 <LI><A HREF="#Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions">Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions</A>
7610 <LI><A HREF="#Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples">Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples</A>
7611 <LI><A HREF="#OpenLDAP Software Contributions">OpenLDAP Software Contributions</A>
7612 <LI><A HREF="#Configuration File Examples">Configuration File Examples</A>
7613 <LI><A HREF="#LDAP Result Codes">LDAP Result Codes</A>
7614 <LI><A HREF="#Glossary">Glossary</A></UL>
7615 <P>Also, the table of contents is now 3 levels deep to ease navigation.</P>
7616 <H2><A NAME="New Features and Enhancements in 2.4">A.2. New Features and Enhancements in 2.4</A></H2>
7617 <H3><A NAME="Better {{B:cn=config}} functionality">A.2.1. Better <B>cn=config</B> functionality</A></H3>
7618 <P>There is a new slapd-config(5) manpage for the <B>cn=config</B> backend. The original design called for auto-renaming of config entries when you insert or delete entries with ordered names, but that was not implemented in 2.3. It is now in 2.4. This means, e.g., if you have</P>
7619 <PRE>
7620    olcDatabase={1}bdb,cn=config
7621    olcSuffix: dc=example,dc=com
7622 </PRE>
7623 <P>and you want to add a new subordinate, now you can ldapadd:</P>
7624 <PRE>
7625    olcDatabase={1}bdb,cn=config
7626    olcSuffix: dc=foo,dc=example,dc=com
7627 </PRE>
7628 <P>This will insert a new BDB database in slot 1 and bump all following databases down one, so the original BDB database will now be named:</P>
7629 <PRE>
7630    olcDatabase={2}bdb,cn=config
7631    olcSuffix: dc=example,dc=com
7632 </PRE>
7633 <H3><A NAME="Better {{B:cn=schema}} functionality">A.2.2. Better <B>cn=schema</B> functionality</A></H3>
7634 <P>In 2.3 you were only able to add new schema elements, not delete or modify existing elements. In 2.4 you can modify schema at will. (Except for the hardcoded system schema, of course.)</P>
7635 <H3><A NAME="More sophisticated Syncrepl configurations">A.2.3. More sophisticated Syncrepl configurations</A></H3>
7636 <P>The original implementation of Syncrepl in OpenLDAP 2.2 was intended to support multiple consumers within the same database, but that feature never worked and was removed from OpenLDAP 2.3; you could only configure a single consumer in any database.</P>
7637 <P>In 2.4 you can configure multiple consumers in a single database. The configuration possibilities here are quite complex and numerous. You can configure consumers over arbitrary subtrees of a database (disjoint or overlapping). Any portion of the database may in turn be provided to other consumers using the Syncprov overlay. The Syncprov overlay works with any number of consumers over a single database or over arbitrarily many glued databases.</P>
7638 <H3><A NAME="N-Way Multimaster Replication">A.2.4. N-Way Multimaster Replication</A></H3>
7639 <P>As a consequence of the work to support multiple consumer contexts, the syncrepl system now supports full N-Way multimaster replication with entry-level conflict resolution. There are some important constraints, of course: In order to maintain consistent results across all servers, you must maintain tightly synchronized clocks across all participating servers (e.g., you must use NTP on all servers).</P>
7640 <P>The entryCSNs used for replication now record timestamps with microsecond resolution, instead of just seconds. The delta-syncrepl code has not been updated to support multimaster usage yet, that will come later in the 2.4 cycle.</P>
7641 <H3><A NAME="Replicating {{slapd}} Configuration (syncrepl and {{B:cn=config}})">A.2.5. Replicating <EM>slapd</EM> Configuration (syncrepl and <B>cn=config</B>)</A></H3>
7642 <P>Syncrepl was explicitly disabled on cn=config in 2.3. It is now fully supported in 2.4; you can use syncrepl to replicate an entire server configuration from one server to arbitrarily many other servers. It's possible to clone an entire running slapd using just a small (less than 10 lines) seed configuration, or you can just replicate the schema subtrees, etc. Tests 049 and 050 in the test suite provide working examples of these capabilities.</P>
7643 <H3><A NAME="Push-Mode Replication">A.2.6. Push-Mode Replication</A></H3>
7644 <P>In 2.3 you could configure syncrepl as a full push-mode replicator by using it in conjunction with a back-ldap pointed at the target server. But because the back-ldap database needs to have a suffix corresponding to the target's suffix, you could only configure one instance per slapd.</P>
7645 <P>In 2.4 you can define a database to be &quot;hidden&quot;, which means that its suffix is ignored when checking for name collisions, and the database will never be used to answer requests received by the frontend. Using this &quot;hidden&quot; database feature allows you to configure multiple databases with the same suffix, allowing you to set up multiple back-ldap instances for pushing replication of a single database to multiple targets. There may be other uses for hidden databases as well (e.g., using a syncrepl consumer to maintain a *local* mirror of a database on a separate filesystem).</P>
7646 <H3><A NAME="More extensive TLS configuration control">A.2.7. More extensive TLS configuration control</A></H3>
7647 <P>In 2.3, the TLS configuration in slapd was only used by the slapd listeners. For outbound connections used by e.g. back-ldap or syncrepl their TLS parameters came from the system's ldap.conf file.</P>
7648 <P>In 2.4 all of these sessions inherit their settings from the main slapd configuration, but settings can be individually overridden on a per-config-item basis. This is particularly helpful if you use certificate-based authentication and need to use a different client certificate for different destinations.</P>
7649 <H3><A NAME="Performance enhancements">A.2.8. Performance enhancements</A></H3>
7650 <P>Too many to list. Some notable changes - ldapadd used to be a couple of orders of magnitude slower than &quot;slapadd -q&quot;. It's now at worst only about half the speed of slapadd -q. Some comparisons of all the 2.x OpenLDAP releases are available at <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/pub/hyc/scale2007.pdf">http://www.openldap.org/pub/hyc/scale2007.pdf</A></P>
7651 <P>That compared 2.0.27, 2.1.30, 2.2.30, 2.3.33, and HEAD). Toward the latter end of the &quot;Cached Search Performance&quot; chart it gets hard to see the difference because the run times are so small, but the new code is about 25% faster than 2.3, which was about 20% faster than 2.2, which was about 100% faster than 2.1, which was about 100% faster than 2.0, in that particular search scenario. That test basically searched a 1.3GB DB of 380836 entries (all in the slapd entry cache) in under 1 second. i.e., on a 2.4GHz CPU with DDR400 ECC/Registered RAM we can search over 500 thousand entries per second. The search was on an unindexed attribute using a filter that would not match any entry, forcing slapd to examine every entry in the DB, testing the filter for a match.</P>
7652 <P>Essentially the slapd entry cache in back-bdb/back-hdb is so efficient the search processing time is almost invisible; the runtime is limited only by the memory bandwidth of the machine. (The search data rate corresponds to about 3.5GB/sec; the memory bandwidth on the machine is only about 4GB/sec due to ECC and register latency.)</P>
7653 <H3><A NAME="New overlays">A.2.9. New overlays</A></H3>
7654 <UL>
7655 <LI>slapo-constraint (Attribute value constraints)
7656 <LI>slapo-dds (Dynamic Directory Services, RFC 2589)
7657 <LI>slapo-memberof (reverse group membership maintenance)</UL>
7658 <H3><A NAME="New features in existing Overlays">A.2.10. New features in existing Overlays</A></H3>
7659 <UL>
7660 <LI>slapo-pcache<UL>
7661 <LI>Inspection/Maintenance<UL>
7662 <LI>the cache database can be directly accessed via LDAP by adding a specific control to each LDAP request; a specific extended operation allows to consistently remove cached entries and entire cached queries</UL>
7663 <LI>Hot Restart<UL>
7664 <LI>cached queries are saved on disk at shutdown, and reloaded if not expired yet at subsequent restart</UL></UL>
7665 <LI>slapo-rwm can safely interoperate with other overlays
7666 <LI>Dyngroup/Dynlist merge, plus security enhancements<UL>
7667 <LI>added dgIdentity support (draft-haripriya-dynamicgroup)</UL></UL>
7668 <H3><A NAME="New features in slapd">A.2.11. New features in slapd</A></H3>
7669 <UL>
7670 <LI>monitoring of back-{b,h}db: cache fill-in, non-indexed searches,
7671 <LI>session tracking control (draft-wahl-ldap-session)
7672 <LI>subtree delete in back-sql (draft-armijo-ldap-treedelete)
7673 <LI>sorted values in multivalued attributes for faster matching
7674 <LI>lightweight dispatcher for greater throughput under heavy load and on multiprocessor machines. (33% faster than 2.3 on AMD quad-socket dual-core server.)</UL>
7675 <H3><A NAME="New features in libldap">A.2.12. New features in libldap</A></H3>
7676 <UL>
7677 <LI>ldap_sync client API (LDAP Content Sync Operation, RFC 4533)</UL>
7678 <H3><A NAME="New clients, tools and tool enhancements">A.2.13. New clients, tools and tool enhancements</A></H3>
7679 <UL>
7680 <LI>ldapexop for arbitrary extended operations
7681 <LI>Complete support of controls in request/response for all clients
7682 <LI>LDAP Client tools now honor SRV records</UL>
7683 <H3><A NAME="New build options">A.2.14. New build options</A></H3>
7684 <UL>
7685 <LI>Support for building against GnuTLS</UL>
7686 <H2><A NAME="Obsolete Features Removed From 2.4">A.3. Obsolete Features Removed From 2.4</A></H2>
7687 <P>These features were strongly deprecated in 2.3 and removed in 2.4.</P>
7688 <H3><A NAME="Slurpd">A.3.1. Slurpd</A></H3>
7689 <P>Please read the <A HREF="#Replication">Replication</A> section as to why this is no longer in OpenLDAP</P>
7690 <H3><A NAME="back-ldbm">A.3.2. back-ldbm</A></H3>
7691 <P>back-ldbm was both slow and unreliable. Its byzantine indexing code was prone to spontaneous corruption, as were the underlying database libraries that were commonly used (e.g. GDBM or NDBM). back-bdb and back-hdb are superior in every aspect, with simplified indexing to avoid index corruption, fine-grained locking for greater concurrency, hierarchical caching for greater performance, streamlined on-disk format for greater efficiency and portability, and full transaction support for greater reliability.</P>
7692 <P></P>
7693 <HR>
7694 <H1><A NAME="Upgrading from 2.3.x">B. Upgrading from 2.3.x</A></H1>
7695 <P>The following sections attempt to document the steps you will need to take in order to upgrade from the latest 2.3.x OpenLDAP version.</P>
7696 <P>The normal upgrade procedure, as discussed in the <A HREF="#Maintenance">Maintenance</A> section, should of course still be followed prior to doing any of this.</P>
7697 <H2><A NAME="Monitor Backend">B.1. Monitor Backend</A></H2>
7698 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7699 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>This is a temporary requirement and is subject to change over the next 2.4.x beta release cycle
7700 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7701 <P>A monitor (<EM>slapd-monitor(5)</EM>) now needs a <EM>rootdn</EM> entry. If you do not have one, <EM>slapd</EM> will fail to start up with an error message like so:</P>
7702 <PRE>
7703            monitor_back_register_entry_attrs(&quot;&quot;): base=&quot;cn=databases,cn=monitor&quot; scope=one
7704            filter=&quot;(namingContexts:distinguishedNameMatch:=dc=example,dc=com)&quot;: unable to find entry
7705            backend_startup_one: bi_db_open failed! (1)
7706            slap_startup failed (test would succeed using the -u switch)
7707 </PRE>
7708 <P>Here is a complete <EM>database monitor</EM> example:</P>
7709 <PRE>
7710            database monitor
7711            rootdn cn=monitor
7712            rootpw change_me
7713 </PRE>
7714 <H2><A NAME="{{B:cn=config}} olc* attributes">B.2. <B>cn=config</B> olc* attributes</A></H2>
7715 <P>Quite a few <EM>olc*</EM> attributes have now become obsolete, if you see in your logs entries like below, just remove them from the relevant ldif file.</P>
7716 <PRE>
7717            olcReplicationInterval: value #0: &lt;olcReplicationInterval&gt; keyword is obsolete (ignored)
7718 </PRE>
7719 <H2><A NAME="ACLs: searches require privileges on the search base">B.3. ACLs: searches require privileges on the search base</A></H2>
7720 <P>Search operations now require &quot;search&quot; privileges on the &quot;entry&quot; pseudo-attribute of the search base. While upgrading from 2.3.x, make sure your ACLs grant such privileges to all desired search bases.</P>
7721 <P>For example, assuming you have the following ACL:</P>
7722 <PRE>
7723            access to dn.sub=&quot;ou=people,dc=example,dc=com&quot; by * search
7724 </PRE>
7725 <P>Searches using a base of &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; will only be allowed if you add the following ACL:</P>
7726 <PRE>
7727            access to dn.base=&quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot; attrs=entry by * search
7728 </PRE>
7729 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7730 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The <EM>slapd.access</EM>(5) man page states that this requirement was introduced with OpenLDAP 2.3. However, it is the default behavior only since 2.4.
7731 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7732 <P>ADD MORE HERE</P>
7733 <P></P>
7734 <HR>
7735 <H1><A NAME="Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software">C. Common errors encountered when using OpenLDAP Software</A></H1>
7736 <P>The following sections attempt to summarize the most common causes of LDAP errors when using OpenLDAP</P>
7737 <H2><A NAME="Common causes of LDAP errors">C.1. Common causes of LDAP errors</A></H2>
7738 <H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Can\'t contact LDAP server">C.1.1. ldap_*: Can't contact LDAP server</A></H3>
7739 <P>The {[B:Can't contact LDAP server}} error is usually returned when the LDAP server cannot be contacted. This may occur for many reasons:</P>
7740 <UL>
7741 <LI>the LDAP server is not running; this can be checked by running, for example,</UL>
7742 <PRE>
7743       telnet &lt;host&gt; &lt;port&gt;
7744 </PRE>
7745 <P>replacing <EM>&lt;host&gt;</EM> and <EM>&lt;port&gt;</EM> with the hostname and the port the server is supposed to listen on.</P>
7746 <UL>
7747 <LI>the client has not been instructed to contact a running server; with OpenLDAP command-line tools this is accomplished by providing the -H switch, whose argument is a valid LDAP url corresponding to the interface the server is supposed to be listening on.</UL>
7748 <H3><A NAME="ldap_*: No such object">C.1.2. ldap_*: No such object</A></H3>
7749 <P>The <B>no such object</B> error is generally returned when the target DN of the operation cannot be located. This section details reasons common to all operations. You should also look for answers specific to the operation (as indicated in the error message).</P>
7750 <P>The most common reason for this error is non-existence of the named object. First, check for typos.</P>
7751 <P>Also note that, by default, a new directory server holds no objects (except for a few system entries). So, if you are setting up a new directory server and get this message, it may simply be that you have yet to add the object you are trying to locate.</P>
7752 <P>The error commonly occurs because a DN was not specified and a default was not properly configured.</P>
7753 <P>If you have a suffix specified in slapd.conf eg.</P>
7754 <PRE>
7755       suffix &quot;dc=example,dc=com&quot;
7756 </PRE>
7757 <P>You should use</P>
7758 <PRE>
7759       ldapsearch -b 'dc=example,dc=com' '(cn=jane*)'
7760 </PRE>
7761 <P>to tell it where to start the search.</P>
7762 <P>The <TT>-b</TT> should be specified for all LDAP commands unless you have an <EM>ldap.conf</EM>(5) default configured.</P>
7763 <P>See <EM>ldapsearch</EM>(1), <EM>ldapmodify</EM>(1)</P>
7764 <P>Also, <EM>slapadd</EM>(8) and its ancillary programs are very strict about the syntax of the LDIF file.</P>
7765 <P>Some liberties in the LDIF file may result in an apparently successful creation of the database, but accessing some parts of it may be difficult.</P>
7766 <P>One known common error in database creation is putting a blank line before the first entry in the LDIF file. <B>There must be no leading blank lines in the LDIF file.</B></P>
7767 <P>It is generally recommended that <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1) be used instead of <EM>slapadd</EM>(8) when adding new entries your directory. <EM>slapadd</EM>(8) should be used to bulk load entries known to be valid.</P>
7768 <P>Another cause of this message is a referral ({SECT:Constructing a Distributed Directory Service}}) entry to an unpopulated directory.</P>
7769 <P>Either remove the referral, or add a single record with the referral base DN to the empty directory.</P>
7770 <P>This error may also occur when slapd is unable to access the contents of its database because of file permission problems. For instance, on a Red Hat Linux system, slapd runs as user 'ldap'. When slapadd is run as root to create a database from scratch, the contents of <TT>/var/lib/ldap</TT> are created with user and group root and with permission 600, making the contents inaccessible to the slapd server.</P>
7771 <H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Can\'t chase referral">C.1.3. ldap_*: Can't chase referral</A></H3>
7772 <P>This is caused by the line</P>
7773 <PRE>
7774       referral        ldap://root.openldap.org
7775 </PRE>
7776 <P>In <TT>slapd.conf</TT>, it was provided as an example for how to use referrals in the original file. However if your machine is not permanently connected to the Internet, it will fail to find the server, and hence produce an error message.</P>
7777 <P>To resolve, just place a # in front of line and restart slapd or point it to an available ldap server.</P>
7778 <P>See also: <EM>ldapadd</EM>(1), <EM>ldapmodify</EM>(1) and <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5)</P>
7779 <H3><A NAME="ldap_*: server is unwilling to perform">C.1.4. ldap_*: server is unwilling to perform</A></H3>
7780 <P>slapd will return an unwilling to perform error if the backend holding the target entry does not support the given operation.</P>
7781 <P>The password backend is only willing to perform searches. It will return an unwilling to perform error for all other operations.</P>
7782 <P>The shell backend is configurable and may support a limited subset of operations. Check for other errors indicating a shortage of resources required by the directory server. i.e. you may have a full disk etc</P>
7783 <H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Insufficient access">C.1.5. ldap_*: Insufficient access</A></H3>
7784 <P>This error occurs when server denies the operation due to insufficient access. This is usually caused by binding to a DN with insufficient privileges (or binding anonymously) to perform the operation.</P>
7785 <P>You can bind as the rootdn/rootpw specified in <EM>slapd.conf</EM>(5) to gain full access. Otherwise, you must bind to an entry which has been granted the appropriate rights through access controls.</P>
7786 <H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Invalid DN syntax">C.1.6. ldap_*: Invalid DN syntax</A></H3>
7787 <P>The target (or other) DN of the operation is invalid. This implies that either the string representation of the DN is not in the required form, one of the types in the attribute value assertions is not defined, or one of the values in the attribute value assertions does not conform to the appropriate syntax.</P>
7788 <H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Referral hop limit exceeded">C.1.7. ldap_*: Referral hop limit exceeded</A></H3>
7789 <P>This error generally occurs when the client chases a referral which refers itself back to a server it already contacted. The server responds as it did before and the client loops. This loop is detected when the hop limit is exceeded.</P>
7790 <P>This is most often caused through misconfiguration of the server's default referral. The default referral should not be itself:</P>
7791 <P>That is, on <A HREF="ldap://myldap/">ldap://myldap/</A> the default referral should not be <A HREF="ldap://myldap/">ldap://myldap/</A> (or any hostname/ip which is equivalent to myldap).</P>
7792 <H3><A NAME="ldap_*: operations error">C.1.8. ldap_*: operations error</A></H3>
7793 <P>In some versions of <EM>slapd</EM>(8), <EM>operationsError</EM> was returned instead of other.</P>
7794 <H3><A NAME="ldap_*: other error">C.1.9. ldap_*: other error</A></H3>
7795 <P>The other result code indicates an internal error has occurred. While the additional information provided with the result code might provide some hint as to the problem, often one will need to consult the server's log files.</P>
7796 <H3><A NAME="ldap_add/modify: Invalid syntax">C.1.10. ldap_add/modify: Invalid syntax</A></H3>
7797 <P>This error is reported when a value of an attribute does not conform to syntax restrictions. Additional information is commonly provided stating which value of which attribute was found to be invalid. Double check this value and other values (the server will only report the first error it finds).</P>
7798 <P>Common causes include:</P>
7799 <UL>
7800 <LI>extraneous white space (especially trailing white space)
7801 <LI>improperly encoded characters (LDAPv3 uses UTF-8 encoded Unicode)
7802 <LI>empty values (few syntaxes allow empty values)</UL>
7803 <P>For certain syntax, like OBJECT IDENTIFIER (OID), this error can indicate that the OID descriptor (a &quot;short name&quot;) provided is unrecognized. For instance, this error is returned if the <EM>objectClass</EM> value provided is unrecognized.</P>
7804 <H3><A NAME="ldap_add/modify: Object class violation">C.1.11. ldap_add/modify: Object class violation</A></H3>
7805 <P>This error is returned with the entry to be added or the entry as modified violates the object class schema rules. Normally additional information is returned the error detailing the violation. Some of these are detailed below.</P>
7806 <P>Violations related to the entry's attributes:</P>
7807 <PRE>
7808       Attribute not allowed
7809 </PRE>
7810 <P>A provided attribute is not allowed by the entry's object class(es).</P>
7811 <PRE>
7812       Missing required attribute
7813 </PRE>
7814 <P>An attribute required by the entry's object class(es) was not provided.</P>
7815 <P>Violations related to the entry's class(es):</P>
7816 <PRE>
7817       Entry has no objectClass attribute
7818 </PRE>
7819 <P>The entry did not state which object classes it belonged to.</P>
7820 <PRE>
7821       Unrecognized objectClass
7822 </PRE>
7823 <P>One (or more) of the listed objectClass values is not recognized.</P>
7824 <PRE>
7825       No structural object class provided
7826 </PRE>
7827 <P>None of the listed objectClass values is structural.</P>
7828 <PRE>
7829       Invalid structural object class chain
7830 </PRE>
7831 <P>Two or more structural objectClass values are not in same structural object class chain.</P>
7832 <PRE>
7833       Structural object class modification
7834 </PRE>
7835 <P>Modify operation attempts to change the structural class of the entry.</P>
7836 <PRE>
7837       Instanstantiation of abstract objectClass.
7838 </PRE>
7839 <P>An abstract class is not subordinate to any listed structural or auxiliary class.</P>
7840 <PRE>
7841       Invalid structural object class
7842 </PRE>
7843 <P>Other structural object class problem.</P>
7844 <PRE>
7845       No structuralObjectClass operational attribute
7846 </PRE>
7847 <P>This is commonly returned when a shadow server is provided an entry which does not contain the structuralObjectClass operational attribute.</P>
7848 <P>Note that the above error messages as well as the above answer assumes basic knowledge of LDAP/X.500 schema.</P>
7849 <H3><A NAME="ldap_add: No such object">C.1.12. ldap_add: No such object</A></H3>
7850 <P>The &quot;ldap_add: No such object&quot; error is commonly returned if parent of the entry being added does not exist. Add the parent entry first...</P>
7851 <P>For example, if you are adding &quot;cn=bob,dc=domain,dc=com&quot; and you get:</P>
7852 <PRE>
7853       ldap_add: No such object
7854 </PRE>
7855 <P>The entry &quot;dc=domain,dc=com&quot; likely doesn't exist. You can use ldapsearch to see if does exist:</P>
7856 <PRE>
7857       ldapsearch -b 'dc=domain,dc=com' -s base '(objectclass=*)'
7858 </PRE>
7859 <P>If it doesn't, add it. See <A HREF="#A Quick-Start Guide">A Quick-Start Guide</A> for assistance.</P>
7860 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7861 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>if the entry being added is the same as database suffix, it's parent isn't required. i.e.: if your suffix is &quot;dc=domain,dc=com&quot;, &quot;dc=com&quot; doesn't need to exist to add &quot;dc=domain,dc=com&quot;.
7862 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7863 <P>This error will also occur if you try to add any entry that the server is not configured to hold.</P>
7864 <P>For example, if your database suffix is &quot;dc=domain,dc=com&quot; and you attempt to add &quot;dc=domain2,dc=com&quot;, &quot;dc=com&quot;, &quot;dc=domain,dc=org&quot;, &quot;o=domain,c=us&quot;, or an other DN in the &quot;dc=domain,dc=com&quot; subtree, the server will return a &quot;No such object&quot; (or referral) error.</P>
7865 <P><EM>slapd</EM>(8) will generally return &quot;no global superior knowledge&quot; as additional information indicating its return noSuchObject instead of a referral as the server is not configured with knowledge of a global superior server.</P>
7866 <H3><A NAME="ldap add: invalid structural object class chain">C.1.13. ldap add: invalid structural object class chain</A></H3>
7867 <P>This particular error refers to the rule about STRUCTURAL objectclasses, which states that an object is of one STRUCTURAL class, the structural class of the object. The object is said to belong to this class, zero or more auxiliaries classes, and their super classes.</P>
7868 <P>While all of these classes are commonly listed in the objectClass attribute of the entry, one of these classes is the structural object class of the entry. Thus, it is OK for an objectClass attribute to contain inetOrgPerson, organizationalPerson, and person because they inherit one from another to form a single super class chain. That is, inetOrgPerson SUPs organizationPerson SUPs person. On the other hand, it is invalid for both inetOrgPerson and account to be listed in objectClass as inetOrgPerson and account are not part of the same super class chain (unless some other class is also listed with is a subclass of both).</P>
7869 <P>To resolve this problem, one must determine which class will better serve structural object class for the entry, adding this class to the objectClass attribute (if not already present), and remove any other structural class from the entry's objectClass attribute which is not a super class of the structural object class.</P>
7870 <P>Which object class is better depends on the particulars of the situation. One generally should consult the documentation for the applications one is using for help in making the determination.</P>
7871 <H3><A NAME="ldap_add: no structuralObjectClass operational attribute">C.1.14. ldap_add: no structuralObjectClass operational attribute</A></H3>
7872 <P>ldapadd(1) may error:</P>
7873 <PRE>
7874       adding new entry &quot;uid=XXX,ou=People,o=campus,c=ru&quot;
7875         ldap_add: Internal (implementation specific) error (80)
7876            additional info: no structuralObjectClass operational attribute
7877 </PRE>
7878 <P>when slapd(8) cannot determine, based upon the contents of the objectClass attribute, what the structural class of the object should be.</P>
7879 <H3><A NAME="ldap_add/modify/rename: Naming violation">C.1.15. ldap_add/modify/rename: Naming violation</A></H3>
7880 <P>OpenLDAP's slapd checks for naming attributes and distinguished values consistency, according to RFC 4512.</P>
7881 <P>Naming attributes are those attributeTypes that appear in an entry's RDN; distinguished values are the values of the naming attributes that appear in an entry's RDN, e.g, in</P>
7882 <PRE>
7883       cn=Someone+mail=someone@example.com,dc=example,dc=com
7884 </PRE>
7885 <P>the naming attributes are cn and mail, and the distinguished values are Someone and someone@example.com.</P>
7886 <P>OpenLDAP's slapd checks for consistency when:</P>
7887 <UL>
7888 <LI>adding an entry
7889 <LI>modifying an entry, if the values of the naming attributes are changed
7890 <LI>renaming an entry, if the RDN of the entry changes</UL>
7891 <P>Possible causes of error are:</P>
7892 <UL>
7893 <LI>the naming attributes are not present in the entry; for example:</UL>
7894 <PRE>
7895                 dn: dc=example,dc=com
7896                 objectClass: organization
7897                 o: Example
7898                 # note: &quot;dc: example&quot; is missing
7899 </PRE>
7900 <UL>
7901 <LI>the naming attributes are present in the entry, but in the attributeType definition they are marked as:<UL>
7902 <LI>collective
7903 <LI>operational
7904 <LI>obsolete</UL>
7905 <LI>the naming attributes are present in the entry, but the distinguished values are not; for example:</UL>
7906 <PRE>
7907                 dn: dc=example,dc=com
7908                 objectClass: domain
7909                 dc: foobar
7910                 # note: &quot;dc&quot; is present, but the value is not &quot;example&quot;
7911 </PRE>
7912 <UL>
7913 <LI>the naming attributes are present in the entry, with the distinguished values, but the naming attributes:<UL>
7914 <LI>do not have an equality field, so equality cannot be asserted
7915 <LI>the matching rule is not supported (yet)
7916 <LI>the matching rule is not appropriate</UL>
7917 <LI>the given distinguished values do not comply with their syntax
7918 <LI>other errors occurred during the validation/normalization/match process; this is a catchall: look at previous logs for details in case none of the above apply to your case.</UL>
7919 <P>In any case, make sure that the attributeType definition for the naming attributes contains an appropriate EQUALITY field; or that of the superior, if they are defined based on a superior attributeType (look at the SUP field). See RFC 4512 for details.</P>
7920 <H3><A NAME="ldap_add/delete/modify/rename: no global superior knowledge">C.1.16. ldap_add/delete/modify/rename: no global superior knowledge</A></H3>
7921 <P>If the target entry name places is not within any of the databases the server is configured to hold and the server has no knowledge of a global superior, the server will indicate it is unwilling to perform the operation and provide the text &quot;no global superior knowledge&quot; as additional text.</P>
7922 <P>Likely the entry name is incorrect, or the server is not properly configured to hold the named entry, or, in distributed directory environments, a default referral was not configured.</P>
7923 <H3><A NAME="ldap_bind: Insufficient access">C.1.17. ldap_bind: Insufficient access</A></H3>
7924 <P>Current versions of slapd(8) requires that clients have authentication permission to attribute types used for authentication purposes before accessing them to perform the bind operation. As all bind operations are done anonymously (regardless of previous bind success), the auth access must be granted to anonymous.</P>
7925 <P>In the example ACL below grants the following access:</P>
7926 <UL>
7927 <LI>to anonymous users:<UL>
7928 <LI>permission to authenticate using values of userPassword</UL>
7929 <LI>to authenticated users:<UL>
7930 <LI>permission to update (but not read) their userPassword
7931 <LI>permission to read any object excepting values of userPassword</UL></UL>
7932 <P>All other access is denied.</P>
7933 <PRE>
7934         access to attr=userPassword
7935           by self =w
7936           by anonymous auth
7937         access *
7938           by self write
7939           by users read
7940 </PRE>
7941 <H3><A NAME="ldap_bind: Invalid credentials">C.1.18. ldap_bind: Invalid credentials</A></H3>
7942 <P>The error usually occurs when the credentials (password) provided does not match the userPassword held in entry you are binding to.</P>
7943 <P>The error can also occur when the bind DN specified is not known to the server.</P>
7944 <P>Check both! In addition to the cases mentioned above you should check if the server denied access to userPassword on selected parts of the directory. In fact, slapd always returns &quot;Invalid credentials&quot; in case of failed bind, regardless of the failure reason, since other return codes could reveal the validity of the user's name.</P>
7945 <P>To debug access rules defined in slapd.conf, add &quot;ACL&quot; to log level.</P>
7946 <H3><A NAME="ldap_bind: Protocol error">C.1.19. ldap_bind: Protocol error</A></H3>
7947 <P>There error is generally occurs when the LDAP version requested by the client is not supported by the server.</P>
7948 <P>The OpenLDAP Software 2.x server, by default, only accepts version 3 LDAP Bind requests but can be configured to accept a version 2 LDAP Bind request.</P>
7949 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7950 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>The 2.x server expects LDAPv3 [RFC4510] to be used when the client requests version 3 and expects a limited LDAPv3 variant (basically, LDAPv3 syntax and semantics in an LDAPv2 PDUs) to be used when version 2 is expected.
7951 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7952 <P>This variant is also sometimes referred to as LDAPv2+, but differs from the U-Mich LDAP variant in a number of ways.</P>
7953 <H3><A NAME="ldap_modify: cannot modify object class">C.1.20. ldap_modify: cannot modify object class</A></H3>
7954 <P>This message is commonly returned when attempting to modify the objectClass attribute in a manner inconsistent with the LDAP/X.500 information model. In particular, it commonly occurs when one tries to change the structure of the object from one class to another, for instance, trying to change an 'apple' into a 'pear' or a 'fruit' into a 'pear'.</P>
7955 <P>Such changes are disallowed by the slapd(8) in accordance with LDAP and X.500 restrictions.</P>
7956 <H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: ..">C.1.21. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: ...</A></H3>
7957 <P>If you intended to bind using a DN and password and get an error from ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s, you likely forgot to provide a '-x' option to the command. By default, SASL authentication is used. '-x' is necessary to select &quot;simple&quot; authentication.</P>
7958 <H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such Object">C.1.22. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such Object</A></H3>
7959 <P>This indicates that LDAP SASL authentication function could not read the Root DSE. The error will occur when the server doesn't provide a root DSE. This may be due to access controls.</P>
7960 <H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such attribute">C.1.23. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: No such attribute</A></H3>
7961 <P>This indicates that LDAP SASL authentication function could read the Root DSE but it contained no supportedSASLMechanism attribute.</P>
7962 <P>The supportedSASLmechanism attribute lists mechanisms currently available. The list may be empty because none of the supported mechanisms are currently available. For example, EXTERNAL is listed only if the client has established its identity by authenticating at a lower level (e.g. TLS).</P>
7963 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7964 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>the attribute may not be visible due to access controls
7965 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7966 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7967 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>SASL bind is the default for all OpenLDAP tools, e.g. ldapsearch(1), ldapmodify(1). To force use of &quot;simple&quot; bind, use the &quot;-x&quot; option. Use of &quot;simple&quot; bind is not recommended unless one has adequate confidentiality protection in place (e.g. TLS/SSL, IPSEC).
7968 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7969 <H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Unknown authentication method">C.1.24. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Unknown authentication method</A></H3>
7970 <P>This indicates that none of the SASL authentication supported by the server are supported by the client, or that they are too weak or otherwise inappropriate for use by the client. Note that the default security options disallows the use of certain mechanisms such as ANONYMOUS and PLAIN (without TLS).</P>
7971 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
7972 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>SASL bind is the default for all OpenLDAP tools. To force use of &quot;simple&quot; bind, use the &quot;-x&quot; option. Use of &quot;simple&quot; bind is not recommended unless one has adequate confidentiality protection in place (e.g. TLS/SSL, IPSEC).
7973 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
7974 <H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Local error (82)">C.1.25. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Local error (82)</A></H3>
7975 <P>Apparently not having forward and reverse DNS entries for the LDAP server can result in this error.</P>
7976 <H3><A NAME="ldap_search: Partial results and referral received">C.1.26. ldap_search: Partial results and referral received</A></H3>
7977 <P>This error is returned with the server responses to an LDAPv2 search query with both results (zero or more matched entries) and references (referrals to other servers). See also: ldapsearch(1).</P>
7978 <P>If the updatedn on the replica does not exist, a referral will be returned. It may do this as well if the ACL needs tweaking.</P>
7979 <H3><A NAME="ldap_start_tls: Operations error">C.1.27. ldap_start_tls: Operations error</A></H3>
7980 <P>ldapsearch(1) and other tools will return</P>
7981 <PRE>
7982         ldap_start_tls: Operations error (1)
7983               additional info: TLS already started
7984 </PRE>
7985 <P>When the user (though command line options and/or ldap.conf(5)) has requested TLS (SSL) be started twice. For instance, when specifying both &quot;-H ldaps://server.do.main&quot; and &quot;-ZZ&quot;.</P>
7986 <H2><A NAME="Other Errors">C.2. Other Errors</A></H2>
7987 <H3><A NAME="ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=34 (Numerical result out of range)">C.2.1. ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=34 (Numerical result out of range)</A></H3>
7988 <P>This slapd error generally indicates that the client sent a message that exceeded an administrative limit. See sockbuf_max_incoming and sockbuf_max_incoming_auth configuration directives in slapd.conf(5).</P>
7989 <H3><A NAME="ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=11 (Resource temporarily unavailable)">C.2.2. ber_get_next on fd X failed errno=11 (Resource temporarily unavailable)</A></H3>
7990 <P>This message is not indicative of abnormal behavior or error. It simply means that expected data is not yet available from the resource, in this context, a network socket. slapd(8) will process the data once it does becomes available.</P>
7991 <H3><A NAME="daemon: socket() failed errno=97 (Address family not supported)">C.2.3. daemon: socket() failed errno=97 (Address family not supported)</A></H3>
7992 <P>This message indicates that the operating system does not support one of the (protocol) address families which slapd(8) was configured to support. Most commonly, this occurs when slapd(8) was configured to support IPv6 yet the operating system kernel wasn't. In such cases, the message can be ignored.</P>
7993 <H3><A NAME="GSSAPI: gss_acquire_cred: Miscellaneous failure; Permission denied;">C.2.4. GSSAPI: gss_acquire_cred: Miscellaneous failure; Permission denied;</A></H3>
7994 <P>This message means that slapd is not running as root and, thus, it cannot get its Kerberos 5 key from the keytab, usually file /etc/krb5.keytab.</P>
7995 <P>A keytab file is used to store keys that are to be used by services or daemons that are started at boot time. It is very important that these secrets are kept beyond reach of intruders.</P>
7996 <P>That's why the default keytab file is owned by root and protected from being read by others. Do not mess with these permissions, build a different keytab file for slapd instead.</P>
7997 <P>To do this, start kadmin, and enter the following commands:</P>
7998 <PRE>
7999      addprinc -randkey ldap/ldap.example.com@EXAMPLE.COM
8000      ktadd -k /etc/openldap/ldap.keytab ldap/ldap.example.com@EXAMPLE.COM
8001 </PRE>
8002 <P>Then, on the shell, do:</P>
8003 <PRE>
8004      chown ldap.ldap /etc/openldap/ldap.keytab
8005      chmod 600 /etc/openldap/ldap.keytab
8006 </PRE>
8007 <P>Now you have to tell slapd (well, actually tell the gssapi library in Kerberos 5 that is invoked by Cyrus SASL) where to find the new keytab. You do this by setting the environment variable KRB5_KTNAME like this:</P>
8008 <PRE>
8009      export KRB5_KTNAME=&quot;FILE:/etc/openldap/ldap.keytab&quot;
8010 </PRE>
8011 <P>Set that environment variable on the slapd start script (Red Hat users might find /etc/sysconfig/ldap a perfect place).</P>
8012 <P>This only works if you are using MIT kerberos. It doesn't work with Heimdal, for instance.</P>
8013 <P>In Heimdal there is a function gsskrb5_register_acceptor_identity() that sets the path of the keytab file you want to use. In Cyrus SASL 2 you can add</P>
8014 <PRE>
8015     keytab: /path/to/file
8016 </PRE>
8017 <P>to your application's SASL config file to use this feature. This only works with Heimdal.</P>
8018 <H3><A NAME="access from unknown denied">C.2.5. access from unknown denied</A></H3>
8019 <P>This related to TCP wrappers. See hosts_access(5) for more information. in the log file: &quot;access from unknown denied&quot; This related to TCP wrappers. See hosts_access(5) for more information. for example: add the line &quot;slapd: .hosts.you.want.to.allow&quot; in /etc/hosts.allow to get rid of the error.</P>
8020 <H3><A NAME="ldap_read: want=# error=Resource temporarily unavailable">C.2.6. ldap_read: want=# error=Resource temporarily unavailable</A></H3>
8021 <P>This message occurs normally. It means that pending data is not yet available from the resource, a network socket. slapd(8) will process the data once it becomes available.</P>
8022 <H3><A NAME="`make test\' fails">C.2.7. `make test' fails</A></H3>
8023 <P>Some times, `make test' fails at the very first test with an obscure message like</P>
8024 <PRE>
8025     make test
8026     make[1]: Entering directory `/ldap_files/openldap-2.4.6/tests'
8027     make[2]: Entering directory `/ldap_files/openldap-2.4.6/tests'
8028     Initiating LDAP tests for BDB...
8029     Cleaning up test run directory leftover from previous run.
8030      Running ./scripts/all...
8031     &gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt; Executing all LDAP tests for bdb
8032     &gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt; Starting test000-rootdse ...
8033     running defines.sh
8034     Starting slapd on TCP/IP port 9011...
8035     Using ldapsearch to retrieve the root DSE...
8036     Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start...
8037     ./scripts/test000-rootdse: line 40: 10607 Segmentation fault $SLAPD -f $CONF1 -h $URI1 -d $LVL $TIMING &gt;$LOG1 2&gt;&amp;1
8038     Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start...
8039     Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start...
8040     Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start...
8041     Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start...
8042     Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start...
8043     ./scripts/test000-rootdse: kill: (10607) - No such pid
8044     ldap_sasl_bind_s: Can't contact LDAP server (-1)
8045     &gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt; Test failed
8046     &gt;&gt;&gt;&gt;&gt; ./scripts/test000-rootdse failed (exit 1)
8047     make[2]: *** [bdb-yes] Error 1
8048     make[2]: Leaving directory `/ldap_files/openldap-2.4.6/tests'
8049     make[1]: *** [test] Error 2
8050     make[1]: Leaving directory `/ldap_files/openldap-2.4.6/tests'
8051     make: *** [test] Error 2
8052 </PRE>
8053 <P>or so. Usually, the five lines</P>
8054 <P>Waiting 5 seconds for slapd to start...</P>
8055 <P>indicate that slapd didn't start at all.</P>
8056 <P>In tests/testrun/slapd.1.log there is a full log of what slapd wrote while trying to start. The log level can be increased by setting the environment variable SLAPD_DEBUG to the corresponding value; see loglevel in slapd.conf(5) for the meaning of log levels.</P>
8057 <P>A typical reason for this behavior is a runtime link problem, i.e. slapd cannot find some dynamic libraries it was linked against. Try running ldd(1) on slapd (for those architectures that support runtime linking).</P>
8058 <P>There might well be other reasons; the contents of the log file should help clarifying them.</P>
8059 <P>Tests that fire up multiple instances of slapd typically log to tests/testrun/slapd.&lt;n&gt;.log, with a distinct &lt;n&gt; for each instance of slapd; list tests/testrun/ for possible values of &lt;n&gt;.</P>
8060 <H3><A NAME="ldap_*: Internal (implementation specific) error (80) - additional info: entry index delete failed">C.2.8. ldap_*: Internal (implementation specific) error (80) - additional info: entry index delete failed</A></H3>
8061 <P>This seems to be related with wrong ownership of the BDB's dir (/var/lib/ldap) and files.</P>
8062 <PRE>
8063     chmod -R openldap:openldap /var/lib/ldap
8064 </PRE>
8065 <P>fixes it in Debian</P>
8066 <H3><A NAME="ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Can\'t contact LDAP server (-1)">C.2.9. ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Can't contact LDAP server (-1)</A></H3>
8067 <P>Using SASL, when a client contacts LDAP server, the slapd service dies immediately and client gets an error :</P>
8068 <PRE>
8069      SASL/GSSAPI authentication started ldap_sasl_interactive_bind_s: Can't contact LDAP server (-1)
8070 </PRE>
8071 <P>Then check the slapd service, it stopped.</P>
8072 <P>This may come from incompatible of using different versions of BerkeleyDB for installing of SASL and installing of OpenLDAP. The problem arises in case of using multiple version of BerkeleyDB. Solution: - Check which version of BerkeleyDB when install Cyrus SASL.</P>
8073 <P>Reinstall OpenLDAP with the version of BerkeleyDB above.</P>
8074 <P></P>
8075 <HR>
8076 <H1><A NAME="Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions">D. Recommended OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions</A></H1>
8077 <P>This appendix details the recommended versions of the software that OpenLDAP depends on.</P>
8078 <P>Please read the <A HREF="#Prerequisite software">Prerequisite software</A> section for more information on the following software dependencies.</P>
8079 <H2><A NAME="Dependency Versions">D.1. Dependency Versions</A></H2>
8080 <TABLE CLASS="columns" BORDER ALIGN='Center'>
8081 <CAPTION ALIGN=top>Table 8.5: OpenLDAP Software Dependency Versions</CAPTION>
8082 <TR CLASS="heading">
8083 <TD>
8084 <STRONG>Feature</STRONG>
8085 </TD>
8086 <TD>
8087 <STRONG>Software</STRONG>
8088 </TD>
8089 <TD>
8090 <STRONG>Version</STRONG>
8091 </TD>
8092 </TR>
8093 <TR>
8094 <TD>
8095 &nbsp;<TERM>Transport Layer Security</TERM>:
8096 </TD>
8097 <TD>
8098 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8099 </TD>
8100 <TD>
8101 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8102 </TD>
8103 </TR>
8104 <TR>
8105 <TD>
8106 &nbsp;
8107 </TD>
8108 <TD>
8109 <TT>&nbsp;<A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A></TT>
8110 </TD>
8111 <TD>
8112 <TT>0.9.7+</TT>
8113 </TD>
8114 </TR>
8115 <TR>
8116 <TD>
8117 &nbsp;
8118 </TD>
8119 <TD>
8120 <TT>&nbsp;<A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">GnuTLS</A></TT>
8121 </TD>
8122 <TD>
8123 <TT>2.0.1</TT>
8124 </TD>
8125 </TR>
8126 <TR>
8127 <TD>
8128 &nbsp;<TERM>Simple Authentication and Security Layer</TERM>
8129 </TD>
8130 <TD>
8131 <TT>&nbsp;<A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A></TT>
8132 </TD>
8133 <TD>
8134 <TT>2.1.21+</TT>
8135 </TD>
8136 </TR>
8137 <TR>
8138 <TD>
8139 &nbsp;<TERM>Kerberos Authentication Service</TERM>:
8140 </TD>
8141 <TD>
8142 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8143 </TD>
8144 <TD>
8145 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8146 </TD>
8147 </TR>
8148 <TR>
8149 <TD>
8150 &nbsp;
8151 </TD>
8152 <TD>
8153 <TT>&nbsp;<A HREF="http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/">Heimdal</A></TT>
8154 </TD>
8155 <TD>
8156 <TT>Version</TT>
8157 </TD>
8158 </TR>
8159 <TR>
8160 <TD>
8161 &nbsp;
8162 </TD>
8163 <TD>
8164 <TT>&nbsp;<A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">MIT Kerberos</A></TT>
8165 </TD>
8166 <TD>
8167 <TT>Version</TT>
8168 </TD>
8169 </TR>
8170 <TR>
8171 <TD>
8172 Database Software
8173 </TD>
8174 <TD>
8175 <TT>&nbsp;<A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A>:</TT>
8176 </TD>
8177 <TD>
8178 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8179 </TD>
8180 </TR>
8181 <TR>
8182 <TD>
8183 &nbsp;
8184 </TD>
8185 <TD>
8186 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8187 </TD>
8188 <TD>
8189 <TT>4.2</TT>
8190 </TD>
8191 </TR>
8192 <TR>
8193 <TD>
8194 &nbsp;
8195 </TD>
8196 <TD>
8197 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8198 </TD>
8199 <TD>
8200 <TT>4.4</TT>
8201 </TD>
8202 </TR>
8203 <TR>
8204 <TD>
8205 &nbsp;
8206 </TD>
8207 <TD>
8208 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8209 </TD>
8210 <TD>
8211 <TT>4.5</TT>
8212 </TD>
8213 </TR>
8214 <TR>
8215 <TD>
8216 &nbsp;
8217 </TD>
8218 <TD>
8219 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8220 </TD>
8221 <TD>
8222 <TT>4.6</TT>
8223 </TD>
8224 </TR>
8225 <TR>
8226 <TD>
8227 &nbsp;
8228 </TD>
8229 <TD>
8230 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8231 </TD>
8232 <TD>
8233 <TT>Note: It is highly recommended to apply the patches from for a given release.</TT>
8234 </TD>
8235 </TR>
8236 <TR>
8237 <TD>
8238 Threads:
8239 </TD>
8240 <TD>
8241 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8242 </TD>
8243 <TD>
8244 <TT>&nbsp;</TT>
8245 </TD>
8246 </TR>
8247 <TR>
8248 <TD>
8249 &nbsp;
8250 </TD>
8251 <TD>
8252 <TT>POSIX <EM>pthreads</EM></TT>
8253 </TD>
8254 <TD>
8255 <TT>Version</TT>
8256 </TD>
8257 </TR>
8258 <TR>
8259 <TD>
8260 &nbsp;
8261 </TD>
8262 <TD>
8263 <TT>Mach <EM>CThreads</EM></TT>
8264 </TD>
8265 <TD>
8266 <TT>Version</TT>
8267 </TD>
8268 </TR>
8269 <TR>
8270 <TD>
8271 TCP Wrappers
8272 </TD>
8273 <TD>
8274 <TT>Name</TT>
8275 </TD>
8276 <TD>
8277 <TT>Version</TT>
8278 </TD>
8279 </TR>
8280 </TABLE>
8281
8282 <P></P>
8283 <HR>
8284 <H1><A NAME="Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples">E. Real World OpenLDAP Deployments and Examples</A></H1>
8285 <P>Examples and discussions</P>
8286 <P></P>
8287 <HR>
8288 <H1><A NAME="OpenLDAP Software Contributions">F. OpenLDAP Software Contributions</A></H1>
8289 <P>The following sections attempt to summarize the various contributions in OpenLDAP software, as found in <TT>openldap_src/contrib</TT></P>
8290 <H2><A NAME="Client APIs">F.1. Client APIs</A></H2>
8291 <P>Intro and discuss</P>
8292 <H3><A NAME="ldapc++">F.1.1. ldapc++</A></H3>
8293 <P>Intro and discuss</P>
8294 <H3><A NAME="ldaptcl">F.1.2. ldaptcl</A></H3>
8295 <P>Intro and discuss</P>
8296 <H2><A NAME="Overlays">F.2. Overlays</A></H2>
8297 <H3><A NAME="acl">F.2.1. acl</A></H3>
8298 <P>Plugins that implement access rules.  Currently only posixGroup, which implements access control based on posixGroup membership.</P>
8299 <H3><A NAME="addpartial">F.2.2. addpartial</A></H3>
8300 <P>Treat Add requests as Modify requests if the entry exists.</P>
8301 <H3><A NAME="allop">F.2.3. allop</A></H3>
8302 <P>Return operational attributes for root DSE even when not requested, since some clients expect this.</P>
8303 <H3><A NAME="autogroup">F.2.4. autogroup</A></H3>
8304 <P>Automated updates of group memberships.</P>
8305 <H3><A NAME="comp_match">F.2.5. comp_match</A></H3>
8306 <P>Component Matching rules (RFC 3687).</P>
8307 <H3><A NAME="denyop">F.2.6. denyop</A></H3>
8308 <P>Deny selected operations, returning <EM>unwillingToPerform</EM>.</P>
8309 <H3><A NAME="dsaschema">F.2.7. dsaschema</A></H3>
8310 <P>Permit loading DSA-specific schema, including operational attrs.</P>
8311 <H3><A NAME="lastmod">F.2.8. lastmod</A></H3>
8312 <P>Track the time of the last write operation to a database.</P>
8313 <H3><A NAME="nops">F.2.9. nops</A></H3>
8314 <P>Remove null operations, e.g. changing a value to same as before.</P>
8315 <H3><A NAME="nssov">F.2.10. nssov</A></H3>
8316 <P>Handle NSS lookup requests through a local Unix Domain socket.</P>
8317 <H3><A NAME="passwd">F.2.11. passwd</A></H3>
8318 <P>Support additional password mechanisms.</P>
8319 <H3><A NAME="proxyOld">F.2.12. proxyOld</A></H3>
8320 <P>Proxy Authorization compatibility with obsolete internet-draft.</P>
8321 <H3><A NAME="smbk5pwd">F.2.13. smbk5pwd</A></H3>
8322 <P>Make the PasswordModify Extended Operation update Kerberos keys and Samba password hashes as well as <EM>userPassword</EM>.</P>
8323 <H3><A NAME="trace">F.2.14. trace</A></H3>
8324 <P>Trace overlay invocation.</P>
8325 <H3><A NAME="usn">F.2.15. usn</A></H3>
8326 <P>Maintain <EM>usnCreated</EM> and <EM>usnChanged</EM> attrs similar to Microsoft AD.</P>
8327 <H2><A NAME="Tools">F.3. Tools</A></H2>
8328 <P>Intro and discuss</P>
8329 <H3><A NAME="Statistic Logging">F.3.1. Statistic Logging</A></H3>
8330 <P>statslog</P>
8331 <H2><A NAME="SLAPI Plugins">F.4. SLAPI Plugins</A></H2>
8332 <P>Intro and discuss</P>
8333 <H3><A NAME="addrdnvalues">F.4.1. addrdnvalues</A></H3>
8334 <P>More</P>
8335 <P></P>
8336 <HR>
8337 <H1><A NAME="Configuration File Examples">G. Configuration File Examples</A></H1>
8338 <H2><A NAME="slapd.conf">G.1. slapd.conf</A></H2>
8339 <H2><A NAME="ldap.conf">G.2. ldap.conf</A></H2>
8340 <H2><A NAME="a-n-other.conf">G.3. a-n-other.conf</A></H2>
8341 <P></P>
8342 <HR>
8343 <H1><A NAME="LDAP Result Codes">H. LDAP Result Codes</A></H1>
8344 <P>For the purposes of this guide, we have incorporated the standard LDAP result codes from <EM>Appendix A.  LDAP Result Codes</EM> of rfc4511. A copy of which can be found in <TT>doc/rfc</TT> of the OpenLDAP source code.</P>
8345 <P>We have expanded the description of each error in relation to the OpenLDAP toolsets.</P>
8346 <H2><A NAME="Non-Error Result Codes">H.1. Non-Error Result Codes</A></H2>
8347 <P>These result codes (called &quot;non-error&quot; result codes) do not indicate an error condition:</P>
8348 <PRE>
8349         success (0),
8350         compareFalse (5),
8351         compareTrue (6),
8352         referral (10), and
8353         saslBindInProgress (14).
8354 </PRE>
8355 <P>The <EM>success</EM>, <EM>compareTrue</EM>, and <EM>compareFalse</EM> result codes indicate successful completion (and, hence, are referred to as &quot;successful&quot; result codes).</P>
8356 <P>The <EM>referral</EM> and <EM>saslBindInProgress</EM> result codes indicate the client needs to take additional action to complete the operation.</P>
8357 <H2><A NAME="Result Codes">H.2. Result Codes</A></H2>
8358 <P>Existing LDAP result codes are described as follows:</P>
8359 <H2><A NAME="{{success (0)}}">H.3. <EM>success (0)</EM></A></H2>
8360 <P>Indicates the successful completion of an operation.</P>
8361 <P><HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left">
8362 <STRONG>Note: </STRONG>this code is not used with the Compare operation.  See <A HREF="#compareFalse (5)">compareFalse (5)</A> and <A HREF="#compareTrue (6)">compareTrue (6)</A>.
8363 <HR WIDTH="80%" ALIGN="Left"></P>
8364 <H2><A NAME="{{operationsError (1)}}">H.4. <EM>operationsError (1)</EM></A></H2>
8365 <P>Indicates that the operation is not properly sequenced with relation to other operations (of same or different type).</P>
8366 <P>For example, this code is returned if the client attempts to StartTLS [RFC4346] while there are other uncompleted operations or if a TLS layer was already installed.</P>
8367 <H2><A NAME="{{protocolError (2)}}">H.5. <EM>protocolError (2)</EM></A></H2>
8368 <P>Indicates the server received data that is not well-formed.</P>
8369 <P>For Bind operation only, this code is also used to indicate that the server does not support the requested protocol version.</P>
8370 <P>For Extended operations only, this code is also used to indicate that the server does not support (by design or configuration) the Extended operation associated with the <EM>requestName</EM>.</P>
8371 <P>For request operations specifying multiple controls, this may be used to indicate that the server cannot ignore the order of the controls as specified, or that the combination of the specified controls is invalid or unspecified.</P>
8372 <H2><A NAME="{{timeLimitExceeded (3)}}">H.6. <EM>timeLimitExceeded (3)</EM></A></H2>
8373 <P>Indicates that the time limit specified by the client was exceeded before the operation could be completed.</P>
8374 <H2><A NAME="{{sizeLimitExceeded (4)}}">H.7. <EM>sizeLimitExceeded (4)</EM></A></H2>
8375 <P>Indicates that the size limit specified by the client was exceeded before the operation could be completed.</P>
8376 <H2><A NAME="{{compareFalse (5)}}">H.8. <EM>compareFalse (5)</EM></A></H2>
8377 <P>Indicates that the Compare operation has successfully completed and the assertion has evaluated to FALSE or Undefined.</P>
8378 <H2><A NAME="{{compareTrue (6)}}">H.9. <EM>compareTrue (6)</EM></A></H2>
8379 <P>Indicates that the Compare operation has successfully completed and the assertion has evaluated to TRUE.</P>
8380 <H2><A NAME="{{authMethodNotSupported (7)}}">H.10. <EM>authMethodNotSupported (7)</EM></A></H2>
8381 <P>Indicates that the authentication method or mechanism is not supported.</P>
8382 <H2><A NAME="{{strongerAuthRequired (8)}}">H.11. <EM>strongerAuthRequired (8)</EM></A></H2>
8383 <P>Indicates the server requires strong(er) authentication in order to complete the operation.</P>
8384 <P>When used with the Notice of Disconnection operation, this code indicates that the server has detected that an established security association between the client and server has unexpectedly failed or been compromised.</P>
8385 <H2><A NAME="{{referral (10)}}">H.12. <EM>referral (10)</EM></A></H2>
8386 <P>Indicates that a referral needs to be chased to complete the operation (see Section 4.1.10).</P>
8387 <H2><A NAME="{{adminLimitExceeded (11)}}">H.13. <EM>adminLimitExceeded (11)</EM></A></H2>
8388 <P>Indicates that an administrative limit has been exceeded.</P>
8389 <H2><A NAME="{{unavailableCriticalExtension (12)}}">H.14. <EM>unavailableCriticalExtension (12)</EM></A></H2>
8390 <P>Indicates a critical control is unrecognized (see Section 4.1.11).</P>
8391 <H2><A NAME="{{confidentialityRequired (13)}}">H.15. <EM>confidentialityRequired (13)</EM></A></H2>
8392 <P>Indicates that data confidentiality protections are required.</P>
8393 <H2><A NAME="{{saslBindInProgress (14)}}">H.16. <EM>saslBindInProgress (14)</EM></A></H2>
8394 <P>Indicates the server requires the client to send a new bind request, with the same SASL mechanism, to continue the authentication process (see Section 4.2).</P>
8395 <H2><A NAME="{{noSuchAttribute (16)}}">H.17. <EM>noSuchAttribute (16)</EM></A></H2>
8396 <P>Indicates that the named entry does not contain the specified attribute or attribute value.</P>
8397 <H2><A NAME="{{undefinedAttributeType (17)}}">H.18. <EM>undefinedAttributeType (17)</EM></A></H2>
8398 <P>Indicates that a request field contains an unrecognized attribute description.</P>
8399 <H2><A NAME="{{inappropriateMatching (18)}}">H.19. <EM>inappropriateMatching (18)</EM></A></H2>
8400 <P>Indicates that an attempt was made (e.g., in an assertion) to use a matching rule not defined for the attribute type concerned.</P>
8401 <H2><A NAME="{{constraintViolation (19)}}">H.20. <EM>constraintViolation (19)</EM></A></H2>
8402 <P>Indicates that the client supplied an attribute value that does not conform to the constraints placed upon it by the data model.</P>
8403 <P>For example, this code is returned when multiple values are supplied to an attribute that has a SINGLE-VALUE constraint.</P>
8404 <H2><A NAME="{{attributeOrValueExists (20)}}">H.21. <EM>attributeOrValueExists (20)</EM></A></H2>
8405 <P>Indicates that the client supplied an attribute or value to be added to an entry, but the attribute or value already exists.</P>
8406 <H2><A NAME="{{invalidAttributeSyntax (21)}}">H.22. <EM>invalidAttributeSyntax (21)</EM></A></H2>
8407 <P>Indicates that a purported attribute value does not conform to the syntax of the attribute.</P>
8408 <H2><A NAME="{{noSuchObject (32)}}">H.23. <EM>noSuchObject (32)</EM></A></H2>
8409 <P>Indicates that the object does not exist in the DIT.</P>
8410 <H2><A NAME="{{aliasProblem (33)}}">H.24. <EM>aliasProblem (33)</EM></A></H2>
8411 <P>Indicates that an alias problem has occurred.  For example, the code may used to indicate an alias has been dereferenced that names no object.</P>
8412 <H2><A NAME="{{invalidDNSyntax (34)}}">H.25. <EM>invalidDNSyntax (34)</EM></A></H2>
8413 <P>Indicates that an LDAPDN or RelativeLDAPDN field (e.g., search base, target entry, ModifyDN newrdn, etc.) of a request does not conform to the required syntax or contains attribute values that do not conform to the syntax of the attribute's type.</P>
8414 <H2><A NAME="{{aliasDereferencingProblem (36)}}">H.26. <EM>aliasDereferencingProblem (36)</EM></A></H2>
8415 <P>Indicates that a problem occurred while dereferencing an alias.  Typically, an alias was encountered in a situation where it was not allowed or where access was denied.</P>
8416 <H2><A NAME="{{inappropriateAuthentication (48)}}">H.27. <EM>inappropriateAuthentication (48)</EM></A></H2>
8417 <P>Indicates the server requires the client that had attempted to bind anonymously or without supplying credentials to provide some form of credentials.</P>
8418 <H2><A NAME="{{invalidCredentials (49)}}">H.28. <EM>invalidCredentials (49)</EM></A></H2>
8419 <P>Indicates that the provided credentials (e.g., the user's name and password) are invalid.</P>
8420 <H2><A NAME="{{insufficientAccessRights (50)}}">H.29. <EM>insufficientAccessRights (50)</EM></A></H2>
8421 <P>Indicates that the client does not have sufficient access rights to perform the operation.</P>
8422 <H2><A NAME="{{busy (51)}}">H.30. <EM>busy (51)</EM></A></H2>
8423 <P>Indicates that the server is too busy to service the operation.</P>
8424 <H2><A NAME="{{unavailable (52)}}">H.31. <EM>unavailable (52)</EM></A></H2>
8425 <P>Indicates that the server is shutting down or a subsystem necessary to complete the operation is offline.</P>
8426 <H2><A NAME="{{unwillingToPerform (53)}}">H.32. <EM>unwillingToPerform (53)</EM></A></H2>
8427 <P>Indicates that the server is unwilling to perform the operation.</P>
8428 <H2><A NAME="{{loopDetect (54)}}">H.33. <EM>loopDetect (54)</EM></A></H2>
8429 <P>Indicates that the server has detected an internal loop (e.g., while dereferencing aliases or chaining an operation).</P>
8430 <H2><A NAME="{{namingViolation (64)}}">H.34. <EM>namingViolation (64)</EM></A></H2>
8431 <P>Indicates that the entry's name violates naming restrictions.</P>
8432 <H2><A NAME="{{objectClassViolation (65)}}">H.35. <EM>objectClassViolation (65)</EM></A></H2>
8433 <P>Indicates that the entry violates object class restrictions.</P>
8434 <H2><A NAME="{{notAllowedOnNonLeaf (66)}}">H.36. <EM>notAllowedOnNonLeaf (66)</EM></A></H2>
8435 <P>Indicates that the operation is inappropriately acting upon a non-leaf entry.</P>
8436 <H2><A NAME="{{notAllowedOnRDN (67)}}">H.37. <EM>notAllowedOnRDN (67)</EM></A></H2>
8437 <P>Indicates that the operation is inappropriately attempting to remove a value that forms the entry's relative distinguished name.</P>
8438 <H2><A NAME="{{entryAlreadyExists (68)}}">H.38. <EM>entryAlreadyExists (68)</EM></A></H2>
8439 <P>Indicates that the request cannot be fulfilled (added, moved, or renamed) as the target entry already exists.</P>
8440 <H2><A NAME="{{objectClassModsProhibited (69)}}">H.39. <EM>objectClassModsProhibited (69)</EM></A></H2>
8441 <P>Indicates that an attempt to modify the object class(es) of an entry's 'objectClass' attribute is prohibited.</P>
8442 <P>For example, this code is returned when a client attempts to modify the structural object class of an entry.</P>
8443 <H2><A NAME="{{affectsMultipleDSAs (71)}}">H.40. <EM>affectsMultipleDSAs (71)</EM></A></H2>
8444 <P>Indicates that the operation cannot be performed as it would affect multiple servers (DSAs).</P>
8445 <H2><A NAME="{{other (80)}}">H.41. <EM>other (80)</EM></A></H2>
8446 <P>Indicates the server has encountered an internal error.</P>
8447 <P></P>
8448 <HR>
8449 <H1><A NAME="Glossary">I. Glossary</A></H1>
8450 <H2><A NAME="Terms">I.1. Terms</A></H2>
8451 <TABLE CLASS="plain">
8452 <TR CLASS="heading">
8453 <TD>
8454 <STRONG>Term</STRONG>
8455 </TD>
8456 <TD>
8457 <STRONG>Definition</STRONG>
8458 </TD>
8459 </TR>
8460 <TR>
8461 <TD>
8462 3DES
8463 </TD>
8464 <TD>
8465 Triple DES
8466 </TD>
8467 </TR>
8468 <TR>
8469 <TD>
8470 ABNF
8471 </TD>
8472 <TD>
8473 Augmented Backus-Naur Form
8474 </TD>
8475 </TR>
8476 <TR>
8477 <TD>
8478 ACDF
8479 </TD>
8480 <TD>
8481 Access Control Decision Function
8482 </TD>
8483 </TR>
8484 <TR>
8485 <TD>
8486 ACE
8487 </TD>
8488 <TD>
8489 ASCII Compatible Encoding
8490 </TD>
8491 </TR>
8492 <TR>
8493 <TD>
8494 ASCII
8495 </TD>
8496 <TD>
8497 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
8498 </TD>
8499 </TR>
8500 <TR>
8501 <TD>
8502 ACID
8503 </TD>
8504 <TD>
8505 Atomicity, Consistency, Isolation, and Durability
8506 </TD>
8507 </TR>
8508 <TR>
8509 <TD>
8510 ACI
8511 </TD>
8512 <TD>
8513 Access Control Information
8514 </TD>
8515 </TR>
8516 <TR>
8517 <TD>
8518 ACL
8519 </TD>
8520 <TD>
8521 Access Control List
8522 </TD>
8523 </TR>
8524 <TR>
8525 <TD>
8526 AES
8527 </TD>
8528 <TD>
8529 Advance Encryption Standard
8530 </TD>
8531 </TR>
8532 <TR>
8533 <TD>
8534 ABI
8535 </TD>
8536 <TD>
8537 Application Binary Interface
8538 </TD>
8539 </TR>
8540 <TR>
8541 <TD>
8542 API
8543 </TD>
8544 <TD>
8545 Application Program Interface
8546 </TD>
8547 </TR>
8548 <TR>
8549 <TD>
8550 ASN.1
8551 </TD>
8552 <TD>
8553 Abstract Syntax Notation - One
8554 </TD>
8555 </TR>
8556 <TR>
8557 <TD>
8558 AVA
8559 </TD>
8560 <TD>
8561 Attribute Value Assertion
8562 </TD>
8563 </TR>
8564 <TR>
8565 <TD>
8566 AuthcDN
8567 </TD>
8568 <TD>
8569 Authentication DN
8570 </TD>
8571 </TR>
8572 <TR>
8573 <TD>
8574 AuthcId
8575 </TD>
8576 <TD>
8577 Authentication Identity
8578 </TD>
8579 </TR>
8580 <TR>
8581 <TD>
8582 AuthzDN
8583 </TD>
8584 <TD>
8585 Authorizaiton DN
8586 </TD>
8587 </TR>
8588 <TR>
8589 <TD>
8590 AuthzId
8591 </TD>
8592 <TD>
8593 Authorization Identity
8594 </TD>
8595 </TR>
8596 <TR>
8597 <TD>
8598 BCP
8599 </TD>
8600 <TD>
8601 Best Current Practice
8602 </TD>
8603 </TR>
8604 <TR>
8605 <TD>
8606 BDB
8607 </TD>
8608 <TD>
8609 Berkeley DB (Backend)
8610 </TD>
8611 </TR>
8612 <TR>
8613 <TD>
8614 BER
8615 </TD>
8616 <TD>
8617 Basic Encoding Rules
8618 </TD>
8619 </TR>
8620 <TR>
8621 <TD>
8622 BNF
8623 </TD>
8624 <TD>
8625 Backus-Naur Form
8626 </TD>
8627 </TR>
8628 <TR>
8629 <TD>
8630 C
8631 </TD>
8632 <TD>
8633 The C Programming Language
8634 </TD>
8635 </TR>
8636 <TR>
8637 <TD>
8638 CA
8639 </TD>
8640 <TD>
8641 Certificate Authority
8642 </TD>
8643 </TR>
8644 <TR>
8645 <TD>
8646 CER
8647 </TD>
8648 <TD>
8649 Canonical Encoding Rules
8650 </TD>
8651 </TR>
8652 <TR>
8653 <TD>
8654 CLDAP
8655 </TD>
8656 <TD>
8657 Connection-less LDAP
8658 </TD>
8659 </TR>
8660 <TR>
8661 <TD>
8662 CN
8663 </TD>
8664 <TD>
8665 Common Name
8666 </TD>
8667 </TR>
8668 <TR>
8669 <TD>
8670 CRAM-MD5
8671 </TD>
8672 <TD>
8673 SASL MD5 Challenge/Response Authentication Mechanism
8674 </TD>
8675 </TR>
8676 <TR>
8677 <TD>
8678 CRL
8679 </TD>
8680 <TD>
8681 Certificate Revocation List
8682 </TD>
8683 </TR>
8684 <TR>
8685 <TD>
8686 DAP
8687 </TD>
8688 <TD>
8689 Directory Access Protocol
8690 </TD>
8691 </TR>
8692 <TR>
8693 <TD>
8694 DC
8695 </TD>
8696 <TD>
8697 Domain Component
8698 </TD>
8699 </TR>
8700 <TR>
8701 <TD>
8702 DER
8703 </TD>
8704 <TD>
8705 Distinguished Encoding Rules
8706 </TD>
8707 </TR>
8708 <TR>
8709 <TD>
8710 DES
8711 </TD>
8712 <TD>
8713 Data Encryption Standard
8714 </TD>
8715 </TR>
8716 <TR>
8717 <TD>
8718 DIB
8719 </TD>
8720 <TD>
8721 Directory Information Base
8722 </TD>
8723 </TR>
8724 <TR>
8725 <TD>
8726 DIGEST-MD5
8727 </TD>
8728 <TD>
8729 SASL Digest MD5 Authentication Mechanism
8730 </TD>
8731 </TR>
8732 <TR>
8733 <TD>
8734 DISP
8735 </TD>
8736 <TD>
8737 Directory Information Shadowing Protocol
8738 </TD>
8739 </TR>
8740 <TR>
8741 <TD>
8742 DIT
8743 </TD>
8744 <TD>
8745 Directory Information Tree
8746 </TD>
8747 </TR>
8748 <TR>
8749 <TD>
8750 DNS
8751 </TD>
8752 <TD>
8753 Domain Name System
8754 </TD>
8755 </TR>
8756 <TR>
8757 <TD>
8758 DN
8759 </TD>
8760 <TD>
8761 Distinguished Name
8762 </TD>
8763 </TR>
8764 <TR>
8765 <TD>
8766 DOP
8767 </TD>
8768 <TD>
8769 Directory Operational Binding Management Protocol
8770 </TD>
8771 </TR>
8772 <TR>
8773 <TD>
8774 DSAIT
8775 </TD>
8776 <TD>
8777 DSA Information Tree
8778 </TD>
8779 </TR>
8780 <TR>
8781 <TD>
8782 DSA
8783 </TD>
8784 <TD>
8785 Directory System Agent
8786 </TD>
8787 </TR>
8788 <TR>
8789 <TD>
8790 DSE
8791 </TD>
8792 <TD>
8793 DSA-specific Entry
8794 </TD>
8795 </TR>
8796 <TR>
8797 <TD>
8798 DSP
8799 </TD>
8800 <TD>
8801 Directory System Protocol
8802 </TD>
8803 </TR>
8804 <TR>
8805 <TD>
8806 DS
8807 </TD>
8808 <TD>
8809 Draft Standard
8810 </TD>
8811 </TR>
8812 <TR>
8813 <TD>
8814 DUA
8815 </TD>
8816 <TD>
8817 Directory User Agent
8818 </TD>
8819 </TR>
8820 <TR>
8821 <TD>
8822 EXTERNAL
8823 </TD>
8824 <TD>
8825 SASL External Authentication Mechanism
8826 </TD>
8827 </TR>
8828 <TR>
8829 <TD>
8830 FAQ
8831 </TD>
8832 <TD>
8833 Frequently Asked Questions
8834 </TD>
8835 </TR>
8836 <TR>
8837 <TD>
8838 FTP
8839 </TD>
8840 <TD>
8841 File Transfer Protocol
8842 </TD>
8843 </TR>
8844 <TR>
8845 <TD>
8846 FYI
8847 </TD>
8848 <TD>
8849 For Your Information
8850 </TD>
8851 </TR>
8852 <TR>
8853 <TD>
8854 GSER
8855 </TD>
8856 <TD>
8857 Generic String Encoding Rules
8858 </TD>
8859 </TR>
8860 <TR>
8861 <TD>
8862 GSS-API
8863 </TD>
8864 <TD>
8865 Generic Security Service Application Program Interface
8866 </TD>
8867 </TR>
8868 <TR>
8869 <TD>
8870 GSSAPI
8871 </TD>
8872 <TD>
8873 SASL Kerberos V GSS-API Authentication Mechanism
8874 </TD>
8875 </TR>
8876 <TR>
8877 <TD>
8878 HDB
8879 </TD>
8880 <TD>
8881 Hierarchical Database (Backend)
8882 </TD>
8883 </TR>
8884 <TR>
8885 <TD>
8886 I-D
8887 </TD>
8888 <TD>
8889 Internet-Draft
8890 </TD>
8891 </TR>
8892 <TR>
8893 <TD>
8894 IA5
8895 </TD>
8896 <TD>
8897 International Alphabet 5
8898 </TD>
8899 </TR>
8900 <TR>
8901 <TD>
8902 IDNA
8903 </TD>
8904 <TD>
8905 Internationalized Domain Names in Applications
8906 </TD>
8907 </TR>
8908 <TR>
8909 <TD>
8910 IDN
8911 </TD>
8912 <TD>
8913 Internationalized Domain Name
8914 </TD>
8915 </TR>
8916 <TR>
8917 <TD>
8918 ID
8919 </TD>
8920 <TD>
8921 Identifier
8922 </TD>
8923 </TR>
8924 <TR>
8925 <TD>
8926 IDL
8927 </TD>
8928 <TD>
8929 Index Data Lookups
8930 </TD>
8931 </TR>
8932 <TR>
8933 <TD>
8934 IP
8935 </TD>
8936 <TD>
8937 Internet Protocol
8938 </TD>
8939 </TR>
8940 <TR>
8941 <TD>
8942 IPC
8943 </TD>
8944 <TD>
8945 Inter-process communication
8946 </TD>
8947 </TR>
8948 <TR>
8949 <TD>
8950 IPsec
8951 </TD>
8952 <TD>
8953 Internet Protocol Security
8954 </TD>
8955 </TR>
8956 <TR>
8957 <TD>
8958 IPv4
8959 </TD>
8960 <TD>
8961 Internet Protocol, version 4
8962 </TD>
8963 </TR>
8964 <TR>
8965 <TD>
8966 IPv6
8967 </TD>
8968 <TD>
8969 Internet Protocol, version 6
8970 </TD>
8971 </TR>
8972 <TR>
8973 <TD>
8974 ITS
8975 </TD>
8976 <TD>
8977 Issue Tracking System
8978 </TD>
8979 </TR>
8980 <TR>
8981 <TD>
8982 JPEG
8983 </TD>
8984 <TD>
8985 Joint Photographic Experts Group
8986 </TD>
8987 </TR>
8988 <TR>
8989 <TD>
8990 Kerberos
8991 </TD>
8992 <TD>
8993 Kerberos Authentication Service
8994 </TD>
8995 </TR>
8996 <TR>
8997 <TD>
8998 LBER
8999 </TD>
9000 <TD>
9001 Lightweight BER
9002 </TD>
9003 </TR>
9004 <TR>
9005 <TD>
9006 LDAP
9007 </TD>
9008 <TD>
9009 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
9010 </TD>
9011 </TR>
9012 <TR>
9013 <TD>
9014 LDAP Sync
9015 </TD>
9016 <TD>
9017 LDAP Content Synchronization
9018 </TD>
9019 </TR>
9020 <TR>
9021 <TD>
9022 LDAPv3
9023 </TD>
9024 <TD>
9025 LDAP, version 3
9026 </TD>
9027 </TR>
9028 <TR>
9029 <TD>
9030 LDIF
9031 </TD>
9032 <TD>
9033 LDAP Data Interchange Format
9034 </TD>
9035 </TR>
9036 <TR>
9037 <TD>
9038 MD5
9039 </TD>
9040 <TD>
9041 Message Digest 5
9042 </TD>
9043 </TR>
9044 <TR>
9045 <TD>
9046 MIB
9047 </TD>
9048 <TD>
9049 Management Information Base
9050 </TD>
9051 </TR>
9052 <TR>
9053 <TD>
9054 MODDN
9055 </TD>
9056 <TD>
9057 Modify DN
9058 </TD>
9059 </TR>
9060 <TR>
9061 <TD>
9062 MODRDN
9063 </TD>
9064 <TD>
9065 Modify RDN
9066 </TD>
9067 </TR>
9068 <TR>
9069 <TD>
9070 NSSR
9071 </TD>
9072 <TD>
9073 Non-specific Subordinate Reference
9074 </TD>
9075 </TR>
9076 <TR>
9077 <TD>
9078 OID
9079 </TD>
9080 <TD>
9081 Object Identifier
9082 </TD>
9083 </TR>
9084 <TR>
9085 <TD>
9086 OSI
9087 </TD>
9088 <TD>
9089 Open Systems Interconnect
9090 </TD>
9091 </TR>
9092 <TR>
9093 <TD>
9094 OTP
9095 </TD>
9096 <TD>
9097 One Time Password
9098 </TD>
9099 </TR>
9100 <TR>
9101 <TD>
9102 PDU
9103 </TD>
9104 <TD>
9105 Protocol Data Unit
9106 </TD>
9107 </TR>
9108 <TR>
9109 <TD>
9110 PEM
9111 </TD>
9112 <TD>
9113 Privacy Enhanced eMail
9114 </TD>
9115 </TR>
9116 <TR>
9117 <TD>
9118 PEN
9119 </TD>
9120 <TD>
9121 Private Enterprise Number
9122 </TD>
9123 </TR>
9124 <TR>
9125 <TD>
9126 PKCS
9127 </TD>
9128 <TD>
9129 Public Key Cryptosystem
9130 </TD>
9131 </TR>
9132 <TR>
9133 <TD>
9134 PKI
9135 </TD>
9136 <TD>
9137 Public Key Infrastructure
9138 </TD>
9139 </TR>
9140 <TR>
9141 <TD>
9142 PKIX
9143 </TD>
9144 <TD>
9145 Public Key Infrastructure (X.509)
9146 </TD>
9147 </TR>
9148 <TR>
9149 <TD>
9150 PLAIN
9151 </TD>
9152 <TD>
9153 SASL Plaintext Password Authentication Mechanism
9154 </TD>
9155 </TR>
9156 <TR>
9157 <TD>
9158 POSIX
9159 </TD>
9160 <TD>
9161 Portable Operating System Interface
9162 </TD>
9163 </TR>
9164 <TR>
9165 <TD>
9166 PS
9167 </TD>
9168 <TD>
9169 Proposed Standard
9170 </TD>
9171 </TR>
9172 <TR>
9173 <TD>
9174 RDN
9175 </TD>
9176 <TD>
9177 Relative Distinguished Name
9178 </TD>
9179 </TR>
9180 <TR>
9181 <TD>
9182 RFC
9183 </TD>
9184 <TD>
9185 Request for Comments
9186 </TD>
9187 </TR>
9188 <TR>
9189 <TD>
9190 RPC
9191 </TD>
9192 <TD>
9193 Remote Procedure Call
9194 </TD>
9195 </TR>
9196 <TR>
9197 <TD>
9198 RXER
9199 </TD>
9200 <TD>
9201 Robust XML Encoding Rules
9202 </TD>
9203 </TR>
9204 <TR>
9205 <TD>
9206 SASL
9207 </TD>
9208 <TD>
9209 Simple Authentication and Security Layer
9210 </TD>
9211 </TR>
9212 <TR>
9213 <TD>
9214 SDF
9215 </TD>
9216 <TD>
9217 Simple Document Format
9218 </TD>
9219 </TR>
9220 <TR>
9221 <TD>
9222 SDSE
9223 </TD>
9224 <TD>
9225 Shadowed DSE
9226 </TD>
9227 </TR>
9228 <TR>
9229 <TD>
9230 SHA1
9231 </TD>
9232 <TD>
9233 Secure Hash Algorithm 1
9234 </TD>
9235 </TR>
9236 <TR>
9237 <TD>
9238 SLAPD
9239 </TD>
9240 <TD>
9241 Standalone LDAP Daemon
9242 </TD>
9243 </TR>
9244 <TR>
9245 <TD>
9246 SLURPD
9247 </TD>
9248 <TD>
9249 Standalone LDAP Update Replication Daemon
9250 </TD>
9251 </TR>
9252 <TR>
9253 <TD>
9254 SMTP
9255 </TD>
9256 <TD>
9257 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
9258 </TD>
9259 </TR>
9260 <TR>
9261 <TD>
9262 SNMP
9263 </TD>
9264 <TD>
9265 Simple Network Management Protocol
9266 </TD>
9267 </TR>
9268 <TR>
9269 <TD>
9270 SQL
9271 </TD>
9272 <TD>
9273 Structured Query Language
9274 </TD>
9275 </TR>
9276 <TR>
9277 <TD>
9278 SRP
9279 </TD>
9280 <TD>
9281 Secure Remote Password
9282 </TD>
9283 </TR>
9284 <TR>
9285 <TD>
9286 SSF
9287 </TD>
9288 <TD>
9289 Security Strength Factor
9290 </TD>
9291 </TR>
9292 <TR>
9293 <TD>
9294 SSL
9295 </TD>
9296 <TD>
9297 Secure Socket Layer
9298 </TD>
9299 </TR>
9300 <TR>
9301 <TD>
9302 STD
9303 </TD>
9304 <TD>
9305 Internet Standard
9306 </TD>
9307 </TR>
9308 <TR>
9309 <TD>
9310 TCP
9311 </TD>
9312 <TD>
9313 Transmission Control Protocol
9314 </TD>
9315 </TR>
9316 <TR>
9317 <TD>
9318 TLS
9319 </TD>
9320 <TD>
9321 Transport Layer Security
9322 </TD>
9323 </TR>
9324 <TR>
9325 <TD>
9326 UCS
9327 </TD>
9328 <TD>
9329 Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character Set
9330 </TD>
9331 </TR>
9332 <TR>
9333 <TD>
9334 UDP
9335 </TD>
9336 <TD>
9337 User Datagram Protocol
9338 </TD>
9339 </TR>
9340 <TR>
9341 <TD>
9342 UID
9343 </TD>
9344 <TD>
9345 User Identifier
9346 </TD>
9347 </TR>
9348 <TR>
9349 <TD>
9350 Unicode
9351 </TD>
9352 <TD>
9353 The Unicode Standard
9354 </TD>
9355 </TR>
9356 <TR>
9357 <TD>
9358 UNIX
9359 </TD>
9360 <TD>
9361 Unix
9362 </TD>
9363 </TR>
9364 <TR>
9365 <TD>
9366 URI
9367 </TD>
9368 <TD>
9369 Uniform Resource Identifier
9370 </TD>
9371 </TR>
9372 <TR>
9373 <TD>
9374 URL
9375 </TD>
9376 <TD>
9377 Uniform Resource Locator
9378 </TD>
9379 </TR>
9380 <TR>
9381 <TD>
9382 URN
9383 </TD>
9384 <TD>
9385 Uniform Resource Name
9386 </TD>
9387 </TR>
9388 <TR>
9389 <TD>
9390 UTF-8
9391 </TD>
9392 <TD>
9393 8-bit UCS/Unicode Transformation Format
9394 </TD>
9395 </TR>
9396 <TR>
9397 <TD>
9398 UTR
9399 </TD>
9400 <TD>
9401 Unicode Technical Report
9402 </TD>
9403 </TR>
9404 <TR>
9405 <TD>
9406 UUID
9407 </TD>
9408 <TD>
9409 Universally Unique Identifier
9410 </TD>
9411 </TR>
9412 <TR>
9413 <TD>
9414 WWW
9415 </TD>
9416 <TD>
9417 World Wide Web
9418 </TD>
9419 </TR>
9420 <TR>
9421 <TD>
9422 X.500
9423 </TD>
9424 <TD>
9425 X.500 Directory Services
9426 </TD>
9427 </TR>
9428 <TR>
9429 <TD>
9430 X.509
9431 </TD>
9432 <TD>
9433 X.509 Public Key and Attribute Certificate Frameworks
9434 </TD>
9435 </TR>
9436 <TR>
9437 <TD>
9438 XED
9439 </TD>
9440 <TD>
9441 XML Enabled Directory
9442 </TD>
9443 </TR>
9444 <TR>
9445 <TD>
9446 XER
9447 </TD>
9448 <TD>
9449 XML Encoding Rules
9450 </TD>
9451 </TR>
9452 <TR>
9453 <TD>
9454 XML
9455 </TD>
9456 <TD>
9457 Extensible Markup Language
9458 </TD>
9459 </TR>
9460 <TR>
9461 <TD>
9462 syncrepl
9463 </TD>
9464 <TD>
9465 LDAP Sync-based Replication
9466 </TD>
9467 </TR>
9468 </TABLE>
9469
9470 <H2><A NAME="Related Organizations">I.2. Related Organizations</A></H2>
9471 <TABLE CLASS="plain">
9472 <TR CLASS="heading">
9473 <TD>
9474 <STRONG>Name</STRONG>
9475 </TD>
9476 <TD>
9477 <STRONG>Long</STRONG>
9478 </TD>
9479 <TD>
9480 <STRONG>Jump</STRONG>
9481 </TD>
9482 </TR>
9483 <TR>
9484 <TD>
9485 <A HREF="http://www.ansi.org/">ANSI</A>
9486 </TD>
9487 <TD>
9488 American National Standards Institute
9489 </TD>
9490 <TD>
9491 <A HREF="http://www.ansi.org/">http://www.ansi.org/</A>
9492 </TD>
9493 </TR>
9494 <TR>
9495 <TD>
9496 <A HREF="http://www.bsi-global.com/">BSI</A>
9497 </TD>
9498 <TD>
9499 British Standards Institute
9500 </TD>
9501 <TD>
9502 <A HREF="http://www.bsi-global.com/">http://www.bsi-global.com/</A>
9503 </TD>
9504 </TR>
9505 <TR>
9506 <TD>
9507 <ORG>COSINE</ORG>
9508 </TD>
9509 <TD>
9510 Co-operation and Open Systems Interconnection in Europe
9511 </TD>
9512 <TD>
9513 <JUMP>&nbsp;</JUMP>
9514 </TD>
9515 </TR>
9516 <TR>
9517 <TD>
9518 <A HREF="http://cpan.org/">CPAN</A>
9519 </TD>
9520 <TD>
9521 Comprehensive Perl Archive Network
9522 </TD>
9523 <TD>
9524 <A HREF="http://cpan.org/">http://cpan.org/</A>
9525 </TD>
9526 </TR>
9527 <TR>
9528 <TD>
9529 <A HREF="http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/">Cyrus</A>
9530 </TD>
9531 <TD>
9532 Project Cyrus
9533 </TD>
9534 <TD>
9535 <A HREF="http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/">http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/</A>
9536 </TD>
9537 </TR>
9538 <TR>
9539 <TD>
9540 <A HREF="http://www.fsf.org/">FSF</A>
9541 </TD>
9542 <TD>
9543 Free Software Foundation
9544 </TD>
9545 <TD>
9546 <A HREF="http://www.fsf.org/">http://www.fsf.org/</A>
9547 </TD>
9548 </TR>
9549 <TR>
9550 <TD>
9551 <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/">GNU</A>
9552 </TD>
9553 <TD>
9554 GNU Not Unix Project
9555 </TD>
9556 <TD>
9557 <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/">http://www.gnu.org/</A>
9558 </TD>
9559 </TR>
9560 <TR>
9561 <TD>
9562 <A HREF="http://www.iab.org/">IAB</A>
9563 </TD>
9564 <TD>
9565 Internet Architecture Board
9566 </TD>
9567 <TD>
9568 <A HREF="http://www.iab.org/">http://www.iab.org/</A>
9569 </TD>
9570 </TR>
9571 <TR>
9572 <TD>
9573 <A HREF="http://www.iana.org/">IANA</A>
9574 </TD>
9575 <TD>
9576 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
9577 </TD>
9578 <TD>
9579 <A HREF="http://www.iana.org/">http://www.iana.org/</A>
9580 </TD>
9581 </TR>
9582 <TR>
9583 <TD>
9584 <A HREF="http://www.ieee.org">IEEE</A>
9585 </TD>
9586 <TD>
9587 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
9588 </TD>
9589 <TD>
9590 <A HREF="http://www.ieee.org">http://www.ieee.org</A>
9591 </TD>
9592 </TR>
9593 <TR>
9594 <TD>
9595 <A HREF="http://www.ietf.org/iesg/">IESG</A>
9596 </TD>
9597 <TD>
9598 Internet Engineering Steering Group
9599 </TD>
9600 <TD>
9601 <A HREF="http://www.ietf.org/iesg/">http://www.ietf.org/iesg/</A>
9602 </TD>
9603 </TR>
9604 <TR>
9605 <TD>
9606 <A HREF="http://www.ietf.org/">IETF</A>
9607 </TD>
9608 <TD>
9609 Internet Engineering Task Force
9610 </TD>
9611 <TD>
9612 <A HREF="http://www.ietf.org/">http://www.ietf.org/</A>
9613 </TD>
9614 </TR>
9615 <TR>
9616 <TD>
9617 <A HREF="http://www.irtf.org/">IRTF</A>
9618 </TD>
9619 <TD>
9620 Internet Research Task Force
9621 </TD>
9622 <TD>
9623 <A HREF="http://www.irtf.org/">http://www.irtf.org/</A>
9624 </TD>
9625 </TR>
9626 <TR>
9627 <TD>
9628 <A HREF="http://www.iso.org/">ISO</A>
9629 </TD>
9630 <TD>
9631 International Standards Organisation
9632 </TD>
9633 <TD>
9634 <A HREF="http://www.iso.org/">http://www.iso.org/</A>
9635 </TD>
9636 </TR>
9637 <TR>
9638 <TD>
9639 <A HREF="http://www.isoc.org/">ISOC</A>
9640 </TD>
9641 <TD>
9642 Internet Society
9643 </TD>
9644 <TD>
9645 <A HREF="http://www.isoc.org/">http://www.isoc.org/</A>
9646 </TD>
9647 </TR>
9648 <TR>
9649 <TD>
9650 <A HREF="http://www.itu.int/">ITU</A>
9651 </TD>
9652 <TD>
9653 International Telephone Union
9654 </TD>
9655 <TD>
9656 <A HREF="http://www.itu.int/">http://www.itu.int/</A>
9657 </TD>
9658 </TR>
9659 <TR>
9660 <TD>
9661 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/foundation/">OLF</A>
9662 </TD>
9663 <TD>
9664 OpenLDAP Foundation
9665 </TD>
9666 <TD>
9667 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/foundation/">http://www.openldap.org/foundation/</A>
9668 </TD>
9669 </TR>
9670 <TR>
9671 <TD>
9672 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/project/">OLP</A>
9673 </TD>
9674 <TD>
9675 OpenLDAP Project
9676 </TD>
9677 <TD>
9678 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/project/">http://www.openldap.org/project/</A>
9679 </TD>
9680 </TR>
9681 <TR>
9682 <TD>
9683 <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A>
9684 </TD>
9685 <TD>
9686 OpenSSL Project
9687 </TD>
9688 <TD>
9689 <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">http://www.openssl.org/</A>
9690 </TD>
9691 </TR>
9692 <TR>
9693 <TD>
9694 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/">RFC Editor</A>
9695 </TD>
9696 <TD>
9697 RFC Editor
9698 </TD>
9699 <TD>
9700 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/">http://www.rfc-editor.org/</A>
9701 </TD>
9702 </TR>
9703 <TR>
9704 <TD>
9705 <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/">Oracle</A>
9706 </TD>
9707 <TD>
9708 Oracle Corporation
9709 </TD>
9710 <TD>
9711 <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/">http://www.oracle.com/</A>
9712 </TD>
9713 </TR>
9714 <TR>
9715 <TD>
9716 <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/">UM</A>
9717 </TD>
9718 <TD>
9719 University of Michigan
9720 </TD>
9721 <TD>
9722 <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/">http://www.umich.edu/</A>
9723 </TD>
9724 </TR>
9725 <TR>
9726 <TD>
9727 <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">UMLDAP</A>
9728 </TD>
9729 <TD>
9730 University of Michigan LDAP Team
9731 </TD>
9732 <TD>
9733 <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html</A>
9734 </TD>
9735 </TR>
9736 </TABLE>
9737
9738 <H2><A NAME="Related Products">I.3. Related Products</A></H2>
9739 <TABLE CLASS="plain">
9740 <TR CLASS="heading">
9741 <TD>
9742 <STRONG>Name</STRONG>
9743 </TD>
9744 <TD>
9745 <STRONG>Jump</STRONG>
9746 </TD>
9747 </TR>
9748 <TR>
9749 <TD>
9750 <A HREF="http://search.cpan.org/src/IANC/sdf-2.001/doc/catalog.html">SDF</A>
9751 </TD>
9752 <TD>
9753 <A HREF="http://search.cpan.org/src/IANC/sdf-2.001/doc/catalog.html">http://search.cpan.org/src/IANC/sdf-2.001/doc/catalog.html</A>
9754 </TD>
9755 </TR>
9756 <TR>
9757 <TD>
9758 <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">Berkeley DB</A>
9759 </TD>
9760 <TD>
9761 <A HREF="http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html">http://www.oracle.com/database/berkeley-db/db/index.html</A>
9762 </TD>
9763 </TR>
9764 <TR>
9765 <TD>
9766 <A HREF="http://www.cvshome.org/">CVS</A>
9767 </TD>
9768 <TD>
9769 <A HREF="http://www.cvshome.org/">http://www.cvshome.org/</A>
9770 </TD>
9771 </TR>
9772 <TR>
9773 <TD>
9774 <A HREF="http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/generalinfo.html">Cyrus</A>
9775 </TD>
9776 <TD>
9777 <A HREF="http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/generalinfo.html">http://cyrusimap.web.cmu.edu/generalinfo.html</A>
9778 </TD>
9779 </TR>
9780 <TR>
9781 <TD>
9782 <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">Cyrus SASL</A>
9783 </TD>
9784 <TD>
9785 <A HREF="http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html">http://asg.web.cmu.edu/sasl/sasl-library.html</A>
9786 </TD>
9787 </TR>
9788 <TR>
9789 <TD>
9790 <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/">GNU</A>
9791 </TD>
9792 <TD>
9793 <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/">http://www.gnu.org/software/</A>
9794 </TD>
9795 </TR>
9796 <TR>
9797 <TD>
9798 <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">GnuTLS</A>
9799 </TD>
9800 <TD>
9801 <A HREF="http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/">http://www.gnu.org/software/gnutls/</A>
9802 </TD>
9803 </TR>
9804 <TR>
9805 <TD>
9806 <A HREF="http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/">Heimdal</A>
9807 </TD>
9808 <TD>
9809 <A HREF="http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/">http://www.pdc.kth.se/heimdal/</A>
9810 </TD>
9811 </TR>
9812 <TR>
9813 <TD>
9814 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/jldap/">JLDAP</A>
9815 </TD>
9816 <TD>
9817 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/jldap/">http://www.openldap.org/jldap/</A>
9818 </TD>
9819 </TR>
9820 <TR>
9821 <TD>
9822 <A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">MIT Kerberos</A>
9823 </TD>
9824 <TD>
9825 <A HREF="http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/">http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/</A>
9826 </TD>
9827 </TR>
9828 <TR>
9829 <TD>
9830 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">OpenLDAP</A>
9831 </TD>
9832 <TD>
9833 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">http://www.openldap.org/</A>
9834 </TD>
9835 </TR>
9836 <TR>
9837 <TD>
9838 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/">OpenLDAP FAQ</A>
9839 </TD>
9840 <TD>
9841 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/faq/">http://www.openldap.org/faq/</A>
9842 </TD>
9843 </TR>
9844 <TR>
9845 <TD>
9846 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">OpenLDAP ITS</A>
9847 </TD>
9848 <TD>
9849 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/its/">http://www.openldap.org/its/</A>
9850 </TD>
9851 </TR>
9852 <TR>
9853 <TD>
9854 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/">OpenLDAP Software</A>
9855 </TD>
9856 <TD>
9857 <A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/software/">http://www.openldap.org/software/</A>
9858 </TD>
9859 </TR>
9860 <TR>
9861 <TD>
9862 <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">OpenSSL</A>
9863 </TD>
9864 <TD>
9865 <A HREF="http://www.openssl.org/">http://www.openssl.org/</A>
9866 </TD>
9867 </TR>
9868 <TR>
9869 <TD>
9870 <A HREF="http://www.perl.org/">Perl</A>
9871 </TD>
9872 <TD>
9873 <A HREF="http://www.perl.org/">http://www.perl.org/</A>
9874 </TD>
9875 </TR>
9876 <TR>
9877 <TD>
9878 <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">UMLDAP</A>
9879 </TD>
9880 <TD>
9881 <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html</A>
9882 </TD>
9883 </TR>
9884 </TABLE>
9885
9886 <H2><A NAME="References">I.4. References</A></H2>
9887 <TABLE CLASS="plain">
9888 <TR CLASS="heading">
9889 <TD>
9890 <STRONG>Reference</STRONG>
9891 </TD>
9892 <TD>
9893 <STRONG>Document</STRONG>
9894 </TD>
9895 <TD>
9896 <STRONG>Status</STRONG>
9897 </TD>
9898 <TD>
9899 <STRONG>Jump</STRONG>
9900 </TD>
9901 </TR>
9902 <TR>
9903 <TD>
9904 <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/doc/guides/slapd/guide.pdf">UM-GUIDE</A>
9905 </TD>
9906 <TD>
9907 The SLAPD and SLURPD Administrators Guide
9908 </TD>
9909 <TD>
9910 O
9911 </TD>
9912 <TD>
9913 <A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/doc/guides/slapd/guide.pdf">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/doc/guides/slapd/guide.pdf</A>
9914 </TD>
9915 </TR>
9916 <TR>
9917 <TD>
9918 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2079.txt">RFC2079</A>
9919 </TD>
9920 <TD>
9921 Definition of an X.500 Attribute Type and an Object Class to Hold Uniform Resource Identifers
9922 </TD>
9923 <TD>
9924 PS
9925 </TD>
9926 <TD>
9927 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2079.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2079.txt</A>
9928 </TD>
9929 </TR>
9930 <TR>
9931 <TD>
9932 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2296.txt">RFC2296</A>
9933 </TD>
9934 <TD>
9935 Use of Language Codes in LDAP
9936 </TD>
9937 <TD>
9938 PS
9939 </TD>
9940 <TD>
9941 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2296.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2296.txt</A>
9942 </TD>
9943 </TR>
9944 <TR>
9945 <TD>
9946 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2307.txt">RFC2307</A>
9947 </TD>
9948 <TD>
9949 An Approach for Using LDAP as a Network Information Service
9950 </TD>
9951 <TD>
9952 X
9953 </TD>
9954 <TD>
9955 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2307.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2307.txt</A>
9956 </TD>
9957 </TR>
9958 <TR>
9959 <TD>
9960 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2589.txt">RFC2589</A>
9961 </TD>
9962 <TD>
9963 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (v3): Extensions for Dynamic Directory Services
9964 </TD>
9965 <TD>
9966 PS
9967 </TD>
9968 <TD>
9969 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2589.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2589.txt</A>
9970 </TD>
9971 </TR>
9972 <TR>
9973 <TD>
9974 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt">RFC2798</A>
9975 </TD>
9976 <TD>
9977 Definition of the inetOrgPerson LDAP Object Class
9978 </TD>
9979 <TD>
9980 I
9981 </TD>
9982 <TD>
9983 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2798.txt</A>
9984 </TD>
9985 </TR>
9986 <TR>
9987 <TD>
9988 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2831.txt">RFC2831</A>
9989 </TD>
9990 <TD>
9991 Using Digest Authentication as a SASL Mechanism
9992 </TD>
9993 <TD>
9994 PS
9995 </TD>
9996 <TD>
9997 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2831.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2831.txt</A>
9998 </TD>
9999 </TR>
10000 <TR>
10001 <TD>
10002 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2849.txt">RFC2849</A>
10003 </TD>
10004 <TD>
10005 The LDAP Data Interchange Format
10006 </TD>
10007 <TD>
10008 PS
10009 </TD>
10010 <TD>
10011 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2849.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2849.txt</A>
10012 </TD>
10013 </TR>
10014 <TR>
10015 <TD>
10016 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3088.txt">RFC3088</A>
10017 </TD>
10018 <TD>
10019 OpenLDAP Root Service
10020 </TD>
10021 <TD>
10022 X
10023 </TD>
10024 <TD>
10025 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3088.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3088.txt</A>
10026 </TD>
10027 </TR>
10028 <TR>
10029 <TD>
10030 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3296.txt">RFC3296</A>
10031 </TD>
10032 <TD>
10033 Named Subordinate References in LDAP
10034 </TD>
10035 <TD>
10036 PS
10037 </TD>
10038 <TD>
10039 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3296.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3296.txt</A>
10040 </TD>
10041 </TR>
10042 <TR>
10043 <TD>
10044 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3384.txt">RFC3384</A>
10045 </TD>
10046 <TD>
10047 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (version 3) Replication Requirements
10048 </TD>
10049 <TD>
10050 I
10051 </TD>
10052 <TD>
10053 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3384.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3384.txt</A>
10054 </TD>
10055 </TR>
10056 <TR>
10057 <TD>
10058 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3494.txt">RFC3494</A>
10059 </TD>
10060 <TD>
10061 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol version 2 (LDAPv2) to Historic Status
10062 </TD>
10063 <TD>
10064 I
10065 </TD>
10066 <TD>
10067 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3494.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc3494.txt</A>
10068 </TD>
10069 </TR>
10070 <TR>
10071 <TD>
10072 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4013.txt">RFC4013</A>
10073 </TD>
10074 <TD>
10075 SASLprep: Stringprep Profile for User Names and Passwords
10076 </TD>
10077 <TD>
10078 PS
10079 </TD>
10080 <TD>
10081 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4013.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4013.txt</A>
10082 </TD>
10083 </TR>
10084 <TR>
10085 <TD>
10086 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4346.txt">RFC4346</A>
10087 </TD>
10088 <TD>
10089 The Transport Layer Security (TLS) Protocol, Version 1.1
10090 </TD>
10091 <TD>
10092 PS
10093 </TD>
10094 <TD>
10095 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4346.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4346.txt</A>
10096 </TD>
10097 </TR>
10098 <TR>
10099 <TD>
10100 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4422.txt">RFC4422</A>
10101 </TD>
10102 <TD>
10103 Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL)
10104 </TD>
10105 <TD>
10106 PS
10107 </TD>
10108 <TD>
10109 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4422.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4422.txt</A>
10110 </TD>
10111 </TR>
10112 <TR>
10113 <TD>
10114 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4510.txt">RFC4510</A>
10115 </TD>
10116 <TD>
10117 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Technical Specification Roadmap
10118 </TD>
10119 <TD>
10120 PS
10121 </TD>
10122 <TD>
10123 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4510.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4510.txt</A>
10124 </TD>
10125 </TR>
10126 <TR>
10127 <TD>
10128 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4511</A>
10129 </TD>
10130 <TD>
10131 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): The Protocol
10132 </TD>
10133 <TD>
10134 PS
10135 </TD>
10136 <TD>
10137 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt</A>
10138 </TD>
10139 </TR>
10140 <TR>
10141 <TD>
10142 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">RFC4512</A>
10143 </TD>
10144 <TD>
10145 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Directory Information Models
10146 </TD>
10147 <TD>
10148 PS
10149 </TD>
10150 <TD>
10151 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4512.txt</A>
10152 </TD>
10153 </TR>
10154 <TR>
10155 <TD>
10156 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4513.txt">RFC4513</A>
10157 </TD>
10158 <TD>
10159 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Authentication Methods and Security Mechanisms
10160 </TD>
10161 <TD>
10162 PS
10163 </TD>
10164 <TD>
10165 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4513.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4513.txt</A>
10166 </TD>
10167 </TR>
10168 <TR>
10169 <TD>
10170 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt">RFC4514</A>
10171 </TD>
10172 <TD>
10173 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): String Representation of Distinguished Names
10174 </TD>
10175 <TD>
10176 PS
10177 </TD>
10178 <TD>
10179 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4514.txt</A>
10180 </TD>
10181 </TR>
10182 <TR>
10183 <TD>
10184 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt">RFC4515</A>
10185 </TD>
10186 <TD>
10187 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): String Representation of Search Filters
10188 </TD>
10189 <TD>
10190 PS
10191 </TD>
10192 <TD>
10193 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4515.txt</A>
10194 </TD>
10195 </TR>
10196 <TR>
10197 <TD>
10198 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4516.txt">RFC4516</A>
10199 </TD>
10200 <TD>
10201 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Uniform Resource Locator
10202 </TD>
10203 <TD>
10204 PS
10205 </TD>
10206 <TD>
10207 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4516.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4516.txt</A>
10208 </TD>
10209 </TR>
10210 <TR>
10211 <TD>
10212 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4517.txt">RFC4517</A>
10213 </TD>
10214 <TD>
10215 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Syntaxes and Matching Rules
10216 </TD>
10217 <TD>
10218 PS
10219 </TD>
10220 <TD>
10221 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4517.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4517.txt</A>
10222 </TD>
10223 </TR>
10224 <TR>
10225 <TD>
10226 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4518.txt">RFC4518</A>
10227 </TD>
10228 <TD>
10229 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Internationalized String Preparation
10230 </TD>
10231 <TD>
10232 PS
10233 </TD>
10234 <TD>
10235 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4518.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4518.txt</A>
10236 </TD>
10237 </TR>
10238 <TR>
10239 <TD>
10240 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4519.txt">RFC4519</A>
10241 </TD>
10242 <TD>
10243 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP): Schema for User Applications
10244 </TD>
10245 <TD>
10246 PS
10247 </TD>
10248 <TD>
10249 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4519.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4519.txt</A>
10250 </TD>
10251 </TR>
10252 <TR>
10253 <TD>
10254 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4520.txt">RFC4520</A>
10255 </TD>
10256 <TD>
10257 IANA Considerations for LDAP
10258 </TD>
10259 <TD>
10260 BCP
10261 </TD>
10262 <TD>
10263 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4520.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4520.txt</A>
10264 </TD>
10265 </TR>
10266 <TR>
10267 <TD>
10268 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt">RFC4533</A>
10269 </TD>
10270 <TD>
10271 The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) Content Synchronization Operation
10272 </TD>
10273 <TD>
10274 X
10275 </TD>
10276 <TD>
10277 <A HREF="http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt">http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc4533.txt</A>
10278 </TD>
10279 </TR>
10280 </TABLE>
10281
10282 <P></P>
10283 <HR>
10284 <H1><A NAME="Generic configure Instructions">J. Generic configure Instructions</A></H1>
10285 <PRE>
10286 Basic Installation
10287 ==================
10288
10289    These are generic installation instructions.
10290
10291    The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for
10292 various system-dependent variables used during compilation.  It uses
10293 those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package.
10294 It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent
10295 definitions.  Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that
10296 you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, a file
10297 `config.cache' that saves the results of its tests to speed up
10298 reconfiguring, and a file `config.log' containing compiler output
10299 (useful mainly for debugging `configure').
10300
10301    If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try
10302 to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail
10303 diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can
10304 be considered for the next release.  If at some point `config.cache'
10305 contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it.
10306
10307    The file `configure.in' is used to create `configure' by a program
10308 called `autoconf'.  You only need `configure.in' if you want to change
10309 it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version of `autoconf'.
10310
10311 The simplest way to compile this package is:
10312
10313   1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type
10314      `./configure' to configure the package for your system.  If you're
10315      using `csh' on an old version of System V, you might need to type
10316      `sh ./configure' instead to prevent `csh' from trying to execute
10317      `configure' itself.
10318
10319      Running `configure' takes awhile.  While running, it prints some
10320      messages telling which features it is checking for.
10321
10322   2. Type `make' to compile the package.
10323
10324   3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with
10325      the package.
10326
10327   4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and
10328      documentation.
10329
10330   5. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the
10331      source code directory by typing `make clean'.  To also remove the
10332      files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for
10333      a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'.  There is
10334      also a `make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly
10335      for the package's developers.  If you use it, you may have to get
10336      all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came
10337      with the distribution.
10338
10339 Compilers and Options
10340 =====================
10341
10342    Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that
10343 the `configure' script does not know about.  You can give `configure'
10344 initial values for variables by setting them in the environment.  Using
10345 a Bourne-compatible shell, you can do that on the command line like
10346 this:
10347      CC=c89 CFLAGS=-O2 LIBS=-lposix ./configure
10348
10349 Or on systems that have the `env' program, you can do it like this:
10350      env CPPFLAGS=-I/usr/local/include LDFLAGS=-s ./configure
10351
10352 Compiling For Multiple Architectures
10353 ====================================
10354
10355    You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the
10356 same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their
10357 own directory.  To do this, you must use a version of `make' that
10358 supports the `VPATH' variable, such as GNU `make'.  `cd' to the
10359 directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run
10360 the `configure' script.  `configure' automatically checks for the
10361 source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'.
10362
10363    If you have to use a `make' that does not supports the `VPATH'
10364 variable, you have to compile the package for one architecture at a time
10365 in the source code directory.  After you have installed the package for
10366 one architecture, use `make distclean' before reconfiguring for another
10367 architecture.
10368
10369 Installation Names
10370 ==================
10371
10372    By default, `make install' will install the package's files in
10373 `/usr/local/bin', `/usr/local/man', etc.  You can specify an
10374 installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving `configure' the
10375 option `--prefix=PATH'.
10376
10377    You can specify separate installation prefixes for
10378 architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files.  If you
10379 give `configure' the option `--exec-prefix=PATH', the package will use
10380 PATH as the prefix for installing programs and libraries.
10381 Documentation and other data files will still use the regular prefix.
10382
10383    In addition, if you use an unusual directory layout you can give
10384 options like `--bindir=PATH' to specify different values for particular
10385 kinds of files.  Run `configure --help' for a list of the directories
10386 you can set and what kinds of files go in them.
10387
10388    If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed
10389 with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the
10390 option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'.
10391
10392 Optional Features
10393 =================
10394
10395    Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to
10396 `configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package.
10397 They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE
10398 is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System).  The
10399 `README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the
10400 package recognizes.
10401
10402    For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually
10403 find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't,
10404 you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and
10405 `--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations.
10406
10407 Specifying the System Type
10408 ==========================
10409
10410    There may be some features `configure' can not figure out
10411 automatically, but needs to determine by the type of host the package
10412 will run on.  Usually `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints
10413 a message saying it can not guess the host type, give it the
10414 `--host=TYPE' option.  TYPE can either be a short name for the system
10415 type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name with three fields:
10416      CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM
10417
10418 See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field.  If
10419 `config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't
10420 need to know the host type.
10421
10422    If you are building compiler tools for cross-compiling, you can also
10423 use the `--target=TYPE' option to select the type of system they will
10424 produce code for and the `--build=TYPE' option to select the type of
10425 system on which you are compiling the package.
10426
10427 Sharing Defaults
10428 ================
10429
10430    If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share,
10431 you can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives
10432 default values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'.
10433 `configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then
10434 `PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists.  Or, you can set the
10435 `CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script.
10436 A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script.
10437
10438 Operation Controls
10439 ==================
10440
10441    `configure' recognizes the following options to control how it
10442 operates.
10443
10444 `--cache-file=FILE'
10445      Use and save the results of the tests in FILE instead of
10446      `./config.cache'.  Set FILE to `/dev/null' to disable caching, for
10447      debugging `configure'.
10448
10449 `--help'
10450      Print a summary of the options to `configure', and exit.
10451
10452 `--quiet'
10453 `--silent'
10454 `-q'
10455      Do not print messages saying which checks are being made.  To
10456      suppress all normal output, redirect it to `/dev/null' (any error
10457      messages will still be shown).
10458
10459 `--srcdir=DIR'
10460      Look for the package's source code in directory DIR.  Usually
10461      `configure' can determine that directory automatically.
10462
10463 `--version'
10464      Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure'
10465      script, and exit.
10466
10467 `configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options.
10468
10469 </PRE>
10470 <P></P>
10471 <HR>
10472 <H1><A NAME="OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices">K. OpenLDAP Software Copyright Notices</A></H1>
10473 <H2><A NAME="OpenLDAP Copyright Notice">K.1. OpenLDAP Copyright Notice</A></H2>
10474 <P>Copyright 1998-2008 The OpenLDAP Foundation.<BR><EM>All rights reserved.</EM></P>
10475 <P>Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted <EM>only as authorized</EM> by the <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Public License">OpenLDAP Public License</A>.</P>
10476 <P>A copy of this license is available in file <TT>LICENSE</TT> in the top-level directory of the distribution or, alternatively, at &lt;<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/license.html">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/license.html</A>&gt;.</P>
10477 <P>OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.</P>
10478 <P>Individual files and/or contributed packages may be copyright by other parties and their use subject to additional restrictions.</P>
10479 <P>This work is derived from the University of Michigan LDAP v3.3 distribution.  Information concerning this software is available at &lt;<A HREF="http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html">http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html</A>&gt;.</P>
10480 <P>This work also contains materials derived from public sources.</P>
10481 <P>Additional information about OpenLDAP software can be obtained at &lt;<A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/">http://www.OpenLDAP.org/</A>&gt;.</P>
10482 <H2><A NAME="Additional Copyright Notices">K.2. Additional Copyright Notices</A></H2>
10483 <P>Portions Copyright 1998-2008 Kurt D. Zeilenga.<BR>Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Net Boolean Incorporated.<BR>Portions Copyright 2001-2006 IBM Corporation.<BR><EM>All rights reserved.</EM></P>
10484 <P>Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted only as authorized by the <A HREF="#OpenLDAP Public License">OpenLDAP Public License</A>.</P>
10485 <P>Portions Copyright 1999-2007 Howard Y.H. Chu.<BR>Portions Copyright 1999-2007 Symas Corporation.<BR>Portions Copyright 1998-2003 Hallvard B. Furuseth.<BR>Portions Copyright 2007-2008 Gavin Henry.<BR>Portions Copyright 2007-2008 Suretec Systems Limited.<BR><EM>All rights reserved.</EM></P>
10486 <P>Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that this notice is preserved. The names of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without their specific prior written permission.  This software is provided ``as is'' without express or implied warranty.</P>
10487 <H2><A NAME="University of Michigan Copyright Notice">K.3. University of Michigan Copyright Notice</A></H2>
10488 <P>Portions Copyright 1992-1996 Regents of the University of Michigan.<BR><EM>All rights reserved.</EM></P>
10489 <P>Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is preserved and that due credit is given to the University of Michigan at Ann Arbor. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. This software is provided ``as is'' without express or implied warranty.</P>
10490 <P></P>
10491 <HR>
10492 <H1><A NAME="OpenLDAP Public License">L. OpenLDAP Public License</A></H1>
10493 <PRE>
10494 The OpenLDAP Public License
10495   Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
10496
10497 Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation
10498 (&quot;Software&quot;), with or without modification, are permitted provided
10499 that the following conditions are met:
10500
10501 1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements
10502    and notices,
10503
10504 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright
10505    statements and notices, this list of conditions, and the following
10506    disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
10507    with the distribution, and
10508
10509 3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.
10510
10511 The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time.
10512 Each revision is distinguished by a version number.  You may use
10513 this Software under terms of this license revision or under the
10514 terms of any subsequent revision of the license.
10515
10516 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS
10517 CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
10518 INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
10519 AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT
10520 SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S)
10521 OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
10522 INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
10523 BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
10524 LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
10525 CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
10526 LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
10527 ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
10528 POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
10529
10530 The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in
10531 advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing
10532 in this Software without specific, written prior permission.  Title
10533 to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright
10534 holders.
10535
10536 OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
10537
10538 Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City,
10539 California, USA.  All Rights Reserved.  Permission to copy and
10540 distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted.
10541 </PRE>
10542 </DIV>
10543 <DIV CLASS="footer">
10544 <HR>
10545 <DIV CLASS="navigate">
10546 <P ALIGN="Center"><A HREF="http://www.openldap.org/">Home</A> | <A HREF="../index.html">Catalog</A></P>
10547 </DIV>
10548 <P>
10549 <FONT COLOR="#808080" FACE="Arial,Verdana,Helvetica" SIZE="1"><B>
10550 ________________<BR>
10551 <SMALL>&copy; Copyright 2008, <A HREF="http://www.OpenLDAP.org/foundation/">OpenLDAP Foundation</A>, <A HREF="mailto:info@OpenLDAP.org">info@OpenLDAP.org</A></SMALL></B></FONT>
10552
10553 </DIV>
10554
10555 </BODY>
10556 </HTML>